LIBRARY OF THE University of California. MRS. MARTHA E. HALLIDIE. Class V £ '..r; I Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/cortinamethodintOOcortrich THE COETINA METHOD UNiVE-r-;.;iTY )) \ r ' ' THE CORTII^A METHOD INTENDED FOR SELF-STUDY AND FOR USE IN SCHOOLS SPA1!^ISH 1I< TWENTY LESSOIsTS WITH A SYSTEM OF ARTICULATION BASED ON ENGLISH EQUIVALENTS, FOK ACQUIRING A CORRECT PRONUNCIATION BY E. DIEZ DE LA COETINA, M. A. DIRECTOR OF R. D. CORTINA ACADEM'sfoF LANGUAGES IN NEW YORK; AUTHOR OF FRENCH IN TWENTY LESSONS ; FRANCl:S EN VEINTE LECCIONES ; INGLES EN VEINTE LECCIONES ; VERBOS ESPASfOLES ; MODELOS PARA CARTAS ; THE CORTINA SERIES, ETC. AX AUTOGRAPH INTRODUCTION BY DON CARLOS DE BORBON TWENTY-FOURTH EDITION NEW YORK R. D. CORTINA, PUBLISHER 1899 ^^ '^ Copyright, 18S9, By R. D. CORTINA. AUTOGRAPH LETTER FROM HIS HIGHNESS DON CARLOS DE BORBON. .11775? ■«<«^ /*- ^^^t^^^r^-^^^ ^.*^t^ ^ ^y ^y-^X^ ^^i^^<^^'^. / i<^^^^^ rf;<^jc-/ <^d€^ ^ .^^ /^yi^iic^ ^<^ ^^^/^t>^Sfet TRANSLATION OF THE PRECEDING LETTER. Feom Don Carlos dk Boeb6n. Venice, December 15, 1890. My Deab Coetina : I congratulate you on your well-constructed book for teaching the Spanish language, and thank you for the expressive dedication contained in the copy sent to me. Labor always exalts him who cultivates it. My faithful friends, when beset with misfortune, practiced it on all occasions with a brave spirit, those of humble birth as well as those who, like your- self, came of noble lineage. As they were brothers in heroism, so also were they in assiduity. I have not forgotten the many proofs of sympathy which I received from the great country where you are now, when I was there in the first flush of my youth, and I remember with pleasure the admiration which the spectacle of its marvelous activity pro- duced in me. The thought of Spain accompanying me in all my travels through the world, I can not but envy the good which I admire in each country, and I would wish to inspire Spain with the same noble and praiseworthy energy which characterizes the United States. . You will accept, my dear Cortina, my especial congratulations for the services which you have rendered our race, by extending in those regions the language of the discoverer, who was the first to cross the Atlantic to invoke the blessing of God, and pronounce the message of civilization. That God may guard you, is the wish of Your most affectionate Oaelos. viii PREFACE. The great advantage of this method is that it enables the learner to acquire a thorough knowledge of the Spanish language in the shortest possible time. It simplifies learn- ing greatly, by studying it, as John Locke remarks, " with- out the drudgery of grammar," but introduced from time to time, and, as Erasmus advised, ''kept within proper limits.'''^ The student, if reasonably diligent, may count upon being able to speak, understand, and write in Spanish quite fluently in the short space of twenty lessons. It is a well-known fact that, by the old methods of study, only a few students obtain any degree of fluency in speaking a language that is foreign to them. It is true that many of them can, after a number of years spent in study, conjugate, decline, analyze, and perhaps translate a sentence into English, but they are seldom able to put an English sentence into an idiomatic foreign one. Such learning, although laboriously acquired, is of little prac- tical value, and the tourist or commercial traveler finds himself in an awkward dilemma when forced to ask for even the every-day necessaries of life in a foreign tongue. The foUow^ing work is complete in only "twenty les- sons," four lessons in each of the five books. The conven- ience of the student has been considered in this arrange- ment, for the books are published in such a form as to be X PREFACE. easily carried in the pocket, and are thus available at e very- spare moment, whether traveling or at home, when oppor- tunity makes it possible to employ the time in study. A vocabulary is given at the commencement of each of the first eight lessons, including the new words introduced in each lesson, in addition to the regular vocabulary of strange words that will be found all through the five books. Notes on all grammatical points, explaining idiomatic or special words or phrases, are given at the bottom of each page. These notes need not necessarily be memo- rized, but they serve to answer any question or doubt that may arise in the mind of the student. This new edition differs from former editions — First, In having the figured pronunciation in English of all new words introduced for the first, second, and even third times ; and Second. In the literal translation word by word of all idiomatic Spanish phrases, so that the student may see dis- tinctly, and be able to form his own judgment of the con- struction and peculiarities of the expressions. Both of these helps are printed in such a manner as in no way to confuse the student should he have no occasion to refer to them. In addition to all the necessary grammatical foot-notes, will be found on the last part of each book a "Parte Segunda" (Part Second), or a special and thorough study of the verbs, in which the author's practice of many years of careful and systematic work has succeeded in obviating all difficulties which generally arise in the study of the same. A theoretical-practical explanation, giving points to aid in memorizing all the different terminations, will follow each classification of the regular verbs. At the end of the fifth book will be found a reference- list of the most important regular and irregular verbs, with PREFACE. xi the page given where they themselves or one of the same class have been conjugated. There is also given a long list of Spanish proverbs, as vi^ell as some other partially necessary features, which may be of some importance for those who may wish to make a careful and particular study of the language. It is proper to observe, that, as the student progresses in his study with the present work, the English language is gradually dropped for purposes of explanations and notes, and in its stead Spanish sentences and words of simple construction and ready comprehension are substi- tuted, by which means the learner is taught the pure construction, to form sentences correctly, and to think in the language, which is the great aim of every system of language-teaching. IMPORTANCE OF THE STUDY OF SPANISH. The two Americas are almost as sharply divided lin- guistically as geographically. In North America, English is the universal tongue, while in Central and South Amer- ica, Mexico, and the West Indies, Spanish, the mother- tongue of the old conquerors, remains the language of the people. It is a fact that the Spanish-speaking races of the southern half of the two continents are showing a growing inclination to acquire a knowledge of English ; and it is desirable, if only for the purpose of commerce, that the English-speaking people of the northern half should recip- rocally learn to speak the language of Spain. There is no doubt that in this manner the vast business intercourse of the two continents could be still further augmented. The interchange of the manufactured commodities of the United States for the agricultural products of South America, Cen- tral America, Mexico, and the West Indies, would be greatly facilitated, and both continents would thus become, what xii PREFACE. they seem geographically intended to be, the most inde- pendent and self-sustaining countries of the globe. The avenue of commercial intercourse, long since opened by the Suez Canal with Egypt, and the prospective high- way in the Central American republics through Nicara- gua and Costa Rica, where Spanish is the national tongue, makes a knowledge of Spanish an absolute necessity for the demands of trade, as well as an indispensable acquisi- tion for the student and the public press. If the mercantile community of the United States will acquire a speaking knowledge of Spanish, it will prove of the greatest financial advantage to merchants, and they will speedily reap a golden harvest from their labors. A well-known American statesman recently stated, in the columns of the daily press of New York city, that the people of the United States, in many respects so remark- ably energetic, are extremely indifferent in the matter of acquiring any proficiency in other tongues than their native English. Even those who may be engaged in business in Central America and Mexico are very neglectful of the opportunities of trade which an acquaintance with Spanish would give them. Europeans, on the other hand, who have settled there, speak and write Spanish fluently, and the consequence is that many of them have amassed great wealth, and attained much political influence with the peo- ple. This is notably the case with many Dutch, German, and French emigres ; they have learned the language and adapted themselves to the customs of the country, and in every case with gratifying results. To young men, preparing themselves for a career in the world, these exaipples point a useful lesson : they will find, on inquiry, that a knowledge of Spanish will enable them to procure lucrative positions in the United States, as there is a great demand at the present time for fairly educated PREFACE. xiii young men who can converse and correspond in Spanish, and are thereby the better qualified to fill positions as trav- eling salesmen, correspondents, clerks, etc. Excellent em- ployment is always open for such young men, as there also is for young ladies under the same conditions. Demands for lady teachers, stenographers, type-writers, traveling companions, etc., are constantly increasing from all the Spanish-speaking American countries. The literature of Spain is copious and ancient, and will repay the student. The works of Lope de Vega, Cervantes, Tirso, Calder6n, etc., are but imperfectly known to the reading people of the United States, and this principally because there are few faithful translations of the works of these great masters ; yet it is quite possible, as is explained in the present book, to acquire a sufficient knowledge of Spanish without interminable labor to read them in the original. That there exists in the United States a great desire to become acquainted with the beauties of the litera- ture of Spain, is evidenced by the success which has at- tended the recent publications of English translations of the works of the modern Spanish writers of eminence, such as Alarc6n, Yalera, Gald6s, Palacio Yaldes, Escrich, Fernan Caballero, Echegaray, Rueda, Castelar, Pereda, and others. These authors have also been translated into almost all the European languages, and always with the same extraordi- nary and instantaneous success. Rafael Diez de la Cortina. September, 1889. PEEFACE TO THE TWENTY-FIEST EDITIOK Inspired by a debt of gratitude, before offering this book to the public for the twenty-first time, I have en- deavored, by an earnest application of my energies, to present the work in the very clearest and best possible form. I have been led to do this not only by my great desire for the extension of the study of languages and by the reception accorded my previous efforts, but also by the very kind and stimulating criticism from eminent men, both of the social and of the literary world, which has honored and guided me in the past. I therefore add, as marks of appreciation, a few ex- tracts from the opinions which have been received. These prove that my labors have not been sterile, but, on the contrary, they have borne good fruit in the inexhaustible field of teaching. The Author. EXTRACTS FROM NUMEROUS TESTIMONIALS. The clearest and most progressive method yet puhUshed.— Tribune, N.Y, An excellent work to acquire knowledge of a language in less time than was ordinarily used for learning its alpiiabet.— i/eraZd, N. Y. Based on the most sensible plan for acquiring a language.— jRecorde?%N.Y. Best text book that has appeared for learning laugMages.— Town Topics, N. Y. It is astonishing how quickly pupils learn by his system.— jToftacco Joiir- nal, N. Y. His books have established his reputation. — Home Journal, N. Y. Superior to all others. — Werner^ s Magazine, N. Y. By far the best method published.— JfaiY and Express, N. Y. The most superior of its kind. — Las Tres Americas, N. Y. Grammar employed only when necessity requires M.— School Journal,^. Y. Gives thorough knowledge in a remarkably short time. — Boston Journal of Education. # Follows Lockes doctrine "without the drudgery of grammar."— TF/«co?j- siti Journal of Education. Presents the facts of the. language in accord with sound pedagogy.— Journal of Pedagogy, Athens, Ohio. Decidedly one of the he^t\>oo\^i>,of\is\^\n6..— Educational Review, London. The difficulties of a language reduced to a miuimuva..— Educational Tivies, London. Teaches by enchanting the student. — Estandarte Real, Barcelona, Spain. The most perfect plan to learn a language.— i?^ Imparcial, Madrid. The excellency of the plan followed by the author merits universal praise. — Ilustracion Espafiola y Americana, Madrid. Of an eminently practical character.— i^;e?*c?7o Espaflol, Madrid. Dispenses with the old monotonous rovitine.—Magisterio Espaflol, Madrid. Based on the most solid scientific principles.— ia Conti-oversia, Mndr'n}. Text book in all the colleges in the country.— DiaWo de la Marina, Havana. It smooths out all difflcultios.— ia PatHa, Santiago, Cuba. The very best method ever written. — Diario de Pucbla, Puebla, Mexico. Large orders are constantly being referred to New York.— 7)e?Hocrrtc/rr, Ponce, Porto Rico. It has no YiYsd.—Anunciador Costarri cense, San Jos6, Costa Rica. Most thoroughly '* up-to-date."— -E7^ Heraldo, Bogota, Columbia. Most excellent to acquire a language in the least possible time.— P?'o/. Wm. J. Kiiapp, Chicago University. The more I see and hear of your methods, the more do I appreciate their worth.— Pro/. J^. Leroux, U. S. Naval Academy, Annapolis, Md. Your books are as useful as they are interesting.— Pro/. Kroeh, Stevens Institute, Hoboken, N. J. Your book is one of the many pleasing souvenirs I take with me from this marvelous country.— Z>i*A;e of Veragna. F>'om an aufoqraph letter from Don Carlos de Borhon:—! heartily congrat- ulate you on your most carefully constructed book.— Ca/7o.s. DIRECTIOI^S. Methods are the masters of masters. —Talleyrand. How to Study by This Method. At the beginning of each lesson the new words with fcheir pronunciation^ as given in the vocabularies, must be carefully studied. The Spanish headings of the les- sons and vocabularies should always be pronounced in that language, and should never be replaced by the cor- responding English names, although the words resemble one another and have been chosen on that account. Care must be taken to give each word its correct accent, but this can only be accomplished by reading the Spanish aloud, clearly and distinctly. The Spanish sentences must next be read until all the words can be pronounced without hesitation and until their meaning is thoroughly understood. The English translation is given in all cases, but must be referred to only when it is necessary for learning the meaning of a word or sentence. The pages opposite the Spanish sentences are divided into two parts ; the figured pronunciation of the Spanish is on the left, and the idiomatic English translation on the right. It will be noticed that in the column dedicated to the figured pronunciation there is a gradual omission of those words which are supposed to be known through having been already given one or more times, the result 2 DIRECTIONS. being that there thus remain only incoherent and incom- plete phrases. This is done with the view of causing the student to make an effort to remember the words the first time he sees them^ and compelling him to read the Spanish in its correct form and as it is printed on the corresponding page. Below the Spanish sentences is their literal translation^ which will be of great assist- ance in the study of their construction. The grammat- ical explanations in the foot notes are of much impor- tance to the progress of the learner, and great attention should be paid to them. They will clear up many of the idiomatic difficulties, and prove helpful to the student at all times. Recitations. The recitation of lessons is not one of the characteris- tics of this method, for the principal object of the system is conversational practice on the words and sentences of the current lesson. To succeed in this the pupil must be well prepared before coming to class, so that the whole of the time may be devoted to conversation. This should be always carried on in Spanish, unless there should be an absolute necessity for the teacher to use English in helping the student to answer, or in giving any explana- tions that might be required at first. Each lesson is divided into two principal parts, ^ viz. : a vocabulary of the most important series of words, and a phraseology of the most useful model sentences. The vocabulary in question has no connection with the phra- seology which follows it, but is intended to form the basis of a sei^arate dialogue. This arrangement saves 1. As may be observed, from the first lesson to the eighth inclusive, there are two vocabularies ; the second is the one we are referring to, the first being only a kind of r6sum6 of the entire lesson, a knowledge of which will greatly facilitate the study of the phraseology in the following pages. DIRECTIONS. 3 valuable space, and leaves to the professor's skill and intelligence or to the solitary student's personal effort, the task of developing what the book can only sketch. Neither in the practice of the vocabulary alluded to nor in that of the sentences ought there to be any recitation ; the system by which the professor asks in English and the student answers in Spanish, or vice versa — which is the plan of the old methods — ought not at the present day to be used by anyone who knows how to teach lan- guages, it having become antiquated as useless and irra- tional. The professor will begin, then, the first lesson, for example, and with greater reason all the rest, by speaking in Spanish and asking a student: ^^Oiidl es el tenia del vocahulario de la primera leccion ? The latter will reply, always repeating the principal phrase of the ques- tion: El tenm del vocabulario de la primera leccion es "La Familia.^^ The professor will next direct a student at one end of the class to question another at the other end, the teacher bearing in mind that the farther the questioner is from the one who answers the better it is, because both, being obliged to speak loud and distinctly, make a greater effort and acquire greater accuracy of pronun- ciation: Senor FulanOj pregunte usted al senor Mengano, I quien es el representante de lafamiliaf The one addressed by the professor will ask the one he is to address: 8r, MenganOj ^ quien es el representante de lafamilia^ or, de la raza humanaf El representante de lafamlliaj or, de la raza humana, es el honibre. Next the feminine is asked for in order to bring into the conversation the word mujer (woman). Then the professor, always trying to use words which resemble one another in both languages, will con- tinue : El hombre y la mujer se unen en matrimonio, y i que es el hombre d la mujer f Answer : El hombre es el marido 4 DIRECTIONS. de hi mujer, Y la mujer, i qu^ es al homhre f etc. With reference to the ^^Nationalities'' the same procedure will be followed : i,J)e que nacionalidad es usted; su padre ^ su madre ; un homhre de Italia; los hijos del senor Bismarck; los hermanos de un homhre de Eusia; que soy yof etc. In every class in which languages are taught a black- board is necessary for illustrating by examples as often as the opportunity presents itself of enabling the student to see clearly, easily and distinctly the reason of what is being demonstrated, without being compelled to over- strain his imagination. The instructor must try by every means in his power to make the pupil enjoy the lesson and long for it, instead of hating and fearing it. This end can be attained by interesting and amusing illustrations rather than by tedious disquisitions which perplex and disgust the pupil. During the conversation on the "Familia^^ and the '^Nacioimlidades^^^ the black- board must be made use of to illustrate the Article, the Gender, the Plural Number, the Possessive Pronouns, the Present tense of the verb ser, etc., etc. Any word which the student does not understand must be written, and the pupil must be brought to a knowledge of it by means of synonyms, assimilations, or by opposites, ac- cording to the judgment of the professor, before use is made of the English equivalent — an expedient to be avoided as much as possible. The same system must be used in the dialogues; in the course of the first, for instance, the presents of the indicative, subjunctive and imperative of the regular verbs should be taught by practical illustrations, and in no wise by requiring the pupils to learn by heart. The above-mentioned tenses of the different conjugations can be explained in a few minutes in such a manner that they will never be for- DIRECTIONS. 4« gotten ; and so with the other tenses in the subsequent lessons. Even when sometimes the subjects treated of may seem trivial to the learner, because they have no direct bearing on his profession or line of life, he must nevertheless give them all the importance which they really possess ; for although he is neither a shoemaker, a tailor, a hatter nor a lawyer, for instance, he will some day need to buy shoes, clothes or a hat, or he will perhaps require the services of an attorney, and it will be ex- tremely convenient for him to know the proper words and idioms connected with those occupations. Both master and scholar must imagine themselves as actually engaged in the business transactions which form the sub- jects of the conversations. The system on which is founded this Method, offers the inestimable advantage of educating the student's ear, of exercising his organ of language and giving it flexibility for the emission of sounds hitherto foreign to it, of perfecting his pronunciation, and of familiarizing him with all the turns of the language he is studying. Time for Study. The idea of Prendergast, one of the ablest philologers of the world, that the times of study should be short but fre- quent, is not recommended by the author of the Cortina Method, because in this way it is difficult for the stu- dent to concentrate his mind sufficiently so as to arrive at the desired results ; and, besides this, persons engaged in their daily occupations seldom find the opportunity for study more than once a day, and all this must be taken into account. Study, then, should be taken up as often as practicable, and as long a time as possible should be devoted to it. 4^ DIRECTIONS. For Self-Instruction. The directions under ^^How to Study by This Method" should be followed. After both vocabularies have been memorized the Spanish sentences should be read until they can be repeated without difficulty, the English being referred to only when the sense is not understood. A written translation should then be made of the sentences into English, and this English should be retranslated into Spanish, the mistakes being corrected by reference to the book when the whole lesson has been finished. F(yr Conversation, — After the exercises have been writ- ten and properly corrected, the Spanish sentences should be repeated aloud without the help of the book, so that a conversation may be carried on with oneself by asking and answering questions from the written exercise, refer- ring to the English of the text in case of doubt only. The Fhonograph, — This marvelous invention, due to the genius of the immortal Edison, which has already introduced and will continue to produce in the future so great and so surprising a revolution in pedagogical studies, is a most powerful aid to the professor, who will find in it a faithful and lasting echo of his teachings, and a most useful help to the student, who will be able to repeat the lessons of the teacher and educate his ear — the chief element in the learning of languages — as often as the time at his disposal will allow and his love of study will suggest. The applications to instruction of which this invention is susceptible, are as incalculable as is immense the field which they open to. the initiative and intelligence of those called to foment and propagate the study of modern languages ; such is the importance of these applications that they alone would suffice to con- stitute the glory of the distinguished inventor. DIRECTIONS. 4<^ Pronunciation. As each of the five vowels in Spanish has but one invariable sound, no system of diacritical marking is necessary to indicate the pronunciation. Only the ordinary English letters, therefore, will be employed for the purpose, in accordance with the following plan : VOWELS. 1. a will be represented by ah or a, and is always pronounced as in the English wov^ father. 2. Cj by ay and sometimes by ai, according to the Eng- lish pronunciation. Whenever an accent is placed over it thus, ay\ it must be pronounced short, e in Spanish has the sound of the English a as pronounced in the alphabet. 3. ^, by ee or i, according to the emphasis and the letters following. 4. 0, by the English o or oh, and is pronounced as in the word cone. 5. Uj by oo or w, according to the adjacent vowels. Pronounce it as o in move. CONSONANTS. The consonants in Spanish, with the following excep- tions, have the same sounds as in English : 6. c, before e or ^, as in acentOy ah-^/^a^/ng'-toh, and cocina, koh-ifMe'-nah, will be represented by th, pro- nounced as in thanJc or thin. When i follows th, as in eocina, lecdon, layk-f/iie-ong', negocios, nay-goh'-^Me-os, etc., the e after the i following th is silent, and is used to give the i the long sound of the English i in thief. Before a, or u, c has the same sound as in English, and will be indicated by k or c. 7. d, at the end of a word, as in hondad, bohng-daiC^', cvudady thie-oo-datNy will be represented by th, and 4'^ DIRECTIONS. must be pronounced as in the word the, not soft as in think. 8. Qj before e or ij as in gente, hayng'-tsij, gigante, hee- gahng'-tayj will be represented by h, and must be pro- nounced like that letter, strongly aspirated. Before a, o and t^ it is hard, as in the English words gab, go, good. The combinations gue, gui as they are in guess and guitar, for instance, unless the u has a diseresis (ii), when it is pronounced as in aguero, ah-goo-ay'-roh, vergiienza, vayrr- goo-ayng'-tha, etc. 9. j, before any vowel, has the same sound as the g before e and i, and will also be represented by the let- ter h. When^' comes at the end of a word it is slightly aspirated, and will be represented by an h alone, as in reloj, TT8ij-loh.'-h, Before e or ^ it has the same sound, and will be equally represented by hay and hee, as the letter g, 10. n. This letter at the end of a syllable, as in cajon, kah-hohng', joven, hoh'-vayng, etc., has the sound of ng in English in the word thing, and will be repre- sented by those letters. 11. r, when having a very strong rolling sound, as at the beginning of words and the end of syllables and after the letters 7i and I, for instance, in alrededor, ahl-rray- day-dorr', Enrique, ayng rree'-kay, 7'ata, rrah'-tah, etc., will be spelled rr to figure the pronunciation. 12. s will be represented by s, but must be pronounced with a strong hissing sound, like ss in English in the word impossible, 13. z. The sound of this letter before the vowels a, o or u, being like that of the letter c when before e or i, is represented also by th, to be pronounced as in think or thick, i. e. : zapatos, ^^ah-pah'-tohs ; razon, rrah-f/^ong'. DIRECTIONS. 5 The following is a table of these letters with their cor- responding sounds : Table for the Sounds. Spanish Values Representkjo. General sound of a. General sound of e. General sound of i. General sound of i Combinations op Letters. Sound. 1. a, ah like a in far. ay, ai ai m pair, ^ j ee, i " ee in meet. * ( i " i in fit, 4. 0, oh " o in no, 5. 00, w " 00 in cool, / th " ^A in thin. 6. •< thayng " than in thank, ( thie " thie in thief, e is silent after thi, and only to give to the i a broader, plain sound, as that of the English e. General sound of o. General sound of u, Sound of c before e or ^. Sound of cen, Sound of ci. 7. th like th in with. 9,< Chay (hee hah hoh hoo hay hee hai/ in hai/, he in he, ha in harm, ho in home, hoo in hoop, hay in hay, he in he. 10. 11. 12. 13. Sound of d at the end of a word. Sound of ge, Sound of yi, Sound of ja, Sound of jo. Sound of ju. Sound of je, Sound of ji, I Sound of j at the end \ of a word. Sound of n at the end of syllable. rr, very strong rolling sound. Sound of rr, or often r, as explained, s like c in cent, Sound of s, tha, thoh, thoo th in thought, Sound of z before a, o, or u. h alone at the end of a word must be aspirated as a mere breathing. ng like ng in wrong. 5 DIRECTIONS. Accented vowels are pronounced short. Diphthongs, though they will be divided to make the pronunciation easier, must be pronounced in quick succession. It is expected that this table, giving the letters used to figure the correct pronunciation, will be referred to by the student whenever any doubt may arise in regard to the pronunciation of any of these letters, or better, to copy it off on a piece of paper or card-board, so as to have it always before him for ready reference. LIBRO PRIMERO* (first book). W^ RTE PRIMERA^ ;j/J.7^ ^^ // (part first). ALFABETO ESPANOL* (SPANISH alphabet). The Spanish alphabet contains four letters that differ from the English : the n, ch, II, and rr, each being consid- ered as one consonant. The letters k and w are not used in Spanish, though the former, being found in a few for- eign words, is included in the alphabet. Remarks. — The letters in Spanish are all of the femi- nine gender, and each has but one sound, which is invari- able, as given in the Alphabetic Table. Every letter, with two exceptions, is distinctly pro- nounced : the A, which is always silent, and the u, which is silent after g or q when followed by e ov i \ so that Spanish words, with these few exceptions, are pronounced exactly as written. The main thing in reading Spanish will be to pronounce correctly the ^sq vowels, a (ah), e (ay), I (ee), o (o), and u (oo). * Lee'-broh pree-may'-roh. 2 Parr'-tay pree-may'-rah. 3 Ahl-pha-bay'-toh ays-pah-nyol'. 8 SPANISH ALPHABET. The following are the letters, with their names in Spanish, and the English pronunciation : Letter. Name. Pronuncia- tion. A, a^ a, ah. B, b, he, bay. C, c, ce. thay.» Ch,ch , che, chay. D, d, de, day. E, e, e, ay. F, f, e/e, ay'-fay. G, g, ge, hay. H, h, ache, ah'-chay. I, V i {latino), ee. J, J, jota. ho'-ta. K, k,^ ka, kah. L, 1, ele, ay'-lay. LI, 11, elle, ayl'-lyay. M, in. erne, ay'-may. Letter. Name. Pronuncia- tion. N, n, ene. ay'-nay. % n, efle. ay'-nyay. O, o, 0, 0. P, P, pe, pay. Q, q» cu, koo. R, r,* ere. ay'-ray. rr, ^ erre. ay'-rray. S, s, ese. ay'-ssay. T, t, te, tay. U, u, ti, 00. V, V, ve, vay. X, X, e'quis, ay'-kees. Y, y,^ y grie'ga, ee gree-ay'-gah, Z, Z, zeta, thay'-tah. ' Th to be pronounced as in the word think. 2 In Spanish manuscript the repreliensible custom prevails of writing capital Y in place of capital 7; thus, Iglesia (ee-glay'-seeah), church, be- comes Yglcsia. This letter is called i latina (ee lah-tee'-nah), Latin i, to distinguish it from the Y, which is called y griega (ee gree-ay'-gah), Greek y, ^ This letter, though not used in Spanish words, is included in the alphabet. ^ The letter r has the rolling sound of the rr, at the beginning and at the end of words as well as at the end of syllables, or after the letters n and I, where it is never doubled. ^ rr is never v/ritten at the beginning of words, so has no capital. * y is called ?/ griega to distinguish it from the letter i latina. SPANISH ALPHABET. 9 SOUNDS OF CONSONANTS. B, b {bay\ has the same sound as in English ; but in pronouncing it the lips are not pressed quite so closely together. This causes it to be confounded sometimes with F^ which is an entirely distinct letter. Beber (bay-bay rr'), to drink. Beta (bo -tab), hoot, C, C {thay). This letter has the sound of Jc (i. e., the same as in Eng- lish) when followed by a consonant or by the vowels a, o, or u, or when it stands at the end of a syllable ; as, Casa (kah'-sah), house, Claro (klah'-ro), clear, Cosa (ko'-sah), thing, Acreador (ah-kray-ay-dorr'), creditor, Cubo (koo'-bo), pail, Acto (ahk'-to), act. Before e or ^, it has the sound of th in tJiinJc ; as, Acento (ah-thayng'-to), accent. Cocina (ko-thie'-nah), kitchen, Leccibn (layk-thie-ong'), lesson. For the sound of k with the letters e or i, see letter Q, Note. — In Spanish America, tbe letter c before e or ?, and the letter z, which has the same sound, are usually pronounced like s instead of th ; cena (thay'-nah), clnco (thceng'-koh), are pronounced say'-nah, seeng'-ko. The Ll^ which among Castilians is as a rule sounded like ly in English, as, cahallo (kah-bahZ'-tyo), for instance, is pronounced like y (kah-bah'-^o) by the Spanish Americans. These are the only material differences be- tween the two pronunciations. Ch, ch (chay), Ch is not a double consonant but a single letter, although of a double form ; it is pronounced like ch in childy che&s^ or cheese, Muchacho (moo-chah'-cho), boy. Chocolate (cho-ko-lah'-tay), chocolate. 10 SPANISH ALPHABET. D, d {day). The sound of this letter is the same as in English, ex- cept when between two vowels or at the end of a word, in which cases it takes the sound of th^ as in the article the or in with} It is important to note that this pronunciation is not that of the soft th as in think. Examples : Dar (dahrr), to give. Dado (dah'-do), given, Bondad (bong-da^A'), kindness. Madrid (mah-dree^A'), Madrid, r, f {ay'-fay), takes the same sound as in English, and can never be replaced by ph ; as, Filadelfia, not Philadelphia, Filipinas, not Philipinas, This letter, like (7, has two distinct sounds. Before a consonant or the vowels a, o, or u, it is pronounced as in English, viz. : Gate (gah'-to), cat, Gota (go'-tah), drop, Gracias (grah'-thie-ahs), thanks. Before e or i it has a peculiar guttural sound, almost like the English letter h strongly aspirated ; as, Gente (hayng'-tay), people. Gigante (hee-gahng'-tay), giant. In order to make g before e or i sound as it does before a, o, or u — i. e., to give it a soft sound — the letter u must be inserted between the g and the vowel ; thus, gue (gay) and gui (gee). As we have already observed in our re- * It being very difficult for foreigners to acquire this particular pro- nunciation of the d between two vowels, which is neither d nor fully th^ they are advised to pronounce it simply as the letter d in English, though trying at the same time not to give it this sound in full. When at the end of a word it must be pronounced like th in the word vAth. SPANISH ALPHABET. H marks on the alphabet, the u is not pronounced in this case unless a diaeresis be written above it, thus, U^ to signify that the letter is not silent. Examples : Guerra (gay'-rrah), war. Verguenza (vayrr-gwayng'-thah), shame, Guita (gee'-tah), string. Aguero (ah-gway'-ro), augury. Note that in the combinations gua and guo both vowels must be pronounced ; as in — Agu.a (ah'-gwah), water. Antiguo (ang-tee'-gwo), ancient. The combination gn in Spanish words takes the same sound as in the English words signal^ signature, etc. ; thus, ]Digiio (deeg'-no), worthy. Dignidad (deeg-nee-da^^'), dignity, H, h {ah'-chay), is never pronounced. Examples : Hora (oh'-rah), hour. Ahora (ah-oh'-rah), now. Deshonor (day-soh-norr'), dishonor. \ Ah. ! (ah), Ah ! This letter, properly speaking, is only a sign used to mark the etymology of words, and is now omitted from ChristOy theatro, archangel, cMmica, etc. ; thus, Cristo, teatro, arcdngel, quimica, etc. J, j (hoh'-tah). This letter has the same peculiar guttural sound before all vowels that g has before e or i. Jamelgo (hah-mayl'-go), nag. Jumento (hoo-mayng'-to), ass, Jota (ho'-tah), the letter J. Viaje (vee-ah'-hay), voyage, Alhaja (ah-lah'-hah),yei/;eZ. Jugo (hoo'-goh), Juice, K, k {Jcah), This letter is used only in foreign words, and has the same pronunciation as c before a, o, or u ; i. e., like k in English. 12 SPANISH ALPHABET. L, 1 {ay'4ay\ takes the same sound as in English ; as, Lana (lah'-nah), wool. General (hay-nay-rahl'), general. Lil, 11 {ayl'-lyay). This letter, like cA, is a single letter, although of a double form, and has a liquid sound resembling that of the English Hi in the word billiards ; as, Sevilla (say-veel'-lya), Seville. Llave (lyah'-vay), key. Llama (lyah'-mah), flame, M, N, and P {ay' -may, ay' -nay, and pay), are pronounced as in English, except in the case of the letter n at the end of a syllable, when it takes the sound of the termination ng in English, viz. : Pan (pahng), bread. Con (kong), with. Sin (sing), without. It should be noted that words ending in n, as well as in any other consonant, when followed by a word begin- ning with a vowel or with h (always mute), are pronounced so that the final consonant of the one word is joined to the first syllable of the other, thus causing them to sound like a single word ; as. Tin hombre (oo-nom'-bray), a man, Algiin amigo (ahl-goo'-nah-mee'-go), soms friend, N, h {ay'-nyay), is pronounced like ni in the English word opinioii or onion. This sound we will represent by ny ; as in — A&o (ah'-nyo), year, Nifio (nee'-nyo), child. The sign ( ~ ), called tilde in Spanish, is of great im- portance, and must not be forgotten. The sound of n is SPANISH ALPHABET. 13 ilke the French g7i, but the Spanish gn must be pronounced as in the words signal^ signify, etc. See remarks on let- ter G, as Magno (mahg'-no). Digno (deeg'-no), etc. Q, q {koo), is always followed by ue or ui. It has the sound of 7c, and, as we have said, the u is silent in these cases. Aqui (ah-kee'), here. auerer (kay-rayrr'), to want, Pequefi.0 (pay-kay'-nyo), small, R, r (aij'-ray). This letter is pronounced with a soft, rolling sound, almost as in English, except at the beginning of words, at the end of syllables, or after the letters n and I, when it is very much rolled, taking the sound of the rr ; thus, Cara (kah'-rah), face, Hombre (om'-bray), man, Rosa (rro'-sah), rose, Almorzar (ahl-morr-thahrr'), to breakfast, Enrique (ayng-rree'-kay), Henry, Alrededor (ahl-rray-day-dorr'), around, rr^ {ay'-rray). The rr is always pronounced with a very strong rolling sound. As no words begin with this letter, the capital rr does not appear in the alphabet. Perro (pay'-rro), dog ; distinct from Pero (pay'-roh), hut, Carre (kah'-rro), cart ; " " Caro (kah'-roh), dear, S, S (ay'-ssay), always takes a strong hissing sound, as in the English ss; as, Siempre (ssee-aym'-pray), always. Soldado (ssohl-dah'-do), soldier, * rr, like ch and II, represents one letter, and must not therefore be divided ; mucko, caballo, ca7'ro, for instance, are divided into syllables, thus : mu-cho, ca-ha-llo^ ca-rro, 8 14 SPANISH ALPHABET. T, t, and V, V {tay and vay)^ are pronounced as in English. X, X [ay'-Jcees), This letter takes the same sound as in English when placed before a vowel ; as in — Sexo (sayk'-so), sex, Prdximo (prok'-see-mo), next. Before a consonant it takes the sound of s. Though without grammatical sanction, this sound has become cor- rect by general usage, e. g. : Sexto (says'-to), sixth. Excusar (ays-koo-sarr'), to excuse, Explicar (ays-plee-kahrr'), to explain, Y, y {ee gree-ay'-gah), . when placed before a vowel, is pronounced as in year or yoiuig. When placed at the end of a word, or when standing alone (in which case it means and)y y is used as a vowel and has the sound of i in Spanish, or that of long e in English. Examples : Yd, 1. Y (ee), and. Rey (ray'-ee), king, Reyes (ray'-yays), kings, Jjey (lay'-ee), law, Leyes (lay'-yays), laws, Z, Z (thay-tah), before the vowels a, o, or u, like c before e or i, has the sound of th in the English word thi?iJc ; as in — Zapato (^Tiah-pah'-toh), shoe. Braze (brah'-thoh), arm. Zumo (thoo' ^-mo), Juice, This letter is never written before e or i, as there would be the two letters, z and c, having the same sound, which is not allowable in Spanish. Whenever it is neces- i See "Table of Sounds." PRONUNCIATION. 15 sary to add either of the vowels e or ^ to words or voca- bles ending in ^, as, for instance, in the formation of plurals and the tenses of verbs, this letter must be changed to c, and then the termination may be added. Examples : Singular. Plural. Paz (pahth), 'peace. Paces ^ (pah'-thays), peaces. Luz (looth), liglit Luces (loo'-thays), ligMs. Rezar (ray-thahrr'), to pray. Race (rray'-thay), may pray. Rece (rray-thay'), I did pray PRONUNCIATION. Accents. The general rule for emphasis in Spanish is : in words ending with a vowel the emphasis should be placed on the next to the last syllable, and in those ending with a conso- nant on the last. Examples : ]!ilesa (may'-ssah), table. Butaca (boo-tah'-kah), arm-chair, Escritorio (ays-kree-toh'-reeo), desk. General (hay-nay-rahr), general. Hablar (ah-blahrr'), to speak, Bondad (bohng-da^7i'), kindness. In words not following this rule the accented syllable must be marked thus ( ' ). Only the acute accent is used in Spanish. Examples : Papa (pah-pah'), papa ; to be distinguished from Papa (pah'-pah), potato. Esta (ays-tah'), it is ; to be distinguished from Esta (ays'-tah), this (fern.). Pr6xinio (prok'-see-mo), next. Sabado (sah'-bah-doh), Saturday. Azticar (ah-//ioo'-kahrr), sugar. Arbol (ahr'-bohl), tree. Celebre (t hay '-lay-bray), celebrated. Mi^rcoles (mee-ayrr'-koh-lays), Wednesday. 2o form the plural of nouns ending in a consonant, es must be added to the singular. 16 PRONUNCIATION. The principal exception to these rules is words ending in n or s ; when, if no accent is placed over the word, it must be emphasized on the penultimate syllable ; but, if the word is emphasized on the last syllable, an accent must be placed over it. Examples : With n. Joven (hoh'-vayng), youth, Origen (oh-ree'-hayng), origin. Iiecci6n (layk-th*e-ong'), lesson. Algun (ahl-goong'), some, any. Orden (olirr'-daing), order. Alguien (ahl'-gee-aing), somebody, Proiiunciaci6n (proh-noong-th^6!-ah-th^e-ong'), pronunciatioii. With s. Lunes (loo -nays), Monday. Maries (mahrr'-tays), Tuesday. Compas (kohm-pahs'), compass. Cortes (kohrr-tays'), polite. Ingles (ing-glays'), Englishman. Prances (f rahng-thays'), Frenchman, Notice that, according to the general rule for empha- sis, the accent will be necessary for the formation of the plural when the singular does not require it, and vice versa ; as, Ordenes (ohrr'-day-nays). J6venes (hoh'-vay-nays). Lecciones (layk-th^e-oh'-nays). Algunos (ahl-goo'-nohs). Compases (kohm-pa'-says). Franceses (frahng-thay'-says). Note. — The plural of words ending in s, when the emphasis is not on the last syllable, does not change ; as, El (ell) limes ; pi. los (lohs) lunes. El martes ; pi. los martes. The change of a word, therefore, from the singular to the plural does not affect the emphasi^^ with the single exception of Car&cter (kah-rahk'-tair), nature^ PL. Caracteres (kah-rahk-tay'-rays). The same rule applies to the terminations of the plural in verbs. Examples : El hombre habla (ayl cm' -bray ah'-blah), The man speaks, Los hombres hablan (los om'-brays ah'-blahng), The men speak. PRONUNCIATION. 17 Family names ending in s, according to tne rule of accents, have the accent on the last syllable but one ; as, Jimenez (hee-may'-nayth), Martinez (marr-tee'-nayth), etc. Some words have an accent to distinguish them from others spelled the same, but not accented ; as, ?m, me ; mi, my ; el, he ; el, the ; and the letters a, 6, 6, and '{t, used as separate words (meaning to, and, or), as well as some interrogative words, are also accented : que (kay), what ? cudndo (kwang'-do), whenl cudl (koo-ahl'), whichl etc. This accent, however, does not affect the pronunciation. Double Consonants, No consonants are doubled except c and also n in com- pound words. Each must be separately and distinctly sounded, and they belong to different syllables, viz.: Leccibn (layk-th^e-ong'), lesson. Acci6n (ahk-thie-ong'), action, Ennoblecer (aing-no-blay-thayrr'), to ennoble. Innumerable (ing-noo-may-rah'-blay), innumerahle. It has already been stated that ch, II, and rr are con- sidered single letters in Spanish. REMARKS ON THE PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS. Diphthongs. When two vowels come together they are either treated as belonging to different syllables, as in traido (trah-ee'-do), brought, or they form a diphthong, i. e., they are pro- nounced as one syllable. In the latter case each vowel retains its own sound, both, however, being pronounced in quick succession and, as it were, melting into one utterance ; for instance, in the English i in ice (which is really a diph- thong composed of a and i) ; as in traigo (tri'-go), I bring, Ai or ay as in dais (dice), ye give ; hay (i), there is. El or ey " veis (vace), ye see ; rey (rray'-ee), king. Oi or oy " sois (soice), ye are ; soy (soee), / am. Ui or uy " cuidado (kwee-dah'-do), care ; muy (mwee), very* 18 PRONUNCIATION. Alc as in causa (kow'-ssah), cause. En " deuda (day'oo-dah), debt la gracias (grah'-thi'e-ahs), thanks. le " cielo {thie-Skf -\o\ heaven. lo " precio (pray'-th^e-oh), price. lu " ciudad (th^e-oo-da^/^0^ c*'^^- Ua " agua (ah'-gwah), water. Ue " huevos (ooay'-vos), eggs. Uo " arduo (arr'-duo), arduous. Usually, when two different vowels come together and do not form a diphthong, an accent is placed over the vowel of the syllable on which the stress of the voice is laid ; as in ratz (rrah-eeth'), root ; cat (kah-ee'), I fell ; 01 (oh-ee'), I heard ; varm (vah-ree'-ah), it varies ; etc. Triphthongs. When three vowels come together and are blended into one sound they are called a triphthong, and form one syl- lable. There are six such in Spanish, viz.: lai as in preci^is (pray-th^e-ah'ees). lei " vacieis (vah-th^e-ay'ees). Uai " santiguais (san-tee-gwah'ees). Uay " Paraguay (pah-rah-gwah'ee). Uei " averigiieis (ah-vay-ree-gway'ees). Uey " buey (bway'ee). DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. Words are divided into syllables according to the fol- lowing rules : 1. A single consonant between two vowels is made to begin a syllable ; for instance, mesa, silla, perro, raucha- cho, etc., are divided thus : me-sa, si-lla, pe-rro, mu-cha-cho, etc. 2. Two consonants standing between vowels are sepa- . rated ; as, consonante, gente, gasto, parte, etc., thus : con- so-nan-te, gen-te, gas-to, par-te. PUNCTUATION. 19 The combinations hl^ br, d, cr, dr, gl, gr, fl^ fr, pi, pr, and tr are exceptions to this rule, viz.: hahlOy ha-blo ; abre, a-bre ; tecla, te-cla ; sangre, san-gre ; zafra, za-f ra ; extra, ex-tra, etc. 3. Diphthongs and triphthongs must not be divided, viz. : guapo, gua-po ; gracias, gra-cias ; biiey (one syllable), etc. PUNCTUATION. In Spanish the marks of punctuation are the same as in English, with the difference that interrogation and exclama- tion points must both precede and follow the sentence. before sentences they are inverted thus, ( Hablar^ like desear (day-say-ahrr'), to ivish^ viajar (vee-ah-harr'), to travel^ procurar (proh-koo-rahrr'), to try^ practicar (prahk-tee-karr'), to prac' tiee.^ necesitar (nay-thay-see-tahrr'), to need^ etc., belongs to the first conjuga- tion, the infinitive of which always ends in ar. 2 The Spanish have no word corresponding to do except haur (ah-thayrr'), which always means either to make or to do^ and it can not be used as an auxili- ary in the conjugation of the verbs ; and so, when do is used thus in English, in Spanish it is simply expressed by the verb, as wishes you ? / not wishy etc., instead of do you ivish ^ I do not wish, etc. The same may be said of all other FIRST LESSON. 23 • PRONUNCIATION. 1. Yo day-say '-oh ah-blahrr'. 2. Ell day-say' -ah ah-blahrr' ays-pah-nyol'. 3. ^Day-say'-ah oos-tayth' ah- blahrr' ing-glays'? 4. See, say-nyor', yo day-say'-oh ah-blahrr' ing-glays' ee ah- lay-mang'. 5. ^Pohrr-kay' day-say'-ang oos- tay'-days ah-blahrr' layng'- • gwahs ? 6. Noh-soh'-trohs day-say-ah'- mohs ah-blahrr' layng'- gwahs pah' -rah vee-ah- hahrr'. 7. ^Ah'-blah oos-tayth' ays-pah- nyol' ? 8. Yo ah'-bloh oong po'-ko, ee tahm-beeayng' ah'-bloh ing-glays'. 9. ^Day-say'-ah oos-tayth' ah- blahrr'-may ayng ays-pah- nyol' f TRANSLATION. 1. I wish to speak, 2. He wishes to speak Spanish, 3. Do 2 you wish to speak Eng- lish f 4. Yes, sir, I wish to speak Eng- lish and German, 5. Why do you wish (pi.) to speak languages 9 6. We want to speak lajiguages in order to travel. 7. Do 2 you speak Spanish ? 8. / speak a little, and I also speak English. 9. Do you wish to speak to me in Spanish 9 auxiliary forma, as did, should, would, mights and shall, and the different terminations of the Spanish verbs take the place of English auxiliaries. 3 In the usual style of conversation the word you is translated by usted (oos-tayth'), when speaking to one person, and by ustedes (oos-tay'-days), when speaking to more than one. These words are contractions for vuestra mer~ ced (your honor, your worship) and vuestras mercedes (your honors, your wor- ships). With usted the verb must be in the third person singular, and with ustedes in the third person plural, because desea usted f means literally wishes your ivorship ? and desean ustedes? wish your worships ? although both are translated simply by you. The word usted is usually abbreviated to V. or Vd., ustedes to V. V. or Vds., but these abbreviations are always read usted and ♦ is the termination of the first person singular of the indicative mood of all regular verbs of the first conjugation ; and a, in which form usted is used, is the termination of the third person. 24 lecci6n primera. espa5?ol. ^ 10. Deseo^mucho pero no hablo casi nada.^ 11. Nosotros procuramos^.hablar con los espanoles para aprender * el espanol. 12. Y deseamos^ hablar con los alemanes para practicar el aleman. ^ 13. ^No^ desea V. (usted) vivir^ en Espaiia? ■^14. Ml padre desea mucho ir^ d Espana para aprender all! el espanol. * 15. I Desea el ir '^ solo 6 con sus hermanos de V.^ ? ■^16. Mis hermanos no desean' salir' de Nueva York; ellos necesitan atender* a los negocios. * LITERAL TRANSLATION. 10. (1) wish much, but (I) not speak almost nothing. 13. Not wishes you to live in Spain ? 14. My father wishes much to go to Spain for (in order) to learn there the Spanish. 15. Wishes he to go alone, or with your brothers of you I . 16. My brothers not wish to go out of New York; they need to attend to the business. 1 See page 23, note 4, and for this, as for the formation of any other tense, ^ it would be useful to consult pages 58, 62, and 63. 3 Two or more negatives in Spanish strengthen the negation, the reverse of what happens in English. JVo always precedes the verb, as no hablo nada^ no deseo nada\ but is omitted when other negatives are placed before it, as nada deseo^ nada hablo. 8 amos is the termination of the first person plural of the present indica- tive of verbs in ar: deseamos^ we wish, j^rocwrawos, we try, etc. FIRST LESSON. 25 PRONUNCIATION. 10. Day-say'-oh moo'-cho pay'-ro no ah'-bloh kah'-see nah'- dah. 11. Noh-soh'-trohs pro-koo-rah'- mohs .... kong lohs ays-pah- nyo'-lays .... ah-prayng- dayrr' ell ays-pah-nyol'. 12. Ee day-say-ah'-mohs .... los ah-lay-mah'-nays prahk- tee-kahrr' ell ah-lay-mang'. 13. i No day-say'-ah oos-tayth' vee- veerr' ayng ays-pah'-nyah ? 14. Mee pah' -dray day-say'-ah moo'-cho eerr ah Ays-pah'- nyah pah'-rah ah-prayng- dayrr' ahl-lyee' ell ays-pah- nyol'. 15. J Day-say'-ah ell irr soh'-loh oh kong soos ayr-mah'- nohs day oos-tayth' 1 16. Mees ayr-mah'-nohs no day- say' -ang sah-leerr' day Nway'-vah York ; ayl'-lyos nay - thay - see' - tahng ah- tayng-dayrr' ah lohs nay- go'-thie-ohs. TRANSLATION. 10. / tvish to very much, but I speak it scarcely any. 11. We try to speak with Span- iards in order to learn Spanish, 12,' And we wish to speak with Germans so as to practice German. 13. Do you not wish to live in Spain ? 14. My father wants to go to Spain very mnch^ in order to learn Spanish there. 15. Does he wish to go alone, or with your brothers 9 16. My brothers do not wish to leave New York ; they must attend to business. * Aprender (ah-prayng-dayrr'), to learn, like atender (ah-tayng-dayrr'), to attend^ vender (vayng-dayrr'), to sell, comprender (kohng-prayng-dayrr'), to understand, etc., belongs to the second conjugation, er being the ending in the iDfinitive of all verbs of this class. 5 Vivir (vee-virr'), to live, like ir (irr), to go, and salir (sah-lirr'), to go out, to leave, etc., belongs to the third conjugation, ir being the termination of the infinitive in all these verbs. « The possessive adjective su, meaning Ms, her, its, their, and your, the complements de el (of he), of him, de ella (of she), of her, de Vd., de Vds., of you, etc., are to be added when the context does not clearly point out the per- son referred to. More will be said about these adjectives in a future lesson. '' The termination an belongs to the third person plural, present indica- tive, of verbs of the first conjugation. 26 lecci6n primera. espaRol. ^ 17. I Aprende ^ espanol su padre de Y.^ para atender d los negocios ? ■^18. Si, sefLor, mi padre desea ir d la America del Sur para vender^ algunos articulos. * 19. I Cuando desea el * partir ? * 20. El desea partir pronto, pero antes desea ir a Fila- deltia manana. ^21. I For eual tren desea el* ir ? * 22. I Desearia el ir por el tren 6 por vapor ? 23. Mi^ madre j mis^ hermanas desean ^ ir con el. * 24. I A que hora desean ellos salir*^ ? * 25. Ellos desean salir manana por la manana.® * LITERAL TRANSLATION. 17. Learns Spanish your father of you for (in order) to attend to the business (pi.) ? 18. Yes, sir, my father wishes to go to the America of the South for (in order) to sell some articles. 19. When wishes he to leave ? 20. He wishes to leave soon, but before wishes to go to Philadel- phia to-morrow. 21. By which train wishes he to go ? 22. Would wish he to go by the train or by steamer? 24. At what hour wish they to go out (leave) ? 25. They wish to go out (leave) to-morrow by the morning. FIRST LESSON. 27 PRONUNCIATION. 17. i Ah-prayng'-day ays-pah-nyoi; SCO pah' -dray day oos-tayth' pah'-rah ah-tayng-dayrr' ah lohs nay-go' -thie-ohs ? 18 mee pah' -dray day-say'- ah irr ah la ah-may'-ree- kah dell soor pah'-rah vayngcdayrr' ahl-goo'-nos ahr-tee'-koo-los. 19. ^ Kwahng'-do day-say'-ah ell pahrr-tirr' ? 20 prohng'-toh pay'-ro ahng'- tes . . . . mah-nyah'-nah. 21. Pohrr kwahl' trayng .... 22. ^. . . . ell trayng' oh pohrr vah-pohrr' ? 23. Mee mah'-dray ee mees ayr- mah'-nahs day-say'-ang irr kong ell. 24. ^Ah kay' o'-rah day-say'-ahng ayl'-lyos sah-lirr' ? • 25. Ayl'-lyos day-say'-ahng sa- lirr' mah-nyah'-nah pohrr lah mah-nvah'-nah. TRANSLATION. 17. Does your father learn Span- ish in order to attend to 18. Yes, sir, my father wishes to go to South America to sell some articles. 19. When does he wish to leave 9 20. He wishes to leave soon, hut he wishes first to go to Philadelphia to-morrow. 21. By which train does he wish to go? 22. Would he like to go by the train or by steamer f 23. My mother and sisters wish to go with him, 24. At what time do they wish to leave ? 25. They wish to leave to-morrow morning. 1 From aprender, to learn. E is the termination of the third pers. sing., ind. pres.', of all verbs in er. 2 See note 6 on page 25. s See note 4 on page 25. * The accent of the pronoun el (he) causes it to be pronounced short, and the article el (the), having no accent, is pronounced long. This is the only difference between the two. s Mi (mee), my (sing.), mis (mees), my (pi.), agree with the noun in number. * See note 7 on page 25. ■^ Salir^ literally, to go out^ signifies also to leave^ the literal translation of which is partir. 8 Idiomatic Spanish, used for to-morrow morning. The difference be- tween to-morrow, manana^ and nioming, la manana^ is the article la. 28 lecci6n segunda. LECCION SEGUNDA.1 Nuevo Vocabulario usado en esta Leccion? Conmigo (kong-mee'-go) . Tomaremos (toh-mah-ray'-mos) Par (pahrr'). Fonda ^ (fon'-dah) Ferrocarril (fay'-rroh-kah-rreel') Estaci6n (ays-tah-thie-ong') Norte (nohrr'-tay) Sur (soorr) .... Hora (oh'-rah) ^ A que hora ? (ah kay' oh'-rah) Temprano (taym-prah'-no) Despues (days-pways') Pan y mantequilla (pang ee mang-tay-keel Aqui (ah-kee') Viaje (vee-ah'-hay) Bastante (bas-tang'-fay) Durante (doo-rang'-tay) Permanencia (payrr-mah-nayng'-thie-ah) I Por que ? (pohrr kay') Porque (pohrr' -kay) Si (see') 4 Si (see) * . Bajo (bah'-hoh) . Alto (ahl'-toh) . Mas alto (mass ahl'-toh) Mas bajo (mass bah'-hoh) . with me. . we shall take, . pair, couple, . restaurant, . railroad. . station, . north. . soxith. . hour. . at what time 9 . early. . after, afterward. -lya) hread and butter, , here, . trip. . enough, , during, . a stay, , why 9 . because, . yes. ^if . soft, low, , loud, tall, high, , louder, taller, higher, , softer, lower. 1 Layk-thie-ong' say-goong' 3 Nway'-voh voh-kah-boo- thie-ong', new 'vocabulary used j'-dah, second lesson. i-lah'-reeoh oo-sah'-do ayng ays'-tah layk- l in this lesson. 3 Restaurant (rays-toh-rang'), from restaurar (rays-tah-oo-rahrr'), to re- store, and the French word restaurant, is often used instead of fonda, as in that language. * Si (see'), yes, is the affirmative adverb, and has an accent, which causes it to be pronounced short and distinguishes it from si (see), if, which is a conjunction. r- SECOND LESSON. 29 Palabras} — Comidas y Bebidas? El almuerzo (ahl-moo-ayrr'-thoh) Almorzar (ahl-morr-tharr') La comida (koh-mee'-dah) Comer (koh-mayrr') . La merienda (may-ree-ayng'-dah) Merendar (may-rayng-dahrr') La cena (thay'-nah) Cenar (thay-nahrr') . Beber (bay-bayrr') . El cafe (kah-fay') . La leche (lay'-chay) Una taza (oo'-nah tah'-thah) El te (tay) Tin cubierto (koo-bee-ayrr'-toh) La servilleta (sayrr-veel-lyay'-tah) El plato (plah'-toh) . El tenedor (tay-nay-dorr') La cuchara (koo-chah'-rah) El cuchillo (koo-cheel'-lyoh) La lista de comidas^ (lees' -tah day koh-mee^ Un vaso de agua (vah'-soh day ah'-gwah) El vino (vee'-noh) . La sopa (soh'-pah) . La carne (kahrr'-nay) El carnero'* (kahrr-nay'-roh) Una chuleta (choo-lay'-tah) Costillas de carnero*^ (kohs-teel'-lyas) Puerco* (pooayrr'-koh) . T?ocino (toh-thie'-noh) Jamon (hah-mong') . Huevos (ooay'-vohs) Una tortilla (tohrr-teel'-lyah) . the hreahfast. . to breakfast, . the dinner. . to eat, to dine. . the luncheon, . to lunch. . the supper, . to sup. , to d7'inh. , the coffee, . the milk, , a cup. , the tea, , a cover. , the napkin. . the plate, dish. ■ . the fork. , the spoon. . the knife. ■das) the hill of fare. . a glass of water, . the wine. . the soup. . the meat. . the mutton, , a cutlet. , mutton-chops, , pork. . hacon, , ham. . eggs. . an omelette. 1 Pah-lah'-bralis, zvords. ^ Koh-mee'-das ee bay-bce'-das, meals and drinks, from coiner, to eat, and beber, to drink. s Lit., list of meals. 4 Carnero (sheep). Spaniards have the same word, camera^ for sheep or mutton, and for pig or pork they use puerco. 6 Costilla, lit., rib. 30 LECClto SEGUNDA. espa5?ol. ^ 1. I Desearian Vdes. almorzar antes de ^ salir para Filadelfia ? * 2. Si, seiior, pero tomaremos^ solamente im par de huevos pasados por agua en la fonda deP ferro- carril. 3, I A que estacion necesitan Vdes. ir, a la * del ^ norte, sur, oeste, 6 a la del ^ este ? ^ 4. Para ir por el primer tren necesitamos salir por la estacion del norte. * 5. g A que hora parte ^ el primer tren ? * LITERAL TRANSLATION. 1. "Would wish you (pi.) to breakfast before of to leave for Phila- delphia ? 2 but (we) shall take only a pair of eggs passed through the water in the restaurant of the railroad. 3. To what station need you (pi) to go, to the (station understood) of the north, south, west, or to the (station understood) of the east ? 4. For (in order) to go by the first train (we) need to go out (to leave) for the station of the north. 5. At what time leaves the first train ? 1 ia^ ias^ ia^ iamos, iais^ ian^ added to any infinitive, form the conditional of the verb. See pages 56 and 60. Many of these complex prepositions require de before a noun, substantive', or verb ; as, antes de ; despues de ; dentro de (dayng-troh day), (within) ; fuera de (fooay'-rah), (without) ; cerca de (near) ; lejos de (far from), etc. When a verb follows the preposition de it must be in the infinitive present instead of the present participle as in English ; so, we must say antes., despues^ cerca., etc., de hacer (before, after, near, etc., of to do), and by no means antes., etc., de liaciendo (ah-thie-ayng'-do), doing. SECOND LESSON. 31 PRONUNCIATION. 1. ^ Day-say-ah-ree'-ahng .... ahl - mohrr - thahrr ' ahng' - tays ? 2. See', say-nyorr', pay'-roh toh- mah - ray' - mos soh' - lah- mayng'-tay oong pahrr day ooay' - vohs pah - sah' - dos porr ah'-gwah ayng lah ' fohng'-dah dell fay'-rroh- kah-rreel'. 3. ^Ah kay' ays-tah-thie-ong' nay-thay-see'-tahng .... ah lah dell nohrr'-tay, soorr, oh-ays'-tay, oh ah lah dell ays'-tay "? 4. Pah' -rah eerr pohrr ell pree- mayrr' trayng nay-thay-see- tah'-mos sah-leerr' .... 5. I . . . . oh'-rah . . . . ? TRANSLATION. 1. Wo^dd you like (pi.) to Ireak- fast before leaving for Phil- adelphia f 2. Fes, si>, hut we shall take only a couple of soft-boiled eggs at the restaurant of the rail- road. 3. To which station do you need (pi.) to go, to the northern or to the southern, western, or eastern ? 4. To go by the first train we must leave from the north- ern station, ^. At what time does the first trai7i leave f * aremos is the termination of the 1st pers. pi. of the future of verbs in ar. In Spanish it is not necessary to express the pronoun before the verb ; we may say yo hahlo (I speak), el come (he eats), nosotros tomaremos (we shall take), etc.; but it is equally correct to say simply hallo, come, tomaremos, etc., as the person and number are always designated by the ending of the verb, or they are sufficiently pointed out by the context. If this is not the case, or if a particular emphasis rests on the pronoun, the latter should be expressed. Usted, ustedes (you), however, must never be omitted, unless to avoid repe- tition, and they require the verb in the third persons, respectively, a pecul- iarity which the student must always bear in mind. See note 3 on page 23. The personal pronouns, besides V. and Vds., are : yo,l', nosotros (masc), nosotras (fem.), we; tu, thou; vosotros (masc), vosotras (fem.), ye; el, he; ella^ she ; and ellos (masc), ellas (fem.), they. 8 When el (the) comes after the preposition de (of, from) and a (to, at), before a masculine noun, both words contract into one, respectively ; as, del, of the, from the ; al, to the, at the. 4 Estacibn, station, which, like all nouns ending in cibn, is feminine, is understood. ^ Parte, from partir (to leave), being the third person singular, indicative present, the termination of which is e in verbs in er or ir. 32 lecci6n segunda. espaS^ol. * 6. El primer tren parte por la manana muy temprano y el proximo tina bora despues. 7. I Desean Ydes. comer aliora ? 8. I Que desean Vdes. comer ? 9. Deseamos tomar una taza de cafe con leche, pan, y mantequilla. 10. Mi amigo desea tambien almorzar aqui. 11. J Por que desean Vdes. ir a'Filadelfia? 12. Necesitamos comprar algunos articulos necesarios para nuestro viaje a Mejico. * 13. ^ Pero sabe ^ V. hablar bastante espanol para hacerse ^ comprender ? ^ 14. Lo ^ comprendo muy bien y creo que ^ lo ^ aprendere perf ectamente ^ durante mi permanencia alii. ' 15. J Por que no habla V. mds alto? * LITERAL TRANSLATION. 6. The first train leaves by the morning very early, and the next one hour afterward. 13. But knows you to speak enough Spanish in order to (para) make yourself to understand ? 14. It (I) understand very well, and (I) believe that it (I) will learn .... 15. For what (why) not speaks you more loud ? 1 Sahe (sah'-bay), from saber (to know), (irregular verb), is the third per- son singular of the indicative present. The first person is se (say), 7 knmv. ^ Hacerse^ compound word of hacer (ah-thayrr'), to do^ and the reflexive SECOND LESSON. 33 PRONUNCIATION. 6 moo'-ee taym-prah''-no ee ell prok'-see-mo .... days- pooays'. 7. i . . . . ah-oh'-rah ! 8 9 oo'-nah tah'-thah day kah-fay' kong lay'-chay .... mang-tay-keel'-lya. 10. Mee ah-mee'-goh .... tahm- bee-»yng' .... ah-kee'. 11. ... . 12. Nay-thay-see-tah'-mos kprni- prarr' ahl-goo'-nos arr-tee'- koo-los nay-thay-sah'-reeos pah'-rah nooays'-troh vee- ah'-hay ah may'-hee-koh. 13. I Pay'-roh sah'-bay .... ah- thayrr • - say kom - prayng- dayrr' ? 14. Loh .... moo'-ee bee-ayng' ee kray'-oh kay loh ah-prayng- day - ray' payrr - f ayk' - tah- mayng'- tay doo - rang'- tay mee payrr - mah - nayng'- thie-ah ahl-lyee'. 15. I mass ahl'-toh ? TRANSLATION. 6. The first U-ain leaves very early in the morning, and the 7iext an hour later, 7. Do you wish (pi.) to dine now ? 8. What do you wish (pi.) to eat f 9. We wish to take a cup of coffee with milk, hread, and but- ter, 10. My friend wishes also to hreak- fast here, 11. Why do you (pi.) wish to go to Philadelphia 9 12. We need to buy some necessary articles for our trip to Mexico, 13. But do you know how to apeak enough Spanish to make yourself understood f 14. 1 understand it very well, and I think that I will learn it perfectly during my stay there. 15. Why do you not speak louder f pronoun se (say), oneh self. These pronouns are always placed after the in- JBnitive and imperative, but before the other tenses. 3 Zo, la (it), los^ las (them), like the reflexive pronouns, note 2, are always placed before the verb except with the infinitive and imperative, in whicn cases the verb and the pronoun form one word ; as, lo {la) comprendo, I under- stand it ; los (las) comprendo, I understand them ; comprendalos, comprenda- las J understand them. * Creer is always followed by que before verbs, except when they are used in the infinitive present ; as, creo aprender. » The suflix mente answers to the English ly^ and is added to the feminine forms of adjectives; as, malo (bad), malamente (badly), from mala (fem.); perfecto, perfectamente^ from perfecta (fem.), etc. 34 lecci6n segunda. ESPASfOL. * 16. g No ^ hablo bastante alto ? "* 17. No ; V. habla muy bajo j no le '^ comprendemos aV.^ 18. ^No me comprende V. ? ^ 19. ^ Quiere ^ Vd. hacerme el favor de ^ repetir ? ^20. ;Habla V.^conmigo^? ^ 21. Si, senor, le^ hablo a Vd. * 22. jQuien dice '^ que el me ^ habla '^ a mi ^ ? * 23. Todo el mimdo lo dice. * LITERAL TRANSLATION. 16. Not speak (I) loud enough f 17. No, you speaks very low (soft), and (we) not to you understand to you. 19. Wants you (to) do me the favor of (to) repeat f 20. Speaks you with myself ? 21. Yes, sir, (I) to you speak to you. • 22. Who says that he to me speaks to me f 23. AH the world it says. 1 The negation no, not, always goes directly before the verb. 8 Ze (lay), to him ^ to her ^ to you (sing.); me (may), tome; te (tay), to thee ; nos (nohs), to us ; os (ohs), to ye ; and lea (lays), to them^ to you (pi.)? indirect object, personal pronouns, must be used before verbs, while the direct object, ^e7, a ella^ dmi^ dti^ a nosotros^ a vosotros^ a ellos^ a ellas, d Vd., d Vds.^ after them if there be any ambiguity, or for the purpose of emphasis. SECOND LESSON. 3j> PRONUNCIATION. 16. ^ . . . ah'-bloh bas-tang'-tay ..J 17 bah'-hoh ee no lay kom- prayng-day'-mos .... 18. ^ . . . may kom-prayng'-day . . . ? 19. ^Keeay'-ray oos-tayth' ah- thayrr'-may ell fah-vorr' day ray-pay-teer' f 20. ^ . . . . kong-mee'-goh f 21 lay ah'-bloh ah oos-tayth'. 22. ^Keeayng' dee'-thay kay ell may ah'-blah ah mee ? 23. Toh'-doh ell moong'-do loh dee'-thay. TRANSLATION. 16. Do I not speak loud enough f 17. No, you speak very softly, and we do not understand you, 18< Do you not understand me f 19. Will you do me the favor to repeat 9 . 20. Are you speaking ^ with me 9 21. Yes, sir, I am speaking^ to you, 22. Who says that he is speaking ^ to me 9 23. Everybody says so. The direct, a Vd.^ though, is always placed after the verb, as in this case, unless to avoid repetition. 3 Quiere Vd. (keeay'-ray), wants you, is always translated for will you in English, when implying willingness : I will not, no quiero (no keeay'-ro). 4 Favor (fah-vorr') must be followed by the preposition de and the verb in the infinitive present. See note 1 on page 30. 5 In Spanish the forms / am speaking, are you speaking ? are not employed as often as in English. It is rendered by I speak, speaks you? « The preposition con (with) is used in a peculiar manner with the per- sonal pronouns mi (mee), me/ ti (tee), thee ; si (see) ; viz., conmigo (kohng- mee'-goh), with me {with myself) ; contigo (kohng-tee'-go), with thee {with thyself)', consigo (cohng-see'-go), with Jdmself^ or yourself . 7 Dice (says) is the third person singular of the present indicative of the irregular verb decir (day-thirr', {th to be always pronounced as in the word think), which, like creer, requires que after it except when placed immedi- ately before the infinitive of verbs. Digo (dee'-goh), 1 say ; decimos (day- thie-mohs), we say ; dicen (dee'-thayng), they say. 36 lecci6n tercera. LECCI6N TERCERA,^ Nuevo Vocahulario, ^ Es verdad ? * (ays vayrr-dath') . dese-a. ellas, >- dese-an. Vd., ) Vds., ) imperfecto' (imperfect). Yo dese-aba,*^ I was wishing or Nosotros dese-abamos.''^ We were tu dese-abas, used to vnsh, etc. vosotros dese-abais, wishing or el, \ ellos, \ used to wish, ella, v dese-aba. ellas, >- dese-aban. etc. Vd., ) Vds., ) PASADO DEFINIDO (pAST DEFINITE). Yo dese-e,* / wished or Nosotros dese-amos,^ We wished tii dese-aste, did wish, etc. vosotros dese-asteis, or did wish, el, \ ■ ellos, ^ etc. ella, |- dese-6. ellas, >• dese-aron. Vd., ) Vds., ) 1 Moh'-doh ing-fee-oee-tee'-voh, injlnitive mood. ^ Pray-sayng'-tay. 3 Hay-roong'-deeoh (present participle), gerund. * Pahrr-tee-thie'-peeoh pah-sah'-doh, past participle. 6 Ing-dee-kah-tee'-voh, indicative mood. « Dese is the stem of the verb, while o, as, a, etc., are the general termina- tions of this tense, which must be added to the stem of the verb. Va//- fiay'-oh, -ahs, -ah, -ah'-mos, -ah'-is, -ahng. These terminations are printed in a heavier type for the purpose of assisting the student. 7 Ing-payrr-fayk'-toh. i>a?/-«ay-ah'-bah, etc. ; daT/say-ah'-hah-moha, etc. • Day-say-3i,y\ -ahs'-tay, -6, -ah'-mos, -ahs'-tay-is, -ah'-rong. 56 VERBOS REGULARES. FUTURO * (future). Singular. Plural. Yo dese-are,* / shall wish, Nosotros dese-aremos,^ We shall tii dese-ar^, etc. vosotros dese-areis, wish, etc. el, ) ellos, ella, V dese-ar^ ellas, >- dese-aran. Vd., ) Yds, ) FUTURO CONDICIONAL^ (CONDITIONAL FUTURE). Yo dese-aria,^ / should or would Nosotros dese-ariamos,* We tii dese-arias, wish, etc. vosotros dese-ariais, should el, \ ellos, \ or would ella, \ dese-aria. ellas, [• dese-arian. wish, etc. Yd., ) ' " Yds., ) MODO SUBJUNTIVO.^ PRESENTE (present). Que^ yo dese-e,^ That I may Que nosotros (nos.) dese-emos,^ That que tu dese-es, wish, etc, que vosotros (vos.) dese-eis, we may [ el, \ [ ellos, ^ wish, etc. que < ella, >- dese-e. que } ellas, >- dese-en. ( Yd., ) ( Yds., ) imperfecto primera forma ^ (first form of the imperfect). Yo dese-ara,'^ / might wish, Nosotros (nos.) dese-aramos,''' We tii dese-aras, etc. vosotros (vos.) dese-arais, might el, \ ' ellos, \ wish, etc. ella, V dese-ara. ellas, >- dese-aran. Yd., ) Yds., ) 1 Foo-too'-roh. Day-say-ah-rsiy' , etc., day-say-SLh-Taj'-uios, etc. 2 Koug-dee-thie-oh-nalir. Day-say-ah-ree' -ah, -ahs, -ah, -ah-mos, -ah-is, -along. 3 Soob-hoong-tee'-voh, subjunctive mood. * This tense being always used in connection with the conjunction que, it will be of help to learn its conjugation by using said conjunction. 6 Day-say'-ay, -ays, -ay ; day-say-ay' -mos, -ay'-is, day-say' -ayng. « Pree-may'-rah for'-mah. There are two forms in Spanish for the im- perfect subjunctive, both meaning the same, and only used for the sake of avoiding cacophony when this part of the verb is employed twice in the same sentence. In any other instance both may be used indiscriminately. ^ Day-say-ah'-rah, -ras, -rah, -rah-mos, -rah-is, -rang. REGULAR VERBS. 57 IMPERFECTO SEGUNDA ^ FORMA (SECOND FORM OF THE IMPERFECT), Singular. Plural. Yo dese-ase,^ I might wish, Nosotros (nos.) dese-asemos, T?« tii dese-ases, etc. vosotros (vos.) dese-aseis, mighc el, ^ ellos, \ wish, etc» ella, [• dese-ase. ellas, > dese-asen. Vd., ) Vds., ) FUTURO CONDICIONAL (CONDITIONAL FUTURE), Singular. Si yo dese-ara or dese-ase, If I wished, etc. si tii dese-aras or dese-ases, d < ella, V dese-ara or dese-ase. ( Vd., ) Plural. Si nosotros dese-dramos or dese-^semos, If we wished, etc. si vosotros dese-arais or dese-aseis, ellos, si \ ellas, J- dese-aran or dese-asen. I ellos, \ < ellas, > ( Vds.,) PRESENTE (present). Singular. Plural. Dese-emos nos., let us wish, Dese-a tii," wish thou. Dese-ad ^^ vos., wish ye, el, let him wish, c ellos, ( el, let him wish. c ellos, ) Dese-e \ ella, let her wish. Dese-en \ ellas, ) \ Vd., wish you. ( Vds., w let them wish. Vd., wish you. ( Vds., wish you (pi.). Note. — For an easier study of these terminations, see " Hints for learn- the Terminations of Verbs easily," on the next page. The compound tenses are formed as in English, with the auxiliary verb to have, in Spanish haher (ah-bayrr'}, and will be fully explained when treating of the auxiliary verbs. 8 Say-goong'-dah. » Day-say-ah' -^Q.j , -says, -say, -say-mos, -say-is, -sayng. 10 Im-pay-rah-tee'-voh, vmperative mood. 11 In the imperative mood the pronouns are placed after the verb, w Day-say-ad'. 58 HINTS FOR LEARNING THE TERMINATIONS EASILY. Hints for learning the Terminations of Verbs in ar. To form the different endings of tenses and persons of the verbs of this conjugation easily, read carefully the following remarks : 1. The ending o is the termination of the first person singular, indicative present, of all verbs with the exceptions of he, I have ; doy, I give ; soy and estoy, I am ; se, I know ; and voy, I go, I am going — i. e., whenever the tense and person is expressed by / do in English, the termination must be o in Spanish. The remaining persons will be found by adding to the infinitive without the r, which will be the third person, the general terminations s, mos, is, and n. 2. The termination of the imperfect is aha, which is also the ending for both the first and third persons, and to this the general termina- tions s, mos, is, and n must be added to form the remaining persons. 3. The past definite is the most irregular of all tenses. The first and third persons singular take the same terminations as the first per- son subjunctive and the first indicative present respectively, the only difference being that the accent is placed on the last syllables ; thus, e, 6. The first person plural is like that of the indicative present : the second singular is aste ; and the second plural is the same as the second singular, adding the general ending is to it. The third person is ron. 4. Future. — This tense will be formed by adding the endings e, as, d, emos, eis, an, to the infinitive. 5. The conditional, with the terminations ia, ias, ia, etc., added also to the infinitive. 6. To form the subjunctive present, add to the stem of the verb the endings e, es, e, emos, eis, en. 7. For the first form of the imperfect subjunctive the endings a, as, a, amos, ais, afi, which are the same terminations as those of the indicative present, except the first, must be added to the infinitive of the verb, care being taken to lay the emphasis on the stem of the verb, to distinguish it from the future, with which tense it might easily be confounded. 8. For the second form of the imperfect subjunctive the partial termination is ase, to which the general endings s, mos, is, and n must be added. 9. The imperative is like the subjunctive present, except in the second persons singular and plural, the former having the partial ending a of the indicative present, and the latter the same ending with d added, ad. REGULAR VERBS. 59 SEGUNDA Y TERCERA CONJUGACIONES.* 2» CONJUGACION. 3* CONJUGACION. MODOS INFINITIVOC. Comer. Partir. Presente. Com-er, to eat Presente. Part-ir, to leave. Gerundio. Com-iendo,2 eating. Gerundio. Part-iendo,"* leaving, Part.2 Pasado. Com-ido,^ eaten. Part.^ Pasado. Part-ido,^ left. MODOS INDICATIVOS. PRESENTES. Yo eom-0,^ / eat or am eating, Yo part-o,^ / leave or am leaving, tii com-es, etc. tu part-es, etc. el, \ el, ^ ell a, [• com-e. ella, >■ part-e. Vd., ) ' Vd, ) Kos. com-emos, We eat or Nos. part-imos, We leave or vos. com-eis, are eating, etc. vos. part-is, are leavirig, etc. ellos, \ ellos, el las, >- com-en. . ellas, >• part-en. Yds., ) Yds., ) IMPERFECTOS. Yo com-ia,' / was eating or Yo part-ia,^ / was leaving or tu com-ias, used to eat, etc. tu part-ias, used to leave, etc. el, \ ' el, ^ ella, \ com-ia. ella, >• part-ia. Yd., ) Yd., ) Nos. com-iamos. We were eating Nos. part-iamos. We were leaving vos. com-iais, or used to eat, etc. vos. part-iais, or used to leave, ellos, \ ellos, \ etc. ellas, >• com-ian. ellas, [• part-ian. Yds., ) Yds., ) 1 Kohng-hoo-gah-thle-oh'-nays. 2 Koh-mee-ayng'-doh. 8 Pahr-tee-thie-pee-oh .... Koh-raee'-doh. * Parr-tee-ayng'-doh. Parr-tee'-doh. * Koh'-mdh, -mays, -may, koh-may' -mos, -is, -koh'-mayng. « Farr'-toh, -tays, -tay, parr-tee' -moi^, -lis', -parr'-tayng, "> Koh-mee'~ah, -ahs, -ah, -ah-mos, -ah-is, -ahng. 8 Farr-tee'-ah, -ahs, -ah, -ah-mos, -ah-is, -ahng. 60 VERBOS REGULARES. Yo com-i,' tii com-iste, el, ^ ella, >• com-i6. Vd., ) Nos. com-imos, Yos. com-isteis, ellos, ellas, Y com-ieron. Vds., PASADOS DEFINIDOS. I ate or did eat, Yo part-i,^ / left or did leave. etc. We ate or did eat, etc. tii part-iste, el, , ella, V part-i6. Vd., ) Nos. part-imos, vos. part-isteis, ellos, \ ellas, >• part-ieron. Vds., ) etc. We left or did leave, etc. FUTUROS. I shall eat, etc. Yo part-ir6, Yo com-er6,3 tii com-er4s, el, ) ella, y com-er4. Vd., ) ' Nos. com-eremos, We shall eat, I shall leave, etc. tu part-ir&s, ella, V part-ir&. Vd., ) Nos. part-iremos, We shall leave, vos. com-er6is, ellos, ellas, y com-er^n. Vds., etc. vos. part-ireis, ellos. \ ellas, >- part-iran. Vds., ) etc. FUTUROS CONDICIONALES. Yo com-eria,^ / should or tii com-erias, would eat, etc. el, ^ ella, [• cora-eria. Vd., ) Nos. com-eriamos, We should or vos. com-eriais, would eat, etc. ellos, ^ ellas, v com-erian. Vds, ) I should or would leave, etc. Yo part-iria,® tii part-irias, ^M . ' ella, V part-iria. Vd., ) Nos. part-iriamos. We should or vos. part-iriais, would leave, etc, ellos, \ ellas, V part-irian. Vds., ) 1 Koh-THQQ', -mis'-tay, -mee-o', -mee'-mos, -mis'-lay-is, -mee-ay'-rong. 3 Par-tee', -tis'-tay, -tee-o', -tee'-mos, -tis'-tay-is, -teeay'-rong. 3 Koh-may-rB.j' , -ras', -ra', -ray'-mos, -ray'-is, -rang'. * Parr-tee-TQ,' , -ras', -ra', -ray'-mos, -ray'-is, -rang'. * Koh-may-ree' -Bh, -ahs, -ah, -ah-mos, -ah-is, -ahng. * Farr-tee-ree'-ah, -ahs, -ah, -ah-mos, -ah-is, -ahng. REGULAR VERBS. 61 MODOS SUBJUNTIVOS. PRESENTES. Que yo com-a, That I may eat, que tu com-as, etc. que < ella, >• com-a. ( Vd., ) Que nos. com-amos, That we que vos. com-ais, may eat, etc. / ellos, que < ellas, )- com-an. ( Vds., Que yo part-a, That I may leave, que tii part-as, etc. ( el, ^ que < ella, v part-a. ( Vd., ) Que nos. part-amos, That ive may que vos. part-6,is, leave, etc. ellos, que -^ ellas, [• part-an. Vds., IMPERFECTOS, PRIMERAS FORMAS. Yo com-iera,'^ / might eat, etc. tu com-ieras, el, J ella, >• com-iera. Vd., ) Nos. com-i6ranios, We might eat, vos. com-ierais, etc. ellos, \ ellas, v com-ieran. Vds., ) Yo part-iera,^ I might leave, etc. tii part-ieras, el, \ ella, >• part-iera. Nos. part-i6ramos, vos. part-ierais, ellos, \ ellas, !■ part-ieran. Vds., ) We might leave, etc. IMPERFECTOS, SEGUNDAS FORMAS. Yo com-iese,* I might eat, etc. Yo part-iese,^*^ tu com-ieses, el, ^ ella, v com-iese. Vd., ) Nos. com-i§semos. We might eat, vos. com-ieseis, etc. ellos, ^ ellas, >• com-iesen. Vds., ) I might leave, etc. tu part-ieses, el, ^ ella, V part-iese. Vd., ) Nos. part-iesemos, vos. part-ieseis, ellos, ^ ellas, y part-iesen. Vds., ) We might leave, etc. T Koh-mee-ay' -Ysih, -rahs, -rah, -rah-mos, -rah-is, -rahng. 8 Par r- tee-ay' -Ydih, -rahs, -rah, -rah-mos, -rah-is, -rahng. » Koh-mee-ay' -^Q.j , -says, -say, -eay-raos, -say-is, -sayng. 10 Parr-tee-ay'-ssiy, -says, -say, -*ay-mos, -say-is, -sayng. 62 VERBOS REGULARES. FUTUROS CONDICIONALES. Singulares. St JO cora-iera or com-iese, Si yo part-iera or part-iese, si tu com-ieras or com-ieses, si tii part-icras or part-ieses, rel. ^ /el, ^ si ■< ella, V com-iera or com-iese. si •< ella, V part-iera or part-iesa ( Yd., ) ' ( Yd., ) If I ate, etc. If I left, etc. Plurales. Si nos. com-ieramos or Si nos. part-i^ramos or com-iesemos, part-i6seinos, si A^os. com-ierais or com-ieseis, si vos. part-ierais or part-ieseis, { ellos, ) . ( ell OS, eiios, \ ellas, y Yds., ) com-ieran or - \ ^^ part-ieran or SI -{ ellas, ^- ^ com-iesen. ^ ' ^ part-iesen* If we ate, etc. If we left, etc. MODOS IMPERATIVOS. PRESENTES. Singulares. Com-e tii, eat thou. Part-e tii, leave thou. el, let him eat. ( el. let him leave. Com-a •< ella, let her eat. Part-a •< ella, let her leave. i Yd., eat you (sing.). ( Yd., leave you (sing.). Plurales. Com-amos nos., let us eat. Part-amos nos., let us leave. Com-ed ^ vos., eat ye. Part-id ^ vos., leave ye. ^ \ ,' [ let them eat. ^^ . ( , ' (■ Ze^ them leave, Com-an < ellas, ) Part-an < ellas, ) ( Yds., eat you (pi.). ( Yds., leave you (pi.). Sints for learning the Terminations easily. SEGUNDA Y TERCERA CONJUGACIONES. As may be seen by comparing the endings of the tenses in these two verbs, there is only a very slight difference between them, and the reason for having them printed together is to show more practically 1 Koh-mayd'. 2 Parr-teed'. REGULAR VERBS. 63 in what respects they differ. For the formation of the endings in the different tenses and persons let us observe : 1. As we have said, the first person singular of the indicative present ends in o, the partial termination of the tense being e, which is the ending of the third person singular, to which the general ter- minations 5, mos, and n must be added. The third conjugation changes this partial termination e to i in the first person plural, and it loses it in the second person, making imos, is, both of these endings being used instead of emos and eis. 2. The partial termination for the imperfect is m, the emphasis always being placed over the i. 3. To form the past definite the partial termination will be *, which is the ending of the first person, to which the termination 6 of the past for verbs of the first conjugation will be added to form the third singular, ste for the second, mos first plural, steis, i. e., the same as the second singular, followed by the general termination is for the second plural, and eron for the third. 4. For the future and conditional the general terminations e, as, a, emos, eis, an, and ia, ias, ia, iamos, iais, and ian, must be added » to the infinitive. Compare these two endings with the terminations of the indicative and subjunctive present for the first, and that of the imperfect for the later. 5. The suhju7ictive present of verbs ending in er or ir has a for the partial termination, contrary to that of verbs of the first conju- gation, which is e. 6. The partial terminations for both forms of the imperfect sub- junctive are iera and iese respectively. 7. The imperative we know is like the subjunctive present — the only difference being that the pronouns are always placed after the verb — with the exception of the two second persons, which are e and ed for the second conjugation and e and id for the third. Note. — The subjunctive present and the most important persons of the imperative, viz., third, sing., and first and third, pi., are formed with the partial termination, opposite to that of the infinitive or in- dicative present ; i. e. : Being ar the inf. ; a ind. pres. ; e subj. and imp. u • « f « " " » " " ** " tr " ) 64 VERBOS REGULARES. Some Orthographic Changes necessary in the Roots or Stems of Regular Verbs, Verbs ending in car, gar, zar^ cer, ger, cir, gir, guir [u silent), qidr (u silent), require in some persons and tenses a slight orthographic change in the root^ so as to enable the latter to preserve the sound which it takes in the infinitive. FIRST CONJUGATION. Verbs ending in car, gar, and zar. 1. In the first place, they change the c of car into qu before e (see letter (7, page 9) ; as in tocar (toh-karr'), to play: Pres. Subj.^ : toque ^ toques, toque, toquemos, toqueis, toquen. Imperative : toca, toque, toquemos, tocad, toquen. Past Def. : toque,^ tocaste, toco, tocamos, tocasteis, tocaron, instead of toce (toh'-thay), etc., and toce (toh-thay'). Like this are : Aplicar, to apply, Marcar, to mark, etc. etc. 2. In the second instance they change the g of gar into gu before e (see letter G, page 10) ; as mpagar (pah-garr'), to pay : 1 For the termination of the subjunctive present of verbs, see " note," page 63; i. e., When the termination of the infinitive is ar the subjunctive is e. It ha^ been said the imperative, with the exception of the two second per^ sons, is like the subjunctive present. This rule is general for all verbs. a Toh'-kay, toh'-kays, toh'-kay, toh-kay'-mos, etc. . 3 Toh-kay', toh-kahs'-tay, toh-ko', toh-kah'-mos, etc. The termination of the first person singular of the past of verbs of the first conjugation is like the 'partial termination of the subjunctive present with an accent. See re- mark 8, page 58. REGULAR VERBS. 65 Pres. Subj. : pague,^ pagues^ pague, paguemos, pagueis, paguen. Imperative : paga, pague, paguemos, pagad, paguen. Past Def. : pague^ pagaste, pago, pagamos, pagasteis, pagaron, instead of page (pah '-hay), etc., and page (pah-hay'). Like this are : Entregar, to hand, Prorrogar, to extend time, etc. etc. 3. In the third case they change the z of zar into c before the same letter e (see letter Z, page 14) ; as in rezar (ray-thahrr'), to pray : Pres. Subj. : rece^ reces, rece, recemos, receis, recen. Imperative : reza, rece, recemos, rezad, recen. Past Def. : rece* rezaste, rezo, rezamos, rezasteis, rezaron, instead of reze, etc., and rez&, according to the grammatical rule given when treating of the pronunciation of the letter z, page 14. In no case can this letter be written before e or ^. Like this are : Amenazar, to menace, Gozar, to enjoy, etc. etc. SECOND CONJUGATION. Verbs ending in cer and ger. 4. In the first instance they change the c of cer into z before the letters o and a, and this case will be contrary to number 3 ; as in veneer (vayng-thayr'), to vanquish : Pres. Ind. : venzo,^ vences, vence, vencemos, venceis, vencen. Pres. Subj.^ : venza,'^ venzas, venza, venzamos, venzdis, venzan. Imperative ^ : vence, venza, venzamos, venced, venzan, instead of venco (vayng'-koh), and venca (vayng'-kah), vencas (vayng'-kahs), etc. 1 Pah'-gay, pah'-gays, etc. « Pah-gay'. See note 3, page 64. 3 Ray'-thay, ray'-thays, etc. * Ray-thay'. See note ^3, page 64. 5 Vayng'-thoh. « See note 1 on page 64. ' Vayng -thah, vayng'-thas, etc. QQ VERBOS REGULAREa Like this are : Mecer, to swing, Convencer, to convince, etc. etc. 5. In the second ease they change the (/ of ger into ;' before o and a (see letters C and J, pages 9-11) ; as in coger (koh-hairr'), to catch : Pres. Ind. : cojo,^ coges, coge, cogemos, cogeis, cogen. Pres. Subj. : coja,^ cojas, coja, cojamos, cojdis, cojan. Imperative : coge, coja, cojamos, coged, cojan, instead of cogo (koh'-goh), and coga (koh'-gah), cogas (koh'-gas), etc. Like this are : Proteger, to protect, Recoger, to pick up, etc. etc. THIRD CONJUGATION. Verbs ending in cir, gir, guir (u silent), and quir (u silent), 6. In the first case, like verbs ending in cer, number 4, they change the c of cir into z before the endings o and a ; as in zurclr (^Aoor ^-thir'), to darn : Pres. Ind. : zurzo^ ^ zurces, zurce, zurcimos, zurcis, zurcen. Pres. Subj.^ : zurza,^ zurzas, zurza, zurzamos, zurzdis, zurzan. Imperative ^ : zurce, zurza, zurzamos, zurcid, zurzan, instead of zurco (^Aoor'-koh), and zurca (^Aoor'-kah), zurcas (^Aoor'-kahs), etc. Like the model are : Esparcir, to spread, Resareir, to compensate, etc. etc. * Koh -hoh, -hays, -hay, hoh-hay ' -n\oh^, -is, koh'-hayng. 2 Koh'-h.Sih, -has, -ha, koh-hah'-vaoh^, -is, koh'-han (lit., one thousand two hundred), 2,000. Dos mil. 2,003. Dos mil tres.' 10,000. Diez mil. 100,000. Cien« mil. 500,000. auinientos mil. 1,000,000. Un millon (meel- lyong'). 2,000,000. Dosmillones(meel- lyoh'-nays). 1887. Mil ochocientos ochen- ta y siete. 1889. Mil ochocientos ochen- ta y nueve. « Ciento loses its fiDal syllable to (toh) when placed immediately before a noun or adjective; as in cien libros (lee'-bros), one hundred books; cien huenos libros^ one hundred good books. '' It must be noticed that the y (and) is omitted where cero {zero) is the figure before the last ; thus, ciento uno instead of ciento y uno ; ciento dos, ciento tres, etc., instead of ciento y dos^ ciento y tres^ etc. ^ Doscientos^ etc., up to novecientos^ have a feminine form in ow,- viz., dosdentas casas^ two hundred houses ; quinientas personas (pair-soh'-nahs), five hundred persons. » Mil is indeclinable as a numeral ; thus, cien mil, doscientos mil. When used as a noun it has a plural ; as, muchos miles (mee'-lays) de pesos (pay'-sos), many thousands of dollars. 1" Such English expressions as eleven hundred, eighteen hundred^ etc., are rendered in Spanish by one thousand one hundred {mil ciento), one thousand eight hundred {mil ochocientos), etc. 72 lecci(5n quinta. espaKol. * 1. I Que ha ^ estudiado Vd. hoy ? * 2. g Han ^ estudiado Vds. mucho ? 3. Hemos ^ estado muy ocupados, escribiendo la corres- pondencia. ^ 4. J Ha escrito ^ Yd. las cartas en espaiiol ? * 5. No, sefior ; yo ^ he hecho ^ la correspondencia aleuia- na^ y el eorresponsal espanol eseribio la espaiiola. * 6. ^ Hay ^ mucha correspondencia espanola en su casa deYd.? *7. ^Tiene'' Yd.^ relaciones comerciales con paises es- panoles ? * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 1. What has studied you to-day I 2. Have (pi.) studied you much ? 4. Has written you the letters in Spanish ? 5. No, sir, I have made the correspondence German and the corrA.. spondent Spanish wrote the Spanish. 6. Is there much correspondence Spanish in your house of you I 7. Have you relations commercial with countries Spanish ? 1 Ha (ah), he or she has^ you have., is the third person singular, present indicative, of the auxiliary verb haher (ah-bairr'), to have ; he (ay), / have ; hemos (ay'-raos), ive have ; han (ahng'), they have. This verb, when used as an auxiliary, must always be followed by the past participle of the principal verb, as in English. 2 Escrito (ays-kree'-toh), written., is the past participle of the irregular verb escrihir (ays-kree'-beer). This is the only irregularity in this verb. 3 The personal pronoun yo ''yoh) is used in this case as an emphasis, in order to more clearly express the fact of there being two writers. * Hecho (ay'-choh), made., done., is the past participle of the irregular verb hacer lah-thairr'), to malce., to do. FIFTH LESSOxV. 73 pronunciaci6n. 1. ^. ... ah ays-too-deeah'-doh oh'-ee ? 3. iAhng....? 3. Ay'-mos ays-tah'-doh .... oh- koo-pah'-dohs, ays-kree-bee- aing'-doh lah koh-rrays- pohng-dayng'-thie-ah. 4. I Ah ays-kree'-toh .... kahrr'- tas ? 5 ay ay'-choh ah-lay- mah'-nah .... ^ Ah'-ee .... koh-rays-pohng- daing' - thie - ah ays - pah- nyoh'-lah . . . . ? ^ Teeay'-nay .... ray-lah-thie- oh'-nays koh-mair-thie-ah'- lays kohng pah-ee'-says . . . ? TRADUCCION. 1. What have you studied to- day ^ 2. Have you (pi.) studied much ? 3. We have been very busy writing letters. 4. Have you written the Spanish letters 9 5. No, sir, I have attended to the German correspondence^ and the Spanish corre- spondent wrote the Spanish. 6. Is there a large Spanish corre- spondence at your house 9 7. Have you any ^ commercial re- lations with Spanish coun- tries 9 8 In Spanish the noun is placed before the adjective, which must agree in gender and number with the noun it qualifies. « Ha?/ (ah'-ee), there is or there are, is the present indicative of the imper- sonal form of the verb haher (ah-bairr'), to be there. This verb, as ^an im- personal, is only used in the third person singular', there is no plural, and tenses of it are the same as the third person singular of the auxiliary haher (to have), except the indicative present, which instead of being ha (he has) is hay (there is or there are). ' Tiene (teeay'-nay), from tener (tay-nairr'), to have, to possess, to hold, Tengo (taing'-goh), I have ; tenemos (tay-nay'-mos), we have; tienen (teeay'- neng), they have. There are two verbs in Spanish, haber and tener, corre- sponding to the English to have. Tener is the possessive principal verb, and haher the auxiliary, which must always be followed by the past participle of the active verb ; as, he tenido dinero (I have had money). He, first person singular, present indicative, of the auxiliary verb haher ; tenido, past parti- ciple of the active verb tener, to possess, to hold. To be more explicit, tengo un lihro (I have a book) can not be expressed by yo he iin lihro. 8 The words some or any before a noun need not be translated in Spanish. Not any, or no are expressed by no placed before the verb ; as, I have not any coiFee, no tengo cafe (literally, / not have coffee). 74 lecci6n quinta. ESPASfOL. 8. Si ; tenemos ^ negocios con la America del Sur. * 9. Hoy he hecho ef ectiva una letra de Mejico. ^ 10. I Quiere Vd. hacerme ef ectiva esta letra? Necesito ^ dinero americano y no tengo sino espanol. 11. Con mucho gusto, senor ; ^ cuanto desea Vd. ? ■^ 12. ^ Hemos de ^ ir al banco inmediataraente ? * 13. Si, senor ; hemos de ir en seguida, porque los bancos cierran * a las tres. ^ 14. I Cuando ha de enviar Yd. esos efectos ? 15. I He de mandar^ las mercancias inmediatamente ? 16. ^No desea Vd. enviar antes un despacho d su agente ? "^17. Si; he de mandarle^ un telegrama^ al memento, porque necesito salir esta noche.^ * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 9. To-day (1) have made effective (he hecho efectiva) a draft from (of) Mexico. 10. Will you make me effective {hacerme efectiva) this draft ? I need money American and not (I) have but Spanish. 12. Have (we) of to go to the bank immediately ? 13. Yes, sir, we have of to go right away {en seguida), because the banks close at the three (hours [horas] understood). 14. When has of to send you those goods ? 17. Yes ; (I) have of {he de) to send him a telegram at the moment (at once), for that (because) (I) need to leave this night. 1 See note 7 on page 73. ^ gee note 8 on page 73. FIFTH LESSON. 75 PRONUNCIACION. 8 tay-nay'-mos nay-goh'- thie-ohs .... 9. Oh'-ee ay ay'-choh ay-fayk- tee'"Vah .... May'-hee-koh. 10. ^Keeay'-ray .... a-thairr'- may .... ays'-tah lay'-trah ? 11 goos'-toh, say-nyorr'; ^ kwhang'-toh . . . . ? 12. ^ Ay'-mos ing-may-deeah'- tah-maing'-tay ? 13 ay'-mos .... ain-say-gee'- dah .... 14. ^Kwahng'-doh .... ay'-sohs ay-fayk'-tohs 1 15. ^Ay day mahng-dahrr' lahs mayrr'-kahng-thie-ahs . . . .f 16. ^. . . . ahng'-tays oong days- pah'-choh .... ah-haing'- tayf 17 tay-lay-grah'-mah .... TRADUCCION. 8. with Yes, we have business South America, 9. To-day I have cashed a draft from Mexico. 10. Will you cash this draft for me 9 I need some ^ Ameri- can money, and have noth- ing but Spanish, 11. With pleasure, sir; how much do you wish 9 12. Have we to go to the bank im- mediately 9 13. Yes, sir, we must go directly, because the banks close at three o'clock, 14. When have you to send those goods 9 15. Must I send the merchandise 16. DonH you wish to send a dis- patch to your agent first 9 111, Yes, I have to send him a tele- gram at once, because I must leave this evening. 3 Should the verb haber be followed by de^ it will be synonymous with the English to have to, to he obliged to, and it must then precede the infinitive of the principal verb : hemos de (we have to), he de (I have to), etc. * Cierran, they close, from cerrar (thay-rrarr'), which belongs to a certain class of irregular verbs having an e on the syllable before the last. fi Mandar stands equally for to command or to send. « Telegrama is masculine ; see note 3 on page 36. "> Nouns ending in e are for the most part masculine, with some excep- tions; as, noche (no'-chay), night; calle (kahl'-lyay), street; came (kahrr'- nay), meat ; clase (klah'-say), class ; f rase (phra'-say), phrase ; flehre (feeay'- \ir2iy), fever ; leche (lay'-chay), milh; Have (lyah'-vay), key; tarde (tahrr'-day), afternoon ; muerte (moo-ayrr'-tay), death ; parte, place ; hambre (ahm'-bray). hunger ; and some others. Frente (fraing'-tay), forehead, is feminine, but f rente (front), is masculine. Nouns ending in umbre are feminine ; as, lumbre, fire ; pesadumbre, sorrow, etc. 76 lecci6n quinta. ESPASfOL. *18. ^Desearia Vd. hacer sus compras hoy por la ma- nana? * 19. J Que ^ hay que ^ eomprar ? * 20. I Hay que escribir alguna carta d nuestro agente en Sevilla? 21. Ha habido que^ escribir muchas cartas a Boston. * 22. I Cudndo habra ^ vapor correo para Barcelona ? "^23. Hay correo para Espana, los dias cinco/ quince^ y veinticinco * de cada mes. 24. I Que ^ dia del mes es hoy ? * 25. Hoy es el catorce,* de modo que manana sale vapor. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 18. Would like you to make your purchases to-day by the morning f 19. What is there that (to) buy! 20. Is there that (to) write any letter to our agent in Seville ? 22. When will there be (habrd) steamer mail for Barcelona ? 23. There is {hay) mail for Spain the days five, fifteen, and twenty- five of each month. 25. To-day is the fourteen, so that {de modo que, of manner that) to-morrow leaves the steamer. 1 The relative pronouns iqm? (kay') what? iquUn? (kee-aing') who? and / cudl ? which ? are accented when used in interrogations or exclamations ; FIFTH LESSON. 77 pronunciaci6n. 18. I,. . . . ah-thairr' .... kom'- prahs . . . . ? 19. I, Kay ah'-ee kay . . . . ? 20. I ... . nways'-troh .... say- veel'-lyah ? 21. . . . . ah-bee'-doh .... moo'- chahs karr'-tahs ah ... . 22. ^ ah-brah' vah-pohrr' koh- rray'-oh .... Bahr-thay-loh'- naM 23 dee'-ash thing' -koh, king'- thay .... vay' - ing - tee- thing'-koh .... mays'. 24. ^ . . . . dee' -ah dell mays' ays' oh'-ee? 25 kah-tohr'-thay, day moh'- doh kay .... traducci6n. 18. Would you like to make your purchases this morning 9 19. What is there to buy 9 20. Is there any letter to write to our agent in Seville 9 21. It has been necessary to write many letters to Boston. 22. When will there be a mail' steamer for Barcelona 9 23. There is a mail for Spain on the 5th, 16th, and 25th of each month, 24. What day of the month is it to-day 9 25. To-day is the llfth, so that the steamer leaves to-morrow. as, s Que tiene Vd. ? What have you ? / Que feUcidad ! (fay-lee-thie-dath'), What happiness ! / Que bonito I (boh-nee'-toh), How pretty ! / Quien llama f Who knocks ? i Cual desea Vd. f Which one do you wish ? '^ Hay que (it is necessary), is the present of the impersonal verb haber que. Haber, as impersonal, means there to be ; and if followed by que, it is idiomat- ically rendered by to be necessary, synonymous with ser necesario. 3 4Habraf (ah-brah'), will there bef is the future of the impersonal verb haher (there to be). * For the days of the month the cardinal numbers are used instead of the ordinal in Spanish. Primero (pree-may'-roh), first, is the only exception ; viz., hoy ea el primero de mayo, to-day is the first of May. The second, third, etc., are named el dos, el tree, etc., the two, the three, etc. 78 lecci6n sexta. LECCI6N SEXTA.1 Nuevo Vocabulario. Objetos de escritorio (ob-hay'-tohs day ays- ^ kree-toh'-ree-oh) l stationery. Papeleria (pah-pay-lay-ree'-ah) . . . ; Papel (pah-pail') Maquinaria (mah-kee-nah'-ree-ah) . La edad (ay-dath') . Algo (ahl'-goh) Cumplira (koom-plee-ra') .... Puede (pway'-day) El sueno (sway'-nyoh) • the El hambre (ahm'-bray) the hunger. La sed (sayth) the thirst. Ganas de (gah'-nahs day) mind to.^ Bondad (bong-dath') kindness. Doble (doh'-blay) double. El invierno (ing-vee-ayrr'-noh) . . . .the winter. El verano (vay-rah'-no) the summer. Palabras. — Division del Tiempo^^ — Meses del Ano,^ paper, machinery, the age. something, will accomplisho may. Enero (ay-nay'-roh) . Febrero (fay-bray'-roh) . Marzo (marr'-thoh) . Abril (ah-breel') Mayo (mah'-yoh) Junio (hoo'-neeoh) . Julio (hoo'-leeoh) Agosto (ah-gohs'-toh) Setiembre (say-teeaim'-bray) Octubre (ok-too'-bray) Noviembre (no-veeaim'-bray) Diciembre (dee- thie-aim' -bray) January. February. March. April. May. June. July. September. October. November. December. * Says'-tah, sixth lesson, » A desire to do something. 8 Dee-vee-see-ong' dell tee-aim'-poh, division of time, ♦ May'-says dell ah'-nyoh, months of the year. SIXTH LESSON. 79 TJn siglo (see'-gloh) . Un aflo (ah'-nyoh) Un mes (mays') . Una semana^ (say-mah'-nah) Un dia (dee' -ah) Una hora (oh'- rah) . Un minuto (mee-noo'-toh) Un segundo (say-goong'-doh) Hoy (oh'-ee) Ayer (ah-yairr') . Manana (mah-nyah'-nah) . Antes de ayer^ (ahng'-tays day ah-yayrr') Pasado manana ^ (pah-sah'-doh . . . . ) El ano que viene "^ (ell ah'-nyoh . . . . ) El ano pr6ximo (ell ah'-nyoh prok'-see- El ano pasado ^ ( . . . . pah-sah'-doh) El mes que viene or pr6ximo El mes pasado La semana que viene or pr6xima La semana pasada .... Una quincena^ (oo'-nah king-thay'-nal El principio (pring-thie-pee-oh) El medio (may'-dee-oh) El fin (fing) del afi.0 (pring-thie-pee ah) A principios'' ....). A mediados"^ ....). A fines ' de la semana (fee'-nays . . . . ) del mes (may-deeah' a century, a year, a month, a week. a day. a7i hour, a minute, a second, to-day. moh) ■ohs dos . to-morrow. . day before yesterday, . day after to-morrow, >■ next year. . last year. . next month, . last month. . next week. . last week. . a fortnight. . the beginning. . the middle. . the end. (^ at about the begin- S ning of the year. ) at about the middle S of the month. { at about the erid of i the week. 1 From the Latm septimdna, or in Spanish, siete mananas (seven moms), the space of seven days. 2 Antes de ayer^ lit., before of yesterday. 8 Pasado manana, lit., past to-morrow. * El ano que viene, lit., the year that comes. « 5 El ano pasado, lit., the year past. ^ Quincena, space of fifteen days (from quince^ fifteen). Spaniards say ocho dias, eight days, or una semana, for a week; una quincena for a fortnight. ^ A principios, a mediados, a fines, plurals respectively of principio, mediado, and fin, mean more or less, about, the beginning, the middle, or the end. Mediado, from mediar, to come to, to be at the middle of a thing. 80 lecci6n sexta, ESPA^OL. * 1. i Que clase de negocios tiene ^ Vd. ? ^2. I Tiene Yd. negocios en maquinaria ? *3. No, seiior; vendo libros j objetos de escritorio (papeleria). ^ 4. I Que tienen Vds. que '^ comprar ? 5. I Desean Yds. algun papel ? *6. No, senor; pero tenemos que^ comprar algunos (unos) implementos de agricultura. 7. I No tiene Yd. que comprar algunos (unos) muebles ? ^ 8. ^ Cudntos anos ha estado ^ Yd. establecido aqui ? ^ 9. g Cuantos anos tiene * Yd. ? (g Que edad tiene ' Yd. ?) * 10. Tengo ^ ^ treinta anos, pero en marzo proximo tendre ^ * treinta y uno. * 11. g Que edad tiene su hermano de Yd. ? * TRADUCCION LITERAL.* 1. What class of business has you f 2. Has you business in machinery ? 3. No, sir, (I) sell books and objects of office (stationery). 4. What has you (pi.) that to buy ? 6. No, sir, but (we) have that (to) buy some implements of agri" culture. 8. How many years has been you established here ? 9. How many years has you ? (What age has you ?) 10. (I) have thirty years, but in March next I shall have thirty and one. 11. What age has your brother of you? SIXTH LESSON. 81 PRONUNCIACION. TRADUCCION. 1. i Kay klah'-say .... nay-goh'- 1. What is your line of business 9 thie-os teeay'-nay . . . . ? 2. i Teeay'-nay .... mah-kee- 2. Do you deal in machinery ? nah'-ree-ah I 3 lee'-bros ee ob-hay'-tos 3. No, sir, I sell hooks and sta- day ays-kree-toh'-ree-oh. tionery, 4. i . . . . teeay'-naing .... kom- 4. What have you (pi.) to buy 9 prarr' ? 5. i . . . . ahl-goong' , , . A 5. Do you require (pi.) some paper 9 6 tay-nay'-mos .... ahl- 6. No, sir ; but we must buy some goo'-nos (oo'-nohs) im-play- agricultural implements. maing'-tohs .... ah-gree- kool-too'-rah. 7. i . . . . mway'-blays I 7. Have you not to buy some fur- niture f 8. % Kwahng'-tohs .... ays-tah'- 8. How long have you been estab- doh .... ays-tah-blay-thie- lished here 9 doh ? 9. i . . . . ay-dath' .... I 9. How old are^ you 9 ( What is your age 9) 10 tray'-ing-tah .... 10. Jam* thirty years old, but next March I shall be thirty-one, 11. 4. . . . ay-dath' . . . . f 11. How old is your brother 9 1 Tiene (teeay'-nay), Aaw, is the third person singular, present indicative, of tener (tay-nairr'), to have. Tengo (taing'-go), / have ; tenemos (tay-nay'- mos), we have ; tieri^n (teeay'-naing), they have. a Tienen Vds. que, from tener que, to have to, to be obliged to. When tener is followed by que it must precede the infinitive of the principal verb, and, like haber de, means necessity or obligation to do something in particu- lar. The present of the indicative is conjugated thus : tengo que, I have to ; tiene que, he has to ; tenemos que, we have to ; tienen que, they have to. 8 Estado (ays-tah'-doh), been, past participle of estar (ays-tahrr'), to be, * To he is rendered by tener when referring to age. * Tendre (taing-dray'), / shall Aa^e,. future of tener. Tendrdj he will have ; tendremos, we shall have ; tendran, they will have. * Trah-dook-thie-ong* lee-tay-rahl', literal translation. 82 LECCldN SEXTA. ESPASfOL. *12. Mi hermano es mayor ^; pasado manana cumplird^ treinta y tres anos. * 13. I Que edad puede ^ tener su Sr.^ padre de Vd. ? * 14. I Ha tenido Vd. notieias de su Sr.* hermano de Vd.? * 15. ^ Quien le lia dado ^ a Vd. esa noticia ? ^16. ^Quetiene Vd.«? ^ IT. I Tiene ^ Vd. algo '^ (alguna cosa) ? *18. 5 Tiene Vd. sueiio^? * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 12. My brother is larger ; past to-morrow will complete thirty and three years. 13. What age may (to) have your Sir father of you ? 14. Has you had news of your Sir brother of you ? 15. Who to you (le) has given to you that news ? 16. What has you ? 17. Has you something (anything)? 18. Has you sleep ? 1 Mayor (mah-yohrr'), larger^ is the comparative of the adjective rjrande (grahng'-day), large. The following four adjectives are compared irregularly : Adjectives. Comparatives. Superlatives. Grande^ large ; mayor (mah-yohrr';, larger; el^ la,, lo mayor,, the largest. Pequeno,, small; menor (may-nohrr'), smaller; el,, la, lo menor,, the smallest. Bueno,, good; mejor (may-Lohrr'), better; el,, la,, lo mejor,, the best. Malo,, bad ; 'peor (pay-ohrr'), worse ; el,, la,, lo peor,, the worst. For the comparison of the adverbs,, see note 1 on page 48. It has been said that bueno and malo drop the o before a singular mascu- line noun ; and that grande, when implying good quality (great, grand, etc.), also loses the last syllable de,, becoming gran (grahng), before a singular noun, masculine or feminine (see note 3 on page 44). Mayor means also older, as in this case, and menor,, younger. El or la mayor (the largest), means also the eldest, and el or la menor (the smallest), the youngest. SIXTH LESSON. 83 PRONUNCIACION. TRADUCCION. 13 mah-yohrr' .... koora- 12. 3Iy brother is older ; the day plee-rah' tray' - ing - tah ee after to-morrow he will he trais' .... thirty -three years old. 13. ^ . . . . ay-dath' pooay'-day tay- 13. How old may your father he 9 nairr' . . , A 14. ^ . . . . no-tee' -thie-ahs ....'? 14. Have you had news from your brother 9 15. I Kee-aing' . . . . ? 15. Who informed you of that 9 16 16. What is the matter with you 9 17. ^ . . . ahl'-goh (ahl-goo'-nah . . .)? 17. Is anything the matter with you 9 18. ^ . . . . sway'-nyoh ? 18. Are you sleepy 9 3 Cumplira (koom- plee-rah'), future of the verb cumplir (koom-plirr'), to complete^ is used idiomatically in reference to age, to designate the exact number of years of a person. Cumpleanos (koom'-play-ah'-nyohs), birthday. Example : Manana es mi cumpleanos^ or manana cumplo anos^ to-morrow is my birthday. 3 Puedo (may, can), is the first person singular, indicative present ; puede^ third person ; podemos^ first plural ; pueden^ third plural. The infinitive is poder (can, to be able), an irregular verb. * As a form of politeness, the Spaniards say, su Sr. (senor) padre^ su Sr. hermano^ su Sra. (senora) madre, etc. s Dado^ from dar (dahrr), to give, has many idiomatic renderings ; as, dar una noticia^ to give information ; dar la mano^ to shake hands ; dar ra- cuerdos (ray-kwayrr'-dos), to be remembered ; dar la enhorahuena (ay-noh'- rah-bway'-nah), to congratulate; dar los buenos dias, to say good-day; dar la hora el reloj (ray-loh'-A, this last h must be aspirated, see " Table of Sounds"), to strike the hour. « Tener (to have) is used instead of to he in English, when relating to desire or personal necessities, as with Jiambre^ sueno^ sed^ etc. '' Algo (ahl'-goh), something^ is synonymous with alguna cosa (ahl-goo'- nah koh'-sah), and may be used in Spanish to imply either a question or statement; as, 4 hay algo de nuevof is there anything new? (lit., is there sometliiny ofnewf)\ tengo algo que decir d Vd., I have something to tell you. JVada (nothing, not anything), contrary to algo ; as, agid no hay nada^ there is nothing here ; 4 no hay nada de nuevof is there not anything new (nothing of new)? no tengo nada que decirle a Vd.^ I have nothing to tell you; 4 no tiene Vd. nada que hacer? haven't you anything to do? 84 LBCCI(3N sexta. ESPASfOL. ^ 19. No ; pero ^ tengo hambre ^ y sed,^ tengo ganas de comer. * 20. No tengo nada. * 21. Mi hermano tiene dolor de cabeza. * 22. I Tendria Vd. la bondad ^ ^ de acompaiiamos ^ a la tienda espanola ? *23. Tenga^ Yd. la bondad de deeirme'^ en^ donde ha comprado^ esos zapatos. * 24. I Quiere Vd. comprar zapatos de una 6 de doble suela ? *25. Desearia un par de (unos) zapatos ^^ de una suela para el verano, y unas (un par de) botas de doble suelas para el invierno. * traducci6n literal. 19. No, but (I) have hunger and thirst, (I) have a mind (to) eat, 20. Not (I) have nothing. 21. My brother has pain of head. 22. Would have you the kindness of to accompany us to the store Spanish ? 23. Have you the kindness of to tell me in where has bought you those shoes. 24. Will you buy shoes of one or of double sole ? 25. (I) would like a pair of (some) shoes of one sole for the summer and some (a pair of) boots of double sole for the winter. 1 Pero (pay'-roh), hut. When the sentence is preceded by a nega- tive clause, no verb being expressed after but, the word sino is used instead of pero ; viz., no tengo hambre sino sed, I am not hungry but thirsty. 2 Hambre (ahm'-bray), hunger, is feminine (see, note 7, page 75). All feminine nouns beginning with a long a or ha take the masculine article el instead of the feminine la for the sake of euphony ; as, el agua, el hambre, SIXTH LESSON. 85 PRONUNCIACION. 19. .... ahm'-bray ee sayth' .... gah'-nahs .... 20 nah'-dah .... 21. .... doh-lohrr' day kah-bay'- thah. 22. i Taing-dree'-ah .... bong- dath' day ah - kohm - pah- • nyahrr'-nohs . . . . ? 23. Taing'-gah .... bohng-dahth' day day-thie-rr'-may .... thah ^<^-pah'-tohs. 24. ^ . . . . doh'-blay sway'-lah ? 25 pahrr .... vay-rah'-no .... ing-vee-airr'-no. TRADUCCION, 19. iVb, hut I am hungry and thirsty ; I wish to eat, 20. Nothing is the matter with me. 21. My brother has a headache, 22. Would you have the kindness to accompany us to the Spa?iish store 9 23. Rave the hindness to tell me where you have bought those shoes, 24. Do you wish to buy shoes with a single or a double sole 9 25. I should like a pair of shoes with a single sole for the summer and some boots with double soles for the winter. el haclia (ah'-chah), (the hatchet), instead of la agua^ la Tiamhre^ la Tmcha, In the plural the feminine article is used, as las aguas^ las hachas^ etc. 3 Nouns ending in d are feminine with the exception of el sud (sooth), the south; el huesped (ways'-payth), the guest, and a few others. Sud or sur, both south, are equally correct. * JBondad is feminine, and, like favor (see note 4, page 35), must be followed by the preposition de, the verb following in the infinitive present, instead of the present participle, as in English. 6 It has already been explained that the infinitive and imperative of verbs form only one word with the pronouns which are placed after them. « Tenga (taing'-gah), have, is the imperative third person singular of the verb tener. f There is only one verb in Spanish, decir (day-thie-rr'), for the English to say or to tell. 8 :En (in), before the adverb of place donde (where), means within, inside of, while if it denotes motion it should be expressed by a donde (where to), de donde (where from) ; as, / a donde va Vd. ? where are you going to ? ide donde viene (veeay'-nay) Vd. ? where do you come from ? etc. » The Vd. is omitted after comprado to avoid the repetition of the pronoun which is already mentioned after tenga. 10 See pronunciation table. 86 LECCIOX SEPTIMA. LECCI6N s:eptima.i JVieevo Vocabulario. Son (song). En, punto (poong'-toh) . Mas que (sino) Todavia (toh'-dah-vee'-ah) Ya (yah') .... Dar la hora Acabar de (ah-kah-barr') Andar (ahng-darr') . Adelanta (ah-day-lang'-tah) Atrasa (ah-trah'-sah) Por el contrario (kong-trah'-ree-ol Parado (pah-rah'-doh) Descompuesto (days-kom-pways'-toh) Dar cuerda Sucio (soo'-thie-oh) . liimpiar (lim-pee-ahrr') . Se llama (lyah'-mah) Muelle (mwayl'-lyay) Hasta (ahs'-tah) Adi6s (ah-dee-ohs') . h) 2 . they are, exactly, but. yet. already. to strike the time, to have just, to walk, runs fast, loses time, on the contrary, stopped, out of order, to wind, dirty, to cleayi. his name is, watch-spring, till, mitil. good-by. JVumeros Ordlnales, |o3 ;[8 3 primero,* -ra* (pree-may'-roh, -rah 2o 2* Segundo, -da (say-goong'-doh, -dah) 30 3a Tercero,'* -ra (tair-thay'-roh, -rah) 40 4a Cuarto, -ta (kwahr'-toh, -tah) 50 5a Q,uinto, -ta (king'-toh, -tah) 6® 6* Sexto, -ta (says' -toh, -tah) . 1° 7» Septimo, -ma (sayp'-tee-raoh, -mah) 8° 8^ Octavo, -va (ohk-tah'-voh, -vah) . 90 9* Noveno, -na, or nono, -na (no-vay'-noh, -nah) 10° 10* Decimo, -ma (day'-thie-moh, -mah) 1st 2d 3d 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 1 Sayp'-tee-mah, seventh lesson. ' Noo'-raay-rohs orr-dee-nah'-lays, ordinal numbers. These are not used So much as m English, the cardinal numbers being employed in their stead. SEVENTH LESSON. 87 11© 3 ii&s XJndecimo, -ma^ (oong-day'-thie-moh, -mah) . . 11th 12® 12* Duodecimo, -ma (dwoh-day'-thie-raoh, -mah) . . 12th 130 13» D6cimotercio, -cia (day'-thie-moh-tair'-thie-oh, -ah) . 13th 14" 14» Decimocuarto, -ta (day'-thie-moh-kwahr'-toh, -tah) . 14th 150 15* D^cimoquinto, -ta (day'-thie-moh-king'-toh, -tah) . 15th IQo iQa, Decimosexto, -ta (day'-thie-moh-ses'-toh, -tah) . . 16th 170 17a Decimoseptimo, -ma (day'-thie-moh-sayp'-tee-moh) . 17th IS** 18» Decim.octavo, -va (day'-thie-mohk-tah'-voh, -vah) . 18th 19° 19» Decimonono, -na, or decim-onoveno, -na . . 19th 20<» 20* Vigesim.0, -m.a (vee-hay'-see-moh, -mah) . . . 20th 210 21* Vigesimo primero, -ra, etc 21st SO*' 30* Trigesimo, -m.a, etc. (tree-hay'-see-moh, -mah) . . 30th 40o 40* Cuadragesim.0, -mta, etc. (kwah-drah-hay'-see-moh) . 40th 50° 50* duincuagesimo, -ma, etc. (king-kwah-hay'-see-moh) . 50th 60<> 60* Sexag6sim.o, -m.a, etc. (sayk-sah-hay'-see-moh, -mah) 60th 70° 70* Septuagesim.0, -ma, etc. (sayp-twah-hay'-see-moh, -mah) 70th 80« 80* Octog6sim.o, -m.a, etc. (ohk-tah-hay'-see-moh, -mah) . 80th 90® 90* Nonagesim.0, -m.a, etc. (noh'-nah-hay'-see-moh, -mah) 90th 100<* 100* Ceiitesim.0, -ma, etc. (thaing-tay'-see-moh, -mah) . 100th 200° 200* Ducentesim.0, -ma, etc. (doo-thaing-tay'-see-moh) . 200th 3OO0 300* Tricent^simo, -ma,,etc. (tray-thaing-tay'-see-moh) . 300th 400« 400* Cuadragentesimo, -m.a (kwah-drah-haing- . . . .) . 400th 500° 500* duingentesimo, -ma, etc. (king-haing- ....). . 500th 600® 600* Sexcentesimo, -ma (says-thaing-tay'-see-moh, -mah) 600th 700° 700* Septegentesimo, -ma (sayp-tay-haing-tay'-see-moh) 700th 800'> 800* Octogentesimo, -ma (ohk-toh-haing-tay'-see-moh) '. 800th 900° 900* Nonagentesimo, -ma (no-nah-haing-tay'-see-moh) . 900th 1,000° 1,000* Milesimo, -ma, etc. (mee-lay'-see-moh, -mah) 1,000th 10,000° 10,000* Diezmilesimo, -ma, etc 10,000th 1,000,000° 1,000,000* Millonesimo, -ma, etc. . . . 1,000,000th TJltimo, -m.a, or postrero,* -ra (pohs-tray'-roh, -rah) . . last Spaniards very rarely use ordinal numbers beyond mgesimo (20th), and up to tills figure they should be carefully studied. The rest, however, is printed only as a reference. For the days of the month, the cardinal numbers are always used except in the case oi first and last^ when they use primero and ultimo. 3 These two columns are masculine and feminine abbreviations. * The change of termination from to a forms the feminine ; as, primera casa^ duodecima Uccibn^ etc. Primero., as well as tercero (third), and postrero (last), drop the final before a singular masculine noun (see note 4 on page 20). 88 LECCI6n Sl^PTIMA. ESPASfOL. *1. Dispenseme ^ Yd., sefior; ^puede^ Vd. decirme que hora es ' ? * 2. Si, senor ; son ^ las dos y * cuarenta y cinco minutos. * 3. ^ No son mds que ^ las tres menos * cuarto todavia^ ? *4. ^Ha dado' ya^ la una^? * 5. ^No ha oido Yd. dar' la hora? * 6. Acaban de dar ^ las cuatro y media. * 7. g Anda ^ bien su reloj ^^ de Yd. ? Creo que adelanta ^^ cinco minutos. * 8. Por el contrario, mi reloj ^^ atrasa ^^ un cuarto de hora. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 1. Excuse me you, sir ; is able you to tell me what hour is (it) ? 2. Yes, sir, are the two (hour understood) and forty-five minutes. 3. Not are more than (but) the three (hour understood) less quar- ter yet I 4. Has given already the one (hour understood) I 5. Not has heard you to give the hour ? 6. (They) finish of to give (just given) the four and half. 7. Walks well your clock (watch) of you ? I believe that advances five minutes. 8. For the contrary, my watch retards a quarter of hour. » There are many expressions in Spanish, as in English, -which signify the same thing, and synonymous words in common use are given in different sentences, so that the pupil may become acquainted with all of them ; as, dispenseme^ excuseme, perdoneme. Dispenseme^ from dispensar (dis-paing- sahrr'), to excuse^ imperative mood, third person. To excuse may also be translated by excusar (ays-koo-sahrr') and perdonar (payrr-doh-nahrr'), to pardon^ but dispensar is most frequently used. ^ See note 3 on page 83. 8 Ser is used in Spanish as in English, referring to time. As it has been said, it is not translated. All the hours except una (one) are plural, and the verb must therefore be also in plural to agree with them. When inquiring the time, the verb must always be used in the singular, viz. : 4 Qm hora esf what time is it ? Son las dos, tres^ etc. SEVENTH LESSON. ' 89 PRONUNCIACION. TRADUCCION. 1. Dis-paing'-say-may . . . jpway- 1. Excuse me; sir; can you tell day , . . . ? me what time it is f 2 song .... mee-noo'-tohs. 2. Pes, sir ; it is forty-five min- utes past two, 3 may - nos kwahr' - toh 3. Is it not yet more than a qnar- toh'-dah-vee'-ah. ter to three 9 4. i . . . . yah . . . . ? 4. Has one o'clock struck already 9 5. ^ . . . . oh-ee'-doh . . . . ? 5. Have you not heard the clock strike 9 6. Ah-kah'-bahng .... kwah'- 6. It has just struck half-past troh ee may'-dee-ah. four. 7. I Ahng-dah .... ray-lo'-^ ^®. . . . 7. Does your watch go well 9 I think it is five minutes fast, 8 kong-trah'-ree-oh mee 8. On the contrary, my watch is T&j-lo'-h ah-trah'-sah .... a quarter of an hour slow, * Y (and) in this case is used, as after is employed in English, to denote some time past the hour ; and menos (less) is similarly used as before, to de- note some time before the hour. The hour number is always mentioned first, and Tiora (hour) is understood. 6 Que (than) before numerals becomes de ; in this case, however, 7nds que is synonymous with sino (but) (see note 1 on page 84); viz., no tengo mas que {sino) un libro (I have but one book). « Todavia (yet) must be used only in negative sentences ; while ya (already) is used in affirmative or interrogative sentences not implying a negation. '' See note 5, page 83. 8 Aeaban de dar (lit., they finish of to give), they have just struck. Acabar de (to have just) must be always followed by the infinitive of the verb; as, acabo de escribir una carta, I have just finished writing a letter. » Andar (to walk, to go) is used when referring to the movement of a watch or clock ; it expresses simply the idea of movement. Ir (to go) deter- mines the action of a person going. 10 Eeloj (ray-lo'-A, giving the h the sound of cA, as loch, Scotch) signifies tvatch or clock, and each is distinguished by expressing its kind ; as, for in- stance, relqj de bolsillo (pocket-watch), reloj de chimenea (clock of mantel), relqj de pared (pah-rayth') (clock of wall). Reloj, like all nouns ending in j, is masculine. " Adelanta, from adelantar (to advance), used in connection with clocks and watches, is synonymous with the English to gain, Atrasa, from atrasar (to go back or retard), signifies to be slow. 90 lecci6n septima. ESPASfOL. *9. Creo que esta parado ; esta descorapnesto ^ y es necesario mandarlo a casa del relojero (relojeria).^ * 10. J Le ha dado ^ Vd. cuerda ? ^11. Si ; pero esta * sucio y hay que ^ (es necesario) lim- piarlo. ^ 12. I Doride hay un relojero bueno ^ y barato ? *13. En la calle Catorce' numero cuarenta y cinco al oeste. * 14. I Como se llama ^ (cudl es el nombre de) el relojero ? *15. Se llama ^ (su nombre es) Ceballos. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 9. (I) think that is stopped, is out of order {descompuesto), and is necessary to send it to (the) house of the watch-maker. 10. To him (le) has given you cord ? 11. Yes ; but is dirty, and there is that (hay que) (it is necessary) to clean it. 12. Where is there a watch-maker good and cheap 1 13. In the street fourteen, number forty and five to the west. 14. How himself calls (which is the name of) the watch-maker? 15. Himself calls (his name is) Ceballos. 1 Descompuesto (days-kohm-pways'-toh), out of order^ is the past parti- ciple of the irregular verb descomponer (days-kohm-poh-nairr'), to get out of order ; a compound word of the verb componer (to mend, to repair), and the preposition des^ from the Latin dis^ never used in Spanish- except in com- pound words to signify negation, just as in English. 3 Either relojeria or casa del relojero may be correctly used. 8 Dar cuerda a un reloj (lit. , to give cord to a watcli) signifies to wind a watch. 4 Esta (is), from estar (to be), third person siogular, indicative present. In Spanish there are two verbs, ser and estar^ for the English verb to he^ but these two can not be used indiscriminately. Ser is correctly translated by to be^ and is used when the attribute is inherent or essential to the subject. SEVENTH LESSON. 91 PRONUNCIACION. TRADUCCION. 9 ays-tah' pah-rah'-doh .... 9. / think it is stopped ; it is out days-kohm-pways'-toh .... of order, and must he sent nay-thay-sah'-ree-oh .... to the watch-makers, ray-loh-hay'-roh. 10. ^ . . . . kwayrr'-dah ? 10. Have you wound it up P 11 soo'-thie-oh .... lim-pee- 11. Yes, hut it is dirty and must ahrr'-loh. be cleaned. 12 12. Where is a good and cheap watch-maker 9 13 kahl'-lyay .... oh-ays'- 13. At No. 45 West Fourteenth tay. Street, 14. ^ . . . . lyah'-mah . . , . ? 14. What is the name of the watch- maker f 15 Thay-bahlMyos .... 15. His name is Cehallos, or, explained in a more practical way, it answers to the questions what? tuhat of? what for? whom for? and whose? Examples: el es alto, he is tall; mi relqj es de oro, my watch is of gold ; los pies son para andar, the feet are for walking; este sombrero es para Vd., this hat is for you; el lihro es mio, the book is mine, etc. Estar has some distant connection with to remain, to stay, and is used where the state or condition of the subject is accidental or transitory. Estar is the auxiliary to the present participle of verbs, and an- swers to the question of how? and where? as, es^oy (ays-toh'-ee) lien, I am well ; el lihro esta sobre la mesa, the book is on the table ; Juan esta escri- hiendo, John is writing, etc. For a more extended explanation, see remarks upon the use of these two verbs, Second Part. 6 Hay que (see note 2 on page T7) is synonymous with es necesario, it is necessary. « See note 2 on page 44. 7 In naming numbers of streets, Spaniards use the cardinals instead of the ordinals, Catorce, instead of Decimocuarta in this case. Calle is feminine. 8 Se llama^ from llamarse (lit., to call one's self), to he named, is a reflexive verb, in the conjugation of which the pronouns me, myself; se, himself, her- self, or yourself; nos, ourselves ; and se, also themselves or yourselves — must precede the verb except in the infinitive and imperative, where they are affixed to the verb, forming only one word ; as, llamarse, llamdndose, lldmese. Se becomes si after a preposition ; as, a si, to one's self, to himself. The preposition con (with) is prefixed to it, adding go ; as, co7imigo {con-mi-go), with myself; contigo {con-ti-go), with thyself; and consigo {con-si-go)^ with one's self, or with himself (see note 6 on page 35). 92 lecci6n s^ptima. ESPASfOL. 16. El niimero cuarenta y cinco estd cerca de la Sexta avenida g no es verdad ? lY. S15 senor ; esta entre las avenidas Quinta y Sexta. 18. ^Estd el Sor. (seiior) Ceballos en easa? 19. Servidor de Yd} i que desea Yd. ? 20. Un amigo mio me ha dado su direccion ; i me haria^ Yd. el favor de componerme ^ este reloj ? 21. Si, Sr. (seiior) ; pero debo examinarlo. ^22. gCuando lo tendra Yd. compnesto? gCudnto me lie vara * Yd. por la compostura ? * 23. Lo tendra Yd. compuesto dentro de ^ tres dias y le costard tres pesos. 24. I No puede Yd. liacerlo mds barato ? 25. No, Sr. (seiior), no pnedo ; tiene roto ^ un muelle ' que ^ es necesario poner nuevo. * 26. Bueno ^ pues ; buenas tardes ; basta el jueves. 27. Adios, senor. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 22. When it will have you repaired! Bow much (cudnto) to me will carry you for the repair ? 23. It will have you repaired inside of three days, and to you will cost three dollars. 26. Good then (bueno pues) ; good-afternoon ; until the Thursday. 1 People wishing to he polite, either in social or husiness life, will answer by servidor de Vd. (your servant), instead of the English, that is my name. 2 Haria (ah-ree'-ah), would do^ from hacer (ah-thairr'), to do. 8 Componer (kohm-poh-nairr') means to mend, to repair, and arreglar (ah-rray-glarr'), to arrange, to fix. * Llevar (lyay-vahrr'), to carry, is used idiomatically for to charge (price). SEVENTH LESSON. 93 PRONUNCIACION. TRADUCCIONo 16 thairr'-kah .... says'-tah 16. No. 45 is near Sixth Avenue, ah-vay-nee'-dah .... is it not f 17 king'-tah .... 17. Fes, sir ; it is between Fifth and Sixth Avenues. 18 say-nyorr' .... 18. /s Mr. Geballos at home 9 19. Sayrr-vee-dorr' .... 19. J.^ your service^ sir ; what do you wish 9 20 dee-raik-thie-ohng' .... 20. J. friend of mine has given me j, ah-ree'-ah .... ray-lo'-/i? your address. Would you please repair this watch for me 9 21 ayk-sah-raee-nahrr'-loh. 21. Yes, sir; but I must examine it, 22. ^ . . . . kom-pways'-toh ? ^ . . . . 22. When will you have it re- lyay-vah-ra' .... kom-pohs- paired 9 What will yoii too'-rah ? charge me to repair it 9 23 kom-pways'-toh daing'- 23. You will have it repaired troh .... pay'-sos. within three days, and it will cost you three dollars. 24 24. Can you not do it cheaper 9 25 mwayl'-lyay .... poh- 25. No, sir, I can not ; it has a nairr' nway'-voh. broken spring, and a new one must be put in, 26. .... pways' .... ahs'-tah ell 26. Very well ; good-afternoon, till hway'-vays. Thursday. 27. Ah-dee-ohs'^ say-nyorr'. 27. Oood-by, sir. 6 Dentro de (lit., inside of), within. « Roto (broken) is the past participle of romper (rohm-pairr'), to IreaJc. 7 Muelle means a spring of metal ; spring-water is manantial (mah-nahng- tee-ahl') ; and Spring, the season of the year, is primavera (pree-mah-vay'- cah). Muelle means also in Spanish pier. 8 The relative pronoun que is invariable both in gender and number. It refers to persons or things only when placed immediately after the noun to which it refers, and is used instead of the English icho, whom, which, what, that. The relatives can never be omitted in Spanish. Que alone or with prepositions is rendered by what or which., but when referring to persons is replaced by quien or quienes, « Bueno (good), as well as lien (well), are both exclamations in Spanish j ^vdl then! is rendered by /iueno pues! or /Men puea! 94 lecci6n octava. LECC16N octava;^ N'uevo Vocabulario. Para servir k Vd. (sair-veerr') . . , at your service. Solo, solamente (soh'-lah-maing'-tay) . . only. Asuntos (ah-soong'-tohs) affairs. ■ hab- ia. ellas, [• hab-ian. Vd, ) Vds., ) 1 . . . . ah-ook-see-leeah'-rays, auxiliary verbs. 2 Ab-bairr' .... tay-nairr'. » Sairr' .... ays-tahrr'. 4 The gerundio is also called in Spanish participio presente (pahr-tee- thie-peeoh pray-saing'-tay). ^ Ay, ahs, ah, ay'-mohs, ah-bay'-is, almg. AUXILIARY VERBS. 103 PASADO DEFINIDO (PAST DEFINITE). Singular. Plural. Yo hube,» I had, etc. Nosotros hubimos,* We had, etc. tu hubiste, vosotros hubisteis, el, ) ellos, \ ella, y hubo. ellas, |- hubieron. Vd., ) Vds., ) FUTURO (future). Yo habre,2 I shall have, Nosotros habremos,2 We shall tu habras, etc. vosotros habreis, have, etc. el, ) ellos, \ ellas, I habr&n. Vds., ) ella, V habra. Vd., ) FUTURO CONDICIONAL (conditional future). Yo habria,^ I should or would Nosotros habriamos,* We should in habrias, have, etc. vosotros habriais, or would el, ^ ellos, \ have, etc. ella, [• habria. ellas, I habrian. Vd., ) Vds., ) MODO SUBJUNTIVO. presente (present). §we yo haya,^ That I may Que nosotros hayamos,* That we que tii hayas, have, etc. que vosotros hayais, may have, ( ^1' ) ( ellos, \ etc. que \ ella, \ haya. que } ellas, [■ hayan. ( Vd., ) ( Vds., ) imperfecto, primera forma (first form of the imperfect). Yo hubiera,^ I might have. Nosotros hubieramos,^ We might tii hubieras, etc. vosotros hubierais, have, etc. el, J ellos, \ ella, \ hubiera. ellas, >• hubieran. Vd., ) Vds., ) 1 Oo' -hay, -bis'-tay, -boh, -bee'-mohs, -bis'-tay-is, -bee-ay'-rong. 2 Ah-hray', -brahs', -brah', -bray'-mohs, -bray '-is, -brabng'. 8 Ah-bree'-ah, -ahs, -ah, -ah-mohs, -ah-is, -ahng. * ^A'-yah, -yahs, -yah, aA-yah'-mohs, -yah'-is, aA'-yahng, 6 Oo-hee-ay'-xdih, -rahs, -rah, -rah-mohs, -rah-is, -rahng. 104 VERBOS AUXILIARES. IMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA (SECOND FORM OF THE IMPERFECT). Singular. Plural. Yo hubiese,^ I might have, Nosotros hubi6semos,i Tfe w%^^ tii hubieses, etc. vosotros hubieseis, have, etc. el, \ ellos, \ ella, [- hubiese. ellas, t bubiesen. Vd., ) Vds., ) FUTURO CONDICIONAL (CONDITIONAL FUTURE). Singular, Si yo hubiera or hubiese, If I had, etc si tii hubieras or hubieses, el, si \ ella, J- hubiera or hubiese. \ ella, i ( Vd., ) Plural. Si nosotros hubieramos or hubiesemos, // we had, etc. si vosotros hubierais or hubieseis, ellos, \ ellas, >• hubieran or hubi'esen. Vds., ) IMPERATIVE MOOD. From the imperative of haher the only person in use is he, in the sense of to 2^ossess, to see, and to he ; as, he aqui a su amigo, here is your friend (lit., here you have your friend) ; he alli su libro, there is your book ; he alli sus libros, there are your books ; heme aqm, here I am ; helos aili^ there they are ; hela allij there she is, etc. TlEMPOS COMPUESTOS.^ These are- formed the same as in English, with the cor- responding tense of the auxiliary haher, followed by the past participle of the principal verb. 1 Oo-hee-ay'-^^y, -says, -say, -say-mohs, -say-is, -saing. * Tee-aim'-pohs kohm-pways'-tohs, compound tenses. AUXILIARY VERBS. 105 INFINITIVO. PRETIERITO * (preterit). GERUNDIO COMPUESTO (COMPOUND GERUND). Haber habido, to have had, Habiendo habido, haviiig had, PERFECTO'-^ DEFINIDO (PERFECT DEFINITE). Singular. Plural. Yo he habido, / have had, Nos. hemes habido, We have had, tu has habido, etc. vos. habeis habido, etc. el, ) ellos, ^ ella, >• ha habido. ellas, >- han habido. Vd., ) Vds., ) PLUSCUAMPERFECTO^ (PLUPERFECT). Yo habia habido, etc. Nos. habiamos habido, etc. / had had, etc. We had had, etc. PASADO ANTERIOR"* (PAST ANTERIOR). Yo hube habido, etc. Nos. hubimos habido, etc. 1 had had, etc. We had had, etc. FUTURO PERFECTO (PERFECT FUTURE). Yo habre habido, etc. Nos. habremos habido, etc. / shall have had, etc. We shall have had, etc. CONDICIONAL PERFECTO (CONDITIONAL PERFECT). Yo habria habido, etc. Nos. habriamos habido, etc. / should or would have had, etc. We should or would have had, etc. MODO SUBJUNTIVO. PRETERITO PERFECTO (PERFECT PRETERIT). Qvs yo haya habido, etc. Que nos. hayamos habido, etc. That I may have had, etc. That we may have had, etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, PRIMERA FORMA. Yo hubiera habido, etc. Nos. hubieramos habido, etc. I might have had, etc. We might have had, etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA. Yo hubiese habido, etc. Nos. hubiesemos habido, etc. 1 might have had, etc. We might have had, etc. 1 Pray-tay'-ree-toh. ^ Pair-fay k'-toh. 3 Ploos-kwam-pair-fayk'-toh, ■* Anterior (ahng-tay-ree-orr'), anterior. X06 VERBOS AUXILIATiES. CONDICIONAL. Singular. Si yo hubiera or hubiese habido, etc. If I had had, etc. Plural. Si nosotros hubieramos or hubiesemos habido, etc. If we had had, etc. Hemarks upon the Use of the Auxiliary Verb HABER^ to have. There are two verbs in Spanish, haber and tener, an- swering to the English verb to have. Haber is used only as an auxiliary, while tener is a principal verb denoting possession. 1. Haber is used, therefore, in forming the compound tenses, and always precedes the past participle of the prin- cipal verb. Examples : Hemes hablado espaftol. We have spoken Spanish. Habre escrito una carta. I shall have written a letter. In interrogative sentences the auxiliary haber is gener- ally placed immediately before the principal verb, which is followed by the personal pronoun ; as, ^ Con quien ha hablado Vd. ? With whom have you spoken 9 ^ Cudndo habra escrito Vd. la When tvill you have written the carta ? letter ? Often the same construction is employed as in English — i. e., the pronoun is placed between the auxiliary and principal verbs ; this, however, never happens when the perfecto definido is used. For instance, it would not be correct to say : ^ Ha Vd. hablado % Have you spoken 9 But: i Ha hablado Vd. ? Have spoken you 9 AUXILIARY VERBS. 107 Neither can we say : ^ Hemos nosotros comprado ? Have we bought f But: ^ Eemos comprado nosotros ? Have bought we 9 Note that the form of the past participle in the com- pound tenses with haber remains invariable^ as in English ; viz., hemos comprado, but never hemos com^prado^. 2. Haber, when followed by de, takes the infinitive present of the principal verb immediately after it, in which case it is synonymous with the English phrase to have to. Examples : He de ir a mi oficina. I have to go to my office. Habre de hablar espaftol. I shall have to speak Spanish. Habria de aprender el ingles si I would have to learn English if hubiera de hablarlo. I should have to speak it. 3. Haber is also used as an impersonal verb, correspond- ing to the English there to he. Being impersonal, only the third person singular can be used in Spanish, and these forms are the same as those of the auxiliary verb as con- jugated, except in the present tense, when hay is used instead of ha. Conjugation of the Impersonal Verb HABEBy there to be. MODO INDICATIVO. MODO SUBJUNTIVO. Hay, there is or there are. Haya, there may be. Habia, there was or there were. Hubiera, there might be. Hubo, there was or there were. Hubiese, there might be. Habra, there will or shall be. Si hubiera, or si hubiese, ifthert Habria, there should or would be. should be or if there were. Examples. Hay un hombre en la calle. There is a man in the street. 'H.a.Y dos mil personas en el teatro. There are two thousand personf in the theatre. 108 VERBOS AUXILIARES. Hubo una exposicibn universal There was a Universal Exhibi- 671 Chicago el alio 1803. tion in Chicago in the year 1893. Habria haile esta noche si hu- TJiere would he a ball this even- biera (or hubiese) dinero ing if there were money to para pagar la musica. pay for the music. The compound teiises are formed the same as their cor- respondent with haber. The present is ha habido instead of hay habido ; viz. : MODO INDICATIVO. MODO SUBJUNTIVO. Ha habido, there has been. Haya habido, there may have been. Habia habido, there had been. Hubiera habido, there might have been. Hubo habido, there had been. Hubiese habido, there might have been. Habra habido, there shall or unll JSi hubiera, or si hubiese habi- have been. do, if there had or should Habria habido, there should or have been, ivould have been. Examples. Hoy ha habido U7i accidents en There has bee7i an accident in the la calle. street to-day. Habra habido muchos cambios. There unll have bee7imeinjchsinges, Habria habido mas ge7ite en el There wo7ild have been more peo- teatro si no hubiese llovido. pie in the theatre if it had not rained. In the interrogative sentences the construction is the same as that of a simple declaration, and the interrogation is expressed by the inflection of the voice. In writing, the double interrogation point indicates the interrogation. 4. Haber, followed by the conjunction que, is synony- mous with ser necesario (to be necessary), and is impersonal like haber (there to be), in which case the verb following must be in the infinitive present. The conjugation of this form is therefore the same as that of haber (there to be), with que added, thus : AUXILIARY VERBS. 109 Conjugation of the Impersonal Verb HABER QUE, to he necessary. MODO SUBJUNTIVO. MODO INDICATIVO, Hay que, it is necessary. Habia que, it was or used to be 7iecessary. Hubo que, it was necessary, Habr^ que, it will he necessary, Habria que, it should or wouldbe necessary. Haya que, it may be necessary. Hubiera que, it might be neces- sary. Hubiese que, it might be neces- Si hubiera, or si hubiese que, if it were or should be necessary. Hay que ir al correo. Habra que leer los libros. Si hubiese cartas habria que contestarlas. Examples. It is necessary to go to the post-oflBlce. It will be necessary to read the books. If there were any letters it would be necessary to answer them. MODO INDICATIVO. Ha habido que. It has been Habia habido que, Hubo habido que, Habra habido que, Habria habido que. The compound tenses are formed the same as their cor- respondent with haber (there to be), adding que, thus : MODO SUBJUNTIVO. Haya habido que. It may have necessary, Hubiera habido que, been ne- etc. Hubiese habido que, cessary, Si hubiera, or si hubiese etc. habido que. Example. Ha habido que ir a la aduana. It has been necessary to go to the Custom-House. The same construction is used for the interrogative sen- tences as that referring to the impersonal haber (to be there). 5. Haber (there to be) may also be rendered in place of the verb to be, when implying distance ; viz. : S Que distancia hay 9 How far is it 1 S Habr4 tres millas de la calle Is it three miles from Thirty- Treinta y cuatro a la Bateria ? ^ fourth St. to the Battery ? No, Sr. ; hay cuatro millas. No, sir, it is four miles. 1 Lit., will there be three miles from the street Thirty-four to the Battery? 9 110 VERBOS AUXILIARES. CONJUGACION DEL VERBO TENER. MODO INFINITIVO. PRESENTE. Ten-er, to have. Gerundio. Participio Pasado. Ten-iendo,* having. Ten-ido,2 had. MODO INDICATIVO. Singular. PRESENTE. Plural. Yo tengo,^ / have, etc. Nos. ten-emos,^ We have, etc* tii tienes, vos. ten-6is. el, ) ellos, \ ella, I tiene. ellas, [• tienen. Vd., ) Vds., ) IMPERFECTO. Yo ten-ia,'» / had or used Nos. ten-iamos,* We had or tu ten-ias, to have, etc. vos. ten-iais, used to have, el, ) ellos, \ etc. ella, \ ten-ia. ellas, [• ten-ian. Vd.,) Vds., ) PASADO DEFINIDO. Yo tuve,^ / had, etc. Nos. tuvimos,^ We had, etc. tu tuviste, vos. tuvisteis. el, ^ ellos, \ ella, >- tuvo. ellas, V tuvieron. Vd.,) Vds., ) PUTURO. Yo tendr6,« / shall have, Nos. tendremos,^ We shall have. tu tendr^js, etc. vos. tendreis, etc. el, ) ellos, 1 ella, [• tendra. ellas, - teiidr6.li. Vd., ) Vds., ) 1 Tay-nee-aing'-do. a Tay-nee'-do. ' ^ Taing'-goh, tee-ay' -n&ys, -nay, tay-nay' -mos, -is, tee-ay'-naing. * Tay-nee'-ah^ -ahs, -ah, -ah-mohs, -ah-is, -ahng. « Too'-vay, too-vis'-tay, too'-voh, too-vee'-mohs, too-vis'-tay-is, too* vee-ay'-rong. • Tainff-dr&y', -drahs', -drali', -dray'-mohs, -dray '-is, -drahng'. AUXILIARY VERBS. , 111 FUTURO CONDICIONAL. Singular. ' Plural. Yo tendria,^ / should or Nos. tendrianios,^ We should or tu tendrias, would have, etc. vos. tendriais, would have, etc. el, \ ellos, \ ella, >- tendria. ellas, [• tendrian. Vd., ) Vds., ) MODO SUBJUN^TIVO. PRESENTE. Que yo tenga,^ That I may Que nos. tengainos,^ That we que tii tengas, have, etc. que vos. tengais, may have, r el, ^ ( ellos, \ etc. que \ ella, >• tenga. que \ ellas, >• tengan. ( Vd., ) ( Vds., ) IMPERFECTO, PRIMERA FORMA. Yo tuviera,^ / might have, Nos. tuvieramos,* We might tii tuvieras, etc. vos. tuvierais, have, etc. el, ^ , ellos, \ ella, V tuviera. ellas, V tuvieran. Vd., ) Vds., ) IMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA. Yo tuviese,* / might have, Nos. tuviesemos,'* We might tu tuvieses, etc. vos. tuvieseis, have, etc el, J ellos, \ ella, v tuviese. ellas, [• tuviesen. Vd., ) Vds.,) FUTURO CONDICIONAL. Singular. Si yo tuviera or tuviese, // / had or shoidd have, etc. si tii tuvieras or tuvieses, • \^^' ) si •< ella, >• tuviera or tuviese. ( Vd., ) 1 Taing-d/ree' -2ih, -ahs, -ah, -ah-raohs, -ah-is, -ahng. 2 Taing'-gdih, -gahs, -gah, taing-gak'-mdha, -is, taing'-gahng. 8 Too-vee-ay' -rah, -rahs, -rah, -rah-mos, -rah-is, -rahng. * Too-vee-ay'-say^ -says, -say, -say-mohs, -say-is, -saini?. 112 VERBOS AUXILIARES. Plural. Si nos. tuvi6ramos or tuvi^semos, If we had or should have, eta si vos. tuvierais or tuvieseis, c ellos, \ si \ ellas, >• tuvieran or tuviesen. ( Yds., ) MODO IMPERATIVO. Singular. Plural. Tengamos nos., let us have, ye, let them have^ Ten ^ tu, have thou, Ten-ed ^ vos., have ye, el, let him have, ( ellos. j 7^' I let ■< ellas, ) ( Yds., have Tenga •] ella, let her have, Tengan Vd., have you, ( Yds., have you (pL), TiEMPOS COMPUESTOS. INFINITIVO. PRETERITO. GERUNDIO COMPUESTO. Haber tenido, to have had, Habiendo tenido, having had, PERFECTO DEPINIDO. ^, , Singular. Plural. Yo he tenido, / have had, Nos. hemos tenido. We have had^ tu has tenido, etc. vos. hab6is tenido, etc. el, ) ellos, \ ella, [• ha tenido. ellas, >• han tenido. Yd., ) Yds., ) PLUSCUAMPERFECTO. Yo habia tenido, etc. Nos. habiamos tenido, etc. I had had, etc. We had had, etc. PASADO ANTERIOR.^ Yo hube tenido, etc. Nos. hubimos tenido, etc. I had had, etc. We had had, etc. FUTURO PERFECTO. Yo habr^ tenido, etc. Nos. habremos tenido, etc. / shall have had, etc. We shall have had, etc. » Taing'. « Tay-nayth'. » Ahng-tay-ree-orr'. AUXILIARY VERBS. 113 CONDICIONAL PERFECTO. Singular. Plural. Yo habria tenido, etc. , Nos. habriamos tenido, etc. I should or would have had, etc. We should or would have had, etc. MODO SUBJUNTIYO. PRETERITO PERFECTO. Que yo haya tenido, etc. Que nos. hayamos tenido, etc. That I may have had, etc. That we may have had, etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, PRIMERA FORMA. 'Yo hubiera tenido, etc. Nos. hubieramos tenido, etc. I might have had, etc. We might have had, etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA. Yo hubiese tenido, etc. Nos. hubi6semos tenido, etc. I might have had, etc. We might have had, etc. CONDICIONAL. Singular. Si yo hubiera or hubiese tenido, etc. If I had had, etc. Plural. Si nosotros hubieramos or hubi^semos tenido, etc. If we had had, etc. BemarJcs upon the Use of the Active Verb TENERy to have, to hold, to possess, 1. To have, used as an active verb, is translated by tener, and indicates possession, after the manner of its English equivalent, viz. : Tengo una pluma. I have (7 hold) a pen. S Tiene Vd, ese papel 9 Have you (possess) that paper? J^o ; pero lo tendre pronto. No ; but I shall have it (possess) soon. Ul seftor Fulano tuvo mucho Mr. So-and-So had (possessed) dinero, much money. 4 Tendria Vd. esto f Would you have (possess) this? 114 VERBOS AUXILIARES. 2. In sentences where the auxiliary haher is used in conjunction with the active tener, it can not be employed except together with the past participle of the principal verb tener, viz. : ^ Ha tenido Vd. un libro como Have you ever had a book like este, aJguna vez 9 ^ this ? He tenido ese mismo libro, I have had that same book. Hemes tenido dinero. We have had money. Han tenido la desgracia de per- They have had the misfortune to der a su amigo. lose their friend. 3. Tener is also used in the same sense as the verb to he in the English language when expressing desire or sejisa- tion, and is therefore used in conjunction with the follow- ing words : hambre (ahm'-bray), hunger ; sed (sayth'), thirst ; frio (free'-oh), cold\ calor {kdihAoxv'), warmth \ sueno (sway'-nyoh), sleep ; vergtienza (vair-gwaing'-thah), shame ; miedo (mee-ay'-doh), fear ; raz6ii ^ (rah-thong'), right ; no (tener) raz6n,^ to be wrong ; ganas de (gah'-nahs day), mind to (a desire to do something). Examples : S Tiene Yd, suefto 9 * Are you sleepy ? Tengo hambre y sed.^ I am hungry and thirsty. Tengo ganas de corner.^ I have a desire to eat. ^ Que tiene Vd. 9 '' What is the matter with you ? Yo 710 tengo nada, pero Juan Nothing is the matter with me, tiene dolor de cabeza.^ but John has a headache. ^- Tiene Yd. razbn en tener J.re you right in Z>em^ afraid? miedo 9 ^ No, seftor ; 7io tengo razbn. No, sir, I am not right. 1 Lit., have had you a book like this any time? 2 Razbn (Ut., reason) is used in the same sense as right. 3 To he wrong is usually expressed as no tener razbn (lit., not to have reason) ; as, el no tiene razbn (lit., he has no reason), he is not right. 4 Lit., have you sleepiness ? « Lit., I have himger and thirst. « Lit., I have a desire to eat. ^ Lit., what have you? 8 Lit., I have nothing, but John has ache of head. Doler is to ache, to pain ; el dolor ^ the ache, the pain. » Lit., have you reason in to have fear? ' AUXILIARY VERBS. 115 $ Tiene Yd. alguna com f * Is anything the matter with you % Si, sefior ; tengo frio. Yes, sir ; I am cold. S Tiene Vd. frio 6 calor 9 Are you cold or warm ? JSfo tengo ni frio ni calor. ^ I am neither cold nor warm ? 4. It takes the place of the English verb to he when expressing age and dimensio7is, viz. : S Cudntos anos tiene Vd. ? ^ How old are you ? g Que edad tiene Vd. 9 ^ What is your age ? Tengo treinta anos, y en mil ocho- 1 am thirty years old, and in 1887 cientos ochejita y siete tenia I was twenty-eight. veintiocho.^ ^ Que dimensiones tiene este cuar- What are the dimensions of this to 9^ room ? Creo"^ que tendr^ unos veinticinco I think' it may he about twenty- pies de largo, por quince de five feet long by fifteen wide. ancho.^ 5. Tener followed by que indicates necessity or obliga- tion to do something, and is synonymous with to have to or must in the English language ; in this case the conjunction que must always precede the infinitive of the principal verb, viz. : Tengo que estudiar mi leccion I have to study my Spanish Ics- de espafi'Ol. son. ^ Tiene Vd. que ir a su oficina 9 Have you to go to your office ? Si; porque tengo mucho^ que Yes, as I have a great deal (or hacer. much ^ ) to do. 1 Lit., have you anything? ^ Lit., I have not nor cold nor warmth. 8 Lit., how many years have you? '* Lit., what age have you? 6 Lit., I have thirty years .... I had twenty- eight. 8 Lit., what dimensions has this room ? t The verb C7''eer is used in a number of instances in the same manner as the verb to tMnJc. 8 Lit., I believe that it will have some twenty-five feet of lengtli .... » Adverbs may be either placed immediately after the verb, followed by the conjunction que^ or at the end of the sentence ; viz., tengo mucho que hacer or tengo que hacer mucho. 116 VERBOS AUXILIARES. Ser and Estar^ to he. CONJUGACI6N DEL VERBO SER. MODO INFINITIVO. PRESENTE. S-er, to he. GERUNDIO. PARTICIPIO PASADO. S-iendo, being. S-ido, heen. MODO INDICATIVO. Singular. PRESENTE. Plural. Yo soy,^ / am, etc. Nosotros somos,^ We are, etc; tii eres, vosotros sois, el, ) ellos, \ ella, [• es. ellas, I son. Vd., ) Vds., ) IMPERFECTO. Yo era,2 1 was or used Nosotros erainos,2 We were or tii eras, to he, etc. vosotros erais, used to be, etc. el, J ellos, \ ella, >• era. ellas, >• eran. Vd.,) Yds., ) PASADO DEFINIDO. Yo fui,3 1 wa2, etc. Nosotros fuimos,^ We were, etc tii fuiste, vosotros fuisteis. el, ) ellos, \ ella, \ fu6. ellas, >• fueron. Vd.,) Yds., ) FUTURO. Yo s-ere,4 1 shall he, etc i. Nosotros s-eremos,'* We shall h tu s-er&s. vosotros s-ereis, etc. el, ) ellos, \ ella, \ s-er^ ellas, y s-eran. Vd.,) Yds., ) 1 Soh'-ee, ay'-rays, ays', soh'-inohs, soh'-is, song. * ^2^'-rah, -rahs, -rah, -rah-mos, -rah-is, -rahng. 8 Foo-ee', foo-is'-tay, fway', foo-ee'-mohs, foo-is'-tay-is, fway'-rong. * Say-ray', -rahs', -rah', -ray'-mohs, -ray'-is, -rahng'. AUXILIARY VERBS. 117 FUTURO CONDICIONAL. Singular. Plural. Yo s-eria,^ / should or Nosotros s-eriamos,* We should tii s-erias, would he, etc. vosotros s-eriais, or would he, el, ^ ellos, \ etc. ella, [ s-eria. ellas, \ s-erian. Vd., ) Vds., MODO SUBJUNTIVO. PRESENTE. Qu-e yo sea,^ That 1 may he, Que nosotros seainos,^ That we que tu seas, etc. que vosotros seals, may he, etc. / el, J ( ellos, ^ que \ ella, >- sea. que \ ellas, [• sean. ( Vd., ) ( Vds., ) IMPERFECTO, PRIMERA FORMA. Yo fuera,^ / might he, etc. Nosotros fueramos,^ We might tii fueras, vosotros fuerais, he, etc. el, \ ellos, \ ella, >• fuera. ellas, >- fueran. Vd., ) Vds., J IMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA. Yo fuese,* / might he, etc. Nosotros fuesemos,* We might tii fueses, vosotros fueseis, he, etc. el, \ ellos, \ ella, >• fuese. ellas, >- fuesen. Vd., ) Vds., ) 'fUTURO CONDICIONAL. Singular. Si yo fuera or fuese, If I were, etc. si tii fueras or fueses, el, \ ella, \ fuera or fuese. Vd., ) 1 Say-ree'-ah, -ahs, -ah, -ah-mos, -ah-is, -ahng. 2 Say'-&h, -ahs, -ah, say-ak' -mohs^ -is, say'-ahng. 3 ^way' -r&h, -rahs, -rah, -rah-mohs, -rah-is, -rahng. ^'-say, -says, -say, -say-mohs, -say-is, -saing. 118 VERBOS AUXILIARES. Plural. Si nosotros fueramos or fuesemos, If we were, etc. 5* vosotros fuerais or fueseis, ellos, 5* ^ ellas, J- fueran or fuesen. ( eJios, ^ 5* -< ellas, > ( Vds., ) MODO IMPERATIVO. ^. , PRESENTE. „, , Singular. Plural. Seamos nos., let us be, S6 * tu, be thou. S-ed ^ vos., be ye. J el, let him be. ( ellos, } j . .^ » ella, let her be. Sean < ellas, \ Vd., be you. ( Vds., be you (pi.). TiEMPOS COMPUESTOS. INFINITIVO. PRETERITO. GERUXDIO COMPUESTO. Haber sido, to have been. Habiendo sido, having been, PERFECTO DEFINIDO. ^, , Singular. Plural. Yo he sido, / have been, etc. Nosotros hemos sido, We have tn has sido, vosotros habeis sido, been, etc. el, ^ ellos, \ ella, l ha sido. ellas, l han sido. Vd., ) Vds., ) PLUSCUA3IPERFECT0. . Yo habia sido, etc. Nos. habiamos sido, etc. / had been, etc. We had beeti, etc. PASADO ANTERIOR. Yo hube sido, etc. Nos. hubimos sido, etc. / had been, etc. We had been, etc. FUTURO PERFECTO. Yo habre sido, etc. Nos. habremos sido, etc. / shall have been, etc. We shall have been, etc. 1 Say'. 2 Sayth'. AUXILIARY VERBS. 119 CONDICIONAL PERFECTO. Singular. Plural. Yo habria sido, etc. Nos. habriamos sido, etc. I should or ivould have been, etc. We should or would have been, etd MODO SUBJUNTIVO. PRETERITO PERFECTO. Que yo haya sido, etc. Que nos. hayamos sido, etc. That I may have been, etc. That we may have been, etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, PRIMER A FORMA. Yo hubiera sido, etc. Nos. hubieramos sido, etc. J might have been, etc. We might have been, etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA. Yo hubiese sido, etc. Nos. hubiesemos sido, etc. I might have been, etc. We might have been, etc. CONDICIONAL. . Singular. Si yo hubiera or hubiese sido, etc. If I had been, etc. Plural. Si nos. hubieramos or hubiesemos sido, etc. If we had been, etc. Hemarhs upon the Use of the Verb SERy to be. There are two verbs in Spanisb corresponding to the English to be, but their respective meanings widely differ. The verb ser is what may properly be termed a definite verb — that is to say, governing the inherent and mental state of persons, of ran'k, profession, trade, and nationality, and of things absolute, i. e., things not likely to undergo change. A careful observance of the rules laid down for the study of the two verbs in the following pages will relieve the student of a great deal of ditliculty. i20 VERBOS AUXILIARES. 1. Examples where the attribute is essential or inherent: Mi cuarto es grande} My room is large. El hombre es alto.^ The man is tall. El es joven, rico y sano^ y por lo He is young, rich, and healthy, tanto es feliz? and therefore is happy. La madera es util. The wood is useful. 2. Referring to quality, rank, profession, dignity, trade, nationality, etc. : El senor Martin es banquero, y es Mr. Martin is a banker and a espanol, Spaniard. El seftor Smith es ahora el Mi- Mr. Smith is now the Secretary nistro de Estado. of State. j&Z es un gran orador. He is a great orator. ^ Quim es ese hombre 9 Who is that man ? Es el tenedor de libros de mi casa. He is the book-keeper at my housa 3. Ser is also used when referring to possession, origin, or materials, followed by the preposition de, except when in connection with the possessive pronouns mio (mee'-oh), mine ; tuyo (too'-yoh), thine ; suyo ^ (soo'-yoh), his, hers, or yours\ nuestro (nways'-troh), our\ and vuestro (vways'-troh), yours (of ye), when the preposition is not employed ; viz. : Este libro es de mi hermano.^ This book is my brother's.* El vino es de Espana. The wine is from Spain. El reloj es de oro.^ The watch is of gold. I De quien es este reloj ? '' Whose watch is this ? iVb es suyo,* que es mio.^ It is not his, but mwe. 1 ^« is used because the room is large and can not undergo change. 2 Es because it refers to the height of the person, which is absolute. 3 In this case ser is used to express the condition of the man under such circumstances. * Su7/o, when unaccompanied by the article, may be rendered more ex- plicit by de ■ est-ar^. Vd., ) I shall he, etc. Nosotros est-aremos,* vosotros est-areis, ellos, \ ellas, V est-ar^n. Vds., ) We shall be, etc. 1 Ay8-tolo!-QQ, -tabs', -tab', -tah'-mobs, -tab'-is, -tabng'. 2 AyS'taTi -hoh, -babs, -bab, -bab-mobs, -bab-is, -babng. 3 ^^5-too*-vay, -too-vis'-tay, -too'-vob, -too-vee'-mobs, -too-vis'-tay-is, -too-veeay'-rong. * Ays-tah-xny' , -rabs', -rab, etc. AUXILIARY VERBS. 123 FUTURO CONDICIONAL. Singular. Plural. Yo est-aria,^ / should or Nosotros est-ariamos,* We should tii est-arias, would be, etc. vosotros est-ariais, or would be, el, ^ ellos, \ etc. ©11a, [ est-aria. ellas, I est-arian. Vd., ) Vds., ) MODO SUBJUNTIVO. PRESENTE. Que yo este,^ That I may be, Que nosotros est-emos,* That we que tii estes, etc. que vosotros est-6is, may be, etc. / el, ) ( ellos, que -< ella, V est6. q^ie < ellas, V esten. ( Vd., ) ( Vds., ) IMPERFECTO, PRIMERA FORMA. Yo estuvieta,^ / might be, Nosotros estuvieramos,^ We tu estuvieras, etc. vosotros estuvierais, might be, el, ) ellos, ^ etc. ella, y estuviera. ellas, V estuvieran. Vd., ) Vds., ) IMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA. Yo estuviese,'* / might be, Nosotros estuviesemos,"* We tu estuvieses, etc. vosotros estuvieseis, might &c, el, \ ellos, \ etc. ella, >■ estuviese. ellas, >■ estuviesen. Vd., ) Vds.,) FUTURO CONDICIONAL. Singular. Si yo estuviera or estuviese, // / were, etc. si tu estuvieras or estuvieses, i ^^' ) si < ella, y estuviera or estuviese. ' Vd., ) 1 Ai/s-tah-ree'-ah, -ree'-ahs, -ree'-ah, etc. 2 Ays-tay', -tays', -tay', -tay'-mos, -tay'-is, -taing'. 8 Ays-too-veeay'-iah, -ralis, -rah, -rah-mohs, -rah-is, -rahng. * Ays-too-veeay' -say, -says, -say^ -say-mohs, -say-is, -saing. 124 . VERBOS AUXILIARES. Plural. Si nosotros estuvieramos or estuviesemos, If we ivere^ etc si vosotros estuvierais or estuvieseis, ellos, ^ ellas, > estuvieran or estuviesen. Vds., ) MODO IMPERATIVO. , PRESENTE. _, , Singular. Plural. — Est-emos nos., let us be. "Estk tu, be thou. Est-ad ^ vos., be ye, Est6 el, let him be. ( ellos, , , ^ „ , ^ ^ let them be. J el, let him be. ( ellos, ) ■< ella, let her be. Esten •< ellas, f ( Vd., be you. ( Vds., b be you (pi.). TiEMPOS COMPUESTOS. INFINITIVO. PRETERITO. GERUNDIO COMPUESTO. Haber estado, to have been. Habiendo estado, having been. PERFECTO DEFINIDO. Singular. Plural. Yo he estado, 1 have been^ Nosotros hemos estado, We have tii has estado, etc. vosotros habeis estado, been, etc. el, \ ellos, \ ella, V ha estado. ellas, >- han estado. Vd., ) Vds., ) PLUSCUAMPERFECTO. Yo habia estado, etc. Nos. habiamos estado, etc. / had been, etc. We had been, etc. PASADO ANTERIOR. Yo hube estado, etc. Nos. hubimos estado, etc. I had been, etc. We had been, etc. FUTURO PERFECTO. Yo habre estado, etc. Nos. habremos estado, etc. / shall have been, etc. We shall have been, etc. CONDICIONAL PERFECTO. Yo habria estado, etc. Nos. habriamos estado, etc. I should or would have been, etc. We should or would have been, etc > Ays-tahd'. AUXILIARY VERBS. 125 MODO SUBJUNTIVO. PRETERITO PERFECTO. „, Singular. Plural. Que yo haya estado, etc. Que nos. hayamos estado, etc. That I may have been, etc. That we may have heen^ etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, PRIMERA FORMA. Yo hubiera estado, etc. Nos. hubieramos estado, etc. I might have been, etc. We might have bee7i, etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA. Y'o bubiese estado, etc. Nos. bubiesemos estado, etc. / might have been, etc. We might have been, etc. CONDICIONAL. Singular. Si yo bubiera or bubiese estado, etc. If I had been, etc. Plural. Si nos. bubieramos or bubiesemos estado, etc. If we had been, etc. MemarJcs upon the Use of the Verb ESTARy to be (to remain, to stay). This is what may be termed a temporary verb, only used to express the condition of persons or things in a state, temporary or accidental — i. e., when a change is likely to occur at any time ; viz. : Este pan esta caliente} This bread is hot. Luisa esta contenta, Louisa is pleased. La silla esta rota. The chair is broken. El cuarto est^ limpio. The room is clean. El nifto esta cansado. The child is tired. El cafe esta dulce. The c-offee is sweet. Los muchachos estan en la calle. The boys are in the street. ^ Dbiide esta mi sombrero ? Where is my hat 1 Su sombrero esta en la percha. Your hat is on the hat-rack. ' Both ser and estar may be used, according to their own definition, with the adjectives warm and cold when not implying personal feeling ; viz. : La sopa esta caliente. The soup is warm. El hielo esfrio. Ice is cold. 10 126 VERBOS AUXILIARES. 1. It is therefore used to denote the state of healthy viz, : f Cbnio esta Vd. 9 How are you ? Estoy hien. I am well. Ese joven est4 enfermo. That young man 2s ill. ^ No esta me/or F /s he not better ? 2. When joined to certain adjectives to express a way of being, or feelings and emotions ; as, Estar alegre. To he merry. Estar satisfecho. To be satisfied. Estar contento. To be glad. Estar triste. To be sad. 3. It is also used when speaking of the existence of or in localities in general: Yo estaba en mi casa. I was in my house. Mi casa esta en la calle Treinta My house is in Thirty-fourth y cuatro. Street. Nueva York esta en America. New York is in America. Mi hermano estard. maflana en My brother will be in San Fran- San Francisco, cisco to-morrow. ^ Dbnde est& su socio de Vd, 9 Where is your partner ? Esta en Paris. He is in Paris. Paris esta en Europa, Paris is in Europe. 4. It is used in adverbial expressions, excepting, haw- ever, those referring to time (see page 121, number 5) : El vapor esta lejos. The steamer is far away. Estoy de prisa. I am in a hurry. Mi sombrero est6. de moda. My hat is fasliionahle. 5. In constructing the English progressive form ending in ing (ando or iendo ^ ) : Estoy escribiendo un libro. I am writing a book. Juan esta estudiando. John is studying. Nosotros est^bamos hablando. We were speaking. 1 Estar can never be used with the present participle of ir (to go) and venir (to come) in the same sense as it is used in English, when we say, I am going, estoy yendo^ I am coming, estoy viniendo, but use the indicative pres- ent, and say, yo xoj (I go, I am going) and yo vengo (I come, I am coming). AUXILIARY VERBS. 127 6. Followed by the preposition de, to express occupa- tion or disposition of the body or mind. Examples : Hoy estoy de servicio. I am on duty to-day. Estabamos de discusion. We were discussing. El estaba de rina. He felt like quarreling. 7. It may be also employed, followed by the preposition de, instead of ser when speaking of dignities and offices temporarily held : El general Salamanca esta de General Salamanca *s (acting) Go v- Gobernador de Cuba. ernor of Cuba. El seftor Sagasta esta de Presi- Mr. Sagasta is (acting) Prime dente del Consejo de Ministros Minister of Spain. en Espafta, It would, however, be perfectly correct to say : El general Salamanca es Gobernador de Cuba. El seftor Sagasta es el Fresidente del Consejo de Ministros en Espafta. 8. This verb, in connection with the preposition para, followed by the infinitive of the verb, is used idiomatically to express intentioyi or proximity ; viz. : Estaba para escribir cuando I was about (I had the intention Vd. llegb. of) writing when you arrived. Estamos para acabar. We are about finishing. Estaremos para llegar del cam- We shall be about returning from po el treinta de setiembre. the country the 30th of Sep- tember. 9. Por, used in connection with estar instead of para, denotes indecision, or refers to something not completed^ or neglected ; viz. : Estar por hacer una cosa. To have the intention of doing something. Estaba por salir. I was intending to go out. Estoy por leer Don Quijote. I am intending to read "Don Quixote." La casa esta por barrer. The house is unswept. La carta esta aun por escribir. The letter is still unwritteru 128 VERBOS AUXILIARES. Comparison of the Two Verbs SER and ESTAR, It has already been explained that each one of these verbs represents the verb to be ; but as one is absolute and the other transitory^ great care should be exercised when using either, as a misapplication would be apt to cause some confusion. It has therefore been thought necessary to place before the student a few sentences, apparently alike, in which the difficulty likely to occur is shown, thus making it more comprehensible. Estar (transitory), Estoy cansado. I am tired (fatigued). Juan esta vivo, John is alive (or lives). Fedro esta listo, Peter is ready. Uste hombre esta hueno. This man is well. Ul muchacho esta mala. The boy is ill. jEste vino estfi, agrio. This wine has become sour. ^se joven esta muy callado. That young man is very silent. El niflo esta limpio. The child is clean (has been washed). Este ciMirto esta alto. This room is high (a long way up- stairs). Ser Soy cansado. I am tiresome. Juan es vivo. Tohn is lively. Pedro es listo. .^eter is clever (smart). Este hombre es bueno. This man is good. El muchacho es malo. The boy is bad. Este vino es agrio. This wine is sour (naturally). Ese joven es muy callado. That young man is very taciturn. El niflo es limpio. The child is cleanly (in its habits). Este cuarto es alto, (de techo). This room is lofty. FIN DEL LIBRO IL LIBRO TERCERO. PARTE PRIMERA. LECCI6N NOVENA. Palahras, — La Mesa y los Alimentos} Alimentar , to feed. XJn pedazo (pay-dah'-^/toh) . . . .a piece. El chocolate y la crema . . . * the chocolate and the cream, Agua con hielo (eeay'-loh) .... ice-water. El azucar (ah-^Aoo'-kahrr) . . . , the sugar. Caldo heef'tea, broth. Lo magro (mah'-groh), lo gordo (gorr'-doh) . lean meat, fat meat. Legumbres (lay-goom' -brays) .... vegetables. Patatas cocidas (koh-thie-dahs), fritas . boiled, fried potatoes, Patatas asadas baked potatoes. Coliflor (koh-lee-florr') cauliflower, Lechuga (lay-choo'-gah) lettux^e. Tomates, col (kohl') tomatoes, cabbage, Remolachas (ray-moh-lah'-chahs) . . . beets, CeboUas onions. Batatas sweet potatoes, Arroz (ah-rroth') rice. La mostaza (mohs-tah'-^^ah) .... the mustard. La pimienta (pee-mee-aing'-tah) . . . the pepper. El vinagre, el aceite (ah-thay'-ee-tay) . . the vinegar, the oil. Una cucharilla a teaspoon. La sal (sahl'), el salero the salt, the salt-cellar, 1 The table and food. 130 lecci6n novena. ESPASiOL. " 1. g A cuantos estamos hoy ? 2. Estamos a veintidos de setiembre de mil ocho- cientos oclienta y nueve. ^ 3. Pero i que tiene Yd. ? No tiene Vd.^ buena cara.^ ■^4. No me siento^ bien. Deseana ver a^ mi medico. 5. I Cuanto lleva el Dr. Garrido por^ hacer^ una visita f acultativa ? 6. No se ; pero el vive muy lejos y probablemente pedira mucho por venir aqui. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 1. At how many are we to-day ? 3. . . . . Not have you good face. 4. Not myself (I) feel well .... 1 In Spanish the inflection of the voice tells whether the sentence is de- clarative or interrogative. It is not a general rule, in replying, to place the pronoun before the verb ; sometimes it follows the verb, and, as in this case, is perfectly correct. Tener buena cara (lit., to have a good face), which is synonymous with to look or appear well. 3 Siento, from se?itir (to feel), is an irregular verb. He siento belongs to the reflexive conjugation sentirse (to feel one's self). See page 91, note 8. 3 The direct object of a verb, if an animate being, takes a (to) ; as, busco al {a el) doctor^ espero a Juan^ llamo al {a el) perro. If indeterminate, or preceded by a number, d is omitted ; as, husco un ainigo (I am looking for a friend); but used in busco d mi amigo (means I am looking for wy friend). Similarly, d is omitted if the direct object be a thing ; as, espero el tren (I await the train) ; busco mi sombrero (I am looking for my hat). * Por conveys the general idea of cause. It expresses : 1. Price^ excTiange^ equivalent^ and percentage. (See page 47, note 7.) Quiero dos pesos por mi libro. I want two dollars for my book. Cambiaria mi sombrero por el de Vd. I would exchange my hat for yours. El dinero produce cuatro por ciento. Money brings four per cent. 2. Origin^ direction^ and duration of time ; as. La mesa estd hechapor el carpintero. The table is made by the carpenter. Fui d Espana por Italia. I went to Spain by way of Italy. Estuve aiLsente^or tres meses, 1 was absent for three months. LECCION NOVENA. 13] PRONUNCIACION. TRADUCCION. 1. . . , . 1. What day of the month is it 9 2 say-tee-aim'-bray .... 2, It is the 22d of September, 1889. 3 3. But what ails you 9 You don't look well. 4 may'-dee-koh. 4. 1 donH feel well. I should like to see a physician. 5, ^. . . . Gah-rree'-doh .... fah- 5. How much does Dr. Garrido kool-tah-tee'-vah f charge for a professional visit 9 6 proh-bah'-blay-maing'- 6. / donH know ; hut he lives tay .... very far, and will prohahly charge high for comiiig here, 3. Estimation, and answering to in search of, in such expressions as to go for, to send for, and to ask for ; as, Pasa por hombre instruido. He passes for a learned man. Voy por pan. I go /or bread. Envie Vd. por el medico. Send for the physician. Vienen por mi. They come for me. Freguntan por Vd. They ask for you. Note that the preposition a after the verbs pasar, ir, enviar, venir^ and preguntar (note 3) is omitted for general usage and without any grammatical sanction. 4. It also stands for on account of {a causa de), or owing to {dehido a)', as, Ko llegue antes por {dehido a) tener I did not arrive before for (owing to) que hacer. having to do. For {a causa de) su hermano de Vd., On account of jour brother I did not no conclui mi trabajo. finish my work. 5. Instead of {en vez de) or in place of {en lugar de) ; as, Eagalo Vd. por mi. Do it for me. 6. "With the verb estar and an infinitive (see page 127, No. 9), when con- veying the idea of want and requirement ; as, El cocTie esta por alquilar. The carriage is not hired. Estoy por salir. I am inclined to go out. 7. In connection with adjectives and adverbs followed by que {no matter how) ; as, For mucho que estudie, nunca apren- No matter how much he may study, dera. he will never learn. « After the prepositions por and para the verb must be in the infinitive. 132 lecci6n novena. ESPA!sOL. 7. Pues entonces tomaremos tm carruaje e ^ iremos a su casa. 8. Le acompafiare a Vd. con mucho gusto. Aqui viene un coche. 9. i Cochero ! ; i esta alquilado su carruaje ? 10. I Cual es su tarifa ? 11. El precio do tarifa es un peso^ y medio por^ liora. 12. I En que calle vive el Dr. Garrido ? ■^13. Llevenos"* Vd. a la calle de la Luna ntimero 6, lo mas aprisa posible. Cierre ^ la portezuela.^ *14. Llevenos Yd. a buen paso''^ y tendra una buena propina. 15. i Cochero !, pare V. aqui ; esta es la casa y vamos a bajar. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 13. Carry us to the street of the Moon No. 6 the more quickly- possible. Shut the carriage-door (portezuela). 14. Carry us you at good step, and will have a good tip. 1 F (and) before words beginning with i or hi, changes to e (and) for the purpose of euphony, except before hie ; as, padre e hijo, father and son ; f ranees e ingles, French and English, etc. ; but, nieve y hielo, snow and ice. 2 Peso is the Spanish- American word for dollar, while in Spain it is called dura. Peso stands also for weight. The Spanish currency is la peseta (twenty cents). The duro {peso) has five pesetas. 3 See page 130, note 4, No. 1. ^ See page 101, note 6. 6 Cierre, imperative of the irregular verb cerrar (to close). These verbs having an e in the penultimate, take an i before the e in all persons except the first and second plural in the present indicative, subjunctive, and in the imperative. See Class I, irregular verbs. « The terminations uelo, uela, form the diminutive, and convey generally the idea of contempt and adversity ; although portezuela in this case stands for the small door of a carriage, and is the usual expression employed. LECCldN NOVENA. 133 PRONUNCIACION. TRADUCCION. 7 kah-rroo-ah'-hay ay ... , 7. Then we will take a carriage and go to his house, I 8 koh'-chay. 8. I will accompany you, xvith much pleasure. Here comes a carriage, 9. .... ahl-kee-lah'-doh .... 9. Coachman, is your carriage hired f 10. I, , , , tah-ree'-fah . . . . ? 10. What is your fare 9 11 pray'-M^e-oh .... 11. The price is a dollar and a half per hour, 12. I. , . , kahl'-lyay . . . . ? 12. /n ivhat street does Dr, Garri- do live ? 13 Loo'-nah .... ah-pree'- 13. Drive us to No. 6 Moon Street sail .... pohrr-tay-^/ioo-ay'- as quickly as possible. Shut lah. the door. 14 proh-pee'-nah, 14. Drive us quickly, and you shall have a good tip, 15 bah-hahrr'. 15. Driver ! Stop here, this is the house, and we are going to get out. Diminutives end principally in ito (masculine) and ita (feminine) ; they imply beauty, are also used as terms of endearment, as well as to express small- ness, the said terminations of course taking the masculine or feminine vowel of the noun ; as, from hermano, hermanito (dear little brother), and from hermana, hermanita (dear little sister), etc. If in co, go (masculine), or ca, ga (feminine), the suffixes quito, guito, or quita, guita, respectively, are substi- tuted instead ; as, from chico, chica, chiquito, cJiiquita (nice little thing) ; amigo, amiga, amiguito, amiguita (dear little friend). Diminutives of words of one syllable, ending in a consonant, are formed .by the addition of ecito, ecita ; as, from yan., panecito ; flor, Jlorecita. Words of more than one syllable, ending in a consonant, except n, or r, add ito, ita; as, from Idpiz (pencil), lapicito', senal (sign), senalita. When in e, n^ or r, add cito, cita ; as, from horribre, mujer, jardin, homhrecito, mujercita, jardincito. Mano (hand) and pie (foot), make manecita (pretty little hand), piececito (pretty little foot). Other diminutives implying also beauty, grace, and endearment, are illOy ilia and ico, ica. Christian names are similarly subject to the suffix ito ; as, Carlos, Carlitos (Charley); Juan, Juanito (Johnny); Fepe, Pepito (Joe), etc. "> Ir a buen paso is an idiomatic expression, and means to go quickly. 134 lecci6n novena. espaSol. 16. I Tengo el gusto de liablar con el Dr. Garridol * 17. Servidor de Vd.^ Hagame Vd. el favor de pasar adelante.^ 18. I Desde cuando se siente Yd. indispuesto? ^ 19. Desde anoche ; estaba sudando al salir ^ del teatro, y cogi Tin f uerte resfriado. 20. I No se siente Vd. mejor* ahora? 21. Al contrario, me siento mucho peor.* 22. Deme Vd. eP pulso. Ensenerne Vd. la^ lengua. 23. I Cree Vd. que es grave, doctor ? 24. No, sefior; todo lo que Vd. esta experiinentando proviene del cambio de clima. 25. Envie Vd. esta receta a la botica, y tome una cuclia- rada pequefia ^ de la medicina cada "^ dos boras. 26. Si no se siente Vd. mejor, hagame el favor de volver ^ dentro de tres dias. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 17. Servant of you. Do me you the favor of to pass ahead. 19. Since last night ; (1) was perspiring to the to leave {al salir) of the theatre, and (I) caught a strong cold. 1 See page 92, note 1. ^ Pasar adelante means to walk in, 3 The infinitive with al is very often used instead of a subordinate clause beginning with a conjunction of time; as, when^ after ^ while^ a«; ahz., al entrar en casa, me encontre con 8U carta, when entering the house, I found your letter. ■* See note 1, page 48, " comparison of adverbs.'* * When the Spanish implies any part of the body, the possessive adjective lecciOn novena. 135 PRONUNCIACION. 16. ^ . . . . Gah-rree'-doh ? 17 ah-day-lahng'-tay. 18. I, . . . . ing-dis-pways'-toh ? 19 soo-dahng'-doh .... koh- hee' .... rais-free-ah'-doh. 20 21 kohng-trah'-ree-oh .... 22 pool'-soh .... laing'- gwah. 23. ^ . . . . grah'-vay dok-tohrr' ? 24 ays-pay-ree-maing'-tahng- doh .... kahm'-bee-oh . . . . klee'-mah. 25 rray-thay'-tah .... boh- tee'-kah .... koo-chah-rah'- dah .... 26 vohl-vayrr' .... TRADUCCION. 16. Have I the pleasure of speak- ing to Dr. Garrido f 17. At your service, sir. Please come inside. 18. Since when have you felt your- self indisposed f 19. Since last night. I was per- spiring when leaving the theatre, and I caught a vio- lent cold. 20. DoriH you feel better now f 21. On the contrary, I feel much worse. 22. Let me feel your pulse. Show me your tongue. 23. Do you think it very had, doc- tor 9 24. No, sir ; what you are experi- encing proceeds from change of climate. 25. Send this prescription to the drug-store, and take a tea- spoonful of the medicine every two hours. 26. If you do not feel letter, come again within three days. is not used, but the deiinite article el or la. Deme Vd. el pulso, for instance, instead of su pulso ; enseneme Vd. la lengua instead of su lengua. « Cuchara, spoon ; cucharada, spoonful. Cuchara pequena (small spoon) is rendered by teaspoon, and cucharada pequena for teaspoonful. 7 Cada is indeclinable, and means each as well as every, as, cada nno, each one or every one ; cada homhre, cada mujer^ etc. It is used in the plural when numerals are introduced instead of every in English ; as, cada dos horas, every two hours ; cada dos dias, cada veinticinco anos, etc. 8 Volver (to return, to turn, to come back) is an irregular verb. Class IT. Volver a hacer algo (to do something again); as, vuelva Vd., come again. The expression again has no literal equivalent in Spanish, but it is rendered by volver a or otra vez (another time). 136 LECCi6n D^CIMA. LECCI6N DJgCIMA, La Mesa y los Aliment os (continuacion). XTn platillo (plah-teel'-lyo) . XJn jarro (hah'-rroh) Una botella (boh-tayl'-lya) . TJn tirabuz6n (tee-rah-boo-thong') Xa Casa. •blah La escalera .... Los escalones . . . TJn piso XJn cuarto, una habitaci6n TJn cuarto amueblado (ah-muay La sala TJn sal6n .... El comedor (koh-may-dohrr') TJn dormitorio (dohrr-mee-toh'-ree-oh) La ventana . Los cristales . La cortina La biblioteca. El cuarto de bano El excusado, el retrete El jardin (hahr-ding') . El patio (pah'-tee-oh) El subsuelo; la bodega TJna alacena (ah-lah-thay'-nah) La puerfca, la cerradura La Have . El cerrojo La cocina {koh-thie-nah) El §bano. La caoba Nogal negro . El gas Encender Apagar . . a pitcher, a Jug. . a bottle, . a corkscrew. -doh) . the staircase, . the stairs, steps, . a floor, . a room, . a furnished room, , the parlor. . a large room, . the dining-room, , a bedroom, , the window. , the window-panes, , the curtain, . the library, , the bath-room, , the water-closet, , the garden, . the yard, the basement ; the cellar a closet, the door, the lock, the key, the bolt. the kitchen, the ebony, the mahogany, black walnut, the gas, to light, to put out {light). LECCldN DfiCIMA. 187 Numeros Fraccionarios,^ h) La mitad^ (mee-tath') . Un medio (may'-dee-oh) Un tercio (tair'-thie-oh) Dos tercios . Un cuarto Tres cuartos . Un quinto (king'-toh) . Un decimo (day'-thie-moh) Un undecimo (oong-day'-thie-mo: Un dozavo^ (doh-thah'-voh) Un trezavo^ (tray-thah'-voh) Un catorzavo (kah-tohrr-tha'-voh) Un quinzavo (king-thah'-voh) Un dieciseisavo (deeay'-thie-sayee-sah Un dieciochavo (deeay'-thie-oh-ehah' Un veintavo^ (vay'-ing-tah'-voh) Un treintavo^ (tray'-ing-tah'-voh) Un centavo^ (thaing-tah'-voh) . Un milavo^ . the half. . one half. . one third. . two thirds. . one fourth. . three fourths, . one fifth, . one tenth. ' . one eleventh, . one twelfth. . one thirteenth, . one fourteenth, . one fifteenth, voh) one sixteeiith, oh) . one eighteenth, , one twentieth, . one thirtieth. . one hundredth^ one cent . 07ie thousandth. JV^meros Colectivos.^ Un par (parr) a pair, couple, Una decena (day-thay'-nah) Una docena (doh-thay'-nah) Una quincena (king-thay'-nah) Una veintena Una centena. Un miliar (mil-lyahrr') . a number of ten, a dozen. a number of fifteen, a score. a number of hundred. a number of thousand. 1 Noo'-may-rohs frahk-thie-oh-nah'-ree-ohs, fractional numbers. 2 Mitad is synonymous with medio, but the former is a noun, while the latter is an adjectwe. Medio and the other fractions take the feminine form when speaking of measures — as, libra (lee'-brah), pound ; 'vara (vah'-rah), yard, etc. — even if these nouns are not expressed ; as, media libra de azucar (ah-^Aoo'-kahrr), a lialf-pound of sugar ; una cuarta de pano (pah'-nyo;, a quarter of a yard of cloth. 3 In the fractional numbers the particle a'vo corresponds to the English th^ and is declinable : avo (masc), ava (fem.) ; avos (mas. pi.), avas (pi., fern.). 4 Koh-layk-tee -vohs, collective numbers. 138 lecci6n decima. ESPASfOL. 1. Hagame^ Yd. el favor de decir al criado que nos sirva ^ el almuerzo inmediatamente. 2. Senor, el almuerzo esta servido j el Sr. Diaz espera dYd. 3. Digale ^ que me haga ^ el favor de pasar al comedor. ^ 4. Muy bien venido caballero.^ Me alegro ^ mucho de que me acompane Vd. a almorzar. 5. i Jorge !, traiga una silla para el sefior.^ * G. I Que puedo '^ of recerle ^ a Yd. ? i Toma Yd. te 6 cafe ? 7. Preiiero el cafie. * 8. Alii ^ tiene Yd. pavo, pato y polio ; i que prefiere Yd.? * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 4. Very well come gentleman. Myself (I) gladden much of that (to) me may accompany you to breakfast. 6. What can (I) (to) offer you (le) to you 1 .... 8. There have you turkey, duck, and chicken ; what prefers you? 1 Bdga is the imperative of the irregular verb hacer (to do). 2 Sirva (may serve) is the subjunctive present of the irregular verb servir (to serve). See irregular verbs. 3 Diga (say), imperative, third person singular, of the irregular verb decir (to say, to tell). Digo^ first person singular, indicative present. 4 Haga (may do) is the subjunctive present of hacer. After verbs ex- pressive of command^ desire, wish^ entreat?/, permission, concession, fear, or caution, the subjunctive mood must be used. This mood is also used after terms denoting emotion, such as Jo?/, grief, 'vexation, etc. Whenever a gov- erning verb requires the dependent verb in the subjunctive mood ; if the gov- erning verb is in the present, future, or imperative, the dependent verb must stand in the present subjunctive, or perfect definite, accordingly ; as, dudo que T.ie hay a oido (I doubt whether he may have heard me) ; dudare LECCI(5n DfiCIMA. 139 PRONUNCIACION. 1, Ah'-gah-may .... kree-ah'-doh .... ahl-mwayr'-^Aoh .... 2 Dee'-ahth 3. Dee'-gah-lay .... koh-may- dohrr'. 4o . . . . vay-nee'-doh kah-bal- lyay'-ro .... ah-lay'-groh 5. j Hohr'-hay ! trah'ee-gah .... 6. ^Kay' pway'-doh oh-fray- thair'-lay . . , A 7. Pray-feeay'-roh .... 8. Ah-ee' .... pah'-voh, pah'-to ee pohl'-lyo .... TRADUCCION. 1. Please tell the servant to serve us breakfast immediately, 2. Sir, breakfast is served, and Mr. Diaz is waiting for you, 3. Tell him to oblige me by pass- ing into the dining-room, 4. Welcome, sir ! I am very glad to have your company at breakfast, 5. George, bring a chair for the gentleman, 6. What can I offer you f Do you take tea or coffee 9 7. I prefer coffee. 8. There are turkey, duck, and chicken; which do you prefer 9 que me oiga (I shall doubt that he may hear me). In the same manner if the governing verb is in the past or future conditional, the dependent verb must stand in either one of the indefinites ra or se, both being equivalent; as, dudaha, or dude, or dudaria de que hdblara (or de que hahlase). s Caballero means gentleman ; either senor or caballero is correct in this sense. « Me alegro (I am glad), from alegrarse (to gladden, to be glad), is a re- flexive verb (see page 91, note 6). ' Puedo (I can), first person indicative present of the irregular verb poder (to be able) ; no puedo (I can not). The English expression may he is ren- dered in Spanish by puede ser. 8 Usted, ustedes, in the indirect object, are le-a Vd., and les-d Vds. (pi.). » Aki (ah-ee'), alii (ahl-lyee'), meaning there. AM indicates a place near the person addressed, while alii means somewhere distant from the place of conversation. Acd (here, hither) and alia (there, thither) are used when motion is implied; as, venga Vd. acd, come here (hither); vaya Vd. alia, go there (thither). Alia, when no motion is implied, means a place at a great distance in a somewhat indeterminate way: as, ^que sucede alldf what hap- pens there ? In writing to some one in a distant place, acd means here with- out implying motion, and in an indeterminate way; as, acd todos estamoa bien (we are all well in our locality). 140 LECCldN DECIMA. ESPAS(0L. 9. Tomare un poco de pavo, pero deme ^ Vd. muj ^ poco (poquisiiijo^). ^'10. Sirvase^ Yd. pasarme la mantequilla ^ y un pane- cillo.^ "^11. J Que le gusta^ a Vd. mas; panecillos, tostadas 6 pan? "^12. Espero que el cafe este a gusto de Vd. 13. Esta excelente. 14. g Tiene Vd. bastante azucar ^ ? 15. g Que mds puedo servirle a Vd. ? Si necesita Vd. algo digalo con franqueza, sin ceremonia. 16. I Es hora ja'^ de salir ? * 17. Si, senor ; el tren sale a las doce y son ya las once y media. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 10. Serve yourself (to) pass me the butter and a roll. 11. What to you (le) pleases to you more; rolls, toasts, or bread? 12. (I) hope that the coffee may be to taste of you (to your taste). 17. Yes, sir; the train leaves at the twelve, and are already the eleven and half. 1 The inflection of the voice in Spanish always indicates whether the sense is a request or a command, and the expression if you please (si Vd, gusta) is generally omitted. 2 The superlative.is formed with muy (very), as in English ; but in Span- ish there is another form, stronger in meaning, the suffix isimo (masc), isima (fern.), isimos (masc. pi.), isimas (fem. pi.), added to the adjective instead of the last vowel ; as, from mucho^ muchisimo (very very much) ; grande^ grand/lsimo (very very large) ; or added to the last letter, should this be a consonant; as, from fdcil^ facilisimo (very very easy), etc. Adjectives in co or go^ ca or ga^ change these syllables into quisimo, guisimo^ qwisima^ guisima, respectively, for the sake of orthography ; aS( lecci6n decima. 141 PRONUNOIACION. 9 (poh-kee'-see-moh). 10. Seer'-vah-say mahng-tay- keel'-lya ipah-nsLj-thieV- lyo. 11. ^ . . . . pah-nay-^/^iel'-lyohs pahng' ? 12 13. Ays-tah' ays-thay-laing'-tay. 14. ^ . . . . ah-^Aoo'-kahrr ? 15 frahng-kay'-thah, sing thay-ray-moh'-neeah. 16. ^...yah....f 17 TRADUCCION. 9, I will take some turkey, but please ^ give me very little {very, very little). 10. Pray pass me the butter and a rolL 11. What do you like best; rolls, toast, or bread f 12. / hope the coffee is to your taste. 13. It IS excellent, 14. Have you enough sugar 9 15. What else can I help you to 9 Should you need anything, speak freely, without cere- mony. Is it already time to start 9 Yes, air; the train leaves at twelve, and it is now half eleven. 16. 17. from poco, poquisimo (very very little) ; largo, larguisimo (very very long). Those ending in ble change to lilisimo, and those in io into isimo ; as, from amable, admirable, etc. , amabilisimo, admirabilisimo, etc. ; and from limpio (clean), sucio (dirty), etc., limpisimo, sudsimo, etc. 8 Sirvase, imperative of servirse, is equivalent in this sense to please in English, and is synonymous with hdgame Vd. el favor, or tenga Vd. la bondad. 4 Mantequilla (butter), diminutive of manteca (lard). Fanecillo, diminu- tive of pan (bread), (see page 132, note 6), is the rendition of roll. 6 Ghistar (to please, to like), derived from the noun gusto (pleasure), is nearly always an impersonal verb: gle gusta a Vd.f (does it please you?). In Spanish the person does not like the thing, but the thing likes (or is pleas- ant) to the person ; therefore the indirect object pronouns, me, te, le, nos, os, les, must be used in connection with this verb. Gustar de means to be fond of, « Azucar is masculine, as are all nouns ending in r, with the exceptions of lafior (the flower) ; la labor (the labor) ; la mar or el mar (the sea) ; la plea- mar (play'-ah-mahrr'), (the high tide) ; and la bajamar (bah'-hah-mahrr'), (the ebb tide). 7 The adverb ya signifies discmitinuance of a former state; it is the equiva- lent of already ; as, ya ha llegado (he has already arrived). 11 142 lecci6n decima. espaSol. 18. i Juan!, digale Vd, al cochero que nos lleve^ a la estacion ^ lo mds aprisa posible. *19. Le ruego a Vd. que me diga^ en donde esta el despacho de billetes. ^20. ^Cuanto cuesta un billete^ de ida y vuelta al Escorial ^ ? 21. jPor cuanto tiempo es valido un billete de ida y vuelta ? 22. Un billete de ida y vuelta es bueno por diez dias. *23. ^ Donde esta el despacho de equipajes^? Deseo f acturar ^ mis baules.* 24. Hagame Vd. el favor de darme la factura^ (el talon) de mi equipaje.^ ^ 25. Hela"^ aqui, senor. ^ TRADUCCION LITERAL. 19. To you (le) (I) pray to you that to me [me) may say in where is the office of tickets. 20. How much costs a ticket of gone and returned to the Escorial f 23. Where is the office of baggages ? (I) wish to invoice (to check) my trunks. 25. Have it here, sir. 1 See note 4, page 138, use of the aubjunctive. 2 The greater part of English nouns ending in Hon are rendered in Span- ish by changing the letter ^ to c; as, station^ approbation^ education^ etc., hecoming estacion, aprohacibn, educacibn, etc. Nouns ending in n are mascu- line, but are feminine those in ion (see page 31, note 4), and all abstract nouns in on ; as, la razbn (the reason), etc., besides la din or crin (the horse-hair) ; LECCI6N DfiCIMA. 143 18. PRONUNCTACION. ; Hoo-ahng' ! . TRADUCCION. poh-see'-blay. 19. Lay rooay'-goh . . . . ah-pree'-sah 18. John, tell the coachmari to take us to the station as rapidly as possible. 19. Pray tell me where the ticket- office is. 20. ^ Ays-koh-ree-ahr ? 21 vah'-lee-doh .... 22 23 fak-too-rahrr' oo'-lays. 24 fak-too'-rah .... 25. Ay'-lah bah- 20. How much is an excursion- ticket to the Escorial 9 21. For what length of time is the excursion-ticket valid 9 22. An excursion-ticket is good for ten days. 23. Where is the baggage-office 9 I wish to check my trunks. 24. Please give me a check for my baggage, 25. Here it is, sir. la imagen (ee-mah'-haing), (the image) ; la sarten (the frying-pan) ; la sazbn (the seasoning) ; and la sien (the temple). El orden {the order, arrangement of things) is masculine ; but feminine, la orden {the order, command). 3 See note 6, page 47. 4 Nouns ending in I are masculine;- as, el haul (bah-ool'), (the trunk), pi., lo8 haules. The exceptions to this rule are: la cat (kahl'), (the lime) ; la capital {the capital of a country) {el capital {the capital, money) is mascu- line] ; la carcel (kahr'-thail), (the jail); la col (the cabbage) ; la miel (mee- ail'), (the honey) ; la piel (pee-ail'), (the skin) ; la sal (the salt) ; la serial (the sign, the signal) ; la vocal (the vowel) ; and la moral (the moral). s Equipaje is either rendered by haggage or equipage. « Facturar (fak-too-rahr ), lit., to invoice, means to check lag gage ; factura (fak-too'-rah) means haggage-chech as well as invoice. 7 See page 104, " imperative." Hilo, hela aqui (here it is) ; Mlo, hela alii (there it is); Mlos, helas aqid (here they are); helos, Mlas alii (there they are). IM LECCI6N UNDECIMA. LECCI6N UNDECIMA. Muehles, La mesa Tin escritorio (ays-kree-toh'-ree-oh) . Una silla (seel'-lya) Una butaca, un sofa Una mecedora Un canap^ . Un banco Una lampara Un armario (ahr-mah' Un estante de libros Una c6nioda El tocador^ (toh-kah-dohrr') El espejo (ays-pay '-hoh) El caj6n2 (kah-hohng') Un cuadro (kwah'-droh) El marco de un cuadro . Una pintura. un grabado (grab- Una vela, un candelero La luz^ (looth'), el gas^ (gahss' Una arana de luces . Una cama .... Un colcli6n (kohl-chohng') . Un colchon de muelles (mwayl'-lyays) Una almohada (ahl-moh-ah'-dah) Una funda de almohada (foong'-dah) Un almoliad6n (ahl-moh-ah-dong') . the table. a writing-desh, a chair. an arm-chair, a sofa, a rocking-chair. a lounge, a couch; a bench. a lamp. a wardrobe. a book-case. a chest of drawers, the bureau. the mirror. the drawer, a picture. the frame of a picture. a painting, an engraving, a candle, a candlestick. the light, the gas. a chandelier, a bed. a mattress. a spring-mattress, a pillow. a pillow-case, a cushion. bah'-doh) a painting. 1 See note 6, page 141. 2 See note 2, page 142. 8 Nouns ending in are masculine, with the exceptions of la cruz^ the cross ; la luz, the light ; la nariz, the nose ; la raiz, the root ; la paz, the peace ; la 'vez^ the turn, the time ; and la doz, the voice. All abstract nouns ending in ez are likewise feminine ; as, la ninez, the childhood ; la vejez,, old age ; la embriaguez, intoxication, etc. 4 Nouns terminating in s are masculine, with the exceptions of la tos, the cough ; la bills, the bile ; la tisis, the phthisis, consumption ; and all such nouns derived from the Greek. Cutis (skin, of human beings) and andlisis (analysis) are either masculine or feminine. lecci6n und^cima. 145 Adjetivos Multiples y de Hepeticidn} Simple (seem'-play) . single. Doble (doh^-blay) . . double. Triple (tree'-play) . , treble. Cuadruplo or Quadruple . , quadruple. auintuplo or quintuple . , quintuple. Sextuple or sextuple . , sextuple. Septuple or septuple . , septuple. dctuplo or 6ctuple , octuple. N6nuplo or ii6nuple . . nonuple. Decuple or decuple . decuple. Centuplo. . . . , centuple. Una vez (vayth') . , once. Dos veces^ (vay'-thays) . , twice. Tres veces, etc. , three times, etc. Cien veces .... . one hundred times. Un millon de veces . , one million times. Esta vez .... , this time. Otra vez , another time. Cada vez .... , each time. Aquella vez .... , that time. iSsta, aquella y la otra vez , this, that, and the other time. Kara vez .... , seldom. La primera vez . . . . the first time. La ultima vez i the last time. La postrera vez . La proxima vez . . the next time. Algunas veces , sometimes. Varias veces .... . several times. Muchas veces , many times. Pocas veces .... , few times. Todas las veces . , all times. A menudo .... , often. 1 Ahd-hay-tee'-vohs mool'-tee-plays, etc., muUiplicate adjectives^ etc. 2 To form the plural of words ending in z, change zto c and add es (com- pare page 15, letter Z) ; as, for instance, The plural of pez (payth'),^sA, i&peces; The plural of Juez (hoo-a.jth'), Judge, isjueces; The plural of vez (vayth'), time, is veces. 146 lecci6n undecima. ESPASfOL. ' 1. I Que clase de tierapo hace ^ hoy ? 2. Hace un tiempo delicioso. El tiempo estd^ hermo sisimo.^ 3. Abra Vd. la ventana y mire como esta^ el tiempo. * 4. Hace ^ un sol esplendido,^ pero hace mucho ^ f rio. * 5. ^ A cuantos grados esta el termometro ? j Esta bajo 6 sobre cero ? 6. El termometro esta a cuatro grados bajo cero. 7. Me parece que vamos a tener mal tierapo ; el baro- metro senala lluvia. * 8. El barometro ha subido (ha bajado) ; temo que tengamos^ agua."' * 9. La tormenta se acerca ; ya hace mucho ^ viento. Hay mucho lodo (fango) en las calles. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 1. What kind of weather makes to-day ? 4. (It) makes a sun splendid, but (it) makes much cold, o. At how many degrees is the thermometer ? .... 8. The barometer has risen (has fallen); (I) fear that (we) may have water. 9. The storm itself approaches, already makes much wind. There is much mud in the streets. 1 Hace (makes, does), from kacer (to do, to make), when referring to the weather is rendered idiomatically, instead of to he in English. Hace calor (lit., it makes heat)^ it is warm; hace viento {it makes wind)^ it is windy; hace polvo {it makes dv.st)^ it is dusty ; hace sol^ luna {it Tnakes sun^ moon)^ the sun, the moon is shining, etc. 2 When tiempo is used in connection with adverbs or adjectives, the con- struction may be ibrmcd as in English, the verb estar being used instead of lecci6n undecima. 147 PRONUNCIACION. 1. ^ ah'-thay . . . . ? 2 day-lee-thie-oh'-soh .... air-moh-see'-see-moh. 3 4 ays-plaing'-dee-doh .... free'-oh. 5. ^ . . . . tairr-moh'-may-troh ? ^ bah'-hoh ? 6 7 say-nyah'-lah lyoo'-vee- ah. 8 bah-hah'-doh .... ah'- gwah. 9. . . . ah-thayr'-kah . . . vee-aing'- toh .... kahl'-lyays. TRADUCCION. 1. What kind of weather is it to- day 9 2. It is delightful weather. The weather is beautiful. 3. Open the window and look how the weather is. 4. The sun shines splendidly, but it is very cold. 5. How does the thermometer stand 9 Is it below or above zero 9 6. The thermometer is four de- grees below zero. 7. It seems to me that we are going to have bad weather ; the barometer points to rain. 8- The barometer has risen (has fallen) ; I am afraid we are going to have rain. 9. The storm is approaching ; it is very windy now. There is a gr^at deal of mud in the streets. hacer\ viz., cbmo estd el diaf el tiempo esta Jiermosisimo^ el dia estd frio, el verano esta muy caluroso. 3 See page 140, note 2. » •* See note 1. Hace un sol esplendido^ or el sol brilla esplendidamente. 5 MucTio is used instead of muy in connection with the verb Jiacer^ when referrino: to the weather ; as, hace mucho frio, it is very cold ; hace muclio calor^ it is very warm ; hace mucho sol, it is very sunny, etc. Observe, also, tiiat mu7/, though generally translated by 'veri/ or very much, can never qualify a verb or stand alone in discourse; viz., is it very cold to-day? it is very ; 4 hace mucho frio hoy? si, mucho; does he speak very well? yes, very ; / habla {el) muy Men f si, mucho. 8 The subjunctive mood must be used after verbs denoting fear, doubt^ possibility, command, wish, permission, desire, etc. (see page 138, note 4). ^ In speaking of the weather, agua (water) is often used instead of lluvia (rain). 148 lecci6n undecima. ESPAJsOL. * 10. I A cuantos grados llega el termo metro en Espana ? * 11. En el sur de Espana el mercuric asciende ^ algunas veces hasta ciento cinco grados d la sombra. * 12. I Y hasta cuantos grados baja^ en Madrid ? 13. En Castilla^ tenemos a menudo quince y veinte grados sobre cero. *14. En el sur nunca^ desciende^ mas de^ cuarenta 6 cuarenta y cinco grados. *15. El invierno debe de^ ser, por lo tanto, muy agra- dable alli.''^ ■^ 16. J No cree Vd. que va a Hover ? * 17. Esta muy nublado,^ pero creo que bace demasiado frio para que llueva. * TRADUCCIOX LITERAL. 10. At how many degrees arrives the thermometer in Spain ? 11. In the south of Spain the mercury ascends sometimes until hundred five degrees to the shade. 12. And until how many degrees comes down in Madrid ? 14. In the south never descends more of forty or forty and five degrees. 15. The winter must be therefore (por lo tanto) very agreeable there. 16. Not believe you that goes to (to) rain ? 17. It is very cloudy, but (I) believe that it makes too cold for that may rain. 1 Asciende^ third person singular, present indicative, of the irregular verb ascender (to ascend). See Class I, irregular verbs, 2d ^emplo. ^ Baja^ from bajar (to come down, to descend); descender may also be LECCION UNDECIMA. 149 PRONUNCIACION. 10. ^ lyay'-gah ? 11 ahl-goo'-nahs vay'-thays .... sohm'-brah. 12. ^ . . . . bah'-hah ? 13 Kas-teel'-lyah .... 14 noong'-kah des-thie- aing'-day .... 15 ah-grah-da'-blay ahl'- lyee'. 16. ^ . . . . lyoh'-vayrr' ? 17 noo-blah'-doh .... day- mah-seeah'-doh lyway'- vah. traducci6n. 10. How many degrees does the ther- mometer reach in Spain f 11. In the south of Spain the mer- cury sometimes ascends to one hundred and five de- grees m the shade. 12. And how far does it descend in Madrid 9 13. In Castile we often have fifteen and twenty degrees above zero. 14. In the south it never descends more than forty or forty-five degrees. 15. The winter there must there- fore he very agreeable, 16. DonH you think it is going to rain 9 17. It is very cloudy, but I think it is too cold to rai7i. employed; irregular verb, the present of which, third person singular, is desciende^ Class I. Suhir means to ascend^ to go up. 3 Oastilla (kahs-teel'-lyah) is the name of a kingdom in Spain, the capital of which is Madrid, whence the name Castellano is derived, or lengua de Cdstilla (Castilian tongue). 4 Nunca, jamas (never), are synonymous, and may be used in connection with no or without it. Ko always precedes the verb ; as, no desciende nunca ; but is omitted when the other negative precedes it, as, nunca desciende (see page 24, note 2). For emphasis, nunca and jamas are both expressed ; as, nunca jamas desciende or no desciende nunca jamas. When jamas is con- nected with para siempre, it means quite the opposite of never (ever) ; as, para siempre jamas, for ever and ever. In interrogations, jamas stands also for ever when no other negative is present; as, 4 ha visto Vd. jamas esof have you ever seen that ? ^ See note 5, page 89. 6 Deber (see note 2, page 40) is rendered by to owe, to he ohliged to ; deber de, by must ; as, debe de ser, it must be ; el debia llegar, he ought to arrive. 7 See page 139, note. 9. 8 Nube is cloud ; nublado, clouded, from nublar, to be cloudy. 150 lecci6n undecima. ESPA5fOL. ^18. Ya esta nevando. Debe^ Vd. ponerse su imper- meable/ puesto que ^ un paraguas ^ no le serviria ^ para^ nada. * 19. I No tiene Vd. zapatos de goma ? ^^ 20. No ha hecho tanto '^ frio (calor) en todo el invierno, (verano, primavera, otono). 21. ^No cree Vd. que hace demasiado^ calor para^ la presente estacion ^ ? * 22. El calor es sof ocante. No corre ^^ ni ^^ el mds Hgero aire. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 18. Already (it) is snowing. Must you to put yourself your water- proof (mpermeable), since {puesto que) an umbrella not to you would serve for nothing. 19. Not have you shoes of rubber ? 20. Not has made so much cold (warmth) in all the winter (summer, spring, autumn). 22. The warmth is suffocating. Not runs neither tlie more slight air. 1 See note 6 on page 149. ' Impermeable has the same signification as in English, only that in Span- ish it is also used as a noun, and stands for a water-proof coat\ while in English it is always an adjective applied to a material impervious to rain. 3 Puesto que is a conjunction, and stands for since. * Paraguas (pah-rah'-gwahs), um^brella^ is a compound word of para (for) and agua (water), \\t., for water. Paraguas is masculine, the same as all nouns ending in s ; see page 144, note 4. 5 Servir^ to serve, to be useful : esto no slrve^ this is of no use ; esto no sirve para nada, this is good for nothinij. « Para conveys the general idea of e^ect. Por (see page 130, note 4) is caicse. Para stands for : 1. In order to ; as, Comemos para mvir y no vivimos para "We eat to (in order to) live, and we comer. do not live to (in order to) eat. 2. About to (see page 127, No. 8) ; as, E«loy para salir. I am about to go out (on the point of going out). lecci6n undecima. 151 PRONUNCIACION. TRADUCCION. 18. Yah' .... im-pair-may-ah'- 18. It is already snowing. You blay pa-rah'-gwahs .... must put on your rubber coat, as an umbrella would be of no use to you. 19. o . . . 19. Have you no rubber shoes ? 20 (pree-ma-vay'-rali) .... 20. It has not been so cold (warm) in all the winter, {summer, spring, autumn). 21. ^ . . . . pray-saing'-tay . . . . ? 21. Don't you think it too warm for the present season ? 22 so-pho-kahng'-tay .... 22. The heat is suffocating. There koh'-rray nee .... lee-hay'- is not a breath of air. roh ah'-ee-ray. 3. Purpose^ in expressing the object things are made or intended for; as, Plumapara escribir. Pen to write with. Estapluma no sirvepara escribir. This pen is of no use to write with. 4. Para is rendered for for in English to express destination'^ viz., Saldre para Europa manana. I shall leave for Europe to-morrow. Este libra es para su hermano de Vd. This book is for your brother. 5. When referring to time ; as, Esta es la leccibn para el jueves. This is the lesson for Thursday. Lo dejo para manana. I leave it for (or until) to-morrow. 6. In place of in relation to, in comparison, to ; as, Sahe mucho para lo poco que ha He knows (or has learned) a great leido. deal for [in comparison to) the little he has read. Juan es muy alto para su edad. John is very tall for {in relation to) his age. 7 Compare page 101, note 3. ^ Demasiado (masc), demasiada (fern.), (too or too much), demasiados^ demasiadas (too many), is declinable. ^ Estacion means either station or season. 10 Corre (lit., runs) is used idiomatically in Spanish referring to the wind, as in English to blow. 11 Ni ni is rendered for neither nor', as, no hace ni frio ni color, it is neither cold nor warm. In Spanish all negative phrases must be accompanied by the verb in negative form. See note 4, page 149, and page 24, note 2. 152 LECCldN UNDECIMA. espa5?ol. ^23. El clima^ aqui es muy htimedo, j la bnmedad^ hace el calor mas intense, lo mismo^ que^ el frio. ■^ 24. Hay mucha niebla, pero creo que ahora se levanta una suave brisa. *25. Ya bace mucbo^ viento. Cierre Yd. la puerta; temo coger un resfriado. *26. Hay una corriente muy desagradable, y ademas,^ las corrientes son siempre peligrosas. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 23. The climate here is very damp, and the dampness makes the warmth more intense the same than the cold. 24. There is much fog, but I believe that now itself arises a soft breeze. 25. Already makes much wind. Shut you the door; (I) fear (to) catch a cold. 26. There is a draught very disagreeable, and besides, the draughts are always dangerous. 1 Clima (see page 36, note 3) is masculine, notwithstanding the termina- tion a. 2 Hutnedad (see page 85, note 3) is feminine, like most nouns ending in d. lecci6n undecima. 153 23. PRONUNCIACION. . oo'-raay-doh . . . oo-may- dath' , mis'-moh . 24. „ . . . nee-ay' -blah .... 25 vee-aing'-toh .... rays- free-ah'-doh. 26 coh-ree-aing'-tay . . . . ah-day-mahs' .... pay-lee- gro'-sahs. 23 24. TRADUCCION. The climate here is very damp, and the humidity makes the heat, as well as the cold, more intense. It is very foggy, hut I think that a slight breeze is now arising. 25. Now it is very windy. Shut the door ; I fear to catch cold. 26. There is a very disagreeable draught, and draughts, moreover, are always dan- gerous. 3 Mismo {misma, mismoa, mismas) means same, and in some cases self ; as, al mismo tiempo, at the same time ; el liombre mismo, the man himself. Mismo is used idiomatically in connection with some words ; viz., hoy mismo, this very day; ahora mismo, this very moment (just now) ; aqui {alii) mismo, in this (that) very place (right here, there) ; m^anana mismo (to-morrow cer- tam), etc. Que must follow after mismo in comparison, as in this instance : lo mismo que elfrio. With the pronouns yo, tu, el, etc., it becomes reflexive ; as, 2/0 mismo (misma), I myself; tu mismo (misma), thou thyself;' el m,ismo, he himself; ella misma, she herself; nosotros (nosotras) mismos (mismas), we ourselves ; vosotros (vosotras) mismos (mismas), ye (yourselves) ; Vdso mismos (mismas), you yourselves ; uno mismo, una misma, one's self. * For using mucho (much) instead of muy (very), see page 147, note 5. 6 Ademas stands for besides or moreover. 154 LECCI6X DUODECIMA. LECCI6N DUODECIMA. Muehles (continuacidn). Una alfombra . . . . . , a carpet. Un tapete a rug (carpet). a matting. the sheets. the spread, a blanket. a woolen blanket. a towel. Una estera Las sabanas La colcha, una manta . Un cobertor (koh-bair-tohr') Una toalla (toh-ahl'-lyah) La escupidera .the cuspidor. La palangana the hasin. El palanganero the ivash-stand. El bano (bah'-nyoh) the hath. El jarro (hah'-rroh) the pitcher. El cubo the pail. El Fuego y sus Accesorios} La chimenea, el fogbn . . . .the chimney, the fireplace, Un f6sforo, una cerilla (thay-reel'-lya) . a match. La lumbre (loom'-bray) El fuego (f way'-goh) . El carb6n 2 El carb6n de piedra^ La lena^ (lay'-nya) . La ceniza (thay-nee'-thah) La llama (lyah'-mah) Las ascuas (ahs'-kwahs) Las tenazas El humo* (oo'-moh) . t the fire. y the coal. . the fire-wood. . the asJies. . the flame. . the live coals. . the tongs. . the smoke. 1 Ahc-thay-sohrios, the fire and its appurtenances, 2 Carbon (kahr-bohng') refers generally to charcoal, while carbon de piedra (lit., coal of stone) is rendered by coal. 3 There are two different names for wood in Spanish : lena means fire- wood, while madera signifies all kinds of wood for manufacturing purposes. Board is rendered by tahla. * Though Jiumo stands for smohe, the verb to smohe is fumar^ regular verb of the first conjugation. LECCI(5N duodecima. 155 Partes del Mundo} Hahitantes? Europa (ay-oo-roh'-pah) . . Europe . . El europeo.^ America (ah-may'-ree-kah) . America . El americano. Australia (ah-oos-trah'-lee-ah) . Australia . El australiano. Asia (ah'-siah) . . Asia . . El asiatico. Africa (ah'-free-kah) . Africa . . El africano. Eeinos, Imperios y Repiiblicas} Nacionalidades, Alemania . . Germany . El aleman. Austria . . Austria . El austriaco. Belgica . Belgium . El belga. Espana . . Spai7h . . El espanol. Estados XJnido s . United Stati 3s . El americano del norte. Erancia . . France . El frances. Holanda . . Holland . El holandes. Inglaterra . England . El ingles. Italia , Italy . . El italiano. Grecia . Greece . . El griego. Portugal . . Portugal . El portugues. Prusia . Prussia . El prusiano. Sajonia . Saxony . El saj6n. Suecia . Sweden . El sueco. Suiza . . Switzerland . El suizo. Noruega . . Norway . El noruego. Turquia . . Turkey . El turco. Hungria . . Hungary . El hungaro. Rusia . Russia . El ruso. China . China. . El chino. Jap6ii . Japan . . El japones. Mejico . 3Iexico . El mejicano. Nicaragua . Nicaragua . El nicaragiiense. Guatemala . Guatemala . El guatemalteco. Costa Rica . Costa Pica . El costarricense. Sa-lvador . . Salvador . El salvadorense. Honduras . . Honduras . El hondurense. 1 Fart» of the i vorld. 2 Inhahitants, 3 See page 21, note 6. * Kingdoms^ empires^ and republics. 156 lecci6n duod^cima. ESPASfOL. 1. Pregunte^ Vd. a Dn.^ Juan Lopez cuando necesita ese dinero. 2. Lo necesita inraediatamente, pues ^ tiene que com- prar los ef ectos hoy. ^3. g En donde piensa el hacerse ^ la ropa ^ ? 4. En la sastreria de la esquina^ de la calle Veinti- nueve y Broadway. El Sr.^ Fuentes es un buen sastre. *5. Buenos dias, senor Fuentes. Deseo mandarme hacer^ un traje.'' *6. Le ruego a Vd. que me ensene los generos mas nuevos para ternos.' 7. Hdgame Vd. el favor de tomarme medida. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 3. In where thinks he to make himself the cloth ? 5 I wish to command myself to make a suit of clothes (traje), 6. To you (le) I beg to you that to me {me) may show the goods more new for suit of clothes (ternos). > Preguntar (to ask, to inquire) means to ask for information, and the verbs contestar or responder (to answer, to reply) are used in response ; pre- gunte Vd. is the imperative of the first-named verb. Pedir (to ask for) signi- fies to ash in order to receive something. 2 The English appellations Mr. and Mrs. are rendered in Spanish : Mr. by Don (abbreviation Pn. or i).), and Mrs. by Pona (abbreviation Pna. or Pa.)^ before Christian names only; and Mr, by senor (abbreviated Sor. or Sr.), and Mrs. by senor a (abbreviated Sra.)^ before family names. Miss is ren- dered by senorita (say-nyoh-ree'-tah) (abbreviated Sta.)^ either before a Christian or surname. Note that the abbreviations are always pronounced in full in Spanish. For instance, when both names are expressed, as in Mr. John Lopez, they are rendered by Sor. Pon Juan Lopez., or simply Pn. Juan (Hwahng'), but never Pn. Lopez or Sr. Juan. When speaking of a person, the appellatives senor ^ senora, senorita^ require the definite article before them ; as, el tSr. Lopez estd en casa^ Mr. Lopez is at home ; la Sra. Lopez y la Sta. Garcia (Gahrr-thie'-ah) acaban de llegar (lyay-gahrr'), Mrs. Lopez and Miss Garcia have just arrived. When addressing a person the article is not used. LECCI6N DUODfiClMA. 157 PRONUNCIACION. 1. Pray-goong'-tay .... Dong Hwahng Loh'-payth .... 2 p ways' .... ay-fayk'-tohs 3 4 sahs-tray-ree'-ah ays- kee'-nah .... 5 Fwaing'-tays .... trah'- hay. 6 tair'-nohs. 7. .$, . may-dee'-dah. TRADUCCION. 1. AsJc Mr. John Lopez when he needs that money, 2. He needs it immediately, as he has to buy the goods to-day. 3. Where does he intend to have his clothes made ? 4. At the tailor'' s corner of Twen- ty-ninth Street and Broad- way. Mr. Fuentes is a good tailor. 5. Good-morning, Mr. Fuentes. I wish to have a suit made. 6. Please show me the newest goods for suits. 7. Have the kindness to take my 3 The conjunction pues (since) is used to account for a proposition brought forward ; as in leere este libro^ pues Vd. me dice que es hueno^ I will read this book since you tell me it is good. 4 Hacerse (or mandar hacer) is the reflexive form of the verb hacer, and is rendered for to have done, to order to he done. Hacer with an infinitive is often rendered by to have with the past participle in English ; as, hacer traer una cosa {to have anything brought) ; haga Vd. enviar este libra a la libreria {have this book sent to the bookstore). Mandar hacer is synonymous with hacerse mandar, being hacer with an infinitive like to have with the past participle in English ; as, rnande hacer un traje (/ had a suit of clothes made). 6 Bopa stands for linen, and wearing apparel in general. 8 Msquina (corner) means the exterior corner of anything, while rincbn (ring-kohng') is the interior comer ; as, la esquina de una calle (the comer of a street), la esquina de una mesa (the corner of a table) ; but, el rincbn de un cajbn (the inside corner of a drawer), el rincbn de un cuarto (the comer of a room). '^ There are two words in Spanish for suit of clothes: traje and terno. Traje (trah'-hay), though properly meaning a lady^s suit of clothes, is gen- erally used for gentlemen also, being distinguished by traje de mujer and traje de hombre. The word terno signifies a number of three, and in relation to clothing designates coat, trousers, and vest. 12 158 LECCI6n DUODfiCIMA. espaS^ol. 8. I Desea Vd. el saco aiicho 6 estrecho? 9. Ilagamelo ancho y comodo, y no olvide Yd. que me liaee falta^ para la semana que viene. 10. Tratare de^ que tenga Vd. todo sin falta para el martes 6 miercoles a mds tardar.^ * 11. Mandeme Vd. la cuenta al mismo tiempo para que^ la salde. ^ 12. i^o le hace a Vd. muclia falta ese dinero? ^13. j Oh ! no necesita Vd. estar tan ^ de prisa {or tener tanta ^ prisa) ; hay mucho tiempo. 14. Mozo, I ha venido alguien ^ a preguntar por mi B *15. Tin eaballero acaba de*^ dejar esta tarjeta,^ y dijo que volveria ^ dentro de media hora. 16. Cuando vuelva^ supliquele Vd. que suba.^ * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 11 account (bill) to the same time for that (I) it may settle. 12. Not to you makes to you much fault that money ? 13 so hurriedly (to have so much hurry) ; there is much time. 15. A gentleman finished of to leave (just left) this card, and said that (he) would return within of half hour. 1 Hacer falta (lit, to malce fault) ^ signifies to need^ to he in want of. Me hace falta (I need) ; le hace falta a el., a ella., a Vd. (he, she needs ; you need) ; nos hace falta (we need) ; lea hace falta a ellos., d ellas^ d Vds. (they, you {pi.) need). a Tratar (to treat) must be followed by the preposition de., meaning to try. 8 A mds tardar is idiomatic for at the latest. * Para que., followed by the subjunctive of a verb, is rendered by so that. 6 Tan (so, as) is used with adjectives and adverbs ; de prisa (hurriedly) is an adverb ; tanto., tanta (so much, as much), tantos^ tantas (so many, as many), in connection with nouns ; prisa (hurry) is a noun. (See page 101, note 3.) LECCI(5n DUODfiCIMA. 159 PRONUNCIACION. TRADUCCION. 8 ahng'-choh oh ays-tray'- 8, Do you wish the coat to he choh ? loose or tight 9 9 ahng'-choh .... ohl-vee'- 9. Please make it loose and com- day .... fahl'-tah .... fortaMe, and do not forget that I need it for next week, 10 tar-dar'. 10. 1 will try to let you have all without fail by Tuesday or Wednesday at the latest. 11 sahl'-day. 11. Send me the hill at the same time, so that I may settle it. 12 fahF-tah .... 12. Are you not in great need of that money f 13 tahng day pree'-sah .... 13. OA / you need not he in such a hurry ; there is plenty of time. 14 ahl'-gee-aing .... 14. Waiter, has anyhody come to inquire for me f 15 tar-hay'-tah .... dee'- 15. A gentleman just left this card, hoh .... and said he would return within half an hour. 16 wayl'-vah soo-plee'-kay- 16. When he returns, ask him to 'lay .... come up. « Alguien (ahl'-gee-aing), some one, sormbody, any one, anyhody, and nadie (nah'-dee-ay), no one, nobody, refer to persons only; as, iha venido alguien? has anybody come? nadie ha -venido, nobody has come. Alguno, alguna (somebody, some one, anybody, any one) ; algunos, algunas (some, any, a few) ; and ninguno, ninguna, ningunos, ningunas (no one, nobody, none, no), refer to persons and things ; as, alguno (or alguien) ha estado aqui; ^ ninguno (or nadie) ha llegado todavia. ^ Ha recibido Vd. algunos lihros ? have you received any books? no, ISr., no he recibido ninguno, no, sir, I have not received any ; he recibido algunos, I have received some ; no tengo nin- guno, I have not any (none). For alguno becoming algun, see page 44, note 2. 7 Acaba de dejar, just left (see page 89, note 8). 8 Card is rendered by tarjeta in Spanish. 9 Volveria, from Doher, to return, to come back (see page 135, note 8). Vuelva is the subjunctive, which must be used after any conjunction imply- ing future intention, possible or casual ; as, hablare d ese Sr. cuando le vea, I will speak to that gentleman when I see him ; si ve Vd. d nuestro amigo, digale que venga a verme, if you see our friend, tell him to come to see me, etc. 160 LECGldN DUODECIMA. espaJ?ol. 17. Si no me equivoco,^ creo que tengo el honor de hablar con el Sr. Toledo. * 18. He sentido saber ^ la perdida que ha sufrido Yd. con la lirma de Fulano,^ Mengano^ y Cia.* (compania). 19. Mi objeto al hacer^ una nueva visita a este pais es el arreglo de esos asuntos. 20. I Ha perdido Vd. mucho ^ en la quiebra ^ ? 21. Siento^ decir que ha sido una considerable cantidad. 22. Siempre crei que padecia Vd. una equivocacion ^ al hacer ^ tan grandes negocios con esa firma. 23. Me sorprende mucho oir a Vd. decir eso. i No esta Vd. equivocado ^ ? "^24. I A que razon social se refiere Vd. ? '^ 25. Me reliero a la razon social de Fulano,^ Mengano ^ y Cia.^ (compania). * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 18. (I) have felt (was sorry) to know the loss that has suffered you with the firm of So, So & Co. 24. To what reason social {razon social) yourself refers you I 25. Myself (I) refer to the reason social (firm's name) of So, So & Co. * Equivocarse (to be mistaken) is a reflexive verb : me equixioco or estoy f.quivocado (I am mistaken) ; no me equivoco (I am not mistaken). 2 Saber (to know) is used in Spanish instead of to hear {oir) in English when iniphdng any news ; as, he sabido de mi hermano, I have heard (known) {rom my brother ; supe eso antes que Vd. , 1 heard (knew) that before you did. 3 Fulano, Mengano y Zvtano, mean So and So, such a one, referring to lecci6n duodecima. 161 PRONUNCIACION. 17 ay-kee-voh'-koh .... Toh-lay'-doh. 18 fi[r'-mah day Foo-lah'-no, Maing-gah'-no ee Kohm- pah-nyee'-ah. 19 ob-hay'-toh .... vee-see'- tah .... 20 kee-ay'-brah. 21 kohng-see-day-rah'-blay 22 ay-kee-vo-kah-thie-ong' .... fir'-mah. 23 ay-kee-vo-kah'-doh? 24 rah-thong' so-thie-ahr .... 25 Foo-lah'-no, Maing-gah'- no ee Kohm-pa-nyee'-ah. TRADUCCION. V7, If I mistake not, 1 think I have the honor of speakitig with Mr. Toledo. 18. / was very sorry to hear of the loss you have suffered with the firm of So, So & Co. 19. My ohject in making a new visit to this country is to arrange those affairs. 20. Have you lost very much hy the failure 9 21. / am sorry to say it has been a considerable sum. 22. / always thought that you were making a mistake in doing so large a business with that firm. 23. I am very much astonished to hear you say so. Are you not mistaken 9 24. To which firm's name do you refer 9 25. / refer to the firm of So, So S Co. persons only. When referring to one person, Fulano is used; Fulano y Mengano^ when referring to two persons ; and Fulano, Mengano y Zutano (Tom, Dick, and Harry) when to three or more. Dn. Fulano de Tal (Mr. So- and-So) is used for the appellative and family name ; as, le dije que yo era Dn. Fulano de Tal, I told him I was Mr. So-and-JSo. * Cia. or Ca. (Co.) is the abbreviation of compania (company), and must always be pronounced in full, compania. 6 For the use of the infinitive after al, see page 134, note 3. « Muy is translated by very or very much ; but very much is never ren- dered by muy muclio. 7 Quiebra, from quebrar (to break), stands for failure. 8 Siento, from sentir, to feel, or to be sorry ; he sentido (I have felt), 1 have been (I was) sorry. » Equivocadon (mistake), like all nouns ending in don, is feminine. PARTE SEGUNDA. VERBOS IRREGTJLARES. Los verbos no conjugados segun^ los modelos desear, comer y partir, se llaman irregulares. Las irregularidades de los verbos espanoles son muy sencillas,^ limitandose, casi exclusivamente, a un ligero cambio en la raiz,^ Las terminaciones, excepto en algunos casos, muy raros, son siempre regulares. Los verbos irre- gulares en espanol se reducen a ocho clases, ademas^ de algunos otros de irregularidades especiales de los que ^ se tratara por separado en la Clase IX. QLASE I. Algunos verbos terrainados en ar y en er, que tienen la vocal e en la pentiltima^ silaba del infinitivo, como com^nzar {to commence), y ent^nder {to understand), cam- bian por eufonia la e por el diptongo ie en el singular y tercera persona plural de los presentes de indicativo, sub- juntivo e'^ imperatlvo, * Segun (say-goong'), according to. 2 Sencilla (saing-thiel'-lyali), or simple (sim'-play), simple. 3 Raiz (rah-eeth'), root. * Ademds, besides. 5 De los (verbos understood) que^ of which ; see note 7, page 43. « Penultima (penultimate), before the last ; penultima silaba., last syllable but one. ' See page 132, note 1. VERBOS IRREGULARES. 163 1**. Ejemplo en ar: comunzar, to commence. Gerundio. Comenzando. Part. Pasado. Comenzado. La raiz comeii se convierte en comien} IMPERATIVO.* PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. Comienz-0, Comienc - *-e, -as, (( -es, " -a, (( -e, comenz -amos, comenc -emos, -ais, '• -eis, comienz -an. comienc -en. Comienz -Sb tu, comienc *-e e7, ella, V., comenc -emos nos., comenz -ad vos., comienc -en ellos, ellas^ Ys, Los otros tiempos son regulares, como : Imperfecto. Comenz-aba, -abas, -aba, -abamos, -abais, -aban. Pasado. Comenc ^-e, comenz-aste, -6, -amos, -asteis, -aron. Futuro. Comenz-are, -aras, -ara, -aremos, -areis, -aran. Condicional. Comenz-aria, -arias, -aria, -ariamos, ariais, -arian. 1^^ Imp. Subj. Comenz-ara, -aras, -ara, -aramos, -arais, -aran. 2<* Imp. Subj. Comenz-ase, -ases, -ase, -asemos, -aseis, -asen. Los verbos siguientes y sus compuestos,^ se conjugan como comenzar : Acertar,"^ Apretar, Atravesar^ Calentar, Cegar, Cerrar,^ €onfesar, Despertar^ Desterrar, to guess aright, to squeeze, to cross, to warm, to blind, to shut, to confess, to awake, to exile. Unmendar, to correct. Umpezar, to begin. JSnterrar, Fregar, OohernaVy Helar, Herrar. to bury. to rub. to govern. to freeze. to shoe (horses). Manifestar, to manifest. Merendar, to lunch. 1 The cases where irregularities occur while treating of irregular verbs will be printed in italics, and the change of letters in a heavier type, so as to aid the student in distinguishing them. 2 Observe that in this, as in any other case of the irregular verbs, the subjunctive present and imperative follow the irregularity of the indicative present. The second person plural of the imperative is always regular. 8 For the orthographic changes of verbs ending in zar^ see page 65, No. 3 ; z must be changed for c whenever the terminations begin with e, * As, desacertar (to err), encerrar (to shut in), etc 164 VERBOS IRREGULARES. Negar, to deny. Segar, to cut down. Nevar, to snow. Serribrar, to sow. Pensar,^ to think. Sentar, to sit, set. Plegar, to fold. Serrar, to saw. . Quebrar, to break. Sosegar, to rest, calm. Becomendar, to recommend. Temhlar, to tremble. Regar, to water. Tentar,^ to tempt. Memendar, to mend. Tropezar, to stumble. Heventar, to burst. Y algunos otros no de frecuente uso. Errar, to err, verbo irregular de esta clase, toma en vez de la i una y por regla ortografica,^ viz. : IMPERATIVO. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. Yerr-0, Yerr-e, " -as, " -es, " -a, " -e. Err -amos, Err -emos, " -ais, " -eis, Yerr-an. Yerr-en. Yerr-a tu, " -e el, ella, V., Err -emos nos., " -ad vos.f Yerr-en ellos, ellas, Vs, Los otros tiempos, como con comenzar, son regulares: Erraba, erre, errare, erraria, errara, errase. 2**. Mjemplo en er: extender, to understand, Gerundio. Entendiendo. Part. Pasado. Entendido. La raiz entend se convierte en entiend. IMPERATIVO. PRES. DE IND. Entiend-0, " -es, " -e, entend -emos, " -eis, entiend -en. PRES. DE SUBJ. Entiend-a, " -as, " -a, entend -amos, " -ais, entiend -an. Untiend-e tu, " -a el, ella, V., entend -amos nos., " -ed vos., entiend -an ellos, ellas. Vs. 1 Compensar (to compensate), recompensar (to reward), and dispensar (to excuse), derived from pensar, are regular. 2 Cordentar (to content), and intentar (to intend), derived from tentar^ are regular. 3 There are no words in Spanish beginning with ie, this diphthong having to be preceded by a consonant for orthographical reasons ; as in the words Melo (ice), hierro (iron), hierba (grass), etc. VERBOS IRREGULARES. 165 Tiempos regidares : Imperfecto. Entend-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Pasado. Entend-i, -iste, -io, -imos, -isteis, -ieron. Futuro. Entend-ere, -eras, -era, -eremos, -ereis, -eran. Condicional. Entend-eria, -erias, -eria, -eriamos, -eriais, -erian, l^"" Imp. Subj. Entend-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran. 2<> Imp. Subj. Entend-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen. Los verbos siguientes y los que de ellos se derivan ^ se conjugan como entender : Ascender, to ascend. Descender,^ to descend. Perder, to lose. Atender,^ to attend. Uncender, to light. * Tender,^ to tend. Defender, to defend.^ Entender, to understand. Verier, to spill. Y algunos otros no de frecuente uso. CLASE II. Cuando algunos verbos en ar 6 er, tienen la vocal o en la peniiltima sllaba del infinitive, como rogar (to pray), J volver (to return)^ cambian esto o por el diptongo ue, en los mismos tiempos y personas que los de la Clase I toman la i antes de la e, 6 sea, singular y tercera persona del plural de los 2^'^esentes de indicativo, subjuntivo 6 imperor tivo, V, Ejemplo en ar : rogar, to pray, Gerundio. Rogando. Part. Pasado. Rogado. La raiz rog se convierte en rvjQg. PRES. DE 3ND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. jRue^-0, RVlQQU 3-e, " -as. u -es. Rvj^g -a tu. " -a, « -e, ruegu-e el, ella, K, rog -amos, rogu -emos. rogu -emos nos., " -ais. " -eis, rog -ad vos.. rue^ -an. nie^w -en. ruegu-en ellos, ellas, Vs. 1 As, condescender (to condescend), desatender (to neglect), etc. 2 Pretender (to pretend) excepted, which is regular : yo pretendo^ etc « Compare page 64, No. 2, euphonic changes of verbs In gar. 166 VERBOS IRREGULARES. Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. Rog-aba, -abas, -aba, -abamos, -abais, -aban. Pasado. Rogu-e, rog-aste, -6, -amos, -asteis, -aron. Futuro. Rog-are, -aras, -ara, -aremos, -areis, -aran. Condicional. Rog-aria, -arias, -aria, -ariamos, -ariais, -arian. ' 1®' Imp. Subj. Rog-ara, -aras, -ara, -aramos, -arais, -aran. 2^ Imp. Subj. Rog-ase, -ases, -ase, -asemos, -aseis, -asen. Los verbos siguientes y los que de ellos se derivan se conjugan como rogar^ ; Acordar, to agree. Acostar, to lie down. Almorzar, to breakfast. Apostar, to bet. Avergonzar, to shame. Colgar, to hang. Consolar, to console, Contar, to count. Costar, to cost. Encontrar^ to meet. Forzar, to force. Mostrar, to show. Y algunos otros de no muy frecuente uso. Jugar, to plai/, to gamble, sigue ^ la misraa regla de los anteriores, por ser derivado del latino jocari que tiene la o en la penMtiraa silaba ; v. gr. : PoUar, to people. Probar, to prove. Recordar, to remember. Renovar, to renew. Rodar, to roll. Rogar,^ to pray. Soltar, to let loose. Sonar, to sound. Sonar, to dream. Tronar, to thunder. Volar, to fly. Volcar, to overturn. Gerundio. Jugando. Part. Pasado. Jugado. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Jueg-o, Juegu 3-e, " -as. u -es. Jueg -a tu, " -a, i^ -e, juegu 3-e el, ella, F"., jug -amos. jugu -emos. jugu -emos nos., " -ais, " -eis, jug -ad vos., yue^-an. juegu -en. Juegu -en ellos. ellas, Vs. 1 Those derived from rogar, as, prorrogar (to extend time), derogar (to derogate), etc., are regular. 2 Sigue (follows), from seguir (to follow), irregular verb. 3 Compare page 64, No. ^2, euphonic changes of verbs ending in gar. VERBOS IRREGULARES. 167 Los demds ^ tiempoSy como con rogar, son regulares : Jugaba, jugue, jugare, jugaria, jugara, jugase. 2^ HJjemplo en er : volver^ to return. Gerundio. Volviendo. Part '. Pasado. FueZ^o.2 PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Fnp/i'-'^ V^XQlv-B>, " -as. V U.CC'C -es, FueZv-e tu, " -e, " -a, " -a el, ella, F., volv -emos, -eis, volv -amos, -ais. volv -amos nos., -ed vos., mielv -en. mx.elv -an. vxxelv -an ellos, ellas, Vs Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. Volv-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Pasado. Volv-i, -iste, -io, -imos, -isteis, -ieron. Futuro. Volv-ere, -eras, -era, -eremos, -ereis, -eran. Condicional. Volv-eria, -erias, -eria, -eriamos, -eriais, -erian. 1^^ Imp. Subj. Volv-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran. 2° Imp. Sub]'. Volv-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen. Los verbos siguientes y sus compuestos se conjugan corao volver : Ahsolver,^ to absolve. Moler, to grind. Sole7\ to accustom. Disolver^ to dissolve. Morder, to bite. Torcer, to twist. Doler, to pain. Mover, to move. Volver,^ to turn. Llover, to rain. Resolver.^ to resolve. Y algunos otros no muy usados. Oler, to smelly verbo irregular de esta clase,toraaademas, por regla ortografica,^ una h delante del diptongo ue, v> g^'^ ' 1 Los demds means the others, the rest. 2 The past participles of all verbs ending in olver are irregular ; as, from absolver, disolver, resolver, etc., being ahsuelto, disuelto^ restielto, etc. 3 All Spanish words having the diphthong ue for their first syllable must be preceded by the letter h', as m huevo (egg) ; hueso (bone) ; huerta (farm) ; huesped (guest) ; hueste (host) ; huelga (strike) ; hueco (hollow) ; hiiella (track), etc. * V. gr. is the abbreviation of verhi-gracia, synonymous with por e/emplo (for instance), and correspondmg to e. g. or viz. in English. 168 VERBOS IKREGULARES. Gerundio. Oliendo. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ HueZ-0, HueZ-a, *' -es, " -as. " -e. " -a. ol -emos, ol -amos. " -eis, " -ais, hue? -en. hueZ -an. Part. Pasado. Olido. IMPERATIVO. HueZ-e tu, " -a eZ, ella, F., ol -amos nos., " -ed vos., hueZ -an ellos, ellas^ Vs. Los demds tiempos son regulares, como : Olia, oil, olere, oleria, oliera, oliese. CLASE III. Yerbos terminados en acer,^ ecer,^ ocer,^ y los en ucir, toman una z delante de la c de la raiz, siempre que las terminaciones sean a ii^ o, es decir,^ cuando la letra c tenga el sonido de k, lo que sucede en la primera persona del presente de indicativo, todas las del presente de suhjun- tivo, J las del irnperatwo que se forman del presente de subjuntivo. Ejemplos : 1°. Caso con la terminacion en ACER. NACER, to he horn. Gerundio. Naciendo. Part. Pasado. Nacido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. iVazc-o, nac -es, iVazc-a, " -as. Nac -e tu. " -e, " -a, nazc-SL el, ella, F., " -emos. " -amos, " -amos no8.. " -eis. " -ais, nac -ed vos.. " -en. " -an. nazc-SLii ellos, ellas, Vs. 1 Except Tiacer (to make, to do) and its compounds, which belong to Class IX ; hago^ haga, hice, Jiiciera, hiciese^ hare, haria. 2 Except mecer (to swim, to rock), which is a regular verb ; mezo, meza, etc. 3 Except cocer (to boil), which belongs to another class. * (or) becomes u (or) before words beginning with o ot ho\ as, uno u otro (one or another) ; mujer u liombre (woman or man). This change is made for the same orthographical reasons that necessitate the substitution of e for y (and) in all words commencing with i or Ji. See page 132, note 1. fi Es deci?' (it is to say) is synonymous with that is to say, or viz., or i. e. VERBOS IRREGULARES. Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. Nac-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -lan. Pasado. Nac-i, -iste, -io, -imos, -isteis, -ieron. Futuro. Nac-ere, -eras, -era, -eremos, -ereis, -eran. Condicional. Nac-eria, -erias, -eria, -eriamos, -eriais, -erian, l^'^ Imp. Subj. Nac-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran. 2<> Imp. Subj. Nac-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen. 2** caso ; Terminacion en ecer. AGRADECER, to he grateful. 169 Gerundio. Agradeciendo. Part. Pasado. Agradecido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Agradezc-0^ Agradezc-Si, agradec -es, ii -as. Agradec -e tu, -e, li -a. agradezc-Si el, ella, F. " -emos, it -amos, " -amos nos.. -eis, a -ais, agradec -ed vos.. " -en. u -an. agradezc-em ellos, ellas, Vs, Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. Agradec-ia, -ias, -la, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Pasado. Agradec-i, -iste, -io, -imos, -isteis, -ieron. Futuro. Agradec-ere, -eras, -era, -eremos, -ereis, -eran. Condicional. Agradec-eria, -erias, -eria, -eriamos, -eriais, -erian. l*"" Imp. Subj. Agradec-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran. 2® Imp. Subj. Agradec-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen. 3**. Caso C071 la terminacion en ocer. CONOCER, to Jcnow. Gerundio. Conociendo. Part. Pasado. Conocido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. (Jonozc-o ClnrinrFfl-Q conoc -es, KjUibUr -as, Conoc -e tu, " -e. (( -a, conozc-a, e7, ella, V., " -emos, <( -amos, " -amos nos.y " -eis, (( -ais, conoc -ed vos., " -en. u -an. conozc-an ellos, ellas, Fa 170 VERBOS IRREGULARES. Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. Conoc-ia, -ias, -ia, -lamos, -iais, -ian. Pasado. Conoc-i, -iste, -io, -imos, -isteis, -ieron. Future. Conoc-ere, -eras, -era, -eremos, -ereis, -eran. Condicional. Conoc-eria, -erias, -eria, -eriamos, -eriais, -erian. 1®^ Imp. Subj. Conoc-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran. 2<' Imp. Subj. Conoc-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen. 4°. Caso con la terminacion en uciR. LUCIR, to shine, Gerundio. Luciendo. Part. Pasado. Lucido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Luzc-0, luc -es, Zwzc-a, " -as. Luc-e til. " -e, " • -a, luzc-a, el, ella, V., " -imos, " -amos, " -amos nos., " -is. " -ais, luc -id vos., " -en. " -an. luzc-Mi ellos, ellas, Vs, Tiempos regulares: Imperfecto. Luc-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Pasado. Luc-i, -iste, -io, -imos, -isteis, -ieron. Futuro. Luc-ire, -iras, -ira, -iremos, -ireis, -iran. Condicional. Luc-iria, -irias, -iria, -iriamos, -iriais, -irian. l®"^ Imp. Subj. Luc-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran. 2° Imp. Subj. Luc-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen. A estos casos pertenecen ^ : complacer (to please) ; aeon- tecer (to happen) ; pertenecer ^ (to belong) ; aborrecer (to hate) ; cocer (to boil) ; torcer (to twist) ; traslucir (to be transparent), etc. CLASE IV. Verbos terminados en eer, como creer {to believe)^ j leer (to read), tienen la irregularidad de carabiar por eufonla, los diptongos ie e io por ye y yo. Ejemplos : 1 Pertenece (belongs), from pertenecer (to belong), is of the class of verbs ending in ecer» VERBOS IRREGULARES. 171 Creer, to believe . Leer, to read. Ore-yendo, creido. i/e-yendo, leido. PASADOS DEFINIDOS. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Cre-i, Cre-imos, Le-i, Le-imos, " -iste, " -isteis, " -iste, " -isteis, " -y6.^ " -yeron.^ " -y6.^ " -yeron.* 103 IMPERFECTOS SUBJUNTIVO.^ Cre-yera, Cre-y6ramos, Le-yera, Le-y6ramos, " -yeras, " -yerais, " -yeras, " -yerais, " -yera. " -yeran. " -yera. " -yeran. 203 IMPERFECTOS SUBJUNTIVO.^ Cre-yese, Cre-y6semos, Le-yese, Le-y§senios, " -yeses, " -yeseis, " -yeses, " -yeseis, " -yese. " -yesen. " -yese. " -yesen. Tiempos regular es : Pres. Ind. ] J^^ Y -o, -es, -e, -emos, -eis, -en. Imperfectos. ] x p® [ -ia, -ias, -la, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Futures. ] Y ® > -ere, -eras, -era, -eremos, -ereis, -eran. Condicionales. -j j^® [ -eria, -erias, -eria, -eriamos, -eriais, -erian. Pres. Subj. -J J^^ t -a, -as, -a, -amos, -ais, -an. Imperatives. , ] t ® y -e, -a, -amos, -ed, -an. Proveer, to provide (participio pasado provi^to)^ poseer, to possess, y alg^n otro se conjugan corao creer y leer. CLASE V. Algunos verbos en ir (3* coi3Jugaci6n), que tienen una e en la penidthna sildba del infinitive, como pedir (to ash), y seguir (to follow), cambian la e por i en algunas personas 1 This irregularity follows throughout the whole of the two tenses of the imperfect subjunctive. 172 v:e-rbos irregulares. de los presentes de indicativo, suhjuntivo e ^ imperativo^ pasados definidos e imperfectos (ambas^ formas) del sub- jimtivo. El gerundio sigue regularmente esta irregula- ridad. Ejemplos : 1<>. Pedir, to ask. Seguir, to follow. "Pid-iendo, pedido. SigM-iendo, seguido. PRESENTES DE INDICATIVO. Singular. Plural. Fid-0, Ped-imos, " -es, " -is, " -e. pid -en. Singular. Sig -0, sigu 3-es, " -e. Plural. Segu Mmos, " -is, sigu -en. PRESENTES DE SUBJUNTIVC* Fid-8i, Pid-SLmos, " -as, " -ais, Sig-si, " -as. Sig-amos, " -ais. " -a. " -an. " -a. " -an. IMPERATIVOS.'* Singular. Singular. JPid-e tu, " -a el, ella, V. Plural. Pit?-amos nosotros, . ped -id vosotros, pid -an ellos, ellas, Vs. Sigu 3-e tu, sig -a el, ella, V. Plural. Sig -amos nosotros, segu 3-id * vosotros, sig -an ellos, ellas, Vs. PASADOS DEFINIDOS. Singular. Plural. Ped-i, Ped-imos, " -iste, " -isteis, pid-io. pid -ieron. Singular. Segu-i, " -iste, sigu -io. Plural. Segu-imos, " -isteis, sigu -ieron. los 5 iMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO.^ PicZ-iera, Pi^-ieramos, >Si^w-iera, /Si^w-ieramos, " -ieras, " -ierais, " -ieras. " -ierais, " -iera. " -ieran. " -iera. • " -ieran. 1 See page 132, note 1. ^ j^rnhoa, amhas, both. 3 Compare page 67, verbs ending in gidr. * See page 163, note 2. 6 io» is the abbreviation of primeros, and ^ that of segundos. • Imperfectos de sub^untivo follow irregularity of the past. or THE JHiVERSiTY 208 1 IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO.^ Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Pit^-iese, PicZ-iesemos, Sigu-iese, Sigu-iesemoSf " -ieses, " -ieseis, " -ieses, " -ieseis, " -iese. " -iesen. " -iese. " -iesen. Tiempos regiilares : Imperfectos. Futures. Condicionales. Ped ) J Seguf ' la, -las, -la, -lamos, -lais, -lan. ] gfo-u [ "^^^' "^^^^' ■^^^' 'i^6"^os, -ireis, -ir i ?^^ I -i i Segru f iria, -irias, -iria, -iriamos, -iriais, -man. Los verbos siguientes y sus compuestos se conjugan como pedir y seguir : Pedir, to ask for. Medir, to measure. Seguir, to follow. Servir, to serve. Vestw, to dress. to prevent. jPerseguir, to persecute. Megir, to rule. Hendir, to surrender. Repetir, to repeat. Competir, to compete. Concebir, to conceive. Conseguir, to get. Derretir, to melt. Despedir^ to dismiss. Elegir, to elect. Y algunos otros de uso no comfm. 2^ Yerbos terminados en eir, como reir [to laugh), freir {to fry), y algunos ^ otros, pierden * la i en la irre- gularidad de la raiz, siempre que la terminacion comienza ^ por i, a fin de ^ evitar cacof onia al juntar ^ las dos is. sucede solamente en los tiempos siguientes : Gerundios: "R-iendo, "Er-iendo, Esto PASADOS DEFINIDOS. Singular. Plural. Singular. . Plural. Re-i, Re-imos, Fre-i, Fre-imos, '" -iste, " -isteis, " -iste, " -isteis, r -io. r -ieron. fr -io. fr -ieron. 1 See note 6, page 172. 8 Compare page 159, note 6. 6 See page 163, EjempLo 1st. '' Juntar, to put together. 13 2 See page 172, note 6. 4 See page 164, Ejemplo 2d. « A Jin de stands for so as to. 174: VERBOS IRREGULARES. Singular. R-iera, " -ieras, " -iera. R-iese, " -ieses, 1«8 IMPERFECTOS DE SUBJUNTIVO.^ Plural. Singular. R-ieramos, Fr-iera, " -ierais. " -ieras, *' -ieran. " -iera, 2°* IMPERFECTOS DE SUBJUNTIVO.^ R-ieseraos, • Fr-iese, " -ieseis, " -ieses, Plural. Fr-ieramos, " -ierais, " -ieran. Fr-iesemos, " -ieseis. ' -lesen. " -iese. Los otros tiempos siguen las regularidades e irregula- ridades que pedir y seguir, excepto el part, pasado de freir que es frito. Participios Pasados : Re-ido, Frito. PRESENTES DE IXDICATIVO. Reir. Freir. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Ri-0, He-imos, JPri-o, Fre-imos, **-es, " -is. " -es, " -is, "-e. ri -en. " -e. fii. -en. PRESENTES DE SUBJUNTIVO. i2i-a, i^i-amos, i^ri-a, -Fri-amos, " -as, " -ais, " -as. " -ais, "-a. ri -an. " -a. fri -an. Singular. IMPERA' nvos. Singular. Ri -e tu. i^'ri-e tu, *< , -a el, ella, V, Plural. " -a el, ella. Plural. V. Ri -amos nosotroSy -Fri-amos nosotros. re -id vosotros, fre -id vosotros. ri -an ellos, ellas. Vs. ' fri -an ellos, ellas, Vs, Tietnpos regulares : Imperfeetos. < p® (• -ia, -ias, -la, -iamos, -iais, -lan. •p, [- -ire, -iras, -ira, -iremos, -ireis, -iran. Condicionales. \ ^ ® i -iria, -irias, -iria, -iriamos, -iriais, -irian. 1 Compare note 1, page 171. VERBOS IRKEGULARES. 175 Sonreir [to smile), engreirse {to he conceited), j alglin otro se conjugan como reir y freir. 3°. Verbos terminados en fiir, como refiir (to scold, to quarrel), pierden la i de las termlnaciones que empiezan por esta letra cuando la e de la raiz cambia por i. Esto sucede en los mismos cases que en el No. 2 pierden la e de la ralz, v. gr. : GrERUNDio. Rifl-eiiAo. PASADO DEFINIDO. ler IMP. SUBJ.l 2^ IMP. SUBJ. Ren-i, Ein-evBi., i^i^l-ese. " -iste, a -eras, " -eses. rift -6, " -era, " -ese, ren -imos. (( -eramos. *' -^semos. " -isteis, " -erais. " -eseis. rift -eron. " -eran. " -esen. Los demas ^ tiempos siguen las mismas regularidades 6 irregularidades que pedir, seguir, reir y freir, v. gr. : PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Jlifl-o, Rin-Q,, *' -as. " -es. jBi^-e tu. " -e. " -a. " -a e7, ella, V. ren -imos " -amos, rift -amos nos., . " -is. " -ais. reii -id vos., rifl -en. " -an. rift -an ellos, ellas, Vs. Tiempos regulares : Part. Pasado. Refi.-ido. I ni perfect o. Refi-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -lais, -ian. Futuro. Ren-ire, -iras, -ira, -iremos, -ireis, -iran. Condicional. Ren-iria, -irias, -iria, -iriamos, -iriais, -irian. Tefiir [to dye), desteflir (to discolor), cefiir (to gird, to surround), desceflir (to ungird), y algiin otro, se conjugan con las mismas peculiaridades que refiir. 1 Compare note 1, page 171. ^ Los demds^ the rest. 176 VERBOS IRREGULARES. CLASE VI. Verbos terminados en entir^ erir j ertir, como sentir (to feel), Aerir (to wou7id) e ^?^yertir {to invert or invest), estan sujetos^ a las irregularidades combinadas de los verbos de las Clases I y V. Ejemplos : Sentir, to feel. Herir, to wound. Invertir, to invert. Sintiendo,^ sentido. Hiriendo,'^ herido. Invirtiendo,^ invertido. PRESENTES DE INDICATIVO. Sient^-o, Hier ^-o, Inviert ^-o. " -es. " -es. -es. ^' -e, " -e. " -e, sent -imos. her -imos, invert -imos, - -is. " -is. ." -^'^ sient -en. hier -en. inviert -en. PRESENTES DE SUBJUNTIVO. Sient^'B>, Bier ^-a, Inviert ^-a, " -as. " -as. -as. " -a. " -a, " -a, sint* -amos> Mr * -amos. invirt^ -amos, '' -ais. -ais, " -ais. sient^ -an. hier^ -an. IMPERATIVOS.* miieW^-an. Sient 3-e tu. Hier ^-e tu, Inviert ^-e tu. " -a el, ella, V,, " -a el, ella, V., -a el, ella, V., sint * -amos nos.. hir^ -amos nos.. invirt ^ -amos nos., sent ^ -id vos,, her 5 -id vos.y invert ^ -id 1*05., sient 3 -an ellos, ellas, hier ^ -an ellos, ellas. inviert ^ -an eZZos, eZto, Vs, Vs. Vs. 1 ^5^^n sujetos, they are subject. 2 Compare Class V, No. 1. * Compare Class I, No. 2. * Compare Class V, No. 1. Imperative follows irregularities of the sub- junctive present. ^ See page 163, note 2. VERBOS IRREGULARES. Ill PASADOS DEFINIDOS. Sent-i, Her-i, Invert -1, " -iste, " -iste. a -iste. sint ^-io, Mri-io, invirt ^ -io, sent -imos, her -imos, invert -imos. " -isteis. " -isteis, " -isteis, sint *-ieron. los hir *-ieron. IMPERFECTOS SUBJUNTIVO.^ invirt ^ -ieron. Sint ^-iera. Hir *-iera, Invirt *-iera, " -ieras, " -ieras, a -ieras, " -iera, " -iera, " -iera, " -ieramos, " -ieramos, (( -ieramos, " -ierais, " -ierais. " -ierais, *' -ieran. 208 " -ieran. IMPERFECTOS SUBJUNTIVO.* a -ieran. Sint *-iese, Hir ^-iese, Invirt *-iese, " -ieses, " -ieses, " -ieses. " -iese, " -iese, a -iese, " -iesemos, " -iesemos. ** -iesemos, " -ieseis, " -ieseis, " -ieseis, " -iesen. " -iesen. « -iesen. Tiempos regulares : ( Sent ) Imperfectos. < Her y -ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. ( Invert ) ( Sent ) Futures. •< Her y -ire, -iras, -ira, -iremos, -ireis, -iran. ( Invert ) ( Sent ) Condicionales. ■< Her >- -iria, -irias, -iria, -iriamos, -iriais, -irian. ( Invert ) Los verbos siguientes y sus derivados se conjugan como sentir, herir e invertir : Advertir, to notice. Convertir, to convert. Divertir, to amuse. Arrepentirse, to repent. Diferir^ to differ. Herir, to wound. Conferir, to confer. Digerir, to digest. Hervir, to boil. 1 Compare Class V, No. 1. s» Compare page 171, uote 1. 178 VERBOS IRREGULARES. Inferir, to infer. Pervertir, to pervert. Sentir, to feel. Invertir^ to invert. Preferir, to prefer. Sugerir^ to suggest. Mentir, to lie. Referir, to refer. Transferir, to transfer. Y algunos otros de uso no frecuente. CLASE VII. Los verbos dormir (to sleep), morir {to die), y sus com- puestos, cambian la de la raiz por ue, en los mismos tiem- pos y personas que los de la Clase II ; la primera y segunda persona plural del present e de subjuntivo y la primera plural del imperativo toman ademas una u en vez de ^ la o de la raiz. Esta misma alteracion, de cambiar la o por u, la sufren las raices de los pret^ritos, siempre que la termi- nacion contenga los diptongos ie 6 io. El gerundio sigue la irregularidad de los preteritos. Ejemplos : Dormir, to sleep. Morir, to die. DnrmiendOj dormido. Muriendo, muerto. PRESENTES DE INDICATIVO. Singular. Plural. Singular, Plural. Duerm ^-o. Dorm -imos, Muer^-o, Mor -imos, " -es, " -is, " -es. " -is, " -e. duerm-en. " -e. PRESENTES DE SUBJUNTIVO. muer-en. Duerm ^-a. Durm -amos, Muer ^-a. Mur -amos, " -as. " -ais, " -as, " -ais. " -a. duerm-a.n. " -a. muer-an. o. , IMPERATIVOS. CI- 1 Singular. Singular. JDuerm-Q iu, Muer-e tu, " -a e7, ella, V, " -a el, ella, V. Plural. Pliu-al. DvLrm -amos nos., Mur -amos nos. f dorm 3 -id vos., mor -id ^ vos., dvierm- -an ellos, alias, Vs. muer-an ellos, ellas. Vs. 1 IJn vez de (instead of) ; en kigar de (in place of). a Compare Class II, No. 2. s See page 163, note 2. VEKBOS IRREGULARES. 179 Singular. Dorm -i, " -iste, durm -io. Xhirm-iera, " -ieras, " -iera. Zhirm-iese, " -ieses, " -iese. Tiempos Imperfectos. Futures. Condiciouales. PASADOS DEFINIDOS. Plural. Singular. Dorm-imos, Mor-1, " -isteis, " -iste, durm -ievon. mur-io. 1°^ IMPERFECTOS DE SUBJUNTIVO. Z)urm-ieramos, Jfur-iera, " -ierais, " -ieras, " -ieran. " -iera. 2°^ IMPERFECTOS DE SUBJUNTIVO. Z>urm-iesemos, Jfur-iese, " -ieseis, " -ieses, " -iesen. " -iese. regulares ': Mor I" "^^' "^^^' "^^' "i^™^s» -\ais,, -lan. ■j Tur^-. \ -ire, -iras, -ira, -iremos, -ireis, -i S Dorn \ Mor Plural. Mor-imos, " -isteis, mur-ieron. Jfur-ieraraos, " -ierais, " -ieran. Jfur-iesemos, " -ieseis, " -iesen. j ijorni / .lYm^ -irias, -iria, -iriamos, -iriais, -irian. CLASE VIII. Todos los verbos en uir y giiir,^ como huir {to flee) y argiiir^ (to argue), pertenecen a esta clase, cuya^ irregu- laridad consiste en tomar una y despues de la u en los siguientes tiempos y personas : Huir, to flee. Argiiir, to argue, HuyendOf^ huido. Arguyendo^^ argiifdo. PRESENTES DE INDICATIVO. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Huy-o, Hu -imos, Argu'^y-o, Argii -imos, " -es, " -is, " -es, " -is, " -e. ^i^y-en. " -e. argu^y-en, 1 Gioir^ the u is sounded as in argiiir (ahr-goo-oer'). There are many verbs in guir where the u is silent ; as in distinguir (to distinguish), segvir (to follow), etc. Such are not included in this case. ^ Cuya^ whose. 8 The gerundio follows the same irregularity as the preterite. ♦ For rules governing the use of the diaeresis, sec page 10. 180 VERBOS IRREGULARES. PRESENTES DE SUBJUNTIVO. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Buy-Si, ^i^y-amos, Argufy -a,, Argu^y-Simos, " -as. " -ais. " -as. " -ais, " -a. " -an. " -a. " -an. c,. , IMPERATIVOS. ^. , Singular. Singular. Buy -8 tu^ Arguy-Q tu, " . -a e7, ella, F. " -a e7, ella, V. Plural. Plural. Buy -amos nos., Ar guy -Siiiios nos., hu2 -id vos.. argii ^ -id vos., Jmy -an ellos, ellas, Vs, arguy -an ellos, , ellas, Vs, PASADOS DEFINIDOS. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Hu-i, Hu-imos, Argii -i. Argii -imos, " -iste, " -isteis. " -iste. " -isteis. " -y6. " -yeron. argu ^-y6. argu ^ -yeron. 108 I3IPERFECT0S DE SUBJUNTIVO.^ Hu-yera,'* Hu-yeramos, Argu-yera,^ Argu-yeramos, " -yeras, " -yerais, " -yeras, " -yerais. " -yera. " -yeran. " -yera. " -yeran. 2o« IMPERFECTOS DE SUBJUNTIVO.3 Hu-yese,^ Hu-yesemos, Argu-yese,4 Argu-yesemos, " -yeses, " -yeseis. " -yeses, " -yeseis. " -yese. " -yesen. " -yese. " -yesen. Tiempos regulares : Imperfectos. -j ^^^ [ -ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -lais, -ian. Futures. -j ^^^ [ -ire, -iras, -ira, -iremos, -ireis, -iran. Condicionales. -j Aj,o.ji (• -iria, -irias, -iria, -iriamos, -iriais, -irian. 1 See page 179, note 4. « Compare page 163, note 2. 3 The imperfect tenses of the subjunctive invariably follow the irregulari- ties of the past, just as the subjunctive present and imperative follow those ot the indicative present, and the conditional those of the future. * Observe that when y takes the place of *', tliis letter in the termina- tions ib^ ieron^ iera and iese is omitted. See page 171, verbs leer and creer^ VERBOS IRREGULARES. 181 Los verbos siguientes cuente, se conjugan como y algunos otros de uso no fre- hnir y argliir : Arguir, Atribuir^ Concluir, Constituir, Construir, to argue, to attribute, to conclude, to constitute, to construct. Contribuir, to contribute. Destruir^ Disminuir, Distribuir^ Incluir, Influir^ Instruir, to destroy, to diminish, to distribute, to include, to injluence. to instruct. CLASE IX. A. esta "Olase^^ pertenecen los veinticuatro verhos si- guienteSyde irregularidades especiales} V. Primera Conjugacion. Andar {to walk), estar {to be), y'dar {to give). 1. Andar, to walk, Andando, andado. PASADO DEF. !«' IMP. SUBJ. 2<> IMP. SUBJ. Andxk-v *-e, Andwv 2-iera, AndvL-v 2-iese, " -iste, " -ieras, " -ieses. " -0, " -iera, " -iese. " -imos, " -ieramos, " -iesemos, "' -isteis, " -ierais, " -ieseis, " -ieron. " -ieran. " -iesen. Tiempos regulares : Pres. Ind. And-o, -as , -a, -amos, -ais, -an. Imperfecto. And-aba, • •abas, -aba, -abamos, -abais. -aban. Pres. Subj. And-e, -es -e, -emos, -eis, -en. Imperativo. And- a, -e,3 -emos, -ad, -en 1 Owing to their peculiar irregularities, the following twenty-four verbs and those derived from them can not be reduced to any system of classifica- tion like those of the foregoing eight classes. 2 The irregular persons of this verb are composed of the verbs andar and haher^ taking away from the first the termination ar, omitting the h of haher^ and using v instead of J, according to the old-fashioned method of spelling it. 8 Ande is very much used in an idiomatic sense by Spaniards, being equivalent to come along ! and hurry up I 182 VERBOS IRREGULARES. Future. And-are, -aras, -ara, -aremos, -areis, -aran. Condicional. And-aria, -arias, -aria, -ariamos, -ariais, -arian. Desandar {to walk hack) se conjuga como andar, del que es un compuesto. 2. Estar, to be, to stay. Estando, estado. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Est-oy, Est-e, " -es, Est-6. tu, " -a, " -e. " -e el, ella, K, " -amos, " -emos. " -emos nos., " -ais. " -eis, " -ad t'os.. " -an. " -en. " -6n ellos, ellas, Vs, PASADO. V" IMP. SUBJ. 2® IMP. SUBJ. EshxV'Q,^ ^s^uv-iera,* ^shiv-iese,^ " -iste, " -ieras, " -ieses, " -0, " -iera, " -iese, " -imos, " -ieramos, " -iesemos, " -isteis, " -ierais, " -ieseis, " -ieron. " -ieran. " -iesen. Tiempos regular es : Imperfecto. Est-aba, -abas, -aba, -abamos, -abais, -aban. Futuro. Est-are, -aras, -ara, -aremos, -areis, -aran. Condicional. Est-aria, -arias, -aria, -ariamos, -ariais, -arian. 3. Dar, to give, Dando, dado. Pres. DE IND. D-oy, -as, -a, -amos, -ais, -an. PASADO. lei" jjip^ SUBJ. 2° IMP. SUBJ. B-i, * D-iera, D-iese, " -iste, " -ieras, " -ieses, " -i6, ^ " -iera, " -iese, " -imos, " -ieramos, " -iesemos, " -isteis, " -ierais, " -ieseis, " -ieron. " -ieran. " -iesen. 1 Observe that these t^enses and those corresponding with andar have the same in-egularity. VERBOS IRREGULARES. Tiempos regular es : Imperfecto. D-aba, -abas, -aba, -abamos, -abais, -aban. Futuro. D-are, -aras, -ara, -aremos, -areis, -aran. Condicional. D-aria, -arias, -aria, -arlamos, -ariais, -arian. Pres. de Subj. D-e, -es, -e, -emos, -eis, -en. Imperativo. D-a, -e, -emos, -ad, -eno 183 2. Segunda Conjugacion. A. este caso pertenecen los catorce verbos siguientes : Caber {to hold^ to contain) ; caer {to fall) ; haber (im- personal, there to he) ; haber (auxiliary, to have) ; hacer (to make^ to do) ; poder {to be able) ; poner {to put) ; querer {to want^ to love) ; saber {to know) ; ser {to he) ; tener {to have^ to hold) ; traer {to bring) ; valer {to he loorth) ; and ver {to see). 1. Caber, to hold, to contain, Cabiendo, cabido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATnrO. Q,uep-o, auep-a. cab -es, " -as. Cab -e tu, " -e,* " -a, quep-a el, ella, V., " -emos, " -amos. " -amos nos^, " -eis. " -ais, cab -ed vos., " -en. " -an. quep-an ellos, ellas, Vs, PASADO DEP, l^' IMP. SUBJo 20 IMP. SUBJ. Cup-e, Cup-iera, Cup-iese, " -iste. " -ieras. " -ieses, " -0, " -iera. " -iese. " -imos, " -ieramos, " -iesemos. " -isteis. " -ierais. " -ieseis. " -ieron. " -ieran. " -iesen. 1 Cabe, impersonally, is used idiomatically in the sense of it is possible, viz. : si cabe (if it be possible) ; no cabe duda (no doubt, there is ho possible doubt). 184 VERBOS IRREGULAKES. FUTURO, CONDICIONAL." Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Cab-re, Cab-remos, Cab-ria, Cab-riamos, " -ras, *' -r6is, " -rias, " -rials, " 'Tk. " -ran. " -ria. " -rian. Tiempo regular : Imperfecto. Cab-ia, -ias, -ia, -lamos, -iais, -ian, 2. Caer, to fall. Cayendo^^ caido. PRES. DE INDo PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. (7aig2-o, Caig 2.a^ ca -es, " -as, Ca -e tu, " -e, " -a, caig -a el, ella, V., " -emos, " -amos, " -amos nos., -^is, " -ais, ca -ed vos., " -en. " -an. caig 2-an ellos, ellas, Fs. PASADO DEF. 1«' IMP. SUBJ. 2° IMP. SUBJ. Ca-i, Ca-yera,» Ca-yese,3 " -iste, " -yeras, " -yeses, " -y6,3 " -yera, " -yese, " -imos, " -y^ramos, " -y6semos, " -isteis, *' -yerais, " -yeseis, " -yeron.3 " -yeran. " -yesen. Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. Ca-ia, -ias, -la, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Futuro. Ca-ere, -eras, -era, -eremos, -ereis, -eran. Condicional. Ca-eria, -erias, -eria, -eriamos, -eriais, -erian. Decaer {to decay) ^ y recaer {to relapse) sus compuestos, se conjugan como caer. 1 The conditional follows invariably the irregularity of the future. See page 180, note 3. ^ Kah'-ee-go, kah'-ee-gah, kah'-ee-gahng. 3 This verb, the same as those in Class IV, changes for euphony the diph- thongs ifC and io for ye and yo. VERBOS IRREGULARES. 185 8. Haber * (impersonal), there to he. Habiendo, habido. PRES. DE IND. Hay,2 PRES. DE SUBJ. Hay-a,2 IMPERATIVO. PASADO DEF. !«'• IMP. SUBJ. //u&-iera,2 2<> IMP. SUBJ. ^uft-iese.-* FUTURO. Hab-ra,2 CONDICIONAL. Hab-ria.2 Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. Hab-ia. Ohservacion, — Los tiempos compuestos se forman con las terceras person as del auxiliar haher y el participio pa- sado habido ; v. gr. : ha habido, haya habido ; hahta ha- bido ; huho habido ; habrd habido ; hahrta habido ; hubiera habido ; hiibiese habido. 4. Haber (auxiliary),^ to have. Habiendo, habido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. He, Hay-a, has. " -as. -KeUii, ha, " -a. hay-a el, ella, V., hemos, " -am OS, '* -amos nos.y hab-eis, " -ais, hab -ed vos., han. " -an. hay- an elloSy ellas, Vs. » The conjugation of this verb is explained throughout with examples, etc., on pages 107, No. 3, and 108. 2 Being impersonal or unipersonal only the third person singular is used. 3 It has been already explained that haber^ as an impersonal verb, means there to be; and is conjugated the same as when used as the auxiliary, but only in the third person, with the exception of the third person singular, in- dicative, which is ha7/ instead of Aa, and means there is or there are. * See page 104, imperative mood. 186 VERBOS IRREGULAEES. PASADO DEF. l®*" IMP. SUBJ. 2® IMP. SUBJ. Ewh-e, ^u6-iera, ^u6-iese. " -iste, " -ieras, " -ieses, " -0, " -iera, " -iese, " -iraos, " -ieramos, " -iesemos, " -isteis. " -ierais, " -ieseis, " -ieron. " -ieran. " -iesen. FUTURO. CONDICIONAL.^ Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Hab-re, Hab-remos, Hab -ria, Hab-riamos, " -ras, " -reis, (( -rias, " -rials, " -ra. " -rto. " -ria. " -rian. Tiempo regular : Imperfecto. Hab-ia, -las, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. 5. Hacer, to make, to do. Haciendo, hecho. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. -ETag-o, .ffag-a. hac -es, " -as. Haz til. " -e, " -a, hag-Si el, ella, V,, " -emos, " -amos. " -amos nos., " -eis. " -ais. hac -ed vos., " -en. " -an. hag-SLii elloSf' ellas, Vs. PASADO DEF. l®"" IMP. SUBJ. 2° IMP. SUBJ. Mic -e, J7ic-iera, ^ic-iese, " -iste. " -ieras, " -ieses, hiz 2-0, " -iera, " -iese, hie -imos. " -ieramos, " -iesemos, " -isteis. " -ierais. " -ieseis, " -ieron. " -ieran. " -iesen. FUTURO. CONDICIONAL.l Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Ha-re, Ha-remos, Ha -ria, Ha-riamos, " -ras, " -reis, a -rias, '• -rials. " -ra. " -ran. u -ria. " -rian. 1 See note 3, page 180. 2 This change z instead of c is according to orthographical reasons already explained. VERBOS IRREGULARES. 187 Tiempo regular : Imperfecto. Hac-ia, -ias, -ia, -iaraos, -iais, -ian. Los verbos deshacer {to undo), rehacer {to do over again), contrahacer {to imitate), derivados de hacer, se conjugan como este. Satisfacer {to satisfy), derivado del antiguo espanol facer {hacer), hace el imperativo 2* pers. satisfaz 6 satis- face, J los imper. subjs. satis/iciei2i, satisficiese, etc., 6 satisfaciera, satisfaciese, etc. 6. Poder, to le able. Pudiendo, podido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Pue^Z^-o, Pu.ed i-a, " -es, " -as. Pued^-Qtu, " -e. " -a. " -a el, ella, V,, pod -emos, pod -amos. pod -amos nos,, -eis. " -ais, " -ed vos.. pvLQd -en. p\x.ed -an. pued -an ellos, ellas, Vs, PASADO DEF. 1«' IMP. DE SUBJ. 2" IMP. SUBJ. Pu(^-e, Pu6Z-iera, Pud-iese, " -iste, " -ieras. " -ieses. " -0, " -iera. " -iese. " -imos, " -ieramos, " -iesemos, " -isteis, " -ierais. " -ieseis. " -ieron. " -ieran. " -iesen. FUTURO. CONDICIONAL. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Pod-re, Pod-remos, Pod-ria, Pod-riamos, " -ras. " -reis. " -rias, " -rials. " -ra. " -ran. " -ria. " -rian. Tiempo regular : Imperfecto. Pod-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. ' See Class II, 2d example. 188 VERBOS IRREGULARES. 7. Poner, to put. Poniendo, puesto. PRES. DE IND. PRES . DE SUBJ IMPERATIVO. Pon^ ^-0, Pong ^-a, pon -es, " -as, Pon tu, . pong *-a el, ella^V.^ -e, li -a, " -emos, a -amos, " -amos nos., -eis, u -ais, pon -ed vos., " -en. a -an. pong -an ellos, ellas^ Ts, PASADO DEF, 1^ IMP. SUBJ. 2° IMP. SUBJ. Pus-e, Pus -iera, Pus-iese, " -iste, ti -leras, " -ieses, " -0, a -iera, " -iese. " -imos, a -ieramos. " -iesemos, " -isteis, (( -ierais, " -ieseis, " -ieron. ti -ieran. " -iesen. FUTURO. CONDICIONAL. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Pon& ^-re, Pondi '-remos, Pond ^-ria, Pond ^-riamos, " -ras, " -reis, a -rias, " -rials, " -ra. " -ran. it -ria. " -rian. Tiempo regular: Imperfecto. Pon-Ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Los verbos siguientes se conjugan como poner : Anteponer, to place before. Oponer, to oppose. Componer, to repair. Posponer, to postpone. Deponer, to depose. Proponer, to propose. Descomponer, to discompose. Peponer, to replace. Disponer, to dispose. Sobreponer, to place over. Exponer, to expose. Suponer, to suppose. Imponer^ to impose. Trasponer, to transpose. Indisponer, to indispose. 1 Observe that the irregularities of poner for the present, future, and con- ditional of the indicative and present of the subjunctive are just like the cor- responding in the verb tener; see page 191. VERBOS IBREGULARES. 189 8. €luerer, to want, will, to love, Queriendo, querido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Quier-o, Quier-3^, " -es, " -as. Quier-Q tu, " -e, " -a, " -a el, ella, F., quer -emos, quer -amos, quer -amos nos.. " -eis, " -ais, " -ed vos.. quier -en. quier -an. quier -an ellos, ellas, Vs, PASADO DEF. l*' IMP. SUBJ. 2° IMP. SUBJ. §Mis-e, §wis-iera. ^t^is-iese. " -iste. " -ieras, " -ieses, " -o, " -iera, " -iese. " -imos, " -ieramos, " -iesemos, " -isteis^ " -ierais. " -ieseis. *' -ieron. " -ieran. " -iesen. PUTURO. CONDICIONAL. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Quer-r6, Quer-remos, Quer-ria, Quer-riamos, " -r&s. ' -r6is, " -rias, " -rials, " -r&. ' -xkxi. " -ria. " -rian. Tiempo regular : Imperfecto. duer-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. 9. Saber,* to know. Sabiendo, sabido. PRES. DE IND, PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. S6* /Sep *-a. oc. sab-es, " -as, . Sabi-e^w, " -e, " -a. ^ep -a el, ella, F., " -emos, " -amos, " -amos nos,^ " -eis. " -ais, sab -ed vos., " -en. " -an. 5ep -an ellos, ellas, Vs, 1 Observe that saber is conjugated just like caber, except the first person singular of the indicative present. 14 190 VERBOS IRREGULARES. PASADO DEF. l®"" IMP. SUBJ. >Sup-e, /Sup-iera, " -iste, " -ieras. " -0, " -iera, " -imos, " -ieramos. " -isteis, " -ierais, " -ieron. " -ieran. FUTURO. Singular. Plural. Sab-re, Sab-remos, " -ras. " -reis, " -ra. " -ran. 2<* IMP. SUBJ, /Sup-iese, " -ieses, " -iese, , " -iesemos, " -ieseis, " -iesen. CONDICIONAL. Singular. Plural. Sab-ria, Sab-riamos. " -rias, " -rials, " -ria. ** -rian. Tiempo regular : Imperfecto. Sab-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. 10. Ser, to he. Siendo, sido. PRES. DE IND, PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Soy, er-es, Se-a, " -as. S^tu, es, "-a, se-a e7, ella, F., s-omos, " -amos. " -amos nos.. "-ois, " -ais. s -ed vos,. "-on. " -an. se-an ellos, ellas, Vs^ PASADO DEF. V^ IMP. SUBJ. 2® IMP. SUBJ. Fu-i, Fu-era, Fu-ese, " -iste. " -eras. " -eses. "-6, " -era, " -ese. " -imos, " -eramos. " -6semos, " -isteis, " -erais. " -eseis. " -eron. " -eran. " -esen. Singular: IMPERFECTO. Era, Plural. Eramos, eras, erais. era. eran. Tiempos regulares : Futuro. S-ere, -eras, -era, -eremos, -ereis, -eran. Condicional. S-eria, -erias, -eria, -eriamos, -eriais, -erian. VERBOS IREEGULARES. 191 11. Tener, fo have^ to hold. Teniendo, tenido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Teng'O^ tien -es, Teng-3k, " -as. Ten tu. " -e, " -a, ieng-si el, ella, F., ten -emos. *• -amos, " -amos nos.. " -eis, " -ais, ten -ed vos,. tien -en. " -an. teng-an ellos, ellas. Vs. PASADO DEF. I*' IMP. SUBJ. 2* IMP, SUBJ, Tuv-e, Tuv-iera, ^'uv-iese. " -iste. " -ieras. " -ieses, " -0, " -iera. " -iese, " -imos, " -ieramos. " -iesemos, " -isteis, " -ierais, " -ieseis, " -ieron. " -ieran. " -iesen. FUTURO. CONDICIONAL. Singular. Plural. Te^d-remos, Singular. Plural. Te/id-ria, Trnd-riamos, " -ras, " -r6is, u -rias, " -rials, " -r^. " -ran. u -ria. " -rian. Tiempo regular : Imperfecto. Ten-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Los siguientes verbos compuestos de tener, se conjugan como 61 : Atenerse, to abide. Mantener, to maintain.- Contener, to contain. Obtener, to obtain. Detener, to detain. Retener, to retain. Entretener, to entertain. Sostener, to sustain. 12. Traer, i to bring. Trayendo, traido. PRES, DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ IMPERATIVO. Traig-0, ^mig-a, tra -es. " -85, Tra-e tu, -e, " -a, traig-a, el, ella, V., " -emos, " -amos, " -amos wos., " -eis. " -ais. tra -ed vos,, -en. " -an. ^raig-an ellos, ellas, Vs» 192 VERBOS IRREGCLARES. PASADO DEF. I" IMP. SUBJ. 20 IxMP. SUBJ. Traye, Tmj-era, Tmj-ese, " -iste, " -eras, " -eses, " -0, " -era, " -ese, " -imos, " -^ramos. " -6seinos, " -isteis, " -erais. " -eseis. " -eron. " -eran. " -esen. Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. Tra-ia, -ias, -ia, -lamos, -iais, -ian. Future. Tra-ere, -eras, -era, -eremos, -ereis, -eran. • Condicional. Tra-eria, -erias, -eria, -eriamos, -eriais, -erian. Los verbos siguientes, compuestos de traer, se conjugan como el : Abstraer, to abstract. Detraer, to detract. JRetraer, to retract. Atraer, to attract. Distraer, to distract. Substraer, to subtract. ContraeVy to contract. Eztraer, to extract. Sustraer, to subtract. 13. Valer,^ to be worth. Valiendo, valido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Valg-0, val -es, FaZg-a, , " -as. Val -e fu, " -e. -a. valg-a. el, ella, F., " -emos, -amos, " -amos nos,. " -eis, -ais. val -ed vos., " -en. -an. valg-an ellos, ellas, Vs, FUTURO. CONDICIONAL. Sing^ular. Vald-re, Plural. Fa?d-remos, Singular. Plural. Vald-TiSL, FaZd-riamos, " -ras, ' ' -reis. 11 -rias, " -rials. " -ra. i ' -ran. li -ria. " -rian. 1 This verb is never used in Spanish referrinf^ to the amount of capital persons have, but to the cost of things only ; and so it is never said, ^cudnto vale ese hombref how much is that man worth? but gqtie capital tiene ese horribre? ^ Cudnto vale esa casa ? Za casa vale ^ZO ^000 (pesos). VERBOS IRREGULARES. 193 Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. Val-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Pasado Def. Val-i, -iste, -io, -imos, -isteis, -ieron. 1«' Imp. Subj. Val-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran. 2° Imp. Subj. Val-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen. Equivaler (to he equal to), compuesto de valer, se con- juga como el. 14. Ver, to see. Viendo, visto. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Fe-0, Fe-a, V -es, " -as, V-etu, " -e, " -a, ve-a. el, ella, F, " -emos, " -amos, " -amos nos.j " -eis, " -ais. V -ed vos., " -en. " -an. t^e-an ellos, ellas, Vs, Singular Fe-ia, IMPERFECTO. Plural. Fe-iamos, (( , -las. n -iais, Tiempos regulares : Pasado Def. V-i, -iste, -io, -imos, -isteis, -ieron. Futuro. V-ere, -eras, -era, -eremos, -ereis, -eran. Condicional. V-eria, -erias, -eria, -eriamos, -eriais, -erian. l*"^ Imp. Subj. V-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran. 2o Imp. Subj. V-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen. Prever {to foresee) j entrever (to have a glimpse of)y compuestos de ver, se conjugan como ^1. 3. Tercera Conjugacion. Los siete verbos siguientes pertenecen d este caso : Asir (to seize) ; conducir (to conduct) ; decir (to say, to tell) ; ir (to go) ; oir (to hear) ; salir (to go out) ; venir (to come). 194 VERBOS IRREGULARES. 1. Asir,* to seize Asiendo, asido. PEES. DE DTD. PRES. DE SXJBJ. Asg-o, ^5g-a, as -es, " -as. " -e. " -a. " -imos. " -amos. " -is. " -ais. " -en. " -an. IMPERATIVO. As -e tu, asg-SL el, ella, F., " -amos 7105., as -id V08., asg-an ellos, ellas, Vs, Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. As-ia, -ias, -ia, -iaraos, -iais, -ian. Pasado. As-i, -iste, -io, -imos, -isteis, -ieron. Future. As-ire, -iras, -ira, -iremos, -ireis, -iran. Condicional. As-iria. -irias, -iria, -iriamos, -iriais, -irian. l*" Imp. Subj. As-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran. 2<> Imp. Subj. As-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen. 2. Conducir, to conduct, Conduciendo, conducido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Conduzc *-o, conduc -es, ^findij^^ 2-0 -as. Conduc -e tu, -e. " -a, conduzc *-a el, ella, V.^ " -imos, (( -amos. " -amos nos.. -is. a -ais. conduc -id vos.. " -en. a -an. conduzc -an ellos, ellas, Vs, PASADO DEF. 1^ IMP. SUBJ. 2° IMP. SUBJ. Conduj-e, Conduj ^-era, Conduj 2-ese, " -iste, a -eras. " -eses, " 2.0, a -era, -ese, " -imos, i( -eramos. " -esemos, " -isteis. i( -erais, " -eseis, " 2-eron. (( -eran. " -esen. 1 Is now nearly obsolete, and only ^iven for reference. * Compare verbs ending in ucir, Class III. Preterits loose the i of the termination after j or y; see page 180, note 4. VERBOS IRREGULARES. 195 Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. Conduc-ia, -las, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Futuro. Conduc-ire, -Iras, -ira, -iremos, -ireis, -iran. Condi clonal. Conduc-iria, -irias, -iria, -irianios, -iriais, -irian. Se conjugan como conducir : Traducir (to translate) ; deducir (to deduct) ; inducir (to induce) ; introducir (to introduce) ; producir (to produce) ; reconducir (to conduct again) ; and reducir (to reduce), 0. Decir, to tell, to say, Dicie7ido, dicho. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Dig-0, i)ig -a, die -es, a -as. Di tu. it -a, dig-a. el, ella, F., dec -imos, " -amos, " -amos nos.. " -is, u -ais. dec -id vos.. die -en. u -an. dig-an ellos, ellas. Vs. PASADO DEF. 1®' IMP. SUBJ. 2° IMP. SUBJ. Dij-e, ^ij ^-era, X)ij ^-ese. " -iste, " -eras, " -eses, "^-0, (( -era, " -ese. " -imos, " -frames, " -^semos, " -isteis, a -erais, " -eseis, "i-eron. ii -eran. " -esen. FUTURO. CONDICIONAL. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Z)i-r6, Di-remos, m -ria, Di-riamos, - -ras, " -r§is, a -rias, " -rials, " -ra. " -ran. a -ria. " -rian. Tiempo regular : Imperfecto. Dec-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Se conjugan corao decir, sus corapuestos, contradecir (to contradict), desdecir (to retract), predecir (to predict, to fore- tell), bendecir (to bless), j maldecir (to curse), excepto el futuro J condicional (contradecir^, contradeciria, etc., ben- » See page "194, note 2. 196 VERBOS IRREGULARES. decir6, bendeciria, etc., iiialdecir6, maldeciria, etc.), y la segunda persona singular del imperativo (contradice tu^ desdice tu^ bendice t'Ci^ maldice t'li, etc.), que son regulares. Los participios pasados de bendecir y maldecir, son regulares como bendecido y maldecido, 6 irregulares como bendito y maldito, pero estos ultimos son siempre usados como adjetivos, v. gr. : Pan bendito. Holy bread. El 68 un hombre maldito. He is a cursed man. 4. Ir, to go. Yendo, ido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Voy, Vay-a, vas, " -as. Ve tu, va, ", -a, vay-a el, ella, T., vamos, " -amos, V -amos ^ nos., vais, " -ais, id ros.. van. " -an. vay-an ellos, ellas, F& Singu j^^ IMPERFECTO. Plural. Iba Ibamos, Ibas, Ibais, Iba Iban. PASADO DEF.* l^' mp. SUBJ.2 2° IMP. SUBJ.« Fu-i, Fu-era, Fu-ese, " -iste, " -eras, " -eses, "-6, " -era, " -ese, " -imos, " -eramos, " -6semos, " -isteis, " -erais, " -eseis, " -eron. " -eran. " -esen. FUTURO. CONDICIONAL. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Ire, Iremos, Iria, Iriamos. Iras, Ireis, Irias, Iriais, Ira. Iran. Iria. Irian. 1 Notice that onhj in this verb the first person plural, imperative, does not follow the irregularity of same person of the present subjunctive. * These tenses are the same as the corresponding of ser. VERBOS lEEEGULARES. 197 5. Oir,* to hear. Oyendo, oido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Oig'-o, Oig2.a, oy^ -es. " -as. Oy^-e tu, " -e, " -a, oig 2-a el, ella, F., o -imos, " -amos, *' -amos nos., " -is. " -ais, o -id vos.. oy^ -en. " -an. oig 2-an ellos, ellas, Vs. PASADO DEF. 1" IMP. SUBJ. 2o IMP. SUBJ. 0-i, 0-yera, 0-yese, "-i5te, " -yeras, *' -yeses, "-y6, "-yera, " -yese. " -imos, " -yeramos, " -yesemos, "-isteis, " -yerais, "-yeseis, " -yeron. " -yeran. " -yesen. Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. 0-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Futuro. O-iro, -iras, -ira, -iremos, -ireis, -iran. Condicional. 0-iria, -irias, -iria, -iriamos, -iriais, -irian. 6. Salir, to go out, , to leave. Saliendo, salido. PRES. DE IND. SalQ'O, sal -es. PRES. DE SUBJ. >Sa/g-a, " -as, IMPERATIVO. Sal tu, " -e, " -a. salg-si el, ella, V,, . " -imos. " -amos, " -amos 7105., " -is. " -ais. sal -id vos., " -en. " -an. salg-SLJi ellos, ellas, Vs, FUTURO. Singular. Plural. /SaZd-re, /SaZd-remos, CONDICIONAL. Sin^lar. Plural. /SaZd-ria, ASaZd-riamos, " -r6.s. " -reis. <( -rias, " -rials, " -Tk. " -ran. (( -ria. " -rian. 1 In this verb, as in those ending in aer, eer, oer, and mr (only those in which the u is sounded), when the vowel i of the inflexion-endings, followed by e or o, begins a syllable, it becomes the consonant y. See verbs caer^ lear, creer. etc. ^ Oh'-ee-go. Oh'-ee-gah, -gahs, -gah, -gah'-mohs .... 198 VERBOS IRrwEGULARES. Tiempos regulares : Imperfecto. Sal-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Pasado. Sal-i, -iste, -io, -imos, -isteis, -ieron. 1^' Imp. Subj. Sal-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran, 2® Imp. Subj. Sal-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen. Se conjuga como salir, su compuesto sobresalir {to excel). 7. Venir, to come, Viniendo, venido. PRES. DE IND. PRES. DE SUBJ. IMPERATIVO. Veng-o, Veng-a, * vien -es, " -as, Ven til. " -e, " -a, veng-SL el, ella, V., ven -imos, " -amos, " -amos 7ios.y " -is. " -ais. ven -id vos., vien -en. " -an. ve7ig-sin ellos, ellas, Vs. PASADO DEF. !«•■ IMP. SUBJ. 2° IMP. SUBJ. Vin-e, Fin-iera, FiTi-iese, " -iste, " -ieras. " -ieses. " -0, " -iera, " -iese, " -imos, " -ieramos, " -iesemos. " -isteis, " -ierais. " -ieseis. " -ieron. " -ieran. " -iesen. FUTURO. CONDICIONAL. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Fe/id-re, Fend-remos, Fend-ria, Fend-riainos» " -Tka, " -reis, " -rias, " -rials, " -ra. " -ran. " -ria. " -rian. Tiempo regular : Imperfecto. Ven-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian. Se conjugan como venir, los verbos siguientes, sus de- rivados : avenir {to agree) ; desavenir {to disagree) ; pre- venir {to warn) ; convenir {to a^ree) ; intervenir {to inter- fere) ; sobrevenir {to happen). FIN DEL LIBRO III. LIBRO CUARTO. PARTE PRIMERA. LECCI6N DlfiCIMOTERCIA. De las Pohlaciones. Un pueblo, una aldea Las calles (kahl'-lyays), avenidas Una callejuela (kal-lyay-hway'-lah) La acera^ (ah-thay'-rah) Una iglesia (ee-glay'-see-ah) Una catedral (kah-tay-drahl') Un palacio (pah-lah'-thie-oh) Un hotel (oh-tell'), una fonda Un hospital (ohs-pee-tahl') . Un barrio (bah'-rree-oh) Los arrabales Los alrededores^ (ahl-rray-day-doh'-rais) La bolsa El correo (koh-rray'-oh) or la casa correo Una escuela, un colegio (koh-lay'-hee-oh) La universidad Una plaza (plah'-^Aah) a square. Una fuente (fwaing'-tay) . : . . . a fountain, Un paseo a promenade. El parque . . . . . . . , the park. Un edificio (ay-dee-fee'-thie-oh) . . . .a building. 1 Accra (sidewalk) is called in the Spanish-American countries hanqueta, a Alrededorest from alrededor (around), is rendered for the surroundings of a town. a town, a village. the streets, avenues, a lane. the sidewalk. a church. a cathedral. a palace. a hotel, an inn. a hospital. a ward. the suburbs. the surroundings, the exchange. the post-office. a school, a college, the university. 200 lecci6n decimotercia. ESPASfOL. 1. I A que hora se acosto ^ Yd. anoche,^ que estd Yd durmiendo todavia ? * 2. Me acoste ^ muy tarde, y me he quedado ^ dorinido. 3. No me pude^ dormir hasta las cuatro de la manana. 4. Mi criado no me^ llaino y no me he despertado^ hasta ahora. 5. Pero hagame Yd. el faror de sentarse'''; voy a levan- tarme,^ lavarme^ y vestirme^ inmediatamente. 6. Ahi tiene Yd. los periodicos de la manana. g No desea Yd. quitarse el sobretodo ? 7. Si, esta habitacion estd muy caliente, y, si me lo permite Yd. abrire la ventana. * traducci6n literal. 2. Myself I went to bed very late and myself have remained slept. ^ Se acosto^ third person, past, singular, of the reflexive verb acostarse (to go to bed). This class of verbs is conjugated the same as the active, but pre- fixing the pronominal particles me (myself), te (thyself), se (himself, herself, or yourself), nos (ourselves), os (yourselves), and se (themselves or your- selves). The particle se stands, therefore, for Mmself^ herself^ yourself^ them- selves^ and yourselves^ as also for one^s self\ and, when not strictly reflexive, for each other and one another. The conjugation of the past definite tense of the verb acostarse is: yo me acoste, tu te acostaste, e7, ella^ Vd. se acosto, nosotros nos acostamos, 'vosotros os acostasteis, ellos^ ellas^ Vds. se acostaron. 2 Anoche is rendered by last night ; esta noche by to-night. 3 Me he quedado dormido., from quedarse dormido (to oversleep). The pronominal particles, when in connection with the infinitive, gerund, and im- perative affirmative, are joined to them as one word\ but separate and placed before the verb when in connection with any other tense. The gerund of quedarse (to remain) is queddndose., and the imperative, quedate tii^ quedese el, ella^ or Vd. quedemonos nosotros^ quedaos vosotros., quedense ellos., ellas^ or Vs. Note that the first person plural of this tense loses the s of the termina- tion mo8 before the particle nos : quedemonos instead of quedemo&nos. lecci6n decimotercia. 201 PRONUNCIACION. traducci6n. 1. i . . . . ah-no'-chay .... toh'- dah-vee'-ah ? 3. 4. 5. , . . ah-kohss-tay' .... kay- dah'-do. . days-pair-tah'-doh .... 1. At what time did you go to bed last night that you are still sleeping 9 2. I went to bed very late, arid 1 overslept myself, 3. / could not sleep until four o'clock in the morning. 4. My servant did not call me, and I have not awakened until now. . saing-tarr'-say voh'-ee 5. But please sit down; I am going to get up, wash, and dress immediately. There you have the morning papers. DonH you wish to take off your overcoat 9 Yes, this room is very warm, and, if you will permit me, I will open the window. 6 pay-ree-oh'-dee-kohs kee-tarr'-say. 7 ah-bee-tah-thie-ong' ah-bree-ree'-ah .... 6. 7. 4 Could, implying power (I was able), is translated by podia or pude% as, no podia or no pude dormirme. If used with the conjunction si (if), i. e., if I could (if I were able), by pudiera or pudiese ; as, me dormiria si pudiera or si pudiese (I would sleep if I could). But when the condition is implied, \)Y podria\ as, podria dormirme si quisiera (I could go to sleep if I wished). ^ It is very important not to confound the indirect object personal pranouna with the pronominal reflexive particles. In this case, me llamb, me is the in- ^ direct object personal pronoun, as llamb, third person, indicates that somebody other than myself called me. To be a reflexive form, me, first person, must be used in connection with thQ first person of the verb, the same as te with the second, se with the third, etc. The verb, on the contrary, with the personal pronouns me, te, le, etc., must be in connection with a third person, and the verb agree with it. Examples : ]^l me llamb, ella no nos escrihib. « Me he despertado, from despertarse (to awake one's self). 7 Sentarse (to be seated). Many of the passive English verbs s^re reflexive in Spanish, viz. : equivocarse, to be mistaken ; enganarse, to be deceived ; disgustarse, to be displeased, etc. Also those compounded with to get and to become, viz. : enriquecerse, to become rich ; enfermarse, to get sick, etc. 8 Levantarme (to rise myself), from levantarse (to get up) ; lavarme (to wash myself), from lavarse (to wash one's self) ; 'vestirme (to dress myself), from vestirse (to dress one's self), are reflexive verbs. See note 3. 202 LB0CI6n Dl^CmOTERCIA. vspaSoJj, 8. jNo Be lesfriaria^ V de diciembre (the draft will be due on the 1st of Decem- ber) ; el pagare estd vencido (the note is due). ^ See page 210, note 1. LECCldN DECIMOQUINTA. 219 PROXUNCIACIOX. 9 raing'-tang .... 10. Ahl-kee'-lah 11. ... . 12 ray-dong'-dah f 13 ing-fohrr-mahrr'-lay .... 14 vaing-thie'-doh ? 15 maing-swahr-maing-tay 16 tree-mais'-tray .... 17 king-thay'-nah .... 18 moo-dahr'-may .... 19 TRADUCCIOX. 9. What is the rent of these rooms f 10. Do you rent hy the month or hy the week 9 11. How much do you charge for room and hoard 9 12. Do they serve meals a la carte or table d^hote 9 13. / must inform you that the payment is in advance. 14. Would it not be the same to you when the month is up 9 15. I am paid monthly, and there- fore should prefer to pay you at the end of the months 16. Excuse me, but all my arrange- ments are quarterly, and 1 can not rent my rooms under any other conditions. 17. / will pay you every fortnight in advance, that is all I can promise to do. 18. I wish to move as soon as pos- sible, and if you will permit me I will take the rooms now. 19. Within an hour you will re- ceive my luggage. 4 Todo, todos, {toda, todas^) whole^ all^ every, everything ; as, todo el dia (the whole day) ; todos los dias (every day) ; toda la nocTie (the whole night) ; todas las noches (every night) ; todos las veces (every time). 5 The superlative is formed by means of mas, menos, and the article el, la, lo, los, las', as, estas casas son las mas hermosas de la ciudad. It sometimes relates an idea, as in the sentence es lo mas a que puedo comprometerme. ■* « Mudar (to move) means to change one's place in the sense of going to live elsewhere, while mover (to move) implies movement only. 7 Desde (from) points out the beginning of time or place ; as, Desde la creacibn del mundo. From the creation of the world. Desde Nueva Yorh a Filadelfia. From New York to Philadelphia. For this reason it forms part of several adverbial expressions which signify time or place ; viz., desde ahora (from this time); desde aqui (from hence), etc. 220 LECCI6n DfiCIMOQUINTA. espaSTol. 20. Aqui tiene Vd. el importe de una quincena, cincuenta pesos. Hagame el favor de darme el recibo. 21. Sirvase Yd. leermelo.^ 22. "Recibi de Don Fulano de TaP la cantidad^ de cincuenta pesos ($50.00) en pago de la renta de una quincena adelantada por los cuartos que ocupa en la calle del Pez,^ niimero veinticinco, Madrid, 15 de Enero de 1890." 23. Muy bien, tenga Vd. la bondad de firmarlo. 24. Las comidas se sirven : de siete y media d nueve de la manana el almuerzo ; la merienda de doce a una, J ]a comida a las siete en punto ^ de la noche. 25. Los domingos hacemos excepcion j comemos a la una en vez de las siete. ^ It must "be noticed that a sentence is never constructed in Spanish, as in English, by placing the personal pronoun mi (me), preceded by the preposi- tion ^«ra (for), after the verb, but by using the accusative pronoun me before or after the verb, according to the tense in use. In the present instance it is not permissible to say : sirvase Vd. leerlo para mi^ but leermelo ; viz., ^quiere Vd. alcanzarme (lit., reach me) eso? instead of ^quiere Vd. alcanzar eso para mi? (will you please get that /or me?)^ unless the sentence begin with a preposition, then it is necessary to be mentioned in the answer, and the con- struction will be as in English ; viz, 4 para quien lo alcanzo f le suplico que lo alcance Vd. para mi. 2 Don Fulano de Tal (Mr. Such-a-Person), Mr. So-and-So. Tal {tales., pi.), such., such a, refers to persons and things ; as, no conosco lecci6n decimoquinta. 221 pronunciaci6n. 20 ray-thie'-boh. 21 22 23 firr-mahrr'-loh. 24 aing poong'-toh . . . 25 ays-thayp-thie-ong' traducci6n. 20. Here is the amount for a fort- night, fifty dollars. Please give me the receipt, 21. Please read it for me} 22. ^^ Received from Mr, So-and- So the sum of fifty dollars {$50.00) in payment of a fortnights rent in advance for the rooms he occupies at No. 25 Pez St., Madrid, January 15, 1890." 23. Very well, please sign it. 24. Meals are served from 7.30 to 9 A.M., breakfast; lunch from 12 to 1; and dinner at 7 P. M. exactly, 25. We make an exception on Sun- days, and take dinner at 1 instead of 7. a tal persona, I don't know such a person ; tat individuo no vive aqui, such an individual does not live here ; tal amo, tal criado, like master, like serv- ant. Un tal, una tal, means a certain; un tal Fernandez estwvo aqui, a cer- tain Fernandez was here. Tal cual (so so) ; as, / cbmo esta Vd. ? tal cual. Con tal qv>e, on condition that; as, se lo yrestare a Vd. con tal que me lo devuelva, I shall lend it to you on condition that you return it to me. * Cantidad or 6uma (sum) is equally correct. * Pez (fish). In Spanish the word calle is always placed before the noun. La calle del Pez (the Street of the Fish), Fish Street. 6 The combination of the words en punto, used only in connection with the hour, is idiomatic, and synonymous with exactamente (sharp). 16 "^^2^^ lecci6n decimosexta. LECCION D:fiCIMOSEXTA. Articulos de JEscritorio} Una carta, una esquela (ays-kay'-lah) . a letter, a note, Una cartera ....... pocket-hook. Papel de cartas mriting-paper. Papel ordinario ordinary writing-paper^ Una hoja de papel (oh'-hah) . . .a sheet of paper, Un sobre an envelope. Una pluma de acero ^ . . . .a steel pen. Una pluma de ave^ (. . . . ah'-vay) . . a quill pen. Un sellc* (sayl'-lyoh) a seal, a stamp. Un tintero, la tinta an ink-stand, the ink, Tinta de copiar, tinta encamada . . copying-ink, red ink, Un lapiz (lah'-peeth) apericil. Goma^ de borrar, goma .... rubber, mucilage, Un cortaplumas ® a penknife. Cortar un lapiz to sharpen a pencil. Afilar un cortaplumas . . . .to sharpen a knife. Papeleria, el papelero .... stationery, the stationer, Un cuademo a copy-book. El libro mayor, el libro de caja . . the ledger, the cash-hook. El diario (dee-ah'-ree-oh) .... the journal. El libro de banco the hank-book. El libro copiador (koh-pee-ah-dorr') . . the copying-book, Una factura an invoice. Un conocimiento a hill of lading, Una regla, rayar uji libro . . .a ruler, to rule a hook, Un calendario (kah-laing-dah'-ree-oh) . a calendar. Una circular a circular. Un directorio (dee-raik-toh'-ree-oh) . . a directory. Papel secante'' blotti^ig-paper. 1 Writing materials. ^ Acero, steel. ' Ave, fowl. * Sello, seal, is also rendered for stamp. Sellar, to seal, to stamp. 6 Goma stands for both rubber and mucilage', the rubber being distin* guished by goma de borrar (erasing rubber). • Cortaplumas is a compound word of corta (cut) and pluma (pen). ' Secante, from eecar (to dry) ; papel secante, lit., drying-paper. LBCGldN pIlCIMOSEXI'^ Adverhios de Lugar} Delante. ^ En dbnde P J ^ ' Detr&s. J De d6xide P Whence f Dentro. , Para d6nde P Which way f Fuera. ^D6ndeP \wheref ^A d6ndeP Aqui. Alii, ahi.* Aca.» A11&.* Arriba. Abajo. Where to f Here, There, This way. That way. Above, Below, LejoB. Cerca. Adelante. Atrd.s. Debajo. A la derecha. A la izqiiierda. Adverhios de Cantidad.^ ^ Cu4nto P ^ cu&nta P Mow much ? Bastante. ^ Cu&ntos P ^ cu&ntas P How many ? Algo. Mucbo. Poco. Demasiado. ^ C6mo P Bi^n, xnaL Despacio. Asi asi. De veras. De burla. Es verdad. Es cierto. Much, Little, Too much. Casi. Apenas. Basta. Adverhios de Modo,^ How f Claro. Well, ill. Alto. Slowly, Bajo (quedo). So so, Asi. Truly, De balde. For fun. Gratis. Adverhios de Afirmacidn. It is so. Si ; * si, se&or. It is certain, Ciertamente. Before, ^t f Behind, Within. Without, Far, afar. Near, Forward. Backward, Beneath, To the right. To the left. Enough, Something, Almost, Scarcely, That is enougK Clearly, Aloud, Imidly, Soft, softly. So, thus, I Gratis, Fes ; yes, sir. Certainly, Adverhios de NegaciSn, No^; no, sefior. No; no, sir, De ningun modo. In no way. No es verdad. It is not so, Nada de eso. ) Not at all, Absolutamente. ) Absolutely, 1 Adverbs of place. a For the difference between alii and ahi, acd and alia, see page 139, note 9. 8 Adverbs of quantity. * Adverbs of method and order. * After verbs denoting question, belief, declaration, and mspicion, ye« and no are expressed by que si, que no \ as, yo digo que si y el dice que no, I say ^ yes and he says no ; yo creo que si y U que no, 1 think so and he does not. 224 LECCION D^CIMOSEXTA. espaSol, * 1. Segun lo que ^ se me habia dicho esperaba encontrar en Nueva York un elima agradabilisimo.^ 2. De raodo que se ha equivocado Yd. ; j no es verdad, araigo mio ? ^ 3. Por supuesto.* Ayer viniendo del Parque Central, llovio,^ granizo,^ nevo ^ y helo.' 4. En general ^ nieva y hace f rio en invierno, es ver- dad, pero tambien vemos el sol muy a menudo. 5. En tres semanas no ha escampado''' un momento-, llueve^ 6 llovizna^ eonstantemente, y aun ha tronado^ y relampagueado.^ * * G. Si ; pero no es muy frecuente, y no tardard Yd. en ver las calles cubiertas de nieve. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 1. According to {segun) it that they to me had said I expected to find in New York a climate very agreeable. 3. For supposed (of course). Yesterday coming of the Park Cen- tral, rained, hailed, snowed, and froze. 6. Yes, but not it is very frequent, and not will last you in to see the streets covered of snow. 1 Lo que (that which) and todo lo que (all that) relate an idea^ not a word; viz., lo que el dice no es lo que Vd. piensa^ ichat he says is not what you think ; no creo nada de todo lo que no8 han dicho, I don't believe any- thing of what they have told us. ' See page 140, note 2. • We said (page 99, note 7) that the absolute form, mio, tuyo, suyo, nvet- iro, vuestro, always follows the noun, and is used in the address and employed with nouns in an indeterminate sense; as, j querido amigo mio! my dear friend; jies el senor un pariente 8uyof is this gentleman a relative of yours? LECCION DECIMOSEXTA. 225 PRONUNCIACION. 1. Say-goong' .... ah-grah-dah- bee-lee'-see-moh. 3 lyoh-vee-o', grah-nee- thoh', nay-vo' ee ay-lo', 4 nee-ay'- vah .... 5 ays-kam-pah'-doh .... lyoh-veeth'-nah .... ray- lam-pah-gai-ah'-doh. 6 nee-ay'-vay. TRADUCCION. 1. According to what I had been told, 1 expected to find a very agreeable climate in New York, 2. And so you have been mis- taken. Is it not true, my friend P 3c Of course. Yesterday, coming from Central Park, it rained, hailed, snowed, and froze, 4. Generally it snows and is cold in the winter, it is true ; but we also see the sun very often, 5. In three weeks it has not ceased to raifi one moment ; it con- stantly rains or drizzles, and even has thundered and lightened. 6. Yes, but this doe^ not occur frequently, and it will not be long before you see the streets cove^-ed with snow. It is also used to express greater intensity or rhetorical effect ; as, es culpa tv/ya y no mia, it is thy fault and not mine. * For supuesto, synonymous with es claro, and ciertamente is given for of course. * Llovib, granizb, nevo, and held are the past respectively of the imper- sonal verbs llover, granizar, ne^ar, and h^lar. Impersonal verbs are, of course, conjugated only in the third person singular. 8 The preposition en is used idiomatically in different senses ; such as : en general (generahneMe), generally; en particular {particularmente), par- ticularly ; de dia en dia, from day to day ; de tiempo en tiempo, from time to time ; de hoy en quince dias, a fortnight from to-day ; de cuando en cuando, once in a while. 7 Escampado, from escampar (to cease rainins^), is only used in this sense. 8 Llueve, llovizna, from the present tenses of the impersonal verbs Hover (to rain) (see page 167, 2o ejemplo) and lloviznar (to drizzle) ; ha tronado and ha relampagueado are the perfectos definidos of tronar (to thunder) and r«- larrvpaguear (to lighten). 226 lecci6n decimosexta. espaS^ol. 7. Pues eso sera muy desagradable cuando empiece ^ d deshelar. 8. Mientras dura el deshielo,^ si ; pero el sol seea pronto las calles de esta ciudad. 9. I Volvemos ^ a hablar del ^ tiempo ? Crei que no le gustaba ^ a Vd. tal conversacion. 10. En ef ecto, la detesto ; pero yo creo que debe liablarse de todo. ■^11. Del* tiempo es muy neeesario ocuparse, aunque solo sea ^ de ^ cuando en cuando.^ 12. Por ahora tenemos bastante de tan monotona con versacion, ya''^ que hemos practicado los verbos impersonales. 13. Hagamos, pues, otra ^ cosa; y ya' que no podemos salir, leamos un poco. * traducci6n literal. 11. Of the weather is very necessary to occupy one's self, though it may be only from when in when (now and then). 1 Some conjunctions, such as cuando (when), aun cuando (even when), aunque (though), siempre que (whenever), etc., govern the suhjunctive mood when possibilitij only is implied, and the indicative if a positive fact is ex- pressed ; as, sera muy desagradable cuando empiece a deshelar^ it will be very disagreeable when it Ttiay begin to thaw ; es muy desagradable cuando empieza (positive) a deshelar^ it is very disagreeable when it does begin to thaw. 3 El deshielo (the thawing) is the noun from the impersonal verb deshelar (to thaw) ; see page 163, ler ejemplo. 3 Volver d (see page 185, note 8) means to do a thing over again. * Del^ when dependent upon a verb, as in this case, followed by a noun, takes the place of about in English : hablar de or tratar de un asiinto^ to speak about a subject. » See page 141, note 5. « De means of a^ well as from^ and is also translated by desde , as, del lecci6n decimosexta. 227 PRONUNCIACION. 7, , , . , day-say-larr'. 8. Mee-aing'-trahs . . . . ay'-loh .... 9. 10 ay-fayk'-toh , 11 ah-oong'-kay . 12 moh-noh'-toh-nah im-pair-soh-nah'-lais. 13 lay-ah'-mohs . TRADUCCION. 7. But that will he very disagree- able when it begins to thaw, day-see- 8. Yes, while the thaw lasts ; but the sun soon dries the streets of this city. 9. Are we going to speak again about tJie iveather 9 I thought that such conversa- tion did not please you. , 10. Really I detest it, but I think that one ought to speak of everything. 11. It is very necessary to speak about the weather, although only from time to time. . 12. We have sufficient for the pres- ent of such monotonous con- versation, now that we have practiced the impersonal verbs. 13. Let us do something else ; and, as we cannot go out, let us read a little. {de el) principio alfin (from the beginninp^ to the end) ; de arriha a la jo (from top to bottom). The expression de cuando en cuando is idiomatic, and ren- dered iov from time to time, or once in a while, or now and then. ' Ta (already) means sometimes now, as in the present instance ; viz., ^me entiende Vd. ya? do you understand me now\ si, ya le entiendo a Vd. yes, I understand you now. Ya with a ne^crative signifies no longer, not any more, not now, viz., ya no le vere mas, I shall never {no longer) see him again ; ya no es tiempo, there is no time any more ; ya no me Jiahla, he does not speak to me now. 8 Otro, otra (another, other), otros, oiras (others), refer to persons and things ; as, el otro dia (the other' day) ; otro dia {another day) ; otra t^ez {an- other time, again) ; el otro homhre (the other man). It must bo noticed that we never say in Spanish un otro for another, but simply otro ; as, eso no lo Tiubiera dicho otro, another would not have said so, but requires the definite article el, la, whenever a distinct person or thing is to be specified ; as, no m« de Vd. esCf deme el otro, don't give me that, give me the other. 228 lecci6n decimosexta. ESPASfOL. *14. Tiene Vd. razon^; mejor sera eso que tratar de^ andar por esas calles tan resbaladizas.^ 15. I Que prefiere Vd. leer ? **16. Preferiria una obra escrita* por* cualquier^ autor espanol. ^ 17. Creo que pasariamos un buen rato^ leyendo el ''Gil Bias de Santillana." 18. Conozco''^ el libro; pero, ^no fue escrito* por* Le Sage? 19. £l fue efectivamente quieu lo escribio en franees, J no es sino una traduccion arreglada del de D. Antonio Solis. * 20. Yo habia oido decir que era original y que fue traducido * luego ^ por Isla. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 14 You have right; better will be that than to try of to walk through those streets so slippery. 16. I should prefer a work written by any author Spanish. 17. I think that we would spend a good while (rato) reading the " Gil Bias de Santillana." 20. I had heard to say that was the original and that was trans- lated afterward by Isla. 1 See page 114, observation 3. 2 There are about fifteen verbs requiring de before the infinitive ; of these the principal are: aeabar de (to have just); acordarse de {to remember to); alegrarse de (to be glad to) ; dejar de (to fail to) ; encargar de (to commission to) ; hahei' de (to have to) ; olvidarse de (to forget to) ; and tratar de (to try to). 3 Reshaladizas (slippery), from reshalar (to slip). * Passive verbs are formed with the auxiliary ser and the past participle of the principal verb, as in English. Passive verbs are declinable ; escrita ia the feminine form, as it refers to ohra^ feminine. It has been said that by is translated for por aft^r passive verbs. lecci6n decimosexta. 229 PRONUNCIACION. 14 rais-bah-lah-dee'-thas. 15 16 kwahl-kee-air' .... 17 rah'-toh " Hill Bias day Sang-teel-lyah'-nah." 18. i . . . . koh-noth'-koh .... Lay Sah'-ge? 19 Ahng-toh'-nee-oh Soh-lis'. 20. , Iway'-goh .... Is'-lah. 20. / TRADUCCION. 14. You are right ; that will he better than trying to walk, on those slippery streets. 15. What do you prefer to read 9 16. 7 should 'prefer a work written by any Spanish author, I think we would pass a pleas- ant time reading " Gil Bias de Santillanay I know the book; but was it not written by Le Sage 9 19. It was, indeed, he who wrote it in French, but that is only a copy arranged from the work of Don Antonio Soils, have heard it said that it was the original, and after- ward translated by Isla. 17, 18. ^ Cualquiera (sing.), cualesquiera (pl.)» <^^y whatever, any one, lose the final a before a noun, remaining cualquier and cualesquier, and refer to per- sons and things ; as, deme Vd. cualquiera, give me any one you please. Cual- quiera is a compound word of cual (which) and quiera (may wish), the one you may wish. It may be rendered by el que ( la que) Vd, quiera (or guste)^ los que {las que) Vd. quiera (or guste), i. e., any one you please. Ser uno un cualquiera, Spanish idiom, meaning a person of no account. • Eato, while ; un ratito, a little while. ■^ Conozco, from conocer (to know, to be acquainted with). There are two verbs in Spanish, saber and conocer, for the English to know ; and, in order not to confound them, it must be observed that saber is employed to signiiy the act of knoioing, being informed of, having learned, or having a knowledge of something; whereas conocer is used to express the fact of being acquainted with, perceiving, or being able to distingruish persons or things. Conocer, in a more practical sense, means to know by sight ; while saber is to know by study. Examples: conozco las obras de Espronceda, I know (/ have heard of, or I know by sight) the works of Espronceda ; se las obras de Esproneeda, I know {Jby heart) the works of Espronceda ; g sabe Vd. quien conoce a ese hombre ? do you know {have you been informed) who knows (^5 acquainted with) that man? 8 Luego (afterward) is an adverb, synonymous with despues. 230 LECCi6x\ DP:cniosEXTA. ESPA5J0L. 21. El padre Isla corrigio algunos defectos del libro de Le Sage, y lo tradujo al espaiiol. 22. La generalidad ^ cree que el origen de la historia es frances, annque el asunto sea esencialmente es- panol. * 23. Asi lo creia yo tambien, y le agradezco sus informes, de los que ^ no estaba enterado.^ 24. T ahora que hemos pasado el tiempo charlando, retiremonos a descansar. 25. Me parece^ una exeelente idea, puesto que^ me siento un poco cansado. Hasta ^ manana. * TRADUCCION LITERAL. 23. So it believed I also, and to you am obliged (for) your informa- tions, of the what not I was instructed. 1 Observe that nearly all English nouns ending in ty are rendered in Spanish by changing this syllable into dad\ as, generalidad^ generality; actividad^ activity ; capacidad^ capacity, etc. a De los {informes understood) que (of which) ; see page 224, note 1. 3 Enterarse^ estar enterado (to be instructed in) ; as, estaba enterado^ 1 was instructed ; sometimes it is translated for to Jieed or to yay attention ; viz., no lecci(5n decimosexta. 231 PRONUNCIACION. TRADUCCION. 21 koh-ree-hee-o' .... Lay Sah'-ge .... trah-doo'-hoh 22 oh-ree'-haing .... 23 ing-forr'-mais . . . . tay-rah'-doh. 24 chahrr-lahng'-doh dais-kahng-sahrr', 25 ee-day'-ah .... 21. Father Isla corrected some er- rors m Le Sage's hook, and translated it into Spanish, 22. It is generally thought that the origin of the history is French, although the subject may he essentially Spanish, aing- 23. / also thought so, and I am much obliged to you for the information, which I did not possess. , . . . 24. And now that we have passed the time chatting, let us retire to rest. 25. It appears to me an excellent idea, as I feel a little tired. We shall meet in the morn- ing. me entero, I don't heed ; ; enUrese Vd. ! pay attention ! There is no English verb equivalent in meaning, expressing the true meaning of this verb, except that to be acquainted (with the subject in question), which is the nearest in translation. * Me parece, from parecer (to seem, to appear), is a defective verb ; parece que Dendrd, it seems he will come ; parece Jiacer frio esta manana^ it seems to be cold this morning. s See page 150, note 3. « Hasta (till, until, up to, as far as) denotes time, place, or degree. Hasta manana {till to-morrow) ; voy hasta Madrid (I go as far as Madrid) ; hasta la vista, or hasta otra vee {au revoir, till I see you again). PARTE SEGUNDA. VERBOS REFLEXIVOS.^ Se llama verba reflexive aquel cuya^ accion vuelve^ a la misma persona 6 cosa que la rige,* representada 6 suplida por un pronombre personal, como en las locuciones ^ yo me acuesto, I go {pfiyself) to bed ; tu te levantas^ thou (thyself) risest ; e^ se acuerda^ he {himself) remembers, etc. ; 6 en estas otras en que el pronombre va pospuesto y unido al verbo : acostarSQ, to go (o;ie'5 self) to bed ; levantarme, to rise (myself) ; acuerdate, remember thyself, etc. Los verbos reflexives se conjugan, por lo tanto,con dos pronombres personales, el primero (expresado 6 compren- dido) es el sujete, j el segundo el ebjete. Los pronombres que acompanan a los verbos reflexives son los siguientes : Singular. Plural. Yo m.e, / myself. Nosotros nos, we ourselves, tii te,*^ thou thyself. vosotros os,^ ye yourselves. Gi. ^ sUos ^ ' / {he himself she herself. „ ' / ( they themselves. , ella, Vse■^' -^ ' . ., ,. ^ ellas, vse-^ *^, , , , ^ •wTfi ) ( y^^ yourself itself i ( you (pi.) yourselves. 1 Reflexive verbs. 2 Cuj^a (whose) ; sec page 99, note 6. 8 V'uelve (comes back) ; see page 135, note 8. * Eige (rules), from regir (to rule). fi Locuciones^ pi., from locucibn^ elocution, a phrase, an expression. 8 Te and os are the second persons singular and plural of the reflexive pro- noun, and, like the personals tii and t^osotros (see p. 54), imply intimacy and affection. In the elevated style os is employed in place of the pronominal par- ticle le {a Vd., a Vds.) ; viz., os digo {le digo d Vd.), I say to you {sing, or pi.). VERBOS REFLEXIVOS. 233 Estos pronombres van antepuestos respectivamente al verbo, excepto con los tierapos infinitivo^ gerundio^ parti- cipio pasado ^ imperativo, cuando se colocan despues, y formando con ellos una sola palabra.* Ejemplos : j&Z se alaha. He praises himself, Nosotros nos enfadamos. We (ourselves) become angry. Ellos se acordarian. They would remember {themselves), Vosotros OS ^ levantdis. Ye rise (yourselves), Levdntense Yds. Get up (yourselves). Voy d lavanae. I am going to wash myself, Estoy vistiendome. I am dressing myself. Les encontrb lavdndosQ, He found them washing themselves, Estd divirtiendoae. He is amusing himself. Eiguremonos,^ Let us imagine ourselves, Eiguraoa,^ Imagine yourselves, Mbdelo para la Conjugacidn de los VERBOS REFLEXIVOS. INFINITIVO. Lavarse, to wash one's self, GERUNDIO. PARTICIPIO PASADO. Lavandose, washing one's self. Lavadose, washed one's self, MODO INDICATIVO. PRESENTE. _, , Singular. Plural. Yo me lavo, / wash myself^ Nosotros nos lavamos. We wash tii te favas, etc. vosotros os lavais, ourselves^ etc. el, \ ellos, \ ella, [• se lava. ellas, [• se lavan. Yd,) Yds.,) Mn the elevated style the pronominal particles are also joined toother tenses of the verb, the past definite particularly, when the verb begins the sentence ; as, trajeronme este mensaje^ they brought me this message. 2 See page 232, note 6. 3 The 8 of the first person plural and the d of the second person plural are dropped in the imperative. 234 VERBOS REFLEXIVOS. IMPERFECTO. Singular. Yo me lavaba, / was ivashing tu te lavabas, or used to wash el, \ myself, etc. ella, >• se lavaba. Vd., ) Plural". Nosotros nos lavabamos, We were vosotros OS lavabais, washing or ellos, \ used to wash ellas, V se lavaban. ourselves, etc. Vds., ) PASADO DEFINIDO. Yo me lave, I washed or did Nosotros nos lavamos. We washed tii te lavaste, wash myself, vosotros os lavasteis, or did el, \ ' etc. ellos, \ wash ourselves^ ella, V se lavo. ellas, >• se lavaron. etc. Vd., ) Vds.,) FUTURO. I shall wash Nosotros nos lavaremos, We shall myself, etc. vosotros os lavareis, wash our- ellos, \ selves, etc. ellas, [• se lavaran. Vds., ) Yo me lavare, tii te lavaras, a, I ella, >- se lavara. Vd., ) FUTURO CONDICIONAL. Yo me lavaria, / should or ivould Nosotros nos lavariamos, tii te lavarias, wash myself, etc. el, \ ella, >• se lavaria. Vd., ) We vosotros OS lavariais, should or ellos, ^ would wash our- ellas, >■ se lavarian. selves, etc. Vds., ) Que yo me lave, que tii te laves, i el, J que < ella, V se ( Vd., ) Yo me lavara, tii te lavaras, el, \ ella, y se lavara. Vd., ) MODO SUBJUNTIVO. PRESENTE. That I may Que nosotros nos lavemos, That wash myself, que vosotros os laveis, we 7nay etc. / ellos, \ wash ourselves, lave. que < ellas, > se laven. etc. ( Vds., ) IMPERFECTO, PRIMER A FORMA. / might wash Nosotros nos lavararaos. We might myself, etc. vosotros os lavarais. wash our- ellos, \ selves, etc. ellas, >■ se lavaran. Vds., ) VERBOS REFLEXIVOS. 28§ IMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA. Singular. Plural. Yo me lavase, I might wash Nosotros nos lavasemos, TTe mi^A^ tii te la vases, myself, etc. vosotros os lavaseis, wash our- q\ -v ellos, \ selves, etc. ella, V se lavase. ellas, V se lavasen. Vd., ) Vds., ) PUTURO CONDICIONAL. Singular. Si yo me lavara 6 me lavase, If I washed myself etc. si tu te lavaras 6 te lavases, ( ^^' ) si < ella, >• se lavara 6 se lavase. ( Vd., ) Plural. Si nosotros nos lavaramos b nos lavasemos. If we washed ourselves, si vosotros os lavarais u'^ os lavaseis, etc. ellos, si \ ellas, \- se lavaran 6 se lavasen. ( ellos, \ n < ellas, y i Vds., ) MODO IMPERATIVO. PRESENTE. •ni,,*.^! Singular. Plural. Lavemonos ^ nosotros, let us wash ourselves, Lavate tii, wash thyself, Lavaos ^ vosotros, wash yourselves, el, let Mm wash himself i ellos, ) let them wash Ldvese \ ella, let her wash herself, Layense \ ellas, ; themselves, , wash yourselves* / el, let Mm wash himself i ellos, ) ■< ella, let her wash herself, Layense \ ellas, ; ( Vd., wash yourself ( Vds., wa TiEMPOS CoMPUESTOS. INFINITIVO. PRETERITO. Haberse lavado, to have washed one^s self GERUNDIO COMPUESTO. Habiendose lavado, having washed one^s self ^ See page 168, note 4. « See page 233^ note 8* 2S9 VERBOS REFLEXIVOS. PERFECTO DEFINIDO. Singular. Plural. Yo me he lavado, / have washed Nosotros nos hemos lavado, We tii te has lavado. myself, etc. vosotros os habeis lavado, have el, \ ellos, \ washed ourselves, ella, >- se ha lavado. ellas, l se han lavado. etc. Vd., ) Yds., ) PLUSCUAMPERFECTO. i Yo me habia lavado, etc. Nosotros nos habiamos lavado, etc. I had washed myself, etc. We had washed ourselves, etc. PASADO ANTERIOR. Yo me hube lavado, etc. Nosotros nos hubimos lavado, etc. I had washed myself, etc. We had washed ourselves, etc. FUTURO PERFECTO. Yo me habre lavado, etc. Nosotros nos habremos lavado, etc. I shall have washed myself, etc. We shall have washed ourselves, etc. CONDICIONAL PERFECTO. Yo me habria lavado, etc. Nosotros nos habriamos lavado, etc. 1 should or would have washed We should or ivould have washed myself, etc. ourselves, etc. MODO SUBJUNTIVO. PRETERITO PERFECTO. Que JO me haya lavado, etc. Que nosotros nos hayamos lavado, etc. That I may have washed myself, That we may have washed our- etc. selves, etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, PRIMERA FORMA. Yo me hubiera lavado, etc. Nosotros nos hubieramos lavado, etc. / might have washed myself, etc. We mighty have washed ourselves, etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA. Yo me hubiese lavado, etc. Nosotros nos hubiesemos lavado, etc. / might have washed myself, etc. We might have washed ourselves^ otc. VERBOS REFLEXIVOS. 287 CONDICIONAL. Singular, Si yo me hubiera 6 me hubiese lavado, etc. Jf I had washed myself, etc. Plural. Si nosotros nos hubieraraos 6 nos hubiesemos lavado, etc. Jf we had washed ourselves, etc. VERBOS REFLEXIVOS CONJUGADOS CON OTRO VERBO, INFINITIVO. Querer lavarse, 6, quererse lavar, to wish to wash one^s self GERUNDIO. Queriendo lavarse, 6, queriendose lavar, wishing to wash one^s self, PARTICIPIO PAS ADO. Querido lavarse, 6, queridose lavar, wished to wash one^s self MODO INDICATIVO. PRESENTE. Yo quiero lavamie, 6, yo m.e quiero lavar, etc. I wish to wash myself etc. IMPERFECTO. Yo queria lavarm.e, 6, yo m.e queria lavar, etc. / wished to wash myself, etc. PASADO DEFINIDO. Yo quise lavarm.e, 6, yo m.e quise lavar, etc. / wished or did wish to wash myself etc. FUTURO. Yo querre lavanne, 6, yo m.e querre lavar, etc. 1 shall wish to wash myself, etc. FUTURO CONDICIONAL. Yo querria lavanne, 6, yo m.e querria lavar, etc. 1 shmild or would wish to wash myself, etc. MODO SUBJUNTIVO. PRESENTE. Qus yo quiera lavarm.e, 6, que yo me quiera lavar, etc That I may wish to wash myself etc. 17 238 VERBOS REFLEXIV^OS. IMPERFECTO, PRIMERA FORMA. Yo quisiera lavamie, 6, yo me quisiera lavar, etc. / might wish to wash myself, etc. IMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA. Yo quisiese lavarnie, 6, yo me quisiese lavar, etc. / might wish to wash myself, etc. FUTURO CONDICIONAL. Si yo quisiera 6 quisiese lavarm.e, 6, si yo me quisiera 6 me quisiese lavar, etc. If I wished to wash myself, etc. Observaci07ies acerca de los VERBOS REFLEXIVOS. Los verbos reflexives son, 6 esencialmente reflexivos, esto es,^ que no pueden usarse siJio en forma reflexiva^ como arrepentirse {to repent), acordarse {to remember), etc. ; 6 accidentalmente reflexivos, 6 sea/ los que pueden forraarse, como en ingles, de verbos activos 6 neutros : quemarse {to hum one's self, from quemar, to burn) ; calentarse {to warm one's self, from calentar, to loai^m), etc. El nlimero de los verbos esencialmente reflexivos es limitado, pero ilimitado el de los accidentalmente reflexivos, puesto que en espaiiol, como en ingles, casi todos los verbos pueden ser usados en esta forma. 1. Hay muchos verbos reflexivos en espanol que no lo son en ingl6s. Ejemplos : Llaraarse,^ to be called {named). ^ Como se llama Vd. f What is your name I Me llamo Jorge. My name is George, Equivocarse,* to he mistaJcen. Vd. se equivoca. You are mistaken. Sentarse,* to be seated. SientesQ ^ Vd. seftora. Sit down, madam, 1 Esto es, b sea, that is, or that is to say. 2 Pronouns form only one word with the infinitive (present, gerund, and past participle), and the imperative, placed after them. VERBOS REFLEXIVOS. 239 Levantarse, to rise {get up), ^ A que hora se levanta Vd. 9 At what time do you rise % Me levanto d las seis, I rise at six o'clock. Acostarse, to go to bed, ^ Estd Vd. acostdndose ^ ? Are you getting into bed % JSfo, senor; 7io estoy acostdndorae^ No, sir; I am not getting into bed todavia, pero me acostare yet, but I will be soon. pronto, Pasearse, to go to walk. ^ Quiere Vd. pasearse conmigo 9 Will you walk with me? No tengo tiempo de pasearme. I have no time to wallc, Enfadarse, to get angry. No se enfade Vd, Do not get angry. Vestirse, to dress. Nos vestiremos mds tarde. We will dress later. Calentarse, to get warm. Calientese Vd. Get warm. Enriquecerse, to become rich. Dn. Fulano se ha enriquecido en Mr. So-and-So has become rich in muy poco tiempo. a very short time. Arrepentirse, to repent. Ml se arrepintio antes de morir. He repented before dying. Dirigirse, to apply. ^ A quien debo dirigirme 9 To whom must I apply ? - Vd. puede dirigirae d mi. You may apply to me. Enfermarse, to get sick. El se enfermo al salir del teatro. He got sick when leaving the theatre. , Irse, to go away. Me voy. I am going away, Vdyase Vd, Go away. Quejarse, to complain. Me quejo de mi suerte. I complain of my luck. Acordarse, to remember. Me acordarS siempre de eso, I shall always remember that. 1 See page 238, note 2. 240 VERBOS REFLEXIVOS. 2. Por los ejemplos precedentes puede Dotarse que casi todos los verbos pasivos en ingles, son reflexivos en espanol, como tambien los compuestos con to get y to become.^ V. g. : Asustarse, to be frightened. Calentarsey to get warm. Bisffustarae, to be displeased. Unfermarae, to get sick. Hquivocarse, to be mistaken. Enriquecerse, to become rich. Etc. Etc. 3. Yerbos accidentalmente reflexives tienen a menudo un significado diferente al de la forma activa ; tales son entre otros los siguientes : Acosiar, to put some one to bed. Acosfarse, to go to bed. Acordar, to agree. Acordarse, to remember. Levantar, to raise. Zera«/arse, to get up. Hmer, to put. Ponerse d, to begin to do anything. Ir, to go. /rse, to go awav. Etc. Etc. 4. Los verbos reflexivoSy cuando se usan en plural, expre- san una accion reciproca 6 mutua : Nos qneremos como hermanos. We love each other like brothers, Se escriben todos los dias. They write to each other every day. 5. Hay mucbos verbos en espanol que pueden ser usados reflexivamente 6 al contrario, sin alterar su significaeion : > 2h become or to get \3 translated by : 1. Jhnene^ to express a change in health ; viz., Se ha puedo erfermo. He has become sick. Se pu9o hueno ail otro dia. He got well the next day. 2. Fohene or hacerse, if a change in the physical, professional, or moral condition is expressed ; viz., Se ha iTuelto loco. He has become insane. Se TUso medico el ano pasado. He became a physician last year. 8. When the change ot condition is not due to the direct action of the subject, but is the result of his cflFort, Uegar a ser, venir a eer, or ser keeko^ are used: Ibr su habUidad Uegb a ser {vino a ser, By his skillfulness he became phyd* or /ue hecho) medico de la eorU, cian of the court. VERBOS REFLEXIVOS. 241 Fiarse 6 fiar de alguno. To trust somebody. Reirse o reir de alguno. To laugh at some one. ill se ha muerto 6 ha muerto. He has died. 6. Cuando el objeto del verbo es parte del cuerpo, 6 se refiere a prenda de vestido, se usa siempre el pronombre reflexive : Quitese Vd. el ^ sohretodo. Take off your overcoat. i No se pone Vd. el^ sombrero f Won't you put on your hat? Me lavo las ^ manos. I wash my hands. 7. Verbos permanente 6 accidentalmente^ reflexives pueden ser conjugados impersonalmente (tercera persona sing.) con el pronombre se, en cuyo caso el acusativo del pronombre sirve para distinguir la persona. Ejemplo : INFLEXION PERSONAL. INFLEXION IMPERSONAL. Decirse, to say to one's self. Decirse, to he told. Yo me digo, I say to myself, Se me dice, They say to me, or tii te dices, etc. se te dice, / am told, etc. el, ^ (i el, ella, y se dice. se le dice -j a el la, Vd., ) ( d Vd. Nosotros nos decimos. We say Se nos dice, They say to us, or vosotros OS decis, to ourselves, se os dice. We are told, etc. ellos, ^ etc. r a ellos, ellas, V se dicen. se lesdice -j a ellas, Vds., ) ( d Vds. Etc. Etc. Etc. Etc. 8. La voz pasiva no es tan generalraente usada^ en espaiiol como en ingles, y en su lugar se emplea ^ el verbo » When we refer in Spanish to a part of the body or clothing, the pos- sessive pronouns mi, tu, su, etc., are not generally used, but in their place the definite articles el, la, los, las (see page 134, note 5) ; viz., Me duele la cabeza. My head aches. Me duele el hrazo. My arm aches. « See page 215, note 3. Being two or more adverbs ending in mente in the same sentence, this termination is only added to the last. 3 Es usada or se usa, either of which is equally correct. * Es empleado can be used as well as se emplea, both having the same meaning. 242 PRONOMBRES. reflexive en la tercera persona singular 6 plural con el pro- nombre se. Ejemplos : Los cuadros se han vendido. The pictures have heen sold. La apuesta se gan6 y el dinero The bet was won and the money se perdi6. was lost. ^ Que se dice en la ciudad 9 What is said in town ? No se puede ver nada. Nothing can be seen, Aqui se habla espaftol, Spanish is spoken here. PRONOMBRES. Prononibres Reflexivos, 1. Los pronombres de las primeras j segundas personas tienen, como hemos visto en la conjugacion reflexiva, una significacion reflexiva cuando se refieren a la misma persona que el sujeto ; v. gr. : Yo me equivoco. I am mistaken (myself). Tu te contradices. Thou contradictest thyself, Nosotros nos hablamos. We speak to ourselves. 2. Los pronombres de la tercera persona, incluyendo a usted, pueden tambien referirse a una persona 6 cosa dife- rente del sujeto. Ejemplos: J&Z le equivoca. He is telling him wrong. J^l se equivoca. He makes a mistake. V. la engana. You deceive her. V. se engana. You deceive yourself. V. la cierra. You close it. Se ^ cierra. It closes (itself).^ El lo rompe. He breaks it. Se rompe. It breaks (itself), » The translation of »e is sometimes omitted as superfluous in English; viz.: Se marchan en seguida. They depart at once. Lleveselo. Take it to him. Ml se propone hacerlo. He (himself) proposes to do it. Se rompe^ se abre, se cierra. It breaks, it opens, it shuts. PRONOMBRES. 243 Do8 Pronomhres Ohjetivos, 1. Cuando un verbo rige dos pronomhres ohjetivos^ el dativo debe colocarse eiempre delante del acusativo. El pronombre rellexivo se precede a todos los otros pro- nombres, ya ^ esten colocados delante 6 despues del verbo. Ejemplos : Will you tell me so {it to me). They have told us so {it to us), I will give it to you to-morrow. S Me lo dird Vd. f Ellos nos lo han dicho. Se lo dare a Vd. maftana, Digaselo ahora. No quiero decirselo. JSnsefteselos Vd. a el {d ella). No se los ense flare a ellos. Tell him so {it to him) now. I don't want to tell him so {it to him). Show them to him (to her). I won't show them to them. 2. Las combinaciunes le (to Mm) lo (it), le le, le la, le los, le les, le las, les lo, les le, les la, se alteran per eufonla, sustituyendose per se lo, se le, se la, etc., formando las siguientes : Permutaciones. Le le y les le cambian per se le. Le la y les la " " se la. Le lo y les lo " " se lo. Le les y les les " *' se les. Le las y les las " " se las. Le los y les los " " se los. 3. Como el propio use del pronombre reflexivo se en conexion con le, la, lo, les, las, los, etc., presenta gran difi- cultad a los estudiantes, hemos creido oportuno preparar k continuacion, como referenda, la siguiente tabla, dando el pronombre reflexivo se en acusativo, esto es, en el toico caso que puede ocurrir, y los conjuntivos me, te, le, nos, os, les en dativo. ^ JTa in this sense means whether. 244 PRONOMBRES. Comhinaciones del Pronomhre Iteflexivo SE, Singul9,r. Se me, Seme,^ se te, sete,^ se le, se la, ^ a el, sele, sela, )^ a el, se lo (a ella, selo ^ S a el la, se le, se la, se lo Se nos, se OS, [ a Vd., sele, sela, selo ^ a Vd., Plural. Senos,^ seos,^ seles,selas, } aellos, seles, selas, ) aellos, se los f a alias, selos ^ ) a ellas, se les, se las, j se los ! a Vs. seles, selas, selos ^ \ a Vs., himself, to me, herself y to thee, itself to him, to her, themselves, to you (sing.). ' himself to us. herself to ye, to them. themselves, to you (pL). PRONOMBRES PERSONALES. Estos pronombres se dividen en dos clases : pronomhres ahsolutos J pronombres conjuntivos, Los coitjuntivos se usan iinieamente en el dativo y en el acicsativo. Pronoinhres Ahsolutos, 1» Persona. 2» Persona. 3» Persona. Nominativo. Yo, tii, Genitivo, De mi, de ti Dativo. A m.i, a ti, Acusativo. Singular. 61, ella, V. de el, de ella, de V. t 61, a ella, a V. Plural. Nom. Nosotros-as, vosotros-as, ellos, ellas, Vs. Gen. De nosotros-as, de vosotros-as, de ellos, de ellas, de Vs. Dat. A nosotros-as, a vosotros-as, a ellos, a ellas, k Vs. 1 These pronouns form only one word when the verb is used either in the mfimtive, present fxiid past participle, and imperative mood. PRONOMBRES. 245 Pronomhres Conjuntivos, 1* Persona. 2» Pers. 3* Persona. Singular. Dat. Me, to wie, te, to thee, le, to him, it, le, to her, it^ le, to you, Acus. Me, me, te, tJiee, le, him, la, Aer, *7, le, la, you, it. Plural. Masc. Fem. Dat. Nos, ^0 1/5, OS, to ye, les, ^ to them, les, ( /o them, les, ( ^o yoi^. Acus. Nos, ws, OS, 2/e, los, ( them, las, i them, los, las, 1 ?/oi*. Como le es dado para &l, ella y T^, y les para ellos^ ellas y "F^., en case de ambigtledad es necesario, ademas de los conjuntivos delante del verbo, poner los pronombres absolutos en dativo con la preposici6n d despues de 61. Ejemplos : Le hahlo a 61 y ^^o a ella. I speak to him and not to her. Les he dado la noticia a ellos. I have given the news to them {masc.). _ ^ Pronombre Reflexivo se sustituto 3* Persona Neutro. ^^ ^^ Tercera Persona. Absolute. Conjuntivo. Absolute. Conjuntivo. Nom. Ello, lo, it, Se, one's self, — themselves, itself. ( of himself, herself. Gen, De ello, — ^ofit. De si, of o?ie's self, — •< yourself, them- ( selves, yourselves. Dat. A ello, — * to it. A si, to one's self, se, to himself, to herself, etc. Acus, lo, it. se, himself, etc. 1. Los pronombres personales yo, t^i^ U, etc., a excep- ci6n de T^, T^., son generalmente suprimidos, excepto en preguntas, casos de ambigUedad^ 6 para dar mds enfasis d la frase. Ejemplos : i Lo hago yo 6 lo hace 61 9 Do I do it, or does hef Mientras ella estudia 61 lee. While she studies he reads. / Que he de hacer yo 9 What can I do I 1 See page 209, note 6 ; lo can not be used after any preposition, being in such cases substituted by ello. 246 PRONOMBRES. 2. Las form as conjuntivas me, te, le, la, lo, se, y sus plurales nos, os, les, los, las, se, se colocan delante del verbo, excepto cuando usado este en sentencias imperativas afirma- tivas^ 6 en el injinitivo 6 participio presente [gernndio), en cuyo caso se colocan despues, formando una sola palabra con el verbo. Ejemplos : El me lo ha dicho. He has told me so. Nos han dado la noticia. They have given us the news. JVecesito hahlarle. I must speak to him. I Quiere Vd. verle ? Do you want to see him% Pdguenoa Vd. la ctisnia. Pay us the bill. PdgueselSL Vd. (a el). Pay it to him. Ensenerae Vd. el libro. Show me the book. 3. Para dar mas enfasis a la frase 6 ampliarla, ambos pronombres, absohitos y conjuntivos son usados, el conjun- tivo antes y el absoluto despues del verbo, 6 el iiltimo seguido del conjuntivo inmediatamente antes del verbo. Ejemplos : Le pago a 61. ) t i • .' ^, , y I pay him. A 61 le pago. ) ^ -' Me escribe k mi. ' ) tx / , ., [-He writes to me. A m.1 me escribe. ) ^ A mi que m.e importa f What do I care ? 4. Con el pronombre Vd. se usan ambos generalmente ; V. gr. : Le digo k Vd. eso. I tell yqu that. ^ Que le ha dicho d. Vd. f What has he told you % 5. El pronombre personal absoluto debe usarse cuando esta regido por una preposicion, 6 cuando solo, en respuesta k preguntas ; v. gr. : ^ Quien dice eso 9 Who says that ? S ]6l, ella, Vd. o quien ? He, she, you, or who f ^ A quien llama 61 9 Whom is he calling ? A mi, a 61, k nosotros. To me, him, us, ^ Habla el de nosotros 9 Does he speak about us 9 PRONOMBKES. 247 J§]1 habla de iellos. He speaks about them. La casa es de ella. The house belongs to her. 6. Cuando mi, ti, si, estdn regidos por la preposicion con, forman una sola palabra la preposicion y el pron ombre : conmigo {with me) ; contigo (with thee) ; consigo {with him^ her), 7. Las expresiones inglesas it is I, it is he, it was we^ etc., se traducen en espaiiol por soy yo, es 61, 6rainos noso- tros, etc. ; es decir, el tiempo y persona del verbo ser seguido del pronombre personal que corresponda. Sixigular. Soy yo, it is /, eres tii, it is thou, / el, \ < he, es -j ella, ( Vd., \ ihe, a, >• it is < she, i., ) ( you. Era yo, etc. It was J, etc. Fui yo, etc. It was /, etc. Sere yo, etc. It will be /, etc. Seria yo, etc. It would be J, etc. MODO INDICATIVO. PRESENTE. T,, , Plural. Somos nosotros, it is we, sois vosotros, it is ye, ( Vds., it is you (pi.), IMPERFECTO. Eraraos nosotros, etc. It was we, etc. DEFINIDO. Fuimos nosotros, etc. It was we, etc. FUTURO. Seremos nosotros, etc. It will be we, etc. CONDICIONAL. Seriamos nosotros, etc. It would be we, etc. MODO SUBJUNTIVO. PRESENTE. Que sea yo, etc. Que seamos nosotros, etc. That it may be I, etc. That it may be we, etc. !•' IMPERFECTO SUBJUNTIVO. Fuera yo, etc. Fueramos nosotros, etc. It might be I, etc. It might be we, etc. 248 PROXOMBRES. 2® IMPEBFECTO SUBJUNTIVO. Singular. Plural Fuese yo, etc. Fuesemos nosotros, etc. It might be 7, etc. It might he we, etc. CONDICIONAL. Singular. Si fuera 6 fuese yo, etc., If it were I, etc. Plural. Si fueramos 6 fuesemos nosctros, etc., If it were we, etc. Los tiempos compuestos se forman del mismo raodo, V. gr. : he sido yo, etc., habia sido yo, etc., hube sidovo, etc., hahre sido yo, etc., etc. Ejemplos. 4 Es Vd. qui6n llama a la puerta ? Is it you who knocks at the door ? iVb, Sr., no soy yo, fu6 61. No, sir, it is not I, it was he. 4 Ser& 61 qui4n haga eso f Will it he he who will do that ? No, Sr., ser4 su herm^no. No, sir, it mil he his brother. No seria yo quien lo hiciera. It would not he I who should do it. 4 Y si fuera §1, que diria Vd. ? And if it were he, what would you say? 8. Habiendo dado una tabla para el uso de los pronom- bres reflexivos, daremos otra, como referenda, para el de los personates en conexion con le, la, lo, les, las, los. La tercera persona es la iinica forma que puede ocurrir. Combinacio7ies de los Pronomhres Personales, PRIMERAS PeRSONAS CON TeRCERAS. Singular. Me W him, to me, to myself. Me la, her, it, Me lo, it. Me los, les, them (masc), " " Me las. them (fern.). 1 These pronouns, as has been already explained, are always placed before the verb, except when used in connection with the infinitive and imperative, in which case both verb and pronoun (mele, tela, selo, nosles, oslas, etc.) form but one word. PRONOMBRES. 249 Plural. Nos le,' him, to us, to ourselves, Nos la, her, it, *' " Nos lo, it, Nos los, les, them (masc), " " . Nos las, them (fern.), " Segundas Personas con Terceras. Singular. Te le,* him, to thee, to thyself, Te la, her, it, " Te lo, it, " Te los, les, them (masc), " " Te las, them (fern.), " " Plural. Os le,* him, to ye, to yourselves. Os la, her, it, " " Os lo, it, Os los, les, them (masc), " *' Os las, them item.), " " Terceras Personas con Terceras. Singular. Se le,^ him, Se la, her, it, Se lo, it, Se los, les, them (masc), Se las, them (fem.). . ^\to himself, herself, itself^ • . 'I yourself, to you, J Plural. Se le,^ him, Se la, her, it, Se lo, it, Se los, les, them (masc), Se las, them (fem.). ^ ^^' I to themselves, yourselves, to you, ) ^ See page 248, note 1. 250 VERBOS PASIVOS. VERBOS PASIVOS. 1. La voz pasiva de los verbos se forma en castellano con el auxiliar ser en el tiempo que le corresponda, y el participio pasado del verbo principal.^ Ejemplos : Los ninos son castigados. The children are punished. La casa fue vendida. The house was sold. Yo sere Uamado. I shall be called. Ml ha sido muy amado. He has been very much loved, Nosotros somos enganados. We are deceived. LI pan fue partido y distri- The bread was sliced and distrib- buido entre los pobres. uted among the beggars. 2. La voz pasiva se usa, sin embargo, con el verbo estar en vez de ser, cuando el participio pasado es usado como un adjetivo, es decir, cuando el estado 6 condicion del sujeto es descrito sin referenda a accion alguna ; v. gr. : La carta estaba mal escrita. The letter was badly written, LI libro esta concluido. The book is concluded. Las manzanas estan podridas. The apples are rotten. 3. Tambien se usa estar en vez de ser, cuando el estado 6 condicion del sujeto se refiere a localidad 6 situacion en general^ '^ como. La casa esta bien situada. The house is well located. Los libros est§,n colocados en la The books are placed on the table. mesa. Mi quinta esta edificada sobre My country-seat is built by the el mar, sea. 1 Active verbs only — i. e., verbs capable of govemiDigr a direct object — can be made to assume a passive form. Ser (to be) is the auxiliary employed with the past participle of the verb. The latter must a^^ree in gender and number with the subject, which in the active voice is the direct object ; el padre castiga d los Jiijos^ the father punishes the sons, in the passive voice becomes los Mjos son castigados por el padre^ the sons are punisTied by the father. 2 See number 3, page 126. Estar is always used when speaking of localif ties in general. VERBOS PASIVOS. 251 Modelo para la Conjugacion de los VERBOS PASIVOS. INFINITIVO. Ser amado,^ to he loved, GERUNDIO. PARTICIPIO PASADO. Siendo amado,* being loved, Sido amado,^ been loved. MODO INDICATIVO. Singular PRESENTE. pj^^^j Yo soy, Nos. somos, ' tii eres, amado ^ 1 am loved, vos. sois, amados ' We are el, ■> 6 etc. ellos, ^ 6 loved, etc. el la, V es amada.* ellas, I son - amadas.* VdJ • ^ Vds.,J IMPERFECTO. Yo era, Nos. eramos, ' tii eras, amado I was ov used vos. erals. amados We were or el, ^ >■ to be loved, ellos, ^ - 6 used to be ella, l^era amada. etc. ellas, V eran amadas. loved, etc. Vd.,J Vds.,J PASADO DEFINIDO. Yo fui, ^ Nos. f uimos. -j tii f uiste. amado I was loved, vos. fuisteis, amados We were el, ^ 6 etc. ellos, -^ ^ 6 loved, etc. ella, \ f ue amada. ellas, y fueron amadas , VdJ . Yds., J ^ FUTURO. Yo sere. ^ Nos. seremos, ] tu seras. amado / shall be vos. sereis, amados We shall el, ^ ^ 6 loved, etc. ellos, ^ ellas, J^ seran Vds.,J . 6 be loved, ella, > sera amada. amadas. etc. VdJ J * Passive verbs are declinable. By changing the termination o for a we have the feminine form singular, and, adding 8 to each of these, the plural. 252 VERBOS PASIVOS. Singular. FUTURO CONDICIOXAL. Plural. Yo seria, Nos. seriamos, " tii serias, amado / should or vos. seriais, amados We should el, 1 > 6 would be ellos, ^ 6 or would he ella, y serla amada. loved, etc. ellas, > serian amadas. loved, etc. VdJ Yds., J Que yo sea, que tii seas, rel, que -j ella. { IVd., MODO SUBJUNTIVO. PRESENTE. Que nos. seamos, amado That I que vos. seals, 6 may be r ellos, amada. loved, que -I ellas, y sean etc. I Vds., amados That 6 we may amadas. be loved, etc. Yo fuera, tti f ueras, el, ella, !- fiiera Yd., IMPERFECTO, PRIMERA FORMA, Nos. f ueramos, ' amado / might be vos. f uerais, 6 loved, etc. ellos, amada. ellas, ^ fueran Yds., IMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA. Yo f uese, Nos. fuesemos, tii f ueses, amado I might be vos. f ueseis. el, ^ 6 loved, etc. ellos, -^ ellas, y fuesen ella, > fuese amada. Yd., J Yds., J amados We might 6 be loved, amadas. etc. amados We might 6 be loved, amadas. etc. amada. FUTURO CONDICIONAL. Singular. Si yo fuera 6 fuese, si tu f ueras 6 fueses, rel, ^ I ella, V fuera o fuese .Yd., J Plural. Si nos. f ueramos 6 fuesemos, "| si vos. fuerais 6 fueseis, I amados r ellos, ^ r ^ 81 < ellas, y fueran 6 fuesen i amadas. I Yds., J. J amado If I were loved, etc. Jf we were loved, etc. VERBOS PASIVOS. 253 Singular. MODO IMPERATIVO. PKESENTE. Se tii, sea < ella, amado Be thou 6 lovedy etc. amada. Seamos nos., sed vos., r ellos, sean < ellas, LVds., Plural. amados Let us he 6 lovedy etc. amadas. TiEMPOS COMPUESTOS. INFINITIYO. PRETERITO. Haber sido amado 6 amada, to have been loved, GERUNDIO COMPUESTO. Habiendo sido amado 6 amada, having been loved. Singular. Yo he sido amado,* etc. I have been loved, etc. PERFECTO DEFINIDO. Plural. Nos. hemos sido amados,* etc. We have been loved, etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO. Yo habia sido amado, etc. Nos. habiamos sido amados, etc. / h^d been loved, etc. We had been loved, etc. PASADO ANTERIOR. Yo hube sido amado, etc. Nos. hubimos sido amados, etc I had been loved, etc. We had been loved, etc. FUTURO PERFECTO. Yo habre sido amado, etc. Nos. habremos sido amados, etc. / shall have been loved, etc. We shall have been loved, etc. CONDICIONAL PERFECTO. Yo habria sido amado, etc. Nos. habriamos sido amados, etc. / should or would have been loved, We should or would have been etc. loved, etc. 1 The feminine (see note 1, page 251) would be amada for the singular, and amadas for the plural in all the tenses. 18 254 VERBOS PASIVOS. MODO SUBJUNTIVO. Gi«r„,ia^ PRKTERITO PERFECTO. _, , Singular. Plural. Que JO haya sido amado, etc. Que nos. hayamos sido amados, etc That I may have been loved, etc. That we may have been loved, etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, PRIMERA FORMA. Yo hubiera sido amado, etc. Nos. hubieramos sido amados, etc J might have been loved, etc. We might have been loved, etc. PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, SEGUNDA FORMA. Yo hubiese sido amado, etc. Nos. hubiesemos sido amados, etc. Z might have been loved, etc. We might have been loved, etc. CONDICIOXAL. Singular. Si yo hubiera, 6, hubiese sido amado 6 amada, etc. If I had been loved, etc. Plural. Si nos. hubieramos, 6, hubiesemos sido amados 6 amadas, etc. If we had been loved, etc. Ohservaciones acerca de ios VERBOS PASIVOS. 1. Los verbos pasivos cuando estan usados en el presente e imperfecto de indicative, expresan generalmente un senti- miento 6 accion mental ; v. gr. : Pablo es amado de ^ Virginia. Paul is loved by Virginia. 2. Cuando el sentimiento 6 la accion mental no est4 expresada, estando el verbo pasivo en el imperfecto 6 pre- sente de indicativo, se usa estar en vez de ser ; v. gr. : El libro esta ^ escrito por un The book is written by a Spaniard, La casa estk vendida. The house is sold. El puente estaba ya construido. The bridge w?as already built, 1 The English by is generally rendered in Spanish by por, but when a sentiment or mental action is expressed, de is preferred to por\ as, nosotraa somos amadas de nuestras madres, we {fern. ) are loved by our mothers. 3 The passive voice with estar is formed the same as with ser, viz., the' cor- responding tense of the auxiliary and the past participle of the principal verb. VERBOS PASIVOS. 255 3. Los verbos pasivos son generalmente usados ^ en forma activa, en la tercera persona del singular 6 plural, con el pronorabre se.^ Ejemplos : La 3 fruta se vende ^ muy cava. Fruit ^ is sold very dear. i]l 3 cafe se vendi6 * lien. Coffee ^ sold well. Se ama al honibre de Men. The honest man is loved. Se admira la sahiduria de So- The wisdom of Socrates is ad- crates, mired. No se puede ver cosa mas mara- Nothing more wonderful can be villosa. seen. ^ Que lengua se habla en la Ame- What language is spoke?i in South rica del Snr 9 America? En la America del Sur se habla In South America Spanish is espanol. spoken. El frances se habla en Francia. French is spoken in France. 1 It would be just as correct to say se usan instead of son, usados. 2 This unipersoual (third person) form is in frequent use in Spanish when the subject is not a person, and the agent from whom the action pro- ceeds is not expressed — ^i. e., understood; as, Las manzanas se vendieron caras. The apples {sold) were sold dear. Instead of fueron vendidas. Subject: las manzanas \ agent (by whom)', by the owners. 3 In Spanish the definite article el^ la, etc., is necessary when the subject is expressed in a general sense; viz., la fruta, el cafe, se vende, instead of fruta and cafe, as in English. 4 Paradigm, venderse, to be sold. Infinitive Mood : vender se, to be sold ; vendiendose, being sold ; vendi- dose, been sold ; haberse vendido, to have been sold ; hahiendose vendido, having been sold. Indicative Mood : el cafe se vende caro, coffee is sold (is selling or sells) dear ; los cafes se venden caros, coffees are sold (are selling or sell) dear ; el cafe se ha vendido caro, coffee has been sold {or has sold) dear ; los cafes 84 vendieron caros, coffees were sold (or sold) dear ; los cafes se vendian caros^ coffees used to be sold {or to sell) dear; apenas el cafe se hubo vendido caro, hardly hp^d coffee been sold (or sold) dear ; los cafes se habian vendido caros, coffees had been sold (or had sold) dear ; el cafe se venderd {se habrd vendido) caro, coffee will be sold {or will sell, will have been sold, or will have sold) dear, etc. Subjunctive Mood : vendase el cafe barato, let coffee sell or be sold cheap ; aunq-ue los cafes se hayan vendido baratos, though coffees may have been sold {or may have sold) cheap, etc. 256 VERBOS PASIVOS. 4. Los verbos pasivos tienen, como hemos dicbo, genero y nlimero, y deben, por cousiguiente, concordar^ con el sujeto de la oraciori ; v. gr. : Los ninos son llamados a las seis todos los dias. lias mujeres son siempre res- petadas. Los enemigos han sido derro- tados. Nosotros hemos sido engana- dos. Ellas quieren ser obedecidas. The hoys are called at six o'clock every day. Women are always respected. The enemy (pi.) has been defeated^ We have been deceived. They (fern.) wish to be obeyed. " Don Quixote ' Cervantes. The speech will be made by a great orator. The author is very much praised by his compatriots. Emanuel is loved by Margaret. 5. Despues de los verbos pasivos, la preposicion por reemplaza a by en ingles, a raenos que ^ la accion del verbo se refiera a un acto mental, en cuyo caso, de puede ser usado en vez de por ; como, Bon Quijote fue escrito por Cer- " Don Quixote " was written by va7ites. El discurso sera pronnnciado por un gran orador. El autor es muy celebrado por (de) sus compatr iotas. Manuel es amado de (por) Mar- garita. 6. Los verbos quedar e ir, son usados algunas veces en vez de ser, en la f ormacion de la voz pasiva, a fin de ^ dar mas expresion a la sentencia. Ejemplos : La cuestibn de la exposicibn ha The exhibition affair has been de- quedado decidida. cided. Va demostrado que la cosa pasb It is proved that the thing hap- as%, pened so. Iba ya explicado el asunto The subject was already explained ■ cuando .... when .... 1 Concordar means to agree. 2 Amenos que is a conjanction giwan for unless. 3 A fin c?6 is a conjunction, synonymous with para que, and both mean- ing 60 as or in order that. VERBOS IMPERSONALES. 257 VEHBOS IMPERSONALES. Se llaman verbos impersoriales los que por no tener sujeto definido no pueden usarse sino en el infinitivo (pre- sente, y participios presente y pasado), y en la tercera per- sona singular de todos los tiempos. Verhos Impersonales Principales de est a Clase. Amanecer,^ ) , ^ Llover, to rain. Alborear, j ' Lloviznar, to drizzle. Anochecer,^ ) , , Granizar, to hail. Oscurecer, j * Nevar, to snow. Helar, . to freeze. Tronar, to thunder. Deshelar, to thaw. Veiitear, to blow. Relampaguear, to lighten. Modelos de las Conjugaciones. 1. Amanecer,^ to dawn. Amaneciendo, amanecido. MODO INDICATIVO. MODO SUBJUNTIVO. ^Amanece, it dawns. Que amanezca,^ that it may dawn, Amanecia, it was dawning, Amaneciera, it might dawn, Amanecio, it dawned. Amaneciese, it might dawn. AmsmecerL it will datvn, ^. { amaneciera 6 ) .^ ., , , . . '. jj y Si i . y if it dawned. Amanecena, it would dawn, ( amaneciese, ) Tiempos Compuestos. modo indicativo. Ha amanecido, it has dawned. Habia amanecido, it had dawned. Hubo amanecido, it had dawned. Habra amanecido, it will have dawned. Habria amanecido, it would have dawned. , 1 The verbs amanecer and anochecer are sometimes used in the three per- sons, both numbers ; as, Yo amaneci en Granada y anocheci I was in Granada at daybreak and in en Sevilla, Seville at nightfall. Manana anocheceremos en Filadeljia. We shall be in Philadelphia at night»- fall to-morrow. • See Class III of irregular verbs, page 168. 258 VERBOS IMPERSONALES. MODO SUBJUNTIVO. Qiie haya amanecido, that it may have dawned, Hubiera amanecido, it might have daumed. Hubiese amanecido, it might have dawned. Si hubiera, 6, hubiese amanecido, if it had dawned. Anochecer^ y oscurecer se conjugan como amanecer, 2. Helar,* to freeze. Helando, helado. MODO INDICATIVO. MODO SUBJUNTIVO. Hiela,2 it freezes. Que hiele,^ that it may freeze. llel&h% it was freezing, Hel&TSL, it 7night freeze. Helo, it froze. Helase, it might freeze. Helara, it will freeze, ^. j helara 6 ) • /^ ^ /. Helaria, it would freeze. ( helase, ) -^ -^ Los tiempos compuestos se forman como con amanecer. Deshelar,^ iievar,^ alborear,^ lloviznar,^ granizar,^ * ven- tear,^ relampagaear ^ y tronar^ se conjugan como helar, con la diferencia de Us irregularidades correspondientes. 3. lilover,*^ to rain. Lloviendo, llovido. MODO INDICATIVO. MODO SUBJUNTIVO. Llueve,^ it rains. Que llueva,^ that it may rain, Llovia, it was raining. Lloviera, it might rain. Llovio, it rained. Lloviese, it might rain. JAoYerL it will rain. ^. ( lloviera 6 ) .. -. . ■, Ti / .. 7J • - 'S^ ] ^^ ' c if f't rained, Llovena, it would ram. ( lloviese, ) Los tiempos compuestos se conjugan como los prece- dentes. 4. Hay otros verbos impersonales que se usan en amhas terceras joersowas, singular y plural, entre los que, los mas importantes son los siguientes : 1 See page 257, note 1. ' ^ gge Class I, irregular verbs, page 163. 3 Alhorear^ lloviznar^ granizar^ xentear^ and relampaguear are regular verbs. 4 gee page 65, No. 3. * See Class II, irregular verbs, pages 166, 167. VERBOS IMPERSONALES. 259 Verbos Impersonales Principales de esta Olase. Acaecer, \ Convenir, to suit. Acontecer, I to happen. Importar, to matter. Suceder, ) Parecer, to appear, to seem. Ejemplos. Ayer sucedi6 (acontecib 6 acae- A misfortune happened yesterday. ci6) una desgracia. Ayer sucedieron (aconteoieron Several misfortunes happened yes- 6 acaecieron) varias desgra- terday. cias. ^ El negocio convendria. The business would suit Los negocios convendrian. Business would suit. El nino parece timido. The boy seems timid. Los ninos parecen timidos. The boys seem timid. 5. Hay otros verbos que no siendo impersonales tienen caracter de tales ^ en algunas acepciones ; v. gr. : (1) Ser, en las f rases siguientes : Es^ muy tarde. " It^ is very late. Mo es 2 temprano. It ^ is not early, Es ya de dia. It is now daylight. No es de noclie todavia. It is not night yet. (2) Hacer, cuando usado en lugar del verbo ingles to be, refiri^ndonos al tiempo^ 6 cuando traducido por ago indi- cando espacio trascurrido ^ ; v. gr. : Hace sol. The sun shines. Hace luna. The moon is shining. Hizo huen tiempo. It was good weather. Hara mal tiempo. It will he bad weather. Hace muchos aftos. Many years ago. 1 De tales ^ of such. ^ It may be observed that the pronoun it^ which accompanies impersonal verbs in English, is not translated into Spanish. 8 Hacer (ago, to be), impersonally : hace frio^ it is cold ; hace ires dias or treh dias hd^ three days ago ; anoche hizo color ^ it was warm last night ; hizo or hacm sol^ the sun shone ; ha hecho color hoy^ it has been warm to-day ; debt haber hecho frio anoche^ it must have been cold last night, etc. 260 VERBOS IMPERSONALES. (3) Haber, cuando usado impersonalmente, significando there to he^ corao en los ejemplos siguientes : Hay mucha frutcL There is much fruit. Habra muchos Twmhres, There will be many men. Hay lodo. It is muddy. Hubo polvo. It was dusty. Hay cuatro millas de la calls The Battery is four miles from Treinta y cuatro a la Bateria. Thirty-fourth Street. ^ Habria mucha gente en el teatro Would there he many people at the si no lloviera 9 theatre if it should not rain % Habria mas gente. There would be more people. NoTA. — Ha es algunas veces usado por hay 6 hace, especialmente en elevado estilo de eonversaci6n 6 litera- tura ; como, Doce aftos ha,* 6, I t i Hay (hace) doce aflos, ^ we e years ago. 6. La mayor parte de los verbos pueden ser usados corao impersonales en la tercera persona del plural j sin sujeto preciso que los pongan en accion. Ejemplos : Dicen que la cosecha es huena. They say the harvest is good. ^ Que diran 9 What will they say ? Alii rinen. They are fighting there. Aseguran que sucedio asi. They declare it happened thus. 7. A los verbos de acepciones impersonales pertenecen tambien los verbos de/ectivos siguientes. 1 Saber (there to be), impersonally : haj/^ there is, there are ; ha habido, there has been, there have been ; hubo^ there was, there were ; apenas hubo habido^ hardly had there been ; habia^ there used to be ; habia habido^ there had been ; habrd^ there will be ; habrd habido^ there will have been ; liabria^ there would be ; habria habido^ there would have been ; que haya^ that there be or may be ; que iKiya habido^ tliat there may have been ; cuando hubiera^ when there should be ; cuando hubiera habido^ when there should have been ; si hubiera or hubiese^ if there should be ; si hubiera or hubiese habido^ if there should have been or if there had been. 2 It is to be observed that ha always follows the time, while hay or haoe precedes it. VERBOS DEFECTIVOS. 261 VERBOS DEFECTIVOS. Valer, to he worth, to he hetter. *^Mds vale tarde que nunca.^^ ^'Better late than never." m trahajo vale mas que Ih ocio- Work is hetter than idleness. sidad, Bastar, to suffice, to he sufficient Basta que Vd. se ernpene. It is sufficient thsit yon persist in it. fSu palabra basta. Your word is enough, Gustar, to please, to he pleasant. Gusta cuando uno se acostumhra. It pleases when one gets accus- tomed to it. I]l estudio de idiomas gusta. The study of languages is pleasant, Disgustar, to displease, to he unpleasant, Disgusta oir tal cosa. It is unpleasant to hear such a thing. Su conversacion disgusta. His conversation is unpleasant. Placer, to please. Me place oirlo. It pleases me to hear it. ; Plegue a Dios ! May it please God ! Fastidiar, to annoy, to he tiresome, Fastidia quedarse en casa. It is tiresome to remain at home. Tanta lluvia fastidia. So much rain is annoying, Acomodar, to suit. Me acomoda hacerlo asi. It suits me to do it so. Pesar,^ to repent. Me pesa haherlo hecho, I regret having done it. J^os pes6 despues que lo hicimos. We regretted it after we did it. Doler, to ache, to pain. Me duele el hrazo. My arm aches. Me doli6 la caheza esta maflana. My head pained me this morning. 1 Used only in the third person singular. 262 VERBOS DEFECTIVOS. Soler,^ to use, to he in the habit or accustomed to, Suelo levantarme a las siete y I am in the habit of rising at seven almorzar a las ocho. and breakfasting at eight. Hace afios solia dar un paseo Years ago 1 used to take a walk antes de almorzar, before breakfast. Yacer,2 to lie. Aqui yace .... Here lies (so-and-so), Reponer,^ to reply. El hombre repuso al fin . The man replied at last. Antojarse,^ to occur to one^s mind. Jamas se me aiitoj6 ir a tal Never did it occur to me to go to parte, such a place. . 1 Only used in the present and imperfect of indicative ; as, Pres. Ind. Suelo, sueles, suele, soleraos, soleis, suelen, Imperfecto. Solia, solias, solia, soliamos, soliais, solian. 2 Yacer, used only in epitaphs, is conjugated thus : Gerundio, yaciendo ; Pres. Ind., yo yazgo, el yace\ Imperfecto, yacia, etc. ; Past Def., yaci., etc. ; Futuro, yacere, etc.; Cond., yaceria, etc.; Subj. Pres., yo yazga or yazca\ Imps. Subj., yadera or yaciese, etc. ; Imperativo, yaz tu, yaced 'vosotroa. 3 Reponer, when meaning to reply, is used only in the past definite: repuse, repusiste, repuso, repusimos, repusisteis, repusieron. * Used in the third person only. FIN DEL LIBRO IT. LIBRO QTJINTO. PARTE PRIMERA. LECCI6N D^CIMOSEPTIMA. Sentidos y Sensacio7ies Corporales} La vista, el oido .... the sights the hearing. El olfato, el gusto, el tacto . the smelly the taste, the touch. El juicio, la raz6n ^ . . .the judgment, the reason. La imaginacibn,^ el pensamiento the imagiriation, the thought. La voluntad, el deseo . . . the will, the desire. La esperanza the hope. La memoria, la idea . . .the memory, the idea. El gozo; el placer ^ . . . the Joy, the pleasure. El anior,3 el odio .... the love, the hatred. Los celos, el genio , . . the jealousy, the nature or genius. El caracter,^ la digesti6n ^ . .the nature, the digestion. Un suspiro, un quejido . . a sigh, a groan. Un grito, un estornudo . . a scream, a sneeze. Un bostezo, hipo . . . .a gape, hiccough. Los soUozos, una lagrima . . the sobs, a tear. El ronquido, roncar . . .the snoring, to snore. La risa, una carcajada . . the laughter, a burst of laughter. La enfermedad,^ la debilidad'^ . the sickness, the debility. Las arrugas, la robustez ^ . .the ivrinkles, the robustness. La salud,^la vejez,^ la juventud^ the health, the old age, the youth. La adolescencia, la ninez^ . . the adolescence, the childhood. La hermosura, la fealdad"* . . the beauty, the ugliiiess. 1 The 8671,868 and hodihj 8en8ation8. ^ Comparese pajr. 142, nota 2. • Pag. 141, nota 6. * Pag. 85, nota 3. ^ Pag. 144, nota 3. 264 lecci6n decimos^ptima. Adverhios de Duda? Quiza. ) Acaso. \ Q,uizas. >• Perhaps, Por Ventura. \ Perhaps, Tal vez. ) Por fortuna. ) Pico de Orizaba se llama a la cuspide de la montana, porque termiDa en un pico 6 punta. * Vera Cruz esta situada en el polfo de Mejico. Tiene algunas cosas dignas de llamar la atencion, y entre ellas su celebre paseo de la Alameda^ en donde la lujuriosa vegetacion tropical se presenta engalanada con toda la belleza que le es propia. 5 Zarpar^ palabra de naiitica que signiflca levar el ancla, 6 emprender la marcha un vapor 6 buque. « La Ma de Cuba esta situada en el golfo de Mejico, entre las peninsulas de Yucatan y Florida y a la misma distancia, 50 millas, de ambos estrechos. Cuba es la mayor de las Antillas. Fue descubierta el ano 1492, durante el lecci6n decimoctava. 291 caiia de azucar y de cafe, a los que prestan su sombra grandes platanos. Luego, a medida que avanza per la llamada Tierra caliente^ atraviesa verdaderas florestas de arboles y arbustos a cual mas extranos y vistosos, en- trelazados unos con otros en sus elevadas copas, y esmal- tados con flores y hojas de los mas vivos colores. El ferro-carril corre por una sucesion de montaiias cubiertas de una esplendida vegetacion, y las salva, ya por medio de larguisimos tuneles, ya de atrevidos viaductos sobre cascadas y torrentes, ya otras veces bajando incon- cebibles pendientes por los flancos mismos de las monta- nas, y suspendido sobre el abismo. El viajero contempla atonito el grandiose espectaculo que se va desarrollando ante su vista, con una sensacion de asombro no exenta de sobresalto, provocada por aquella maravilla de la naturaleza y del arte. Este ferro-carril deja en el animo del viajero una im- presion tan duradera como agradable, y de el puede estar orgullosa la reptiblica mejicana. De Vera Cruz,^ zarpan ^ magnificos y comedos vapores para La Habana^ la alegre capital de Cuba,^ con sobrada ra- zon llamada Perla de lasAntillas ; los cuales hacen escala'' primer viaje de Cristobal Colon. De Cuba fue de donde salio la expedicion para la conquista de Mejico al mando de Cortes. La situacion de la Isla es en extremo favorable para el comercio, mientras que la extraordinaria feracidad de su suelo y naturaleza de sus productos, la dan ventajas inmensas. De 250 rios aproximadamente que tiene la Isla, solo uno, El Canto, es navegable ; y fue testigo de varias batallas durante la ultima guerra civil. El mas interesante de ellos es el Ay^ que se parte en varios sitios formando pintorescas cataratas, algunas de ellas de 200 pies de altura. El mercurio rara vez asciende a 100 grados 6 baja de 50. El clima es sano, con excepcion de seis meses del aiio en los que reina en la costa la fiebre amarilla, enfermedad que no se conoce en el interior. ^ Hacer escala (nautica), detencion de un buque por poco tiempo en algiin puerto antes de llegar al termino de su viaje. 292 lecci6n decimoctava. en los pueblos de la costa de Yucatan : Frontera^ Campe- che^ Merida y Progreso. Un viaje por mar es en todo tiempo delicioso, siein- pre que el viajero ademas de hacerlo en un vapor bueno, seguro y comodo, tenga la felicidad de no ma- rearse,^ que es lo principal, y de tener companeros que como el esten de buen humor, y scan entretenidos y finos.^ El unico y exclusivo preventivo contra el mareo, es formarse uno mismo la idea de que tan molesto liuesped no ha de tomar posesion de su persona. Los demas preservatives, como el limon y otras recetas,^ son inti- tiles, si uno se empena* en que el mar va a hacerle dano.^ Nada hay peor que permanecer encerrado en el camarote; sobre cubierta,^ por el contrario, la fresca brisa le tiene a uno siempre la cabeza clara y el espiritu tranquilo, a menos que la mar este muy picada ; ^ enton- ces I qaien se resiste ? i Aire libre ! ^ste es el gran remedio con que se ha de contrarrestar tan desagradable enfermedad. Si el que nunca ha viajado en vapor, quiere formarse una idea de lo que es el mareo ; figurese un calorcito que se pasea por dentro del cuerpo con la tranquilidad de 1 Marearse^ 6 tener el mal que produce el mar. 2 Fino en este sentido es sinonimo de politico, amable 6 bien educado. ( * Recetas 6 prescripciones para atacar una enfermedad. * Empenarse^ persistir en algo. s Hacer dano^ enfermarse de alguna cosa. « Sohre cuhierta^ designa el sitio descubierto en la parte superior de un vapor a donde los pasajeros van a tomar el aire y a pasear, declc. 7 Estar la mar picada significa que la mar no esta tranquila. Estar picado Be dice tambien del que esta enfadado 6 de mal humor. « Choza^ casa pobre y pequena en el campo. lecci(5n decimoctava. ' 293 quien no tiene otra cosa que hacer. El paciente se quiere resistir y se resiste un poco, pero el calorcito ocio- 80 y con sobra de inaccion sigue sus paseos, ora subiendOy ora bajando. For supuesto que no hay mal sin placer. Si estando en tal situacion, se divisa una costa lejana, y en el la alcanza a distinguir aunque no sea mds que una miserable choza^ de pescadores, esta se le representa como un gran palacio ; las piedras que la rodean se le figuran casas for- mando espaciosas y bien alineadas calles; las pequenas entradas del mar grandes bahias donde espera poner fin a sus males. ; Que dicha no se experimenta en aquel memento ! gCuanto mas feliz sera el viajero si en tan criticos momentos divisa en lontananza^ los castillos del Morro y La Cabana^ centinelas que, armados de potentes canon.es, parecen velar solicitos por la liermosa ciudad a la que dio nombre la india Hdbana ? La Habana,^^ tan conocida por su aromdtico tabaco y su dulce y sabroso azticar, esta situada d un lado de la linda y espaciosa bahia en la que anclan los vapores que llegan d aquel puerto. « Lontananza^ del latin longus^ largo ; y del italiano lontano, lejos. Ter- minos de un cuadro mas distantes del piano principal. I^n lontananza, a lo lejos. Se usa hablando solo de cosas que por estar muy lejanas apenas se pueden distinguir. 10 La Eabana^ capital de la Isla de Cuba, es una bonita ciudad, preciosa- mente situada, con excelente puerto, buenos teatroe, etc. Sus calles en la parte vieja son estrechas, pero en la parte nueva, estan construidas regular- mente, son anchas y con espaciosas aceras. Los paseos son hermosisimos, distinguiendose los de La India^ La Punta^ Plaza de Isabel II y El Prado. Las casas son bajas, solidamente construidas, y muy parecidas a las del Me- diodia de Espana. A causa del excesivo niimero de carruajes en las calles, la ciudad es ruidosa. El coche clasico de Cuba es la Dolanta^ que ya no se usa sino muy rara vez. 294 LECCldN DECIMOCTAVA. Pequenas lanchas ^ cubiertas de toldos ^ blancos, atra- can ^ presurosas al costado del vapor para conducir d los viajeros al muelle. La ciudad se divide en dos partes : una^ vieja, 6 sea la que estd junto al puerto, j la otra nueva que comprende la parte opuesta a la primera, y separada de esta por el Paseo de Isabel 11^ el Parque de la India^ j el Paseo del Prado. El puerto de La Habana es uno de los mds protegidos y espaciosos del mundo, puesto que la bahia, a la que se entra por un canal may estrecho, defendido por los cas- tillos de El Morro^ La Punta^ La Cabana^ AtareSj y jE7 Prmcijpe^ se ensancha al interior por varias niillas pro- porcionando a los buques un seguro y libre anclaje. En La Habana hay varios edificios muy notables, con- tdndose en primer lugar el Palacio, residencia del Capitan General, y a cuyo f rente se halla la hermosa Plaza de Ar- mas^ y el Templete^ sitio donde reposan las cenizas del inmortal navegante Cristobal Colon. Ademds el cele- brado y espacioso Teatro de Tacon^ la Catedral^ la iglesia de El Angel, el palacio de la Diputacion y tres magnificos mercados : La Plaza del Yajpor, La Plaza del Polvorin y El Mercado de Colon, Las fabricas donde se elabora el tabaco, estdn en gene- 1 Se llama asi 4 los botes 6 embarcaciones pequenas que hay en los puertos. a Toldo^ cubierta de tela fuerte para protegerse del sol, awning. 8 Atracar^ arrimar, juntar las embarcaciones unas con otras, 6 con tierra. * Estos son los nombres de los fuertes mas importantes que defienden a La Habana, cuya posicion militar es excelente. 6 Matanzas^ ciudad fortificada y puerto de mar de Cuba est4 situada en un rico y fertil distrito. Despues de La Habana esta considerada como la po- blacion mas importante de la Isla. Tiene 36,000 habitantes. « Cardenas es una bonita ciudad y puerto de mar, capital de un distrito LECCI6N Dl^CIMOCTAVA. 295 ral situadas en ediiicios que presentan un hermoso y curio- so golpe de vista por su bonita arquitectura. Muy dignos e interesantes de visitar en Cuba son sns Ingenios^ 6 plantaciones de azticar. Tambien sns mas importantes ciudades, como : Matanzas^ desde donde se descnbre el nunea bastante celebrado Yalle del Yumuri / Cardenas^ Cienfuegos^ Santiago ^ y otras. Es indudable que la Isla de Cuba, su capital especial- niente, es de los lugares que mas se prestan para que el americano vaya a pasar un par de meses durante el tiem- po frio. Los lioteles, como M Pasaje, Inglaierra j Mascotte, son buenos ; las comodidades mucbas ; el clima en invier- no, delicioso y sano ; la ciudad, pintoresca e interesante ; y la animacion grande. De La Habana d Nueva York 6 puede hacerse el viaje en vapor directamente, 6 pasando por Nassau, que es una preciosa ciudad aunque pequena, en donde hay excelen- tes hoteles. Hay tambien una linea de magnificos vapores que salen tres veces por semana de La Habana, y hacen el servicio entre dicha ciudad, Cayo Hueso^ y Tampa, pu- diendo el viajero visitar la Florida y continuar el viaje en tren hasta Nueva York. azucarero. El azucar es el principal articulo de exportacion. Tiene 11,000 habitantes. 7 Cienfuegos^ ciudad de lacosta sur, con 10,000 habitantes. Tiene unbuen puerto, y es una de las poblaciones mejor construidas de la Isla. La ciudad fu6 fundada en 1813. 8 Santiago de Cuba, antiguamente capital de la Isla, y ahora la mas impor- tante del departamento Oriental, esta situada en una concavidad formada por montanas. Su puerto es profundo, y bien protegido y fortificado. Como poblaci6n comercial ocupa el tercer lugar entre las de la Isla. 296 LECCldN D^CIMONONA. LECCI6N D^CIMONONA. El Campo y Un bosque, un desierto. Una zanja, un prado Una colina, una montana Un valle, una llanura . El tronco de un arbol . Una rama, las hojas Una raiz, la simiente Hierba 6 yerba, un campo Un manantial, un arroyo Un rio, un lago, un estanque . Una laguna, un pantano Un golfo, un estrecho, un canal . El mar, la orilla 6 ribera, la bahia La calma. la tormenta . Un buque mercante, de guerra . Las anclas, los palos Las velas, las banderas El piloto, el pr^ctico Los oficiales, los marineros La camara, el puente . La cubierta, proa, popa Babor, estribor. La bodega .... el Mar. a forest, a desert a ditch, a meadow, a hill, a mountain, a valley, a plain, the trunk of a tree, a branch, the leaves, a root, the seed. grass, afield. a spring, a brook. a river, a lake, a pond, a swamp, a marsh. a gulf, a strait, a canal. the sea, the shore, the bay, the calm, the storm. a merchant-ship, a man-of-war, the anchors, the masts. the sails, the flags. the helmsman, the pilot. the officers, the sailors, the cabin, the bridge, the deck, bow, stern, port, starboard, the hold. AgricitUura {Agriculture). Un hortelano, un trabajador . a farmer, a workman. El jornal the wages (for farmers). La hoz, una pala . El arado, ^xn azad6n, el latigo El carrero, un carro La cosecha, el gp:ano Una espiga de trigo El heno, la paja Centeno, avena, cebada . Una mazorca de maiz . Algod6n en rama . . the sickle, a shovel. . the plow, a hoe, the whip, . the cart-driver, the cart, , the harvest, the grain, , a?i ear of wheat. , the hay, the straw, , rye, oats, barley, , an ear of corn, , raw cotton'. LECCldN DECIMONC ^y-'^ OF THE jNtVER SITY 1 ^29T Conjunciones. Las conjunciones principales son : Que. Tambien. Ademas de. Y, 6.1 Ni— ni. 6, ui— 6. I Sea que. Tampoco. Mas, pero, sino.^ Mientras que.^ Aun cuando.^ Aunque.3 j Porque. That. Also. Moreover. And. Neither — nor. Or {either) — or. Whether — or. Whether. Neither. But. While. Even, Although. Though. Because. ^ Por que ? Conque. j De modo que. ( Pues, puesto que. Por. Por lo tanto. Para que.^ ( A fin de que.^ / Si. Con tal que.3 A menos que.^ Como, asi como. Asi. Siempre que.^ Ya. Why 9 So that. So then. Since. By, for. Therefore, So that. In order that. If- Provided that. Unless. As. So, thus. Whenever. Already, Inter jecciones. J Ay! I Ah! Alas! Ah! jDe veras ! \ Ay de mi ! Woe is me ! \ Q,ue hermosa ! I He ! I Ea ! Lo ! Well ! \ Que feo ! I Hola ! \ Viva ! Hallo ! Hurrah ! \ Por Dios ! I Cuidado ! Take care ! \ Vamos, pronto ! Come, he quick ! \ Ojala I God grant ! \ Silencio I Silence ! \ due 16,stinia ! What a pity ! \ Caramba ! Hah, strange I Indeed ! Hoiv beautiful ! How ugly ! For God's sake! 1 El Tiso de las conjunciones e, u, en lugar de y, b^ esta explicado en las paginas 132 y 168, notas 1 y 4, respectivamente. 2 Pero y mas se colocan al p^incipio de sentencias adversativas, mientras que {while) sino, puede linicamente ser empleado precedido por una clausula negativa', v. gr. : no es bianco sino negro, it is not white hut black ; me dijo eso pero {mas) no es asi, he told me that, but it is not so. 3 Despues de estas conjunciones es necesario usar el modo subjuntivo, cuando se expresa incertidumhre, duda, posibilidad 6 tiempo futuro indeji- nido; v. gr.: aun cuando {aunque) me lo Jiaya dicho, no me acuerdo {although he may have told w^e so, I do not remember it) ; con tal que lo haga, no me importa {provided that he may do it^ it does not matter). Le doy el libro para que lo lea. 298 lecci6n d^cimonona. LITERATURA CLAsICA ANTIGUA. — En primer lugar distingo entre los libros de Yd. la obra universal del imnortal Cervantes.^ — Si ; el Quijote^ j ademas tengo el Viaje al Parnaso, 8US JVovelas Ejemj^lares^ Galatea^ y Persiles y Segismun- da. Don Qidjote^ su obra mds notable, fue concebida por el ilustre Maneo^ su autor, estando prisionero y ence- rrado en una oscura mazmorra.^ Otro escrito importante de Cervantes es la ultima elocuentisima carta que dirigio d su protector el Conde de Lemos, dedicandole los tra- bajos de Persiles y Segismunda^ postrera obra de tan in- signe genio. — Tambien tiene Vd. aqui al gran Calderon, el que merecio el titulo glorioso de Principe, de los ingenios dramdticos / al Shakespeare de los espanoles.* — Calderon^ es el mas profundo en las ideas, de nues- tros autores dramdticos, el de genio mds comprensivo y alto, quiza el mds grande en lo trdgico y seguramente en lo simbolico. 1 Don Miguel de Cervantes, nacio en Alcala de Henares el 9 de Octubre de 1547. Sus padres, descendientes de ilustres familias, fueron Don Eodrigo de Cervantes y Dona Leonor de Cortinas. Sus primeros estudios los hizo en launiversidad de su pueblo nativo, y luego paso a la de Salamanca en donde curso dos anos. En 1571, Cervantes se alisto como soldado en las tropas que con el nombre de Santa Liga formaron el Papa, Felipe II de Espana, y Ge- nova, contra el turco. Formando parte de tal expedicion se encontro en la memorable batalla naval de Lcpanto, donde recibio una herida en un brazo que le dejo manco. En 1575, estando de guarnicion en Napoles, se embarco para volver a Espaiia, y fue hecho prisionero por el famoso corsario Amaute Mami. Cinco anos y medio duro su cautiverio, y cuando volvio a Espaiia en 1580, Cer- vantes se encontro sin padres, sin amigos y sin fortuna. Eodeado de miseria y privaciones paso su vida este grande hombre y murio el 23 de Abril de 1616, siete dias despues del celebre Shakespeare. 2 Manco se aplica a la persona a quien falta un brazo 6 mano. 8 Mazmorra^ prision subterranea. lecci6n d^cimonona. 299 Sus obras se dividen ; en dramas religiosos y filosofi- cos, como : La Yida es Sueno^ La Devocion de la Cruz j El Mdgico Prodigioso ; dramas tragicos, como : El Me- dico de su Honra^ El Alcalde de Zalamea^ j A Secreto Agravio Seer eta Yenganza ; j, comedias de capa y es- pada,^ como : La Dama L>uende, JVo hay Burlas con el Amor^ Mananas de Ahril y Mayo^ y, Casa con dos Puer- tas Mala es de Guardar. Ademas ha escrito comedias de otro genero, como: 2^0 Siempre lo Pear es Cierto^ y Gudrdate del Agiia Mansa y^ zarzuelas,''' como: El Laurel de Apolo^ y, La Purpura de la Rosa* y autos sacramen tales, co- mo : La Cena de Baltasar^ y, A Dios par Eazori de Estado. — Entre las obras que Vd. no menciona, esta tambien el famoso Carro del Cielo^ que publico cuando apenas contaba trece aiios de edad, y por la que se le cuenta entre los genios mas precoces. * Don Pedro Calderon de la Barca, el priinero y mas grande de los poetas cristianos, como le llamo Schlegel, nacio en Madrid el 17 de enero de 1600. A la edad do quince aiios fue a Salamanca en cuya celebre universidad, dicen sus biografos, aprendio en cinco anos todo lo que en ella se eriseiiaba. En 1625, entro en la carrera de las arraas donde continuo hasta 1635, que Felipe IV le nombro poeta cortesano en reemplazo del difunto Lope de Vega. Cal- deron se hizo sacerdote en 1651, dejando de existir treinta anos mas tarde *' con llanto universal^'''' como dice uno de sus biogralos. A ciento veinte ascienden los dramas escritos por Calderon, entre los que mencionaremos, ademas de los del texto, En esta mda todo es 'verdad y todo es mentira, drama que sirvio a Corneille para su Her actio, y, Fl mayor monstruo los celos (tragedia). Entre las comedias, Antes que todo es mi Dama^ Dar tiempo al tiempo^ El Galdn fantasma^ El Secreto a voces ^ El Alcaide de si mismo, que fu6 imitado por Corneille con el titulo de El Carcelero de si mismo, etc., etc. 6 Llevan este nombre de comedias de capa y espada^ las comedias de cos- tumbres con trajes de la edad media. « Moliere la tomo por modelo para su Escuela de los maridos, "* Vease pag. 270, nota 2. 300 lecci6n decimonona. — Si no temiera desviarme^ del principal objeto de esta leccion, cual es tratar de la literatura antigua espa- iiola, le citana^ a Yd. por curiosidad, los liombres cele- bres mas preeoces que ban existido. — Le suplico que lo haga ; sera algo instructivo e in- teresante de saber. — Pues ademds de Calderon, se cita d Victor Hugo que a los quince anos, escribio "Irtamene / " Pope a los doce, una oda, "A la Soledad ;^^ Byron d los dieciocho, " Horas de Ociosidad ; " Tomas Moore a los trece, tradu- jo a Anacreonte y Dante a los nueve, dedico un cuento d Beatin ; Pascal a los trece, era un gran pensador ; Miguel Angel a los diez y nue\^e, un notable artista ; Goethe d los diezj'escribia en varios idiomas; Lope de Vega escri- bio su primer drama & los once anos ; Metastasio impro- visaba d los diez, y Fenelon a los quince, pronuncio un muy notable discurso. — 'Es en efecto maravilloso,^ y despues de tan agrada- ble como instructiva interrupcion podemos continuar con la literatura espanola que no creia fuese tan copiosa^ e im- portante. — En una tabla mds abajo de este estante ^ leera Vd. 1 Desviar^ separar, apartar, tomar otro camino. 3 Citar^ sinonimo de mencionar. 3 Mdravilloso^ cxtraordinario, excelente, admirable. * Copiosa^ abundante, numerosa, cuantiosa. 6 Estante^ refiriendose a estante de libros, 6 mueble para tener libros. « Fray Lope de Vega, '•'• Fenix de los ingenios^''^ como le llamo su siglo, nacio en Madrid el 25 de Noviembre de 1562. Antes de saber leer ni escribir, repartia sus juguetes entre sus corapaneros de escuela mayores de edad, para que escribieran los versos que el les dictaba. Como Cervantes y Calderon fue tambien militar, tomando parte en la expedicion naval de la Armada In'oen- cihle que Felipe II envio contra Inglaterra, y despues de una vida agitada y Uena de peripecias, se retiro a gozar de la tranquilidad que solo el claustro le brindaba y se hizo sacerdote, muriendo el 25 de Agosto de 1635. Dif'icil- LECCldN DECIMONONA. 301 los nombres de Lope de Vega, Tikso de Molina, Alar- con, EojAs y Moketo. — Digame, le ruego, i cuales son las obras mds notables de Lope, el maestro de los autores dramdticos, de aquel a quien, ponderando su talento, y con tanta adrairaeion como fundamento, apellidaba Cervantes Monstruo de la JSaturaleza ? ^ — Las obras de Lope de Yega,como las de Calderon, consisten en tragedias^ dramas y comedias. Entre las tragedias, figuran en primer lugar : El Casti- go sin Yenganza^ El Cahallero de Olmedo^ La Inocente Sangre^ La Judia de Toledo y Los Siete Infantes de Lara. Sus dramas son : hisioricos^ legendarios "' y noveles- cos, Entre los hist&ricos le citare como mds importantes : El Prmcijpe Perfecto^ Los Tellos de Meneses^ El Nuevo Mundo de Cristobal Colon^ La Ilistoria de Wamha^ y La Santa Liga, Las creaciones mds importantes de Lope son sus dra- mas legendarios y novelescos^ entre los que estdn eu pri- mera linea. La Estrella de Sevilla y El Mejor Alcalde el raente registrara la historia im poeta de tanta popularidad como Lope de Vega. En vida se vio obsequiado y aplaudido por hombres de todas las condicioncs, desde el Pontifice y los monarcas, hasta la clase mas baja del pueblo. A su rauerte, aiin en los paises extranjeros se hicieron lionras a su memoria. Ees- pecto a su fecundidad, puede decirse de Lope, que el solo escribio mas que todos los poetas juntos de su tiempo. A los once afios de edad, compuso su primer drama ; a los cuarenta y uno, tenia escrito 230, nuraero que seis^aiios mas tarde se elevaba al de 483. A los cincuenta aiios, era Lope autor de 900 comedias, y a su muerte, tenia repartido en los teatros del reino 1,500 piezas teatrales. Asegurase que en el espacio de 24 horas, mitad en un dia y mitad en otro, componia Lope un drama de 2,400 versos 6 mas, agigantado y poco creible esfuerzo que repitio en su vida mas dc cien veces. '' Legendario^ perteneciente a la leycnda 6 vida de santos. 21 302 lecci6n decimonona. Rey} Ademas de los mencionados podi-ian citarse : Gas- telvines y Monteses^ Don Juan de Castro^ La Doncella Teodor^ El Bemedio en la Desdicha^ y otros muchos de inmenso merito. Entre los centenares de comedias^ que este fecundo autor eseribio, se pueden citar, como las que retratan con mas verdad y belleza de colorido las costumbres de la epoca: Lo Gierto por lo Dudoso^ El Acero de Madrid^^ y La Moza de Cdntaro? Otras comedias de capa y espa- da de mucho merito, son : La Ilermosa Fea^ Dineros son Calidad^ La Esclava de su Galdn^ El Perro del Hortelano^ La Dama Boba^ Los Milagros del Despre- cio^ etc. — I Y que me dice Vd. de las obras de los otros autores mencionados ; de Tirso de Molina especialmente, nombre que segun me ban dicbo adopto en sus obras para ocultar el suyo verdadero ? — Efectivamente, Tirso de Molina era solo un seudoni- mo, siendo su nombre real Gabriel Tellez^ y fue uno de los discipulos mas adeptos de Lope de Vega. Entre las tragedias de este autor, se citan como mas 1 Este drama esta reputado como la raejor obra de Lope, y es tornado de la cuarta parte de la Cronica general de Alfonso el Sabio. 2 Entre las comedias de Lope las hay misticas^ como El Nacimiento de Oristo^ La Creadon del Mundo^ San Diego de Alcalde etc., de caracteres y de costumbres, y de capa y espada. 3 En esta bella produccion de Lope, una de las mejores en su genero, son los protagonistas 6 heroes, el celebre Don Pedro I de Castilla apellidado el cruel, y su hermano y matador el Conde de Trastamara. * Este nombre esta tornado de la prcparacion que del acero se hacia en aquella epoca para curar ciertaa enfermedades. Moli^re trato de imitarla en su Medico a Palos. 6 £sta es una dc las obras mas caracterizadas en el g^nero de las de capa y espada, « El maestro Tirso de Molina 6 Gabriel Tellez. nacio en Madrid el ano LECCI6N DfiCIMONONA. 303 notables : Los Amantes de Teruel^ y, El Burlador de Se- mlla y El Gonmdado de Piedra^ del que saco el insigne vate Zorrilla su Don Juan Tenorio^ tan popular como aplaudido, y el que Moliere, Shadwell y Mozart llevaron en distintas f ormas a la literatura de sus respectivos paises. Tambien estan mas 6 menos relacionados con la original concepcion de Tirso de Molina, el Don Juan de Byron, y El Estudiante de Salamanca de Espronceda. De los dramas historicos y legendaries deben men- cionarse : La Prudencia en la Mujer^ El Rey Don Pe- dro en Madrid^ y LLazana d^. los Pizarros ; y de las co- medias, que es en donde con rads viveza manifiesta el poeta su genio, le citare las muy populares Don Oil de las Cal- zas Verdes^ La Villana de Valleeas, y El Vergonzoso en Palacio} El ntimero de las obras de Alareon no es crecido; pero sobresalen por su sentido filosofico, y por la profun- didad y belleza dc los pensamientos que atesoran y de los sentimientos que expresan.''' Consisten en comedias^ dramas y tragedias. Entre las primeras estdn Las Paredes Oyen y La Verdad Sos- 1570, muriendo en 1648, cuando contaba 78 de edad. Ademas de las obras citadas de este autor, puedcn mencionarse como figurando en primera linea, las tragedias: El condenado por desconjianza^ y Zavenganza de Tamar ; log dramas historicos y legendarios : La eleccibn por la Virtud^ El Caballero de Gracia^ La condesa handolera^ j El amor y la amistad ; y, la comedia Marta la piadosa. , T Don Juan Ruiz de Alarcon nacio en Mejico, en donde su padre estaba empleado por el gobierno espanol, el aiio 1580. Curso sus primeros estudios en la universidad de dicha ciudad, y en 1600, llego a la Peninsula con objeto de continuar sus estudios en la c^lebre Universidad de Salamanca. En 1613, despues de otro viaje a Mejico, comenzo Alarcon a dar comedias k los teatros de Madrid, mereciendo muchos favores de la Corte y los grandes hasta su muerte, acaecida en 1639. Sus obras ascienden solo a 26, publicadas en dos partes : en 1628 y 1634 respectivamente. 304 lecci6n decimonona. pechosa. La ultima, traducida e imitada por Corneille ^ en su celebrado Menteur^ extendio la fama de Alarcon por toda Europa.^ De los dramas^ figuran en primera linea : Lo que Mu- cho Vale MucJio Guesta j Quien mal Anda mal Acaha? El repertorio de Don Francisco Eojas lo componen ochenta piezas teatrales. De ellas merecen especial men- cion : Garcia del Gastanar^ Entre Bobos Anda el Jiiego^ que tradujo luego Corneille ; Donde hay Agravios no hay Gelos^ que f iie traducida por Scarron ; No hay ser Padre Siendo Hey^ que imito Rotron ; y Gasarse jpor Vengarse, que redujo a novela Lesage.* El ultimo de los continuadores j reformistas del teatro de Lope de Vega fue Moreto,^ cuyas composiciones dra- maticas ascienden A ciento tres. El Valiente Justiciero 6 Bico Ilombre de Alcalde El Def elisor de su Agravio, Ilasta el fin Nadie es Dichoso^ El Desden con el Des- * Oorneille declara que porque La Verdad Sospechosa fuera suya, diera las dos mcjorcs que ha escrito, y confiesa, que ademas de este, tomo otros asuntos de los espanoles, couio por ejemplo el del Cid^ lo que Voltaire con- firma en bu comentario de El Menteur diciendo : " Precise es cont'esar que debemos a Espana la primera tragedia interesante y la primera comedia de caracter que ilustraron a Francia." 2 Tambien son dig'nas de mencionarse ; Antes que te cases mira lo que haces^ Mudarse por mejorarse^ j JVo hay mal que por hien no venga. 3 Los Pechos pi'ivUegiados^ La Crueldad por el honor ^ El Tejedor de Sego- via y otros, son asimismo muy dignos de ser Icidos y estudiados. 4 Don Francisco Rojas nacio en la pintoresca Toledo el ano 1608, y curso su carrera literaria en las universidades de dicha ciudad y la de Salamanca. A la temprana edad de veinticinco afios, era ya conocido y celebrado como autor dramatico. Rojas murio, Begun se cree, asesinado en Madrid en 1638. 6 Don Agustin Moreto, nacio en Madrid el aiio 1618, e hizo bus estudios en Alcala de Henares, como varios de sus predecesores. Pertenecio a la Academia de Madrid^ fue sacerdote, y murio. el ano 1669, a los 51 de su edad, dejando todos sus bienes a los pobres. « Podrian ademas citarse como muy buenas, Antioco y Seluco^ Como se vengan los nobles^ De fuera vendrd quien de casa nos echara^ y otras. lecci6n decimonona. 305 den y El Lindo Don Diego ^ son las cinco obras principa- les de este gran ingenio precursor de Calderon.® — No deja de ser interesante la relacion de las obras de esos grandes poetas. Aqui estan tambien las de Hurtado DE Mendoza/ el famoso autor de El Lazarillo de Tormes. — Esa, y La Guerra de los Moriscos^ ambas en prosa, dieron a sii autor fama imperecedera. En sns produce! ones poeticas, como Adonis^ Ilipome- nes y Atlanta^ El Himno que dedico al cardenal Espino- sa, y otras, demuestra la profundidad, discrecion y expe- riencia propias del hombre de niundo, a la vez que se manifiesta apasionado imitador de los clasicos Horacio, Pindaro, Petrarca y Virgilio. — Entre los contemporaneos de Lope, veo a Miguel Sanchez ^ el Divino^ Tarrega,^ Aguilar,^^ y tantos otros quienea hacen admirar las galas del ingenio espanol. 7 Don Diego Hurtado de Mendoza, nacio en Granada el ano 1503, j era hijo de los Condes de Tendilla y Marqueses de Mondejar. Curso sus primeros estudios en la universidad de Salamanca, entrando despues en la carrera de las armas al servicio del Emperador Carlos V. Murio en Madrid el ano 1575. Los constantes y graves quehaceres que ocuparon la vida^ de Hurtado de Mendoza, le impidieron dedicar mucho tiempo a trabajos literarios, mas lo que lego a la posteridad fue prueba suficiente del m^rito de su autor. 8 Miguel Sanchez a quien sus contemporaneos apellidaron el Bivino, se dio a conocer como poeta lirico-comico por el aiio 1588. Entre sus obras notables, flgura La guarda cuidadosa, que Cervantes, Lope de Vega y Rojas elogiaban mucho. " El Canonigo Tarrega, el primero de los ingenios valencianos que si- guieron la escuela de Lope, publico 12 comedias, de las cuales es tenida como lamejor La e?iemiga favorable, que fu6 tambien la ultima que escribio. M prado de Valencia, y La duquesa constante, figuran tambien en primera linea, siendo consideradas por algunos criticos como superiores a la primera antes citada. 10 Don Gaspar de Aguilar, conocido por El discreto valenciano, de la misma edad aproximadamente que su paisano y rival Tarrega, murio en 1623, y dejo entre sus obras 12 comedias, de las que son las mejores, El mercader amante, La gitana melancolica, y La venganza Twnrosa. 306 lecci6n decimonona. ^No desearia Yd. leer algo del eelebre Don Gui- llen DE Castro,^ aquel que inspire j hasta d quien copio el gran Corneille,^ al antor de las Mocedades del Cid f — Creo que a esa obra es a la que principal mente debe este gran genio su eelebridad en el extranjero. — Es indudablemente la mejor de las que escribio, pero todas fueron muy celebres dentro y fuera de Es- pana. Del raismo genero historico 6 heroico tiene, ademas de Las Mocedades^ La Justicia en la Piedad^ Pagar en Propia Moneda^ j El Amor Constante^ que es uno de sus mds preciosos dramas. En el de eapa y espada, comedias tan interesantes como : El Narciso en su Opi- nion^ que sirvio de modelo a Moreto para El Lindo Don Diego ; La Fuerza de la Costumhre^ y Los mal Casados de Valencia, — Castro y Tirso, son en mi concepto los poetas mas justamente eelebrados de los contemporaneos de Lope. — Don Gaspar de Avila es tambien uno de los nom- bres que con mas admiracion citaba Cervantes, y el que Lope de Vega elogia tanto en su Laurel de Apolo. En- tre sus obras pueden citarse : El Lris de las Pendencias, que es sin duda la mejor ; El Familiar sin Demonio^ y El Valeroso EspanoL 1 Don Gfillen db Castro, uno de los mas celebres de la escuela de Lope de Vega, nacio de una familia ilustre, en Valencia, el aiio 1567. Su vida fue tra- ^ca y agitada, a causa de su genio altivo e inquieto, por lo que vivio siem- pre en la pobreza, apesar de haber tenido protectores como el duque de Osuna y el conde duque de Olivares, terminando sus dias en Madrid el afio 1621. 2 La obra que refiere el texto es la famosa tragedia Le Cid. 3 Don Luis Velez de Guevara, uno de los sostenedores del teatro de Lope, de la escena sevillana, nacio en Ecija, provincia de Sevilla, en enero de 1570. Despues de estudiar en la universidad de la capital, paso a Madrid, en donde bien pronto se hizo cclcbre por su elocuencia y su caracter agradable lecci6n decimonoxa. 307 — I Y donde me deja Vd. al inimitable critico de cos- tumbres, al autor del Diahlo Cojuelo^ a Yelez de Gueva- ra,^ qiiien por su graciosa conversacion merecio que Cer- vantes le apellidase Quita-pesares ? ^ — Es verdad, y por cierto que El Diahlo Cojuelo^ me recuerda d Le Sage, que lo tradujo j publico en su idio- ma, bautizandolo con el nombre de Diable Boiteux, Guevara f ue gran privado del rey Felipe IV, quien gus- taba muclio de su instruccion, cliistes^ y agudezas. A este monarca debe Guevara la popularidad que obtuvo en poco tiempo con sus comedias, pues que fue el que insistio y le convencio de que escribiera para el teatro. Entre los dramas de este hombre elocuente e insigne literato, se reputan como mejores : Mas Pesa el liey que la Sangre^ en el que pinta la heroica hazaiia de Guzmdn el Bueno en Tarifa ; La Restauracion de Esjpana^ que trata del levantamiento de Pelayo en Covadonga ; El Dia- hlo estd en Cantillana^ fundada en una de las aventuras del rey Don Pedro, y otros.^ — El nombre del que llevo la satira a su apogeo, se y festive. Murio en dicha ciudad el aiio 1644, cuando contaba el septuagesi- rao cuarto de su edad. 4 Quitar pesares significa hacer olvidar penas 6 pesares ; convertirlos en alegrias. 5 Como definicion bonita y original, al mismo tiempo que expresiva j ver- dadera de la palabra chiste^ trasladamos aqui la que hizo de ella uno de nues- tros mas insignes literatos contemporaneos en su discurso de recepcion en la Academia de la Longua. " El chiste — dijo — es todo acto, expresion 6 figura que, conteniendo una absoluta conveniencia de fondo, aparece con absoluta disconveniencia de forma." « El numero de sus obras asciende a unas 400, entre las quo tarabi^n pueden citarse: los dramas historioos Dona Ines de Castro ; El valor no tiene edad, que es la relacion de los heohos de Don Diego Garcia de Pa- redes ; y, Los amotinados de Flandes. Entre sus mas notables comedias se cuentan : Los hijos de la Barbuda^ La luna de la sierra^ y La nina de Go* mez Arias. 308 lecci6n decimonona. presenta ante mi vista, el famoso Don Francisco de QUEVEDO.^ — Sus escritos satiricos — morales j festivos^ son a los que principalmente debe este grande hombre su fama y celebridad. Seis son los Suenos de Quevedo^ discursos que escribio bajo este epigrafe : El de las Carahanas 6 Juicio Fimal; El Alguacil Alguacilado ; El Sueno del Injierno que llamo despues Zahurdas de Phiton^ uno de los que estan reputados como mejores ; El Mundojpor Dentro^ La Vis- ta de los Chistes^ y La Casa de Locos de Amor, Completan sus obras satiricas, El Discurso de Todos los Didblos^ y La Ilora de Todos y la Fortuna con Seso que fue su ultima obra. Entre sus ohv2i^ festivas merecen citarse : Las Cartas del Cdballero de las Tenazas^ y El Libro de Todas las Cosas y Otras Muchas Mas. De sus discursos criticos literarios : Cuento de Cuentos^ y La Perinola / y de sus poesias : el poema Las Necedades y las Locuras de Or- lando el Enamorado ; y los sonetos burlescos, A una Na- riz y Apolo Siguiendo a Dafne, 1 Don Francisco de Quevedo nacio el 28 de setiembre de 1580, y fu^ hijo de Don Pedro de Quevedo, secretario de la reina Doiia Ana de Austria, cuarta mujer de Felipe II, y de Dona Maria Santibanez. Hizo sus primeros estudios en la universidad de Alcala. Despues de ser secretario del duque de Osuna j de arreglar diploraaticamente varios tratados con la corte de Roma, con los duques de Saboya, y con la repiiblica de Venecia, volvio a Madrid y fue norabrado secretario del rey, rauriendo el 8 de setiembre de 1645. Como escritor recorrio Quevedo todos los generos asi en prosa como en verso. Las persecuciones que por sus satiras sufrio de parte del gobiemo, que se apo- dero en varias ocasiones de sus papeles, fueron sin duda, la causa a que se debe la perdida de muchos de sus escritos. 2 El Doctor Don Antonio Mira de Mescua, muy celebrado en su tiempo como poeta lirico y dramatico, nacio el aiio 1570. Fue protegido por el conde de Lemos, y despues de haber sido capellan de Felipe IV, murio en Madrid el mismo ano del fallecimiento de Lope de Vega, 1635. lecci6n decimonona. 309 ifeste es el afamado ingenio a quien «Tusto Lipsio 11a- mo " la mayor prez y mas alta gloria de los espanoles^^^ calificativo que puede aplicarse al que es, sin duda, prm- cipe de nuestros escritores satirlcos, y solo halla rival que le aventaje en el immortal autor de Don Quijote de la Mancha, — Pero entonces hablar del siglo dieeisiete, el de oro que debe ser de la literatura espanola, es el cuento de nunca acabar. — Tendremos que dejar tantos y tantos otros, como MiRA DE Mescua, el autor de Galdn Valiente y Discreto^ La Fenix de Salam^anca^ en la que estuvo muy inspi- rado La Dama Duende de Calderon ; La Ltueda de la Fortuna^ y, No hay Dicha ni Desdicha hasta la Muerte ; ^ y a MoNTALVAN, el celebre dialoguista, el rival de Tirso, el incomparable en sus obras mas importantes : Cumjplir con su OUigacion^ La Doncella de Labor, LLa mas Cons- tants Mujer, No hay Vida cotro la Llonra, y Los Aman- tes de TerueU 3 El Doctor Juan Perez de Montalvan nacio en Madrid el ano 1602, y siguio sus estudios en Alcala de Henares. Ocupo durante su vida,- impor- tantes puestos y murio de enajenacion mental, efecto de su extreraada aiicion al estudio, el aiio 1638. Apesar dc que Montalvan era hombre bondadoso y modesto, y mas dado a prodigar clogios a sus contemporaneos que a dirigirles censuras, fue siempre criticado de una manera pertinaz 6 inconveniente, critica a la que por ningiin concepto era acreedor. Debio contribuir a esto el que era hijo del librero del rey, quien le protegio y distinguio mucho lo mismo que los principales magnates de su corte, lo que, sin duda, excito la envidia en muchos y produjo epigramaa como el siguiente : El doctor tii te lo pones. El Montalvan no lo tienes ; Conque, quitdudote el don^ Vienes a quedar Juan Perez. Desde la edad de trece anos produjo Montalvan muchas obras estimables, en prosa y en verso, haciendo un total de sesenta hasta su temprana muerte. 310 LECCION VIGESIMA. LECCl6lsr YIGJfiSIMA, La Huerta (the Farm) Tin jardin, una planta Sembrar, la siembra . Tin limonero, naranjo . TJn moral, cerezo . Un ciruelo, alberchigo Un manzano, peral Una higuera, una palma Un nogal, un castano. Un olivo, un almendro Un roble, un fresno . Un olmo, un laurel Un cedro, un pino Frutas Lini6n, naranja, mora, cereza Ciruela, alberchigo, manzana Higo, datil, pera . Nuez, castana, almendra . Albaricoque 6 damasco Grosella, platano, aceituna Uva, uva espina, pasa Frambuesa, fresa . Mel6n, sandia Pina, avellana Legumbres La patata 6 papa, batata Col, lechuga, cebollas . Alcachofa 6 alcaucil . Rabanos, nabos, pepino Espinacas, coliflor Esparragos, apio, calabaza Setas, remolacha . Guisantes, lentejas Habichuelas 6 frijoles a garden, a 'plant, . to sow, the sowing, Arboles {Trees). . a lemon-tree, orange-tree. . a mulberry -tree, cherry-tree, . a plum-tree, peach-tree. , an apple-tree, pear-tree. . a fig-tree, a palm-tree. . a walnut-tree, chestnut-tree, . an olive-tree, almond-tree, . an oak-tree, an ash-tree. , an elm-tree, a laurel-tree. . a cedar-tree, a pine-tree. (Fruits). . lemon, orange, mulberry, cherry, . plum, peach, apple. . fig, date, pear. . nut, chestnut, almond, , apricot. , currant, banana, olive. , grape, gooseberry, raisin, . raspberry, straivberry. , melon, water-melon. . pineapple, hazelnut. ( Vegetables), . the potato, sweet potato, , cabbage, lettuce, onions, . . artichoke. . radishes, turnips, cucumber, . spinach, cauliflower. , asparagus, celery, pumpkin, , mushrooms, beets, . peas, lentils. . beans. LECCION VIGESIMA. 311 Flares {Flowers), Rosa. Rose. Heliotropo. Heliotrope. CapuUo. Eosebud. Jazmin. Jasmine. Violeta. Violet Camelia. Camellia. Mirto. Myrtle, Magnolia. Magnolia. Azucena. White lily. Rosa de j^a.si6n. Passion-flower. Lirio de mayo K Lily of the valley . Madreselva. Honeysuckle. No me olvides . Forget-me-not. MflTgarita. Daisy. Pensamiento. Pansy. Dalia. Dahlia. Amapola. Poppy, Jacinto. Hyacinth. Clavel. Pink. Tulipan. Tulip. Orquidea. Orchid. Azahar. Orange-blossom. Frases Usuales (continuacion) DUDA, SORPRESA, ADMIRACION. / Como ! s ^^ veras f Yd. me sorprende. Dudo que eso sea verdad. ^ Quien lo hubiera creido 9 No lo hubiera creido nunca. I Es increible ! I Es admirable ! / Es verdaderamente magnifico ! I Que maravilla ! Estoy completa- mente encantado. SlMPATIA Y ANTIPATIA. Es mi mejor amigo. Es mi amigo intimo. Haria cuanto pudiese por el. Ese hombre no me gusta. jSu cara no le recomienda. Le detesto (odio). Todo el mundo le aborrece. Me alegraria que se fuera. Por fin se fue. Para suplicar. g, Quiere Yd. hacerme un favor 9 ^ Quiere Yd. tener la bondad de...9 Me haria Yd. un servicio. Cuento con Yd., ^ no es verdad 9 Doubt, surprise, admiration. What! Really? You astonish me. I doubt that this is true. Who would have believed it ? I would never have believed it. It is incredible ! It is admirable ! It is really magnificent ! What a wonder! I am quite charmed. Sympathy and antipathy. He is my best friend. He is my intimate friend. I would do anything for him. I do not like that man. His looks are not in his favor. I detest (hate) him. He is hated by everybody. I wish he would go. At last he is gone. To REQUEST. Will you do me a favor ? Will you have the kindness to ... ? You would do me a favor. 1 count upon you, may I not ? 312 lecci6n vigesima. LITERATURA MODERNA. POESIA LIEICA. — Sigamos examinaiido los libros de la biblioteca, y detengamonos primero en los poetas liricos. — Aqui estd Quintana/ una de las glorias mas grandes de nuestra literatura. Vea Vd. de el : La Coleccion de Poesias desde los Tienvpos de Juan de Mena^ las Vidas de Esjpanoles Celebres^ la Vida de Don Alvaro de Luna^ la tragedia Pelayo^ j sus Odas. — A continuacion leo los nombres de Gallego,^ ali- tor de la celebre oda £^l Dos de Mayo; de Martinez DE LA Rosa, el celebre estadista ; y del Duque ' de RiVAS. — Martinez de la Rosa,^ mds politico que literato, cultivo sin embargo todos^los generos de literatura, de- jando producciones notables en algunos de ellos. Como moralista, escribio JEl Libro de los Ninos ; como histo- riador, El Espiritu del Siglo^ y Herndn Perez del Pui- gar ; como novelista, Isabel de SoUs ; como dramdtico, Aben-Humeya^ drama que compuso en Paris, durante una de sus emigraciones, e hizo representar en un teatro de 1 Don Manuel Jose Quintana, nacio en Madrid el ano 1772, y curso en Salamanca la carrera de derecho. En 1814, ingreso en las Academias de San Fernando j Espanola. Despu^s de la muerte de Fernando VII, fue sena- dor vitaliclo, ayo de Isabel II, y presidente del Consejo de Instruccion Piibli- ca. En 1855, fu6 coronado piiblica y yolemnemente en el Senado, y murio dos anos mas tarde de haber recibido esta prueba de admiracion y carino por parte de sus contemporaneos. 2 Don Juan Nicasio Gallego, que nacio en Zamora en 1777, debe ser con- tado como muy ilustre entre los restauradores de nuestra poesia en este siglo. Fu^ consejero de Estado, senador. secretario perpetuo de la Academia Espariola y presidente de la de Historia. Murio en 1853. Como poeta nos ha dejado muchas oda8^ elegias^ y sonetos^ verdaderos modelos por. la pureza de la forma y por Bu alto espiritu poetico. lecci6n vigesima. 313 aquella capital; La Conjuracion de Venecia^ calificada como la mejor de sus obras ; y la tragedia Edipo. De sus poesias liricas, la mejor es la '' Epistola al dnque de Frias con motivo de la rauerte de la du- quesa." — ^ Y que me dice Yd. del Duque de Rivas^ el ini- ciador, segtin dicen/del romanticismo en Espana? — En efecto, el romanticismo hizo su aparicion franca entre nosotros con El Moro Exposito 6 Cordoba y Burgos en el siglo X^ j con Don Alvaro 6 la Fuerza del Sino ; las dos obras mas bellas entre las muchas y muy celebra- das de nuestro poeta. Es autor ademas de algunas comedias, de los bellisi- mos Romances Historicos^ que publico en Madrid en 1841, y de otras composiciones, entre ellas, La Azucena Mila- grosa^ que le acredita de excelente prosista ; lo mismo que algunos articulos de la obra Los Espanoles Pintados por Si Mismos^ etc. — ; Ah ! por fin llegamos al poeta popular, al autor de El Diablo Mundo^ y El Estudiante de Salamanca / al 3 Nacio Don Francisco MARTfNEz de la Eosa en Granada en 1786, pro- vincia que lo eligio diputado en 1812. Desde 1820, fue ministro hasta 1823, que emigro a Francia en donde vivio hasta 1831. Desde esta epoca, su im- portancia politica fue grande, unas veces embajador, otras ministro, ya presi- dente del Consejo de Estado, ya del Congreso. Ademas fue director de la Acaderaia Espafiola. * Don Angel de Saavedra, duque de Eivas, nacio en Cordoba el ano 1791. Militar desde muy joven por gracia especial, hallose en la gloriosa batalla de Bailen y en la de Ocafia, donde cayo con once heridas gravisimas. Una emigracion posterior de diez afios, durante los cuales residio en Gibraltar, en Londres, en varies puntos de Francia y en Malta, le dlo oportunidad para tratar con los literatos extranjeros, y para estudiar las obras de los grandes escritores modernos de los varies paises donde habito. Walter Scott y Byron, Lamartine y Victor Hugo, ademas del estudio de Shakespeare, dieron nuevo y seguro rum bo a su inspiracion y genio literario. Murio en Madrid en 1865. 314 lecci6n vigesima. Byron, Goethe, y Leopardi espanol, d Espeonceda en cuya historia estoy tan interesado.^ — La verdadera biografia de Espronceda esta en sus obras. En la cancion de El Pirata^ pinta su amor al peligro ; sn espiritu belicoso, en el Canto del Cosaco / lo acrisolado de su patriotismo, en la Despedida del J oven Griego de la Hija del Apostata ; sus delirios de socialista, en El Mendigo y en El Verdugo ; en el Ilimno al Sol, su elevacion de ideas ; euando canta A un Lucero, llora la perdida de sus ilusiones ; euando en una Orgia se dirige d Jarifa, el hastio le devora ; euando compone El Estu- diante de Salamanca, dibuja en Don Felix de Monteinar su propio retrato. Con leer ese precioso tomo de poesias coleceionadas por el eininente literato Don Patricio de la Escosura, es- tudia uno al poeta y se familiariza con el hombre ; sus versos, vienen a ser un exacto compendio de su historia. — Este poeta, a mi entender, sobresale entre todos los ingenios que florecieron en el periodo del romanticismo, dejando el mas luminoso rastro en pos de si. — A SI es en efecto. El Diablo Mundo contiene los trozos de poesia mas bellos que hay en castellano y quizas 1 Don Jose de Espronceda nacio en Almendralejo (Extremadura) en 1810, e hizo sus estudios en Madrid en el famoso colepo de San Mateo, diri^ido por el no menos cclebre Don Alberto Lista. A los catorce afios escribio su poema Pelayo^ j mas tarde, estando desterrado en Londres, estudio a Shakespeare, a Milton y a Byron, y compuso muchas de sus poesias, entre ellas su hermosa elegia A la Patria. De Londres paso a Paris, y se batio en las barricadas de 1830. Al volver a Espana entro en el cuerpo de Guardias de Corps, desti- nado a hacer la guardia a la reina. A consecuencia de unos versos que escri- bio contra el gobierno, fue segunda vez desterrado, componiendo entonces su novela Sancho Saldana^ coleccion de bellos cuadros. En 1841, fue nombrado secretario de nuestra legacion en El Haya (Holanda), de donde volvio a poco para tomar aaiento en las Cortes como diputado. Murio en 1842, euando con- taba el trigesimo segundo de su edad. lecci6n vigesima. 315 en lengua alguna. El poeta los eseribio al mismo tiempo que los euadernos se iban imprimiendo y vendiendo, j aunque estaba seguro de si mismo, no lo estaba tanto del editor ni del publico, cuando decia al tin de un canto 6 cuaderno prometiendo otro : El cual sin f alta seguira ; se entiende, Si 6ste te gusta j la edicion se vende. — Aqui veo un pequeiio tomo de Pastor Diaz,^ en donde estan las bellisimas poesias tituladas: A la Luna^ La Sirena del Norte j La Mariposa Negra ; tambien el nombre de Enrique Gil, el autor de La Gota de Rocio, que leyo ante la tumba de Espronceda; La Niebla^ A Polonia^ j La Violeta ;^ j por ultimo se detiene mi vista en las Poesias Liricas de la primera de las poetisas espano- las, en G-ertrudis G, de Avellaneda.^ — Dona Gertrudis de Avellaneda fue muy notable como dramatica y especialmente como lirica. A los siete anos, eseribio su primera poesia con motive de la muerte de su padre, y a los doce, sus Odas, en las que pretendio imitar a Quintana. Ha producido ademas mucbas otras poesias y gran ntimero de obras dramaticas. De estas, las mas apreciadas son : Saul^ Alfonso Munio, y Baltasar^ 2 Don Nicomedes Pastor DfAz, famoso orador, nacio en Vivero (Lugo) en 1811. Fue ministro varias veces, representante de Espana en el extranjero, y academico de la Espafiola. Murio en 1863. 3 Don Enrique Gil, nacio en 1815 y murio en Berlin en 1846. Gil eseri- bio, ademas de las mencionadas, El 8enor de Bembibre^ novela historica ; y muchos articulos de viajes y de critica. * Dona Gertrudis Gomez de Avellaneda nacio en Puerto Principe, Cuba, en 1816. A los catorce anos, fue a Espana, estableciendose en Madrid, y haciendo su aparicion en nuestro Pamaso con la publicacion, en 1841, de sus Poesias Liricas. Despues, hasta 1846, que se caso, eseribio varias novelas y tragedias. A los pocos meses perdio a su esposo y se retiro k un convento, de donde salio al cabo de algunos anos dedicandose con mas ardor a las letras, hasta 1868, que murio. 316 LECCI6n VIGl^SIMA. que le proporciono un gran triunfo ; como tambien la com- posicion A la Poesia^ en donde expresa sus sentimientos en versos armoniosos llenos de naturalidad, y en lenguaje de majestuosa sencillez. — AquI esta Trueba/ el popularisimo escritor vaseon- gado, quien durante cuarenta anos ha sabido conmover los corazones con la poesia eandorosa y sen cilia de sus Cuentos Populares^ sus Cuentos de Color de Posa, sus Ouentos Campesinos, sus Narraciones Pojpulares^ su Li- Iro de los Gantares^ y el precioso romance Las Madres. — Otras obras tiene Trueba de subido merito, como El Gabdn y la Chaqueta^ Mari-Santa^ mi obra f avorita ; Pe Flor en Flor^ El Pedentor Moderno y algunas mas. En las mencionadas es donde muestra con mas frescura y con mds lozania su musa, esencialmente popular y sencilla. — Pero aqui tiene Vd. a otros dos poetas notables : Selgas,^ que es de los mas originales, y el sevillano Bec- QUER, uno de los mas simpaticos y al mismo tiempo el mas desgraciado de los de nuestros dias. La primera coleccion de poesias de Selgas, La Primor vera^ fue la revelacion de aquel ingenio verdaderamente revolucionario en el arte lirico. Otras obras de Selgas en verso y en prosa son : La Modestia^ La Cuna Vacia, Po- jas SueltaSj etc. Sus obras podrian contarse por docenas 1 Don Antonio Tkueba, nacio cerca de Bilbao en 1819, y murio en 1889. Ni la vida de la corte a donde fue muy joven, ni las angustias de la lucha por la existencia, consiguieron debilitar en su alma el amor a los porticos valles nativos. Fue periodista, literato, cronii=;ta, novelista, y de todos modos un es- critor notable. Su estilo es sencillo y natural, lo mismo en prosa que en verso. 3 Don Jose Selgas, nacio en Murcia en 1822, y murio en Madrid en 1882. Hombre de mucho talento y de una gran imaginacion, llego a ser un notable estilista. El estilo de Selgas es propio, personalisimo, nuevo. Fue ademas lino de los escritores mas fecundos de imestro tiempo : su laboriosidad fue tan grande como su modestia. lecci6n vigesima. 317 de volumenes, y su popularidad en Europa y en America es de las mas grandes y mas solidas. — La edicion que tiene Vd. aqui de Becquer, en tres tomos y con su retrato, es preciosa, pero yo ereia que sus poesias eran mas numerosas. — Becquer gasto sus fuerzas y su vida muy pronto. Sus obras no son muchas. En esa edicion esta todo lo que escribio y publico: sus Cartas desde mi Celda ; sus preciosas tradiciones y leyendas, como : El Bandido de las Manos Bojas^ Los Ojos Verdes, El Rayo de Luna^ etc. ; y sus Rimas^ que es lo que mas ha contribuido a la gloria del autor.^ — Despues de las obras de Gustavo Becquer veo una coleccion de otros nombres, como : Lopez^ Garcia^ Cavan- yes^ Ros de Olano^ Arnao^ Bartrina^ y otros, entre los de este siglo que ya no ocupan lugar en el ntimero de los vivos ; pero como el tiempo es muy limitado, desearia em- plear el que nos queda en los celebres poetas que aun existen y que seguramente ocuparan nn lugar muy pro- minente en la historia de la literatura espanola. — Para eso empecemos por el decano de todos, por ZoRRiLLA, el poeta nacional, el popular y fecundo, brillan- te y rico en imagenes ; autor de Don Juan Tenorio^ El Zapatero y el Rey y El Punal del GodoJ^ 8 DoK Gustavo Adolfo Becquer, naci6 en Sevilla en 1836, y murio en Madrid en 1870. Huerfano desde su mas tiema infancia, paso su nifiez bajo la proteceion de un tio suyo, hasta que al cumplir veinte anos le trajeron a Madrid sus ilusiones de escritor y de poeta, y el afan de conquistarse una posi- cion. Su vida fue una conatante lucha con la miseria, con la horrible miseria del pobre caballero, del caracter independiente, del hombre que no encuentra caraino ni acierta con la ocasion ni con el modo de abiirselo, apesar de sen- tirse con alientos y con voluntad para el traba-jo. 4 Don Jose Zorrilla, nacio en Valladolid (1817), y fue el aiio 1889 coronado en La Alhambra como poeta nacional. P^s el decano de cllos y el mas popular. 22 318 LECCI6n VIGl^SIMA. — Este ultimo drama me recuerda una anecdota que he oido paso en cierta ciudad de la America espaiiola. Al volver Zorrilla a su casa, despues de asistir a una representacion de su Punal del Godo^ hecha por aficio- nados, se encontro con un amigo que le pregunto, alu- diendo d la velada : " I Como estuvieron los godos ? " Zorrilla contesto : " Hombre, estuvieron tan mal, Que buscaba yo el pufial Para matarlos a todos." — Entre sus obras vera Vd. Cantos del Trovador^ que contiene las preciosas leyendas de: La Princesa Dona Luz^ Margarita la Tomer a^ La, Pasionaria^ El Alcal- de Ronquillo^ que es trabajo de gran merito ; y Vigilias del Estio^ que comprende las tradicionales e historicas tan afamadas : El Talisman^ El Montero de Esjpinosa^ Dos Homhres Generosos^ El Desafio del Diablo y El Testigo de Bronce. — I Y que me dice Vd. del inspirado Campoamor, ciiyo nombre, lo misrao que sus producciones, es de lo mas p(^etico y sentimental ? ^ — Tanto Campoamor como Nunez de Arce, son los poetas vivientes que gozan de mas fama en el Parnaso moderno espanol. Entre las poesias de Campoamor, se distinguen sus Doloras y sus Humorada^. 1 Don Ramon de Campoamor, de la Academia Espanola, nacio en Asturias el alio 1820, y concluyo sus estudios en Madrid, graduandose de doctor en me- dicina, profesion que nunca practice, dedicandose en absoluto a la literatura. Sus escritos son poeticos y filosoficos. Entre lo primeros, ademas de los men- cionados, se encuentran sus Fdhulas Politicas^ Suspiros del Alma, etc. Entre los se^ndos : Filosofia de la Ley, Personalidad, y El Absoluto. 2 Don Gaspar N^nez de Arce, nacio en Valladolid en Agosto de 1834. Despues de ensayarse en el drama, produciendo algunas piezas notables, se lecci6n vigesima. 319 Un Dogma Inedito se titula una de sus ultimas Dolo- ras^ J es como sigue : No s6 si es cuento 6 no es cuentc, Fu6 el dogma planteado asi, Pues duda el que lo conto Y al ponerlo a votacion, Si esto paso 6 no paso - Los sabios, sin excepcion, En el Concilio de Trento. Fueron diciendo : '' Si, si/' Un h ombre de gran doctri- — " Muj bien (dijo el Presi^ na dente) ; Fue a un Concilio a sostener Queda este dogma aceptado; " Que es, por madre, la mujer Mas se dejara arcbivado Una creacion divina, Y oculto perpetuamente." Y que, en honor al Eterno, i Qu6 paz, orden ni gobierno, Que creo tan nobles seres, Podria en el mundo haber Se exceptua a las mujeres Si supiese la mujer De las penas del infierno." Que para ella no hay infierno ? De sus Humoradas, una de las ultimas tambien, es la siguiente : El santo matrimonio nos aterra, Desde que hemos sabido Que, en las luchas civiles, el marido Es quien paga los gastos de la guerra. De Nunez de Arce le citare sus Gritos del Combate^ quizd su mejor trabajo, publicado en un tomo ; y sus Poenias^ entre los que figuran como mas notables : La Vision de Fray Martin^ Un Idilio^ y La tfltima Lamentacion de Lord Byron? Aqui estan tambien las obras de Grilo, el famoso autor de El Mar^ La Monja^ El Aguila j El Siglo XLX\ ^ dedico en absolute al genero lirico. Su vida esta absorbida en gran parte por la politica, en la que ha tornado parte muy activa, habiendo sido diputado y ministro varias veces. Es mierabro de la Eeal Academia, Presidente de varias asociaciones literarias, etc., etc. 3 Don Antonio F. Grilo, nacio en Andalucia y fue intimo amigo y admi- rador del celebre Don Jose Selgas, quien le escribio la Carta-Prologo con que introduce bus preciosas poesias, publicadas en un tomo. 320 LECCI6n VIGl^SIMA. las de Manuel del Palacio, celebre por sus sonetos j sii poema I^l Crista de Vergara ; ^ Las Odas y Epistolas de Menendez Felayo,^ y tantos otros, cuyos nombres seria tarea interminable citar y mucho mas acompanarlos de la enumeracion de sus obras prineipales. POESIA DRAMATICA. — Entre los autores dramaticos de este siglo, y que ya no existen, le citare a : Gil y Zdy^ate^ Breton de los Herre- ros^ Ilartzenbusch^ Ventura de la Yega^ Garcia Gutierrez^ Ayala y Narciso Serra. Los triunfos escenicos de Gil y Z abate ^ son tantos como sus obras. De estas, las mas notables son : la trage- dia Don Bodrigo y Dona Blanca de Borhon ^ los dra- mas : Carlos II el Hechizado^ Guzman el Bueno^ reputado como el mejor de todos ; Don Alvaro de Luna^ El Gran Capitdn^ y Guillermo Tell j y las conaedias : Bl Entreme- iido^ Un Ano Despues de la Boda^ y Cuidado con las Novias, Una de sus valientes octavas, en la escena final del primer acto de Guzman el Bueno^ dice asi : !N"o OS asnsten los fieros escuadrones Que en torno al muro su furor ostentan, Que al ntimero no atienden los leones Cuando en debil rebaiio se ensangrientan : Siempre los esforzados corazones Sus contrarios combaten. no los cuentan : Seguidme, y descargando golpes ciertos, Los contareis mejor despues de muertos. 1 Don Manuel del Palacio, es quizas nuestro mas celebre sonetista. Es escritor en prosa y en verso, habiendo cultivado ambos generos con el mismo grado de cultura y gusto. Gran humoristico, no es preciso sino leerlo para trasportarnos de la melancolia y el desaliento, al mas alto grado de laalegria y buen humor. Entre sus obras, que son mucbas, una de las mejores es, Vela- das de Otono^ publicada en un tomo. lecci6n vigesima. 321 Breton de los Heeeeros* produjo sesenta y dos tra- ducciones, y ciento tres obras originales. Recorrio todos los generos dramaticos aunque sin brillar in a? que en la eomedia^ pero fue en este el primero entre los escritores del siglo. Entre las mejores se citan: A Madrid ms Vuelvo, Marcela 6 ^d Cudl de los Tres?^ El Tercero en Dis- cordia^ Un Novio para la Nina^ Todo es Farsa en este Mundo^ El I Que Dirdn /, No Ganamos para Sustos, Mi Secretario y yo^ Muerete y Verds, etc., etc. Escribio tambien bellisimas poesias liricas, y sus her- mosas satiras tituladas ; Contra el Furor Filarmonico^ Contra la Hijpocresia^ La Mania de Viajar, Al Car- naval^ etc. Haetzenbusch ^ se distinguio como escritor correctisi- nio y elegante, como erudito, y como poeta lirico y dra- matico. 2 Don Marceltno Menendez Pelayo, nmcho mas joven que sus cole- gas, es asombro de erudicion 4 inteligencia. A los veinticuatro anos, era mierabro de la Real Academia. Una de sus principales obras es la que se ha citado en un tomo. 3 Don Antonio Gil y Zarate, nacio en el Escorial en 1793 ; recibio en Francia su primera educacion, de donde regreso a Espana en 1811, y murio en Madrid, en 1861 . Fue escritor fecundo, y su personalidad literaria tiene mayor importancia en el genero dramatico que en los demas que cultivo. 4 Don Manuel Breton de los Herreros nacio en 1796. En 1824, se represento su primera comedia A la vejez mruelas. Fue militar cuando la invasion francesa, y posteriormente secretario de la Academia Espanola hasta BU muerte acaecida en 1873. 6 Don Juan Eugenio Hartzenbusch, nacio en Madrid en 1806. Hijo de un ebanista, y hu^rfano muy nino todavia, ejercio el oficio de su padre y dividio su juventud entre el estudio y sus trabajos manuales. En 1837, se estreno su magnifico drama Los Amantes de Teruel^ que le saco de la oscuri- dad, y le conquisto en una noche la celebridad y la gloria. En 1 847, fue elegido academico de la Espanola, corporacion que a su muerte en 1880, le proclamo autoridad de la lengua patria. Cualquiera de sus composiciones, en prosa 6 en verso, puede servir de modelo para aprendcr a escribir en castellano. 322 lecci6n vigesima. De sus obras escenicas, que ascienden d sesenta y siete, citare las comedias: La Visionaria^ La Coja y el Enco- gidOj J Juan de las Vinas ; j los dramas : LTonoria, La Madre de Pelayo^ Vida par Ilonra^ El Bachiller Men- dariaSj Primero yo^ Dona Mencia^ y Los Amantes de Teruel. Las tres obras draraaticas principales de Venttjka de LA Vega^ son : El Hombre de Mundo^ comedia de costum- bres ; Don Fernando de Antequera^ drama bistorico ; y la tragedia, La Muerte de Cesar^ que son tres obras maes- tras por la eorreccion y la pureza de la forma ; tambien su preciosa traduccion del Cantar de los Cantares. He aqni una ligera muestra del estilo y de la bella ver- sificacion de este escritor, en El Homhre de Mundo, El protagonista hace esta pintura del matriraonio : \ Pues hazlo ! Mira que es cosa En fin Juan, el matrimonio De que no tienes idea Es origen, no lo dudes, Lo que cautiva y recrea, De las mayores virtudes El carino de una esposa. De la tierra. Y . . . j qu6 demoDioI Es fuego que da calor Mucho contra el se propala; Al alma, sin abrasar: Pero cuando todos dan Es conjunto singular En casarse . . . Vamos, Juan, De la amistad y el amor. No sera cosa tan mala. GrARciA Gutierrez/ academico que f ue de la Espafio- la, ha producido obras muy bellas como poeta lirico, pero ante todo como dramatico. 1 Nacio Don Ventuha de la Vega en Buenos Aires en 1807, y enviado a Espana por su madre a los once afios de edad, estudio en el mismo colegio que Espronceda, de quien fue intimo amigo, bajo la direccion de Lista. En 1847, fue nombrado maestro de literatura de la reina Isabel II. Fue director del Teatro Espanol y del Conservatorio Nacional de Musica y Declamacion, y academico de la Espanola. Murio en 1865. 2 Don Antonio Garcia Gutibbrez, nacio en la provincia de Cadiz en 1812. lecci6n vigesima. 323 Su primera obra, el hermoso drama El Trovador^ lo trasformo en una noche de simple soldado que era, en autor popular y adrairado, de nombre glorioso dado por las freneticas aclamaciones de un pueblo arrebatado y enloquecido por su genio, Ademas de El Trovador^ produjo eminentes obras, como : Simon Bocanegra^ Juan Lorenzo^ El Rey Monje^ Venganza Catalana^ y Un Diielo d Muerte, Entre las liguras mas excelsas de nuestra literatura contemporanea, destacase con vigoroso arranque la de D. Abelaedo Lopez de Ayala.^ Es indudable que Aya- la es uno de los cuatro 6 cinco poetas dramaticos que puede presentar nuestro siglo como dignos sucesores de aquellos que, desde Lope d Calderon, hicieron de nuestro teatro el primero del mundo. Entre sus obras dramaticas inmortales, estan : El Tanto por Ciento^ El Tejado de Vidrio, Consuelo^ Sioja^ Dos Guzmcmes^ El Nuevo Don Juan y El Agente de Matri- monios. El ultimo de los siete au tores citados, Naeciso Seek a, escribio para el teatro unas cuarenta piezas ; y ademas publico algunos tomos de poesias. Entre sus mejores obras, se cuentan : j Don Tomds!^ Su padre, pobre artesano, quiso darle una educacion esmerada y le envio a estu- diar medicina a la capital de la provincia ; pero descontento el future autor de M Trovador de estos estudios, dejo Cadiz j fue a Madrid, liaciendo a pie gran parte del viajo. Sujoto a grandes privaciones se vio en la necesidad de ingre- sar como voluntario en un regimiento. Aprendiendo el ejercicio se encon- traba cerca de Madrid cuando se anuncio la representacion de su drama, en^ tregado hacia tiempo y sin esperanza de ser puesto en escena. Murio en Madrid en 1884. 3 Don Abelardo L6pez de Ayala, nacio on la provincia de Sevilla, en 1829. E8tudi6 en esta capital hasta que muy joven fu^ a Madrid, donde se dio muy pronto a conocer. Fu^ politico activo, miuistro de Ultramar, y mu- rio en 1879, siendo predideute del Congreso. 324 lecci6n vigesima. El Amor y La Gaceta^ El tfltimo Mono^ Nadie se Muere hasta que Dios quiere^ El Loco de la Guar- diUa^ J A la Puerta del CuarteU — Ahora que me ha dado Vd. una idea y materia bas- tante, para entretenerme un rato lejendo las produeciones de los autores muertos, digame tambien, se lo agradeeeria, algo sobre los vivos. He oido nombrar eon admiracion los nombres de : Don Jose Echegaray^ y su hermano Don Miguel^ Tamayo^ primo del famoso Gil y Zarate ; Eugenio Selles^ y Cano y Masas, — Don Jose Echegaeay, el primero de los nombres citados por Vd., ha sido el gran revolucionario en la lite- ratura patria de nuestro siglo, creando un genero especial exclusivamente suyo. Sus obras todas, no basta leerlas una vez, es necesario estudiarlas, y admirar en ellas, no solo la grandiosa versiiicacion, sino la manera con que desarrolla sus ideas la privilegiada cabeza del autor. De sus obras principales, que son muchas, le citare como mas notables, las comedias : El Libro Talonario^ y El Iris de Paz; los dramas: El Gran Galeoto^ Dos Fanatismos^ En el Pitno de la Espada^ La Esposa del Vengador^ Como Empieza y Como Acaba, Locura 6 Santidad, De Mala Paza^ En el Pilar y en la Cruz^ Para Tal Culpa Tal Pena, y, 3Iar sin Orillas ; y 1 Don Narciso Serra, nacio en Madrid en 1830. Desde sus primeros anos dio muestra de la viveza de su ingenio y de la independencia de su carac- ter. Entro en el colegio militar, de donde le saco bien pronto su firmisima vocacion de dedicarse al teatro. JResultado de esta vocacion, fue su primera comedia, Mi mamd^ que se represento con buen exito. Aunque empezo a trabajar como actor, bien pronto carabio la profesion, convencido del mal exito que tenia, por la de militar, llegando a ser oficial de coraceros, hasta que ocho alios despues pidio la licencia absoluta, dedicandose entonces a escribir para el teatro hasta su mucrte ocunida en Madrid, en 1877. lecci6n vigesima. 325 las tragedias : En el Seno de la Muerte^ Un Milagro en Egipto^ y, El Gladiador de Edvena, Don Miguel Echegaeay, no tan celebre como su her- mano Don Jose, ha escrito algunas preciosas comedias, como : El Octavo no Mentir^ inspirada en La Verdad Sospechosa de Alarcon; Caerse de un Nido^ En Plena Luna de Miel^ j otras. Don Manuel Tamayo y Baus, nacio en Madrid en 1829. El ser sus padres ambos actores, le dio tanta faeili- dad para el estudio del teatro como para la introduccion de las primeras concepciones de su precoz ingenio. A los ocho anos, arreglo para la escena espanola su primer drama. Su primer original fue representado con exito, contando solo diecinueve alios. Mas tarde com- puso sucesivamente : Virginia, El Lance de Honor, j el muy famoso El Drama Nuevo, que es la mejor de siis obras. Era secretario perpetuo de la Academia Espanola cuando murio, en junio de 1898. EuGENio Selles, periodista y poeta, ha escrito varios dramas de gran merito. En un tiempo se creyo que iba d ser un formidable rival de Echegaray, especialmente despues del estreno de sus dos obras maestras, El Nudo Gordiano, y Las Es- culturas de Came, pero mas tarde se enfrio su entusias- mo y abandono mucho la literatura dramatica. Y por ultimo, Don Leopoldo Oano y Masas, oficial que es de la armada, fue quien gano el premio, por poesia lirica, en la competicion poetica instituida por el ayunta- miento de Madrid, en 1878. Ademas de sus poesias liri- cas, ha escrito varios dramas notables, el mejor de los cuales, Los Laureles de un Foeta, se produjo el mismo ano citado. 326 LECCldN VIGfiSIMA. Ademds de los nombrados podria citarle: EguilaZj EscosuRA, GoKOSTizA, Olona, Picon, Eulogio Florentino SanZj y otros, cujas obras ocupan tambien un lugar miiy prominente en la historia de la literatura dramatica mo- derna, pero que desgraciadamente me veo sin tiempo para mencionar. PEOSA. — Como el tiempo que me resta es ya demasiado corto y aiin no hemos hablado nada de la prosa, le agradeceria que me diera una idea de ella, nombrandome los princi- pales autores, desde el comienzo del siglo, y sue obras mas principales. — Pues aqui tenemos a Lista,^ a quien ya hemos norn- brado como maestro y consejero de Esproiiceda, Ventura de la Vega, y muehos otros de los grand es poetas y litera- tos que llevaron a cabo nuestro renacimiento literario. Como poeta figrfra entre los primeros, y con ser tan alto su merito en este punto, atin lo tiene mas subido como pre- ceptor y como critico. Sus Discnirsos en el Ateneo ; sus Ensayos Critieos ; sus articulos publicados en el Censor, etc., hacen a Lista el primer cntico de su tiempo, el edu- cador y guia de una generacion literaria. Entre sus obras, debe tambien contarse la bella traduc- cion que hizo de la Historia Universal del Conde de Segur. Con leer algunos parrafos de su Introduccion a la Historia Moderna de la misma obra, se puede juzgar 1 Don Alberto Lista, nacio en Sevilla en 1775. Fu^ catedratico de mate- maticas primero ; despues de Retorica y Po^tica, rector del celebre colesrio de San Mateo de Madrid, y director de la Gaceta de Madrid. Murio en Sevilla en 1848. 2 Don Antonio Alcala Galiano, nacio en Cadiz en 1789. Fu6 diputado en varias ocasiones, y liltimamente ministro de Fomento en 1864. Murio" en 1865. LECCldN VIGfelMA. 327 STi prosa castiza y galana, y la fluidez y correccion de su inimitable estilo. Alcala Galiano,^ alcanzo mayor celebridad como ora- dor que como escritor, aunque seria gran iiijusticia no reconocer su merito en este ultimo concepto. . Entre sus escritos mas notables, figuran sus Estudios Criticos^ y el prologo a El Moro Exposito del Duque de Eivas. Sus meritos de orador eran tales, que nadie ha habido en Espana que compita con el, por la facilidad y espontaneidad de la improvisacion, por la gracia, elegan- cia y correccion del estilo, y por la amenidad de cuanto decia. El rey de los criticos espaiioles del presente siglo, como le llama el ilustre Fernando Wolf, puede afirmarse que es Don Agustin Duran.^ Fue discipulo de Lista, quien alimento en el*y dirigio sus aliciones literarias. En 1828, publico un optisculo que influyo muclio en la revolucion literaria verificada poco despues. A fines del mismo ano, dio a luz El RomanceTO de Romances Moris- cos ; en 1830, El Romancero de Romances Doctrinales, Amatorios^ Festivos^ Jocosos^ Satiricos y Burlescos ; y a poco, el Romancero y Cancionero} Entre sus demas producciones debo citar : La Poesia Papular^ El Drama Novelesco^ Juicio de Lope de Vega, el de El Condenado por Desconfiado, de Tirso, y la In- i/poduccion a los Sainetes de Don Ramon de la Cruz. Balmes es una de las glorias espanolas mds pura y 3 Don AausTfN Duran, nacio en Madrid en 1793, y estudio en el Seminario de Vergara j en la universidad de Sevilla. Las fechas principales de su bio- grafia, son las de la publicacion de bus obras. Murio en 1862. 4 Estas tres inapreciables colecciones, las refundio despues en dos precio- 808 voliimenes de la Biblioteca de Autores Espanoles. Otra publicacion iin- portantisima de Duran, es la de las mejores obras de nuestro teatro antiguo, que principio con las de Tirso de Molina. 328 lecci6n vigesima. mds simpdtica del siglo XIX. 'No solo fue uno de los lilosofos mas grandes, y una de las inteligencias mas pro- f undas de nuestro tiempo, sino tambien un escritor emi- nentisimo.^ Entre sus obras, merecen ser estudiadas por el fondo y por la forma : Za Religion demostrada al alcance de los ninos^ Cartas a un Exceptico^ El Protestantismo^ que es indudablemente la primera de todas en importan- cia; El Criterio^ y Memorias solve el Celihato^ trabajo que comenzo su celebridad universal, dandose el easo de que, El Protestantismo^ eomenzara a traducirse al frances, al aleman, al ingles y al latin, atin antes de su piiblicacion. NocEDAL.^ Los meritos de este eelebre hombre politico son muy grandes. Lo mismo cuando escribia que cuando hahlaba, se hacia maestro en el manejo de nuestra lengna. Como orador pocos le ban aventajado : su palabra, limpia y castiza, era vigorosa sin dejar de ser elegante, y abun- dante sin dejar de ser precisa. Leyendo sus Discursos Acadernicos y su Vida de Jo- vellanos^ parece leerse alguna de las obras de nuestros grandes prosistas del siglo de oro, por la correccion y la hermosura del estilo. Don Modesto Lafuente,^ que ademas de insigne his- 1 Don Jaime Balmes, nacio en Vich en 1810. Estudio en el serainario de su ciudad natal y luego en la universidad de Cervera, donde fue profesor j desempeiio varias catedras. En 1839, se dio a conocer como escritor, con Memorias sobre el Celibato. Murio en Vich en 1848. 2 Don Candido Nocedal, nacio hacia la mitad del primer tercio de este siglo. Fue Ministro de la Gobernacion en 1856, y murio en Madrid, en 1885, siendo jefe del partido carlista. 3 Don Modesto Lafdente nacio en 1806. Hizo sus estudios en Leon, Santiago y Valladolid. En 1845, comenzo a publicar el Teatro Social del Siglo JT/X, que abandono mas tarde para dedicarse a reunir los materiales para su Historia de Espana, Diputado varias veces, seiialose en el Parlamento como lecci6n vig^sima. 329 toriador y publicista, fue notable periodista, satirico y escritor de costiimbres, con el seiidonimo popularisimo de Fray Gerundio^ publico muclios periodicos, folletos y libros, pero su obra capital, la que lia inmortalizado sn n ombre, es su Historia General de Espana, El mds popular de los escritores espanoles de costum- bres es El Curioso Parlante, seudonimo con que Don- Ramon DE Mesoneeo Romanos,^ firmo aqnellos bellos cua- dros que forman el Panorama Matritense y las Escenas Matritenses^ viva y acabada pintura de la sociedad y de las costumbres espanolas, y muy especialmente de las ma- drilenas. Ademas, ha dejado el Manual de Madrid^ Tijpos y Caracteres^ el Antigua Madrid^ Paseo Historico jpor las Calles de la Corte^ y Memorias de un Setenton^ su ultima obra, que como todas ellas estd escrita en un estilo lleno de naturalidad y sencillez, y en un lenguaje en extremo castizo y correcto. Y por ultimo, voy a concluir con los muertos dicien- dole algo del celebre Figaro, seudonimo que ha hecho inmortal Don Mariano Jose de Larra.^ orador facil y eletyante, y de palabra energica y persuasiva. Fue vicepresi- dente del Congreso, individuo de las academias Espanola y de la Historia, y director de la Escuela de Diplomacia. Murio en 1865. 4 Este insigne escritor nacio en Madrid en 1803, y murio en 1882. La independencia de su posicion y lo apacible de su caracter, alejaronle por com- pleto de las agitaciones politicas en que vivieron la mayor parte de los escri- tores contemporaneos suyos, y le permitieron consagrar su vida a los trabajos literarios. Sus obras todas, contribuyen a justificar el alto puesto que el autor tiene en nuestra literatura. 6 Don Mariano Jose de Larra, nacio en Madrid en 1809. Recibio en Paris parte de su educacion, y volvio a Espana ingresando en el colegio de San An- tonio A bad de Madrid. Comenzo a dar muestras de su aficion literaria, tra- duciendo del trances La Iliada y El Mentor de la juventud. Murio en 1837, disparandose un pistoletazo, con io que puso fin a una existencia que pudo ser tan provechosa para su patria. 330 LECCION VIGESIMA. Debido d los consejos de su amigo Don Ventura de la Vega, comenzo Larra a hacerse celebre, y a mostrar las cualidades de su estilo j de su talento, escribiendo en el periodico el Pobrecito Hablador^ con aquella satira pun- zante e implacable que es el rasgo mas saliente de su personalidad literaria. Entre las obras de Larra, se cuentan : los dramas Mecias j Quevedo ; la novela, J^l Doncel de Don Enrique^ J otras ; ademas de sinniimero de articulos, que son los que raejor senalan la forma j el sentido de su sdtira asi como su espantoso pesimismo. El titulado, J^l Dia de Difuntos de 1836, ultimo que escribio, viene A ser como siniestra profeeia del desdi- chado fin de su autor tres meses despues de su publicacion. Y ahora para terminar j pasar a la generacion viviente, le mencionare los nombres, no menos celebres de : Eeinoso, eminente poeta y literato que nacio en Sevilla en 1772 ; DoNOSo Cortes, Sanz del Eio, Kevilla, autor de Za Historia de la Literatura espanola / El Conde de Tore- no, Ferrer del E-io, Fernando de Castro, Minano, EsTEBANEZ Calderon, cl autor de las Cartas Espanolas^ publicadas alternando con las Escenas Matritenses de Mesonero Komanos ; y Segovia, autor del boceto Los Aficionados, Tambien los novelistas y escritores de cos- tumbres, Campo Alange (Conde de), Escostjra, Fernan Caballero (Cecilia BoU de Faber), Fernandez y Gon- zalez, el novelista mas fecundo de su generacion, y, Flo- res (Antonio). — I Y cuales son los hombres que dan mas lustre en niiestros dias a su literatura patria ? — Puede decirse que Zorrilla, representa el espanolis- mo ; Tamayo, el buen gusto ; Eciiegaray, la f uerza ; lecci6n vig^sima. 331 Galdos, el talento ; Yalera, la elegancia cMsica ; Cam- POAMOR, la incredulidad amable y sonriente ; Alarcon, el espiritu meridional ; Pereda, la sinceridad artistica ; NtJNEZ DE Aroe, el dominio de la forma ; Menendez Pe- LAYo, la voracidad iDteleetual ; Castelar, la sublimidad oratoria ; Fernandez Flores, el espiritn moderno ; Cas- tro Y Serrano, la observaeion ; Feenandez Bremon, la agudeza ; Alas, la sdtira ; Zapata, el vigor poetico ; Se- LLEs, la audacia ; Cano y Masas, el desenfado ; Blasco, la facilidad ; Taboada, la gracia ; Yaldes, el ingenio ; Perez Escrich, la invencion ; Emilia Pardo Bazan, el estilo ; Patrocinio de Biedma, la descripcion ; y Maria DEL Pilar Sinues, la modestia. — Pues no puedo prescindir de suplicar d Yd. que me de una ligera idea de estos autores, nombrdndome sus obras mas prineipales. — El primero de los que no hemos tratado anterior- mente, y que en mi condensada descripcion representa el talento, es Don Benito Perez Galdos,^ el autor de Gloria y La Familia de Leon RocJi^ uno de los literatos espa- noles mas conocidos en los Estados Unidos. Un insigne literato americano dice : que quien le dio a leer Dona Perfecta^ del mismo autor, iba preguntando a todo el que encontraba si habia leido dicho libro, y si le contestaban negativamente no queria tener mas trato con ellos. Ademds de las tres obras mencionadas, ha escrito una extensa serie de Episodios Nacionales^ en los que trata en la mds ligera y romdntica forma, los sucesos historicos 1 Don Benito Pkrez Qald6s, nacio en Canarias en 1845. Ademas de novelista, es legislador y miembro de la Camara de Diputados. Esta viviendo en Madrid, donde publica sus obras, desde su Uegada a la capital siendo aiin »nuy joven. 332 lecciOn vigEsima. de la Espana coiitempordnea ; Marianela^ Fortunata y Jacinta^ Tormento^ El Doctor Centeno^ El Aitdaz^ La Incognita^ Miau^ Angel Guerra y otras muclias. Don Juan Valeka/ quizas nuestro primer clasico mo- derno, pertenece d la carrera diplomatica y fue ministro en Washington hasta el aiio 1887. La obra por la que mejor se le conoce en America es Pepita Jimenez^ tradueida al ingles por la distinguida y erudita literata Dona Maria J. Serrano. Otros de sus no menos celebrados libros son : El Comendador Mendoza, precedido de un prologo escrito por el famoso estadista, escritor y orador espanol Don Antonio Canovas del Castillo;^ Dona Luz (tradueida al ingles en Nueva York, 1890), Las Ilusiones del Dr, Faustino^ Pasarse de Listo^ Cuentos y Didlogos y otras. Ademas ha escrito infinidad de cartas, en las que deja ver su profunda in- teligencia, elegancia y correccion de estilo, especialmente en las publicadas con el nombre de Cartas Americanas, Don Pedro Antonio de Alaecon ^ es uno de los ge- nios mas originales e inventivos entre sus colegas. Entre sus novelas, se cuenta en primer lugar, El Soin- hrero de Tres Picos^ la mas popular de ellas, precioso, divertido y original libro del que no es posible leer un capitulo sin llegar hasta su fin ; El Final de Norma^ 1 Don Juan Valera, de la Academia espanola, nacio en 1825. Pertenece k ilustre familia y es hermano de la Duquesa de Malakoff que vivia en Paris ocupando uno de los primeros puestos en la antigua aristocracia de la ciudad a la moda. Actualmente vive en Madrid ; es senador del reino y va en impor- tancia a la cabeza del Cuerpo Diplomatico, al que por profesion pertenece. ^ Don Antonio Canovas del Castillo, de la inisma edad aproximada- mente que Don Juan Valera, quizas el primer estadista de Espana, es el jefe del partido monarquico conservador. Es esplendido orador, y hombre del me.ior gusto literario. Fu^ elegido diputado por primera vez en 1854, y ha sido Presidente del Consejo de Ministros durante gran parte de los ultimos veinte anos. Entre sus obras, las mds altamente reputadas son, una Historia de Es' LECCI6N VIGESIMA. 333 una de sus mas interesantes producciones que escribio cuando no contaba mas que 15 anos ; El Escdndalo^ El Nino de la Bola^ Nomlas Oortas^ La Prodiga^ Viajes jpor Espana^ El Capitdn Veneno^ etc. Tambien ha escrito : Poesias Serias y Ilumoristicas ; Juicios Liter arios y Artisticos ; y un precioso cuadro de costumbres titulado Cosas que Fueron. Pereda, que lie citado representando la sinceridad artistica, no tiene rival para descripciones de tipos y cos- tumbres populares, y de caracteres excentricos. Sus obras figuran en primera linea. De las obras de Don Jose Maria de Pereda, le citar6 CO mo las que mas caracterizan su genero : Esbozos y lias- gunos^ Los Hombres de Pro^ El Buey Suelto , . ., Pon Gonzalo Gonzalez de la Gonzalera^ Pe Tal Palo Tal Astilla^ Escenas Montanesas^ Tipos y Costumbres^ y Tipos Trashumantes, — Toca el tumo al ruisenor de la oratoria, al hombre universal, d Castelar, sobre quien deseo muchisimo oir la opinion de Vd. — Don Emilio Castelar, el ''Gladstone EspanoV^ como le Uaman los ingleses, quizas el orador mas elocuente del siglo ; necesitaria varias pdginas y lioras para ocuparme de el, tiempo y espacio de que no me deja Yd. disponer en esta ocasion. pana durante los si^los XVI, XVII, y XVIII, y un largo volumen de estudios sobre el reinado de Felipe IV, publicado ultimamente. 3 Don Pedro Antonio de Alarcon, nacio en Guadix (Granada) en 1833. Estudio en la universidad de la capital donde se graduo a los catorce anos, y fundo a los veinte, un periodico literario semanal. Poco despues paso a Ma- drid. Como critico era tan extremadamente severo que, cuando el publico su primer drama, El Hijo Prbdigo^ cayeron por venganza sobre el tantas criticas, que aunque obra de no escaso m^rito tuvo que retirarla del teatro. Murio en Madrid el ano de 1896. 2^ 334 lecci6n vig^sima. Su distincion como escritor, no obstante haber sido un tanto nublada por la brillantez de su carrera como ar- diente e incansable defensor del republicanismo, j por la inmensa resonaneia de su reputacion como orador, tiene elevado puesto en la historia de su generacion.^ Entre sus obras se cuentan : Z^a Historia de la Civili- zacion^ cuya profunda erudicion esta a la altura de su ri- queza en estilo e imagenes, y de la gloriosa imaginacion de su autor ; Estudios Historicos Sohre la Edad Media^ Historia del Movimiento Iiepid)licano en Europa^ He- cuerdos de Italia^ libro de viajes y descripciones que lia tenido gran exito y que ha sido recientemente traducido al ingles; el tfltiino Suspiro del Moro^ interesantisimo estudio de la historia de Granada hasta la toma de la ciudad por los Reyes Catolicos ; Era Eilippo Lippi^ Be- cuerdos y Esperanzas^ Tragedias de la Historia^ y otras. Sus Oraciones y Discursos Parlamentarios Uenan ademas varies volumenes. En el genero de novelas ha escrito dos : La Hermana de la Caridad^ precioso libro de tal prof undidad de pen- samiento y tal fuerza de diccion y de estilo, que la inteli- gencia necesita detenerse parrafo por parrafo admirando aquella incomparable fluidez en riqueza de palabras y situaciones ; y, la Historia de un Corazon^ cuya segunda parte se titula Bicardo. 1 Don Emilio Castelar, nacio el ano 1832, Teniendo solo veinticuatro de edad, gano por oposicion la catedra de historia critica y filosofica de la univer- sidad de Madrid. Despues de una ardorosa campana parlamentaria en favor de la repiiblica, se opuso vigorosamente al proyecto de una recrencia. El gobier- no elegido por las Cortes despues de la abdicacion de Don Amadeo I, le nom- bro ministro de Estado. En Agosto de 1873, fue elegido presidente de las Cortes, cargo de que hizo dimisi6n al ser nombrado Presidente de la Repiiblica, el 6 de Setieinbre del naismo ano. En loa actuales momentos se eneuentra en Madrid, doude su incansable y fiaisimu plumu, no cesa de dai* originalea y lecci6n vigesima. 335 — He gozado inmensamente con la descripcion de las obras y biografia de tan interesante figura, y ahora le agradeceria que, dejando el resto de los autores anterior- mente citados, me dijera algo de los mas eminentes, Alas, Valdes, y Bazan. — Siento muclio quedarme sin decirle nada sobre es- eri tores de tanto merito como £'scrich^^ . uno de los que mas entretienen con sus interesantisimas novelas ; JSlascOj que se cuenta entre nuestros primeros humoristas ; y Oas- tro y Serrano^ que tanto ha influido en prof undizar el realismo, tendencia de la novela del dia ; pero me limi- tare a hacerle una breve resena de las obras de los nom- bres que me cita Yd., empezando por el vigoroso escritor Don Leopoldo Alas, que con el seudoninio de Clarin^ ha escrito esas faftiosas criticas, que lo han elevado a ocu- par, en union de las insignes figuras de Valera y Menen- dez Pelayo, uno de los primeros puestos en este genero entre los de su generacion. Clarin es un cntico artista, y artista en tod a la exten- sion de la palabra ; no solo siente la belleza, sino que sabe producirla, y esta condicion le da esa sutileza con que se mete hasta en los mas ignorados rincones de las obras para juzgarlas. Entre las obras del autor de Mezclilla j La Begenta^ le citare : Sermon Perdido^ critica y sdtira ; Niieva Cam- 2Mna^ id., id. ; Un Viaje a Madrid^ folleto literario ; Apolo en Pafos^ y Pipd {novelas cortas). tener ocupados a los cajistas, con la energia y fecundidad que es tipica del primer talento espaiiol. 2 Don Enrique Perez Escrich, autor de El Mdrtir del Golgota^ reeiente- mcnte traducida al ingles, fue un escritor fecundisimo cuya biografia se ob- ticne, leyendo su pr^ciosa novela El Frac Azul, en dorjde hace su mas exacto retrato. 336 LECCI6n VIGIESIMA. Don Armando Pal agio Yaldes ^ es el autor de Marta y Maria^ la novela espanola contemporanea mas leida dentro y f uera de Espana ; Jose^ j Maximina^ libros que confirman la observacion de grandes literatos, sobre la tendencia idealista de su escritor. La forma literaria de Marta y Maria^ es irreproeha- ble ; tiene encantador humorismo, es apasionada y tieriia, y por ultimo, esta escrita en un estilo que encanta al pen- saraiento. Yaldes tiene en sus obras el sentido comico, como es propio de todo escritor de la raza de Cervantes, pero como es tambien un liombre de este siglo, posee sus me- lancolias ; su humor esta mezclado de ternura. Todo esto esta palpable en cada pagina que se lee de Maxi- mina. * El Idilio de un Enfermo puede considerarse como la primera novela naturalista espanola, a cuya escuela liace profesion de pertenecer el autor. En la corriente de su primer libro, El Senorito Octa- vio^ se deja sentir un verdadero talento de pintor y de narrador. La Hermana San Suljpicio^ se titula su ultima obra, que si posible fuera habria aumentado la popularidad de su autor, quien cuenta ademds en su repertorio : Los Ova- 1 Don Abjiando Palacio Valdbs nacio en un pueblo de Asturias en 1853. Sus novelas han adquirido gran celebridad, no solo en Espafia, sino en toda Europa y America ; se han traducido a varios idiomas y son objeto de estudio para los principales criticos extranjeros. Generalmente vive en su pais natal excepto tres 6 cuatro meses del aiio que lo pasa en la capital. Valdes no hace mas de diez anos que escribe ; y apenas cinco, que se ha hecho un gran lu^ar entre los criticos y novelistas de la Espana contemporanea, donde goza de la reputacion de maestro. ' Marta y Maria fue traducida en Nueva York, donde es mejor conocida por el nombre de M Marques de Penalta. 3 Traducida al ingles en Nueva York, 1889. LECCldN VIGESIMA. 337 dores del Ateneo^ Los Novelistas Espanoles^ Nuevo Viaje al Parnaso^ La Literatura en 1881^ Aguas Fuertes^ Ei- mrita^ El Cuarto Poder^ j La Espuma,^ Dona Emilia Pakdo Bazan, honra de su sexo en la literatura moderna de su patria, ha contribuido mucho & crear la fama de que hoy goza la novela espanola, y se ha conquistado la admiracion y el interes mds alia de los liinites de su pais, y atin del oceauo. Sus dos ultimas obras son, Insolaeion y Morrina^ im- presas en Barcelona, las que ponen el nombre de su autora a envidiable altura corao novelista. Emilia Pardo Bazan representa como nadie los objetos y como nadie tambien analiza sus caracteres.' Aderads de las dos citadas, ha escrito las preciosas e interesantisimas : Tin Viaje de Nomos^ La Dama Joven^ Los Pazos de TJlloa^ La Madre Naturaleza^ Mi Rome- ria^ PasGual Lopez^ La Cuestion Palpitante^ La Trihu- na^ El Cisne de Vilamorta^ La Pevolucion y la Novela en Rusia (recientemente traducida al ingles), y otras, que son muestras elocuentes del estilo de la autora. — Supongo que muchos otros literatos y hombres de ciencia, deberian tambien ser mencionados, pero tengo que contentarme eon conocer los que van y han ido du- rante el presente siglo a la cabeza en el genero de fiecion, el drama y la poesia, de una literatura moderna que me- rece, con lo que ciertemente no se perderia el tiempo, un concienzudo y detenido estudio. * Publicada en espanol y en ingles al mismo tiempo, en Barcelona y en Nueva York respectivamente. PARTE SEGUNDA. XTSO DE LOS TIEMPOS DEL VERBO. TIEMPOS SIMPLES. MoDo Indicativo. Presente, 1. Este tiempo expresa una accion presente 6 que se re- fiere a epoca actual, Ejemplos :' Mientras yo dicto ella escribe. While I dictate she twites. America es un pueblo ^ que pro- America is a country which pro- gresa sin cesar. gresses without ceasing. Yo madrugo. I get up early. 2. Se usa idiomaticamente el verbo hacer en este tiempo, cuando se denota espacio transcurridOy como : Hace tres anos que no nos babla- It is three years since we spoke to mos. each other. Hace dos semanas que Uueve. It has been raining for two weeks. ^ Cudnto tiempo hace que esta How long have you been in this V. en este pais 9 country ? Hace cinco anos que estoy aqui. I have been here five years. 3. Este tiempo ocupa algunas veces el lugar diol pasadoy especialmente en narraciones, v. gr.: Apenas did la hora^ cuando He- Scarcely had the clock struck, gan los invitados, se sien- when the guests arrived, seat- tan a la mesay y comienza ed themselves at the table, la comida. and dinner began. * Pueblo en este sentido es sinonimo de nacibn. MODO INDICATIVO. 339 4. Algunas veces reemplaza dlfuturo, especialmeDte des- pues de la conjuncion si cuando nunca se usa dicho liempo : Si viene V. d mi casa saldremos If you will come to my house we d dar un paseo. will go to take a w^lk. Voy en seguida d ver d V, I tcill go at once to see you. I Tiene V. la bondad 9 Will you liave the kindness % No uaado, aunquc esta admitido por la Academia. 358 REGIMEN DE LOS VERBOS. DEL IMPERATIVO. Este modo no puede ser propiamente usado negativa- mente. Las formas correspondientes del presente de *sub- juntivo deben usarse en su lugan Ejemplos : due no hable. Let him not speak. No escriba V. Do not write. No lo hagamos. Let us not do it. fc Regimen de los Verbos, 1. El obfeto de un verbo transitive se usa en el caso acu- sativo, sin preposicion, cnaxido se refiere a cosas ; pero es necesario usar ^, delante del objeto, cuando se designa seres animados, Ejemplos : Busco un panuelo. 1 am looking for a handkerchief. Busco d. un hombre. I am looking for a man. ^ Que lee Vd. f What are you reading ? Leo un lihro. . . I am reading a book. ^ A quien lee Vd, f Whom are you reading! Leo a Castelar, I am reading Castelar. NoTAs 1*. La preposici6n & se omite, cuando el objeto es desconocido 6 indeterininado ; v. gr. : Espero algunos amigos, I expect some friends. Busco un sirviente, I am looking for a servant. 2'. Tambi^n se suprime la preposicion, despues del verbo tener, cuando este expresa posesi6n, como : Te7igo un huen amigo, I have a good friend. 3*. Pero no se omite si tener se usa en vez del verbo estar, como : Tiene k su hijo enfermo (6, su hijo His son is sick. est6. enfermo). Tengo & mi hermano en Espafta My brother is in Spain. (6, mi hermano esta en Espafta), VERBOS REGULARES. 359 2. La preposicion d es necesaria despues del verbo que- rer/ cuando este esta iisado en vez de amar : Quiero a mi novia. I love my sweetheart. Quiso mucho a sus padres. He loved his parents very much. 3. Muchos verbos requieren ir seguidos de otras dife- rentes preposi clones, como : de, con, por, para, sobre, etc., cuando en ingles no son necesarias, y algunos de ellos gobiernan diferentes de 6stas sin alterar su significacion. 4. Casi todos los verbos reflexivos, y los que expresan condicion de la mente^ abundancia^ deseo, separacion y cen- sura, van generalmente seguidos de la preposicion de. Es- tos verbos son" los siguientes : Abusar de, to abuse. Lameniarse de, to lament. Acordarse de, to remember. Mofarse de, to scoff at. Admirarse de, to wonder at. Necesitar de, to be in want of. Alegrarse de, to rejoice at. Olvidarse de, to forget. Aprovecharse de, to take ad van- Prescindir de, to do without. tage of. Privarse de, to deprive. Avergonzarse de, to be ashamed of. Reirse de, to laugh at. Burlarse de, to laugh at. Renegar de, to abominate. Carecer de, to be without. Servirse de, to use. Compadecerse de, to pity. Tener Idsfima de, to pity. Desconfiar de, to distrust. Tener verguenza de, to be ashamed Dudar de, to doubt. of. Fiarse de, to trust. Usar de, to use. Oozar de, to enjoy. Valerse de, to avail of. Jactarse de, to boast. Zafarse de, to get rid of. VERBOS REGULARES. Se dice que un verbo es regular, cuando en toda su con- jugacion solo entran las letras radicales sin la menor altera- cion ni aumento, y las terminaciones que le son propias, seg6n la desinencia de su infinitivo en ar, er 6 ir. 1 Querer no yendo seguido de la preposicion, es sinonimo de desear; v. gr.: Quiero un buen tenedor de libros. I wish a good book-keeper. 360 VERBOS REGULARES. No se ha de considerar como tal variaci6n en las letras radicales, la que por razon de ortografia se verifica de c en z, 6 en qn, y otras semej antes explicadas en la pagina 64. Por las reglas siguientes sabremos cuando es regular un verbo. Son Regulares : 1. Todos los verbos que empiezan con la letra Ch. 2. Los que terminan en ear, iar, oar, oer y uar. 3. Los terminados en ar que tienen en la silaba anterior algunas de las vocales a, i 6 u, como aplacar^ derribar, mu- daVy etc., menos, andar, jugar y sus compuestos. 4. Los que terminan en bar 6 brir, menos herbar, pro- bar y sus compuestos. 5. Los acabados en car, menos trocar, clocar, volcar, sus compuestos, y desflocar y emporcar. 6. Los que tienen f en su Ultima silaba. 7. Los acabados en ger, grar, char y jar. 8. Los que terminan en Iar, menos helar, melar, sus com- puestos, y los acabados en olar. 9. Los acabados en liar, no siendo en ollar. 10. Los terminados en mar, mer y mir, menos dormir y gemir. 11. Los que finalizan en nar, menos sonar, tornar, inver- nar, infernar, sus compuestos y descornar y encornar. 12. Los acabados en ilar, menos sofiar. 13. Los terminados en par, per y pir. 14. Los acabados en rar, menos agorar. 15. Los acabados en sar, menos travesar, confesar, pen- sar, engrosar y sus compuestos. 16. Los que concluyen en rer, menos querer y sus com- puestos. 17. Los que acaban en atar, etar, itar, otar, utar y sus compuestos. 18. Los terminados en var, menos renovar y nevar. VERBOS REGULARES. 361 19. Todos los acabados en yar. 20. Los que terminan en azar, ezar, izar, ozar 6 uzar, menos empezar y tropezar. 21. Los acabados en ir que en la silaba anterior tienen i, raenos adquirir, inq[uirir, retiilir y restrifiir. Verb OS Regular es que par sic extructura pueden parecer Irregulares, Abordar, to board a ship. Absorber, to absorb. Acordar,^ to tune. Aferrar, to grapple. Aforar, to gauge. Afrentar, to affront. Agostar, to be consumed. Alternar, to alternate. Anegar, to inundate. Anhelar, to desire anxiously. Aparentar, to affect. Aporcar, to fill gardens with earth. Aposentar, to lodge. Aposiar,^ to post. Asestar, to fire. Atentar, to attempt. Atollary to stick in the mud. Avejentary to get old. Avezar, to be used to. Bregar, to contend. Chocar, to shock. Comentary to comment. Compelery to compel. Compensary to compensate. Condimentar, to season. Congelary to congeal. Cortary to cut. CumpUmentary to compliment. Derogar, to derogate. Desapostar, to dislodge from post, Descolar, to dock. Desencorvar, to straighten. Desenroscar, to untwist. Desertary to desert. Desflecar, to remove flakes, Destemplar, to disconcert. Destronary to dethrone. Detestar, to detest. Dispensary to excuse. Doblegar, to bend. Emparentary to become related. Empernary to bolt. Encolary to glue. Encorvar^ to incurvate. Enervar, to enervate. Enrollar, to roll. Entregary to hand. Estercolar, to manure. Exentary to exempt. Expeler, to expel. Eomeniar, to foment, Impelery to impel. Infestary to infest. Inmergiry to submerge. Innovary to innovate. Insertary to insert. Insistiry to insist. IntentaVy to attempt. 1 Acordar instrumentos 6 voces. >» Apostar 6 poner de posta. 362 VERBOS REGULARES. Jnterpretar, to interpret. Interrogar, to interrogate. Mecer, to swing. Ofender, to offend. Pender, to hang. • Portarse, to behave. Prendarse, to take a fancy. Profesar, to profess. Propender, to have a tendency. Prorrogar, to adjourn. Protestar, to protest. Pemedar, to imitate. Pesolver, to resolve. jSobreseer, to supersede. Solventar, to solve. JSorber, to sip. Suspender, to suspend. Surgir, to surge. Templar, to temper. Ungir, to consecrate. En Yerbos Espan^oles esta la lista de todos los verbos castellanos ; he aqui algiinos de los mas importantes. PEIMERA CONJUGACION. Abotonar, to button. Abrazar, to embrace. Abusar, to abuse. Acabar, to finish. Acompanar, to accompany. Aconsejar, to advise. Acusar, to acknowledge. Adelantar, to improve. Admirar, to admire. Adorar, to adore. Adornar, to adorn. Aguardar, to wait. Alcanzar, to reach. Alejar, to get far from. Amar, to love. Apreciar, to appreciate. Aprovechar, to take advantage. Arreglar, to arrange. Arrojar, to throw. Asegurar, to assure. ^^ar,"to tie. Aumentar, to increase. Avisar, to notice. Bailar, to dance. Bajar, to come down. Porrar, to erase. Brindar, to drink a toast. Callar, to be silent. Cansar, to tire. Cantar, to sing. Cesar, to cease. Cifrar, to number. Clavar, to nail. Cobrar, to collect. Colocar, to place. Comparar, to compare, Comprar, to buy. Copiar, to copy. Cortar, to cut. Declarar, to declare. Dejar, to leave. Descansar, to rest. Desconfiar, to distrust. Descuidar, to neglect. Desechar, to depreciate. Desmayar, to faint. Destinar, to employ. Disculpar, to excuse. Disimular, to dissimulate, Dudar, to doubt. PJmpeftar, to pawn. Encajar^ to shut. VERBOS REGULARES. 362 .Encuadernar, to bind. Entrar^ to enter. , SJnviar, to send. Uscapar, to escape. Escuchar, to listen. Estimar, to estimate. Estudiar, to study. Excusar, to excuse. Ealtar, to fail. Eijarse, to notice. Fumar, to smoke. Ganar, to gain. Gastar, to spend. Gozar, to enjoy. Hallar, to find. Informar, to inform, Importar, to import. Inspirar, to inspire. Juntar, to join. Lavar, to wash. Limpiar, to clean. Llamar^ to call. Llegar, to arrive. Llenar, to fill. Llevar, to carry. Llorar, to weep. Manchar, to stain. Mandar, to command. Matar, to kill. Mejorar, to improve, Mezclar, to mix. Mirar, to look at. Mojar, to wet. Molestar, to worry. Montar, to mount. Mudar, to move. JVombrar^ to name. Notar, to notice. Ocupar, to occupy. Ordenar, to order. Parar, to stop. Participar, to participate, Pasar, to pass by. Perdonar, to pardon. Pintar^ to paint. Pisar, to step on. Plantar^ to plant. Preguntar, to inquire. Preparar, to prepare. Prestar, to lend. Probar, to taste. Procurar, to try, procure, Protestar, to protest. Quedar, to remain. Quitar, to quit. Payar, to rule. Recitar^ to recite. Respirar, to breathe, Restar, to subtract. Saltar, to jump. Separar, to separate. Soportar, to support. jSospechar, to suspect. .Suspirar^ to sigh. Tapar, to cover. Tirar, to throw away. Tomar, to take. Trabajar, to work. Tratar, to deal, to try, Facmr, to empty. Acceder, to accede. Aprender, to learn. Barrer, to sweep. SEGUNDA CONJUGACION. Beber, to drink. Comeier, to commit. Corner^ to eat. 864 VERBOS IRREGULARES. Correr, to run. Comprender, to understand. Conceder, to consent. Corresponder, to correspond. Deber, to owe. Esconder, to hide. Interceder, to intercede. Meter, to put into. Prender, to arrest. Prete7ider, to pretend. Proceder, to proceed. Prometer, to promise. Pesponder, to answer. Retroceder, to retire. Romper, to break. Socorrer, to help. Sorprender, to surprise, Suceder, to happen. Suspender, to suspend. Temer, to fear. yenc?er, to sell. TERCERA C0:N"JUGACI0X. Ahrir, to open. Ahurrirse, to be annoyed. Admitir, to admit. Aftadir, to add. Aludir, to allude. Asistir, to assist. Batir, to build. Gombatir, to fight. Gonfundir, to confuse. Guhrir, to cover. Gumplir, to accomplish. Deeidir, to decide. Descuhrir, to uncover. Desistir, to desist. Discurrir, to discourse. Distinguir, to distinguish.1 Dividir, to divide. Emitir, to emit. Escribir, to write. Escupir, to expectorate. Existir, to exist. Imprimir, to print. Incurrir, to incur. Insistir, to insist. Interrumpir, to interrupt. Ocurrir, to occur. Omitir, to omit. Oprimir, to oppress. Pudrir, to rot. VERBOS IRREGULARES. Se dice que un verbo es irregular, cuando las letras radicales sufren alguna variacion, diminucion 6 aumento, en parte 6 en el todo de la conjugaci6n, 6 cuando sus desi- nencias 6 terminaciones no son las marcadas para los verbos regulares. Se exceptfian de este caso los explicados en la pag. 64, por razones ortograficas. En espanol hay ochocientos sesenta verbos irregulares, y todos ellos, como tambien los regulares, estan comprendi- VERBOS IRREGULARES. 365 dos en Verbos Esp^^oles. A continuacion damos una lista de los quinientos verbos irregulares mas importantes, con los modelos ya conjugados y la pagina correspondiente. tndice General Alfahetico de los Verbos Irregulares ' Conjug. como Pdg. A Apostar, apostar. 166 Conjug. como * Pag. Apretar, apretar. 163 Abastecer, agradecer. 169 Aprobar, probar, 166 Aborrecer, aborrecer. 170 Argiiir, {conjugado) 179 Absolver, absolver, 167 Arrecirse, pedir, 173 Abstenerse, atenerse. 191 Arrendar, merendar, 163 Abstraer, abstraer. 192 Arrepentirse, arrepentirse ,177 Acertar, acertar, 163 Ascender, ascender, 165 Acordar, acordar. 166 Asentir, sentir. 176 Acostar, acostar, 166 Aserrar, serrar, 164 Adestrar, apretar. 163 Asir, {conjugado) 194 Adormecer, agradecer. 169 Asoldar, acordar. 166 Adquirir, diferir, 177 Atender, atender. 165 Aducir, lucir, 170 Atenerse, atenerse. 191 Advertir, advertir, 177 Atentar, calentar. 163 Agradecer, (confugado) 169 Atraer, atraer, 192 Alentar, calentar. 163 Atravesar, atravesar, 163 Almorzar, almorzar. 166 Atribuir, atribuir, 181 Alongar, rogar, 165 Atronar, tronar, . 166 Amanecer, (conjugado) 257 Aventar, apretar, 163 Amoblar, poblar, 166 Araolar, consolar. 166 B Amortecer, agradecer. 169 Bendecir, bendecir. 195 Andar, {conjugado^ 181 Bienquerer, querer. 189 Anochecer, anochecer. 258 Blanquecer, agradecer. 169 Antedecir, decir. 195 Bregar, fregar. 163 Anteponer, anteponer, 188 Antever, ver, 193 C Apacentar, seniar. 164 Caber, {conjugado) 183 Aparecer, agradecer. 169 Caer, a 184 Apetecer, a 169 Calentar, calentar, 163 1 Los verbos modelos que se citan seran no s61o los conjugados, sino tam- bien los dnicamente mencionados en la claac a que correspondan. 25 366 VERBOS IRREGULAEES. Canecer, ^ Carecer, Cegar, Cenir, Cemer, Cerrar, Cimentar, Circuir, Clarecer, Cocer, Colar, Colgar, Comerizar, Compadecer, Comparecer, Competir, Complacer, Componer, Comprobar, Concebir, Concertar, Concluir, Concordar, Condeseender, Condolerse, Conducir, Conferir, Confesar, Conmover, Conocer, Conseguir, Consentir, Consolar, Constituir, Contar, Contender, Contener, Contorcerse, Contradecir, Conjug. como Pdg. agradecer, 169 169 cegar, 163 ceflir, 175 entender, 164 cerrar, 163 acertar, 163 huir, 179 amanecer, 257 {conjug ado) 185 volar, 166 colgar, 166 {conjugado) 163 agradecer, 169 169 competir, 173 complacer, 170 componer, 188 prohar, 166 concehir, 173 acertar, 163 concluir, 181 acordar, 166 descender, 165 , 198 contrihuir, 181 agradecer, 169 convenir, 198 convertir, 177 re^^>, 173 agradecer, 169 {conjugado) 171 {conjugado) 182 caer, 184 {conjugado) 195 agradecer, 169 deducir, 195 defender, 165 diferir, 177 consolar, 166 moler, 167 mostrar, 166 negar, 164 acostar, 166 sentar, 164 poner, 188 sosegar, 164 derretir, 173 volcar, 166 agradecer, 169 acertar, 1G3 acordar, 166 agradecer, 169 calentar, 163 pohlar, 166 desandar, 182 agradecer, 169 apretar, 163 VERBOS IRREGULARES. 367 Conjug. como P^g. Conjug. como P^g. Desaprobar, probar. 166* Desentumecer, agradecer. 169 Desarrendar, merendar, 163 Desenvolver, volver. 167 Desasir, asir^ 194 Deservir, servir. 173 Desasosegar, sosegar^ 164 Desfallecer, agradecer. 169 Desatendcr, atender, 165 Desfavorecer, a 169 Desatentar, tentar, 164 Desflaquecerse, u 169 Desavenir, venir, 198 Desflorecer, (C 169 Desbravecer, agradecer, 169 Desfortalecer, u 169 Descender, descender, 165 Desgobernar, gohernar, 163 Descenir, descenir, 175 Desguarnecer, agradecer, 169 Descolgar, colgar, 166 Deshacer, hacer. 186 Descollar, consolar, 166 Deshelar, deshelar. 258 Descomedirse, medir, 173 Desherbar, despertar. 163 Descomponer, descomponer, ISS Desherrar, u 163 Desconcertar, caleiitar, 163 Deshumedecerse , agradecer. 169 Desconocer, conocer, 169 Deslucir, lucir. 170 Desconsentir, sentir, 176 Desraedirse, medir. 173 Desconsolar, consolar. 166 Desmembrar, sembrar. 164 Descontar, contar, 166 Desmentir, mentir. 178 Desconvenir, venir, 198 Desmerecer, agradecer. 169 Descordar, acordar. 166 Desnegar, negar. 164 Descrecer, agradecer. 169 Desnevar, nevar, 258 Desdecir, desdecir. 195 Desobedecer, agradecer. 169 Desdentar, sentar, 164 Desoir, air, • 197 Desembellecer, agradecer, 169 Desolar, volar, 166 Desembravecer, a 169 Desoldar, acordar. 166 Desempedrar, sembrar, 164 Desollar, volar. 166 Desempobrecer, agradecer. 169 Desobstruir, destruir. 181 Desencerrar, cerrar, 163 Desparecer, agradecer. 169 Desencordar, acordar. 166 Despedir, pedir. 172 Desenfurecerse, agradecer. 169 Despedrar, quebrar. 164 Desengrosar, avergonzar, 166 Despernar, gobernar, 163 Desenmohecer, agradecer. 169 Despertar, despertar. 163 Desenmudecer, u 169 Desplacer, complacer. 170 Desensoberbecer 11 169 Desplegar, cegar. 163 Desentenderse, entender, 164 Despoblar, poblar. 166 Desenterrar, cerrar. 163 Desproveer, proveer. 171 Desentorpecer, agradecer. 169 Destenir, desteftir. 175 Desentristecer, ^^ 169 Desterrar, desterrar. 163 368 VERBOS IRREGULARES. Conjug. como P^g. Conjug. como Pdg. Destituir, constituir, 181 Empequenecer, agradecer, 169 Destorcer, cocer, 185 Empezar, empezar. 163 Destrocar, volcar, 166 Emplastecer, agradecer, 169 Destmir, destruir, 181 Empobrecer, (( 169 Desvanecer, agradecer, 169 Emporcar, volcar. 166 Desventar, reventar, 164 Enaltecer, agradecer, 169 Detener, detener, 191 Enardecer, a 169 Bevolver, volver, 167 Encabellecerse, ii 169 Biferir, diferir, 177 Encallecer, u 169 Digerir, digerir, 177 Encalvecer, ti 169 Diluir, incluir, 181 Encanecer, u 169 Discerner, e7itender, 164 Encarecer, (( 169 Discemir, herir. 176 Encender, encender, 165 Disconvenir, venirj 198 Encerrar, cerrar. 163 Discordar, acordar, 166 Encloquecer, agi^adecer, 169 Disentir, sentir, 176 Encomendar, recomendar , 164 Disminuir, disminuir. 181 Encontrar, encontrar. 166 Disolver, resolver, 167 Encubertar, despertar, 163 Disonar, sonar, 166 Endentar, a 163 Displacer, complacer, 170 Endentecer, agradecer, 169 Disponer, disponer, 188 Endurecer, ti 169 Distraer, distraer, 192 Enfierecerse, « 169 Distribuir, distribuir. 181 Enflaquecer, « 169 Divertir, divertir, 177 Enfranquecer, (( 169 Dormir, {conjugado) 178 Enfurecer, (( 169 Engrandecer, (( 169 E Engreirse, reir. 174 Elegir, elegir. 173 Engrosar, co7isolar. 166 Embarbecer, agradecer, 169 Enhambrecer, agradecer. 169 Embebecer, ii 169 Enloquecer, a 169 Embellecer, ii 169 Enlucir, lucir. 170 Embestir, vestir. 173 Enmagrecer, agradecer. 169 Emblandecer, agradecer, 169 Enmelar, volar. 166 Erablanquecer, (( 169 Enmohecer, agradecer. 169 Embobecer, it 169 Enmudecer, »( 169 Embravecer, (( 169 Ennegreeer, (( 169 Embrutecer, (( 169 Ennoblecer, (( 169 Emparentar, calentar, 163 Ennudecer, (( 169 Empedrar, quehrar. 164 Enorgullecer, « 169 VERBOS IRREGULARES. 369 Enrarecer, Enriquecer, Enrobustecer, Enrodar, Enrojecer, Enronquecer, Enronecer, Enruinecerse, Ensaugrentar, Ensoberbecer, Ensordecer, Entallecer, Entender, Enternecer, Enterrar, Entontecer, Entorpecer, Entredecir, Entrelucir, Entremorir, Entreoir, Entreponer, Entretener, Entrever, Entristecer, Entullecer, Entumecer, Envanecer, Envejecer, Enverdecer, Envilecer, Envolver, Enzurdecer, Equivaler, Erguir, Errar, Escarmentar, Escarnecer, Esclarecer, Conjug. como Pdg. agradecer, 169 169 169 rodar, 166 agradecer, 169 169 169 169 reventar, 164 agradecer, 169 169 169 {conjug ado) 164 agradecer, 169 enterrar, 163 agradecer, 169 169 decir, 195 lucir, 170 morir, 178 oir, 197 poner, 188 tener, 191 entrever, 193 agradecer, 169 169 169 169 169 169 169 volver, 167 agradecer, 169 equivaler, 193 seguir, 172 {conjug ado) 164 reventar, 164 agradecer, 169 169 Conjug. como P%. Escocer, cocer. 185 Esforzar, forzar. 166 Establecer, agradecer. 169 Estremecer a 169 Estrenir, reflir. 175 Excluir, incluir. 181 Expedir, pedir. 172 Exponer, poner. 188 Extender, entender, 164 Extraer, traer, F 191 Fallecer, agradecer. 169 Favorecer, ii 169 Fenecer, a 169 Ferrar, cerrar. 163 Florecer, agradecer. 169 Fluir, influir. 181 Fortalecer, agradecer. 169 Forzar, . forzar, 166 Freir, {conjugado) G 173 Gemir, pedir. 172 Gobernar, gohernar. 163 Guarecer, agradecer. 169 Guarnecer, H 169 Hacendar, enmendar. 163 Hacer, {conjugado) 186 Heder, perder. 165 Helar, {conjugado) 258 Hender, tender, 165 Herbar, herrar. 163 Herbecer, agradecer. 169 Herir, {conjugado) 176 Herrar, herrar, 163 370 VERBOS IRREGULARES. Conjug. como Pdg. M Hervir, hervir, 177 Holgar, rogar, 165 Maldecir, Conjug. como maldecir. PAg. 195 Hollar, volar. 166 Malherir, herir. 176 Huir, (conjugado) 179 Malquerer, querer, 189 Humedecer, agradecer, 169 Maltraer, traer, 191 Manifestar, manifestar 163 I Mantener, mantener, 191 Impedir, pedir, 172 Medir, medir, 173 Iraponer, poner, 188 Melar, tentar, 164 Improbar, probar, 166 Mentar, it 164 Incensar, pensar, 164 Mentir, mentir. 178 Incluir, incluir, 181 Merecer, agradecer. 169 Indisponer, poner, 188 Merendar, merendar. 163 Inducir, conducir. 194 Moblar, pohlar. 166 Inferir, iriferir. 178 Mohecer, agradecer, 169 Infernar, gohernar. 163 Moler, moler. 167 Ingerir, ] herir, 176 Morder, morder. 167 Inquirir, inferir, 178 Morir, (conjugado) 178 Instituir, constituir. 181 Mostrar, mostrar. 166 Instruir, instruir. 181 Mover, mover. 167 Interponer, poner. 188 N Intervenir, venir. 198 Introducir, introducir. 195 Nacer, (conjugado) 168 Invernar, gohernar. 163 Negar, negar, 164 Invertir, invertir. 178 Negrecer, agradecer. 169 Investir, vestir. 173 Nevar, nevar. 258 Ir, {conjugado) 196 J Obedecer, agradecer, 169 Obstruir, destruir. 181 Jugar, (conjugado) 166 Obtener, dhtener. 191 Ofrecer, agradecer. 169 L Oir, (conjugado) 197 Laiiguidecer, agradecer. 169 0]er, " 167 Leer, {conjugado) 171 Oponer, oponer. 188 Lucir, (conjugado) 170 Oscurecer, oscurecer, 258 LI Pacer, P nacer. 168 Llover, (conjugado) 258 Padecer, * agradecer. 169 VERBOS IKREGULAEES. 871 Conjug. como P%. Q Palidecer, agradecer. 169 Conjug. como T&g. Parecer, a 169 Quebrar, quebrar. 164 Pedir, {conjugado) 172 Querer, (conjugado) 189 Pensar, pensar, 164 Perder, perder. 165 R Perecer, agradecer, 169 Reaparecer, agradecer. 169 Permanecer, " 169 Reapretar, apretar. 163 Perniquebrar, quelrar, 164 Rebendecir, bendecir. 195 Perseguir, seguir, 172 Reblandecer, agradecer, 169 Pertenecer, pertenecer, 170 Recaer, caer. 184 Pervertir, pervertir, 178 Recalentar, calentar, 163 Pimpollecer, agradecer. 169 Recluir, incluir, 181 Placer, conplacer, 170 Recocer, cocer. 185 Plegar, regar, 164 Recolar, consolar. 166 Poblar, poblar. 166 Recomendar, recomendar ,164 Poder, (conjugado) 187 Recomponer, poner. 188 Podrecer, agradecer, 169 Reconducir, conducir. 194 Poner, (conjugado) 188 Reconocer, conocer. 169 Poseer, poseer. 171 Reconstruir, huir. 179 Posponer, posponer, 188 Recontar, contar. 166 Preconocer, conocer, 169 Reconvalecer, agradecer, 169 Predecir, decir, 195 Reconvenir, venir. 198 Predisponer, poner, 188 Recordar, recordar. 166 Preferir, preferir. 178 Recostar, costar, 166 Preponer, pone?', 188 Recrecer, agradecer. 169 Presentir, sentir. 176 Rediicir, conducir. 194 Presuponer, poner. 188 Reelegir, elegir. 173 Prevalecer, agradecer, 169 Referir. referir. 178 Prevenir, prevenir. 198 Reflorecer, agradecer. 169 Prever, prever. 193 Refluir, incluir. 181 Probar, probar. 166 Reforzar, forzar, 166 Producir, producir. 195 Refregar, regar. 164 Proferir, preferir. 178 Refreir, freir. 174 Promover, mover, 167 Regar, regar, 164 Proponer, proponer, 188 Regiraentar, reventar, 164 Proseguir, seguir. 172 Regir, regir. 173 Prostituir, constituir. 181 Rehacer, hacer, - 186 Proveer, proveer, 171 Reherir, - herir, 176 Provenir, venir^ 198 Reherrar, herravy 163 372 VERBOS IRREGULARES. Rehervir, Rehuir, Rehumedecer, Reir, Rejuvenecer, Relucir, Remendar, Rementir, Remoler, Remorder, Remover, Renacer, Rendir, Renegar, Renovar, Renir, Repadecer, Repensar, Repetir, Replegar, Repoblar, Reponer, Reprobar, Reproducir, Requebrar, Requerer, Requerir, Resaber, Resalir, Resegar, Resembrar, Resentirse, Resolver, Resollar, Resonar, Resplandecer, Restablecer, Restituir, Restregar, Conjug. como Pdg. hervir, 177 huir, 179 agradecei\ 169 {conjugado) 174 agradecer, 169 lucir, 170 remendar, 164 mentir, 178 moler, 167 unorder, 167 mover, 167 nacer, 168 rendir, 173 negar, 164 reyiovar, 166 {conjugado) 175 agradecer, 169 pensar, 164 repetir, 173 plegar, 164 j??o&Zar, 166 poner, 188 probar, 166 producir, 195 quehrar, 164 querer, 189 AenV, 176 sa&er, 189 saZiV, 197 se^ar, 164 semhrar, 164 sentir, 176 resolver, 167 t'o/ar, 166 sonar, 166 agradecer, 169 169 constituir, 181 re^ar, 164 Retemblar, Retener, Retenir, Retonecer, Retoreer, Retostar, Retraer, Retribuir, Retronar, Reventar, Reverdecer, Reverter, Revestir, Revolar, Revolcarse, Revolver, Robustecer, Rodar, Rogar, Saber, Salir, Segar, Seguir, Sembrar, Sementar, Sentar, Sentir, Serrar, Servir, Sobrecrecer, Sobrentender, Sobreponer, Sobresalir, Sobresembrar, Sobresolar, Sobrevenir, Sobrevestir, Conjug. como Pdg. temhlar, 164 retener, 191 teflir, 175 agradecer, 169 torcer, 185 apostar, 166 retraer, 192 atrihuir, 181 tronar^ 258 reventar, 164 agradecer, 169 verier, 165 vestir, 173 voZar, 166 volcar, 166 volver, 167 agradecer, 169 rodar, 166 {conjugado) 165 {conjugado) 189 197 se^ar, 164 {conjugado) 172 semhrar, 164 reventar, 164 sentar, 164 {conjugado) 176 serrar, 164 servir, 173 agradecer, 169 entender, 164 sobreponer, 188 sobresalir, 198 sembrar, 164 voZar, 166 sobrevenir, 198 vestir, 173 VERBOS IllREGULARES. 372 Conjug. como P&g. Conjug. como T&g. Soldar, redar, 166 Trascolar, volar. 166 Soler, soler, 262 Trascordarse, acordarse. 238 Solver, volver. 167 Trasegar, segar, 164 Sollar, volar. 166 Traslucir, lucir. 170 Sonar, sonar, 166 Trasoir, oir, 197 Sonreir, sonreir, 175 Trasonar, sonar. 166 Sosegar, sosegar. 164 Trasponer, trasponer, 188 Sostener, sostener, 191 Trastrocar, volcar. 166 Subarrendar, recomendar 164 Trasvolar, volar. 166 Subseguir, seguir, 172 Travesar, confesar. 163 Substituir, constituir. 181 Trocar, volcar. 166 Substraer, traer. 192 Tronar tronar. 258 Subtender, entender^ 164 Tropezar, tropezar. 164 Subvenir. venir. 198 Sugerir, sugerir. 178 V Supervenir, venir, 198 ValQr, (conjugado) 192 Suponer, suponer. 188 Venir, u 198 Sustituir, ^ constituir. 181 Ventar, r event ar. 164 Sustraer, sustraer. 192 Ver, (conjugado) 193 T Verdecer, agradecer. 169 Verter, verier. 165 Tallecer, agradecer. 169 Vestir, vestir. 173 Temblar, temblar, 164 Volar, volar. 166 Tender, tender. 165 Volcar, volcar. 166 Tentar, tentar. 164 Volver, (conjugado) 167 Tenir, teflir. 175 Torcer, torcer. 185 Y Tostar, costar. 166 Traducir, traducir, 195 Yacer, yacer. 262 Traer, (conjugadd) 191 4k Transferir, transferir. 178 Z Trascender, encender. 165 Zaherir, herir. 176 Verbos Espa:S^oles, Cortina Method, contiene las con- jugaciones de todos los verbos castellanos, con sus eq.uiva- lentes ingleses, y las preposiciones que les corresponden. 374: MODELOS PARA CORRESPONDENCIA. MODELOS PARA CORRESPONDENCIA. Principios de Cartas de Negocio. Sr. Don Juan Castano, -Nueva York. Muy seiior mio : ^ Madrid, Julio 15, 1890.1 Madrid, 15 de Julio de 1890. ^ Sres. Don Juan Castano y Cia., Nueva York. Muy senores mios : ^ Sr. Don Juan Castano, Madrid. Muy senor nuestro : Sres. Don Juan Castano y Cia., Muy senores nuestros : 4. Nueva York, Junto 15, 1890. Sra. Dona Maria Godinez, Muy senora mia : Madrid. Sevilla, Agosto 30, 1890. Finales de Cartas de Negocio. 1. Quedo3 (6 soy) de Yd. (6 Yds.) atto.* (6 attos.^) y S. S.^ Q. B. S. M.« 1 Las cartas puedeD ser fechadas como en el primero 6 segundo ejemplo. 2 Mio es singular, y por lo tanto el que firma es una sola persona. Tam- bien se puede decir, "J/* estimado senor.'*'' Si ya ha mediado alguna corres- pondencia, 6 se conoce personalmente al sujeto, puede decirse : " Muy senor mio y amigo^'* 6 Estimado senor y amigo^ etc. Lo mismo en plural. 8 Quedo, I remain. * AUo. es la abreviatura de atento^ y attos. la de atentos (pi.). 6 S. S., son abreviaturas de seguro sermdor {sure servant)^ 6 equivalente en ingles a humble servant 6 yours truly. MODELOS PARA CORRESPONDENCIA. 375 2. Me repito de Vd. at to. S. S. » 3. Nos repetimos de Vds. attos. S. S. Jose Morales. Jose Morales e hijos. 4. Aprovechamos esta oportunidad para of recernos de Vds. attos. S. S. Q. B. S. M. Jose Morales y hermanos. MoDELO DE Carta Comercial. San Francisco, Cal., 10 de Mayo de 1890. Sres. Don Rafael Careaga y Cia., Mazatlan, Mejico. Muy Sres. nuestros : Confirmamos "^ ntra.^ anterior ultima 2 del corriente, segun la in- clusa copia de prensa, y ha llegado a ntro. poder su grata * de Vds., fha. 29 del ppdo., cuyo contenido hemos anotado de conformidad. Les agradecemos el nuevo pedido que, por varios articulos, se sirven Vds. confiarnos, los cuales embarcaremos a la primera oportunidad, de acuerdo con sus instrucciones. Sin otro particular, esperamos sus nuevas ordenes y quedamos, como siempre, de Vds., attos. y S. S. Q. B. S. M. Antonio Vargas y Cia. • Q. (que), B. (besa), S. (su), M. (mano), es una formula de respeto que puede suprimirse si se quiere, aunque es bastante usada. Dirigi^ndose a una seiiora 6 seiiorita se dice : Q. (que), B. (besa), S. (sus), P. (pies). 7 Confirmar^ to confirm. Ultima^ last. Corriente^ current. Segun, as per. Inclusa, inclosed. Copia, copy. Prensa, press. Poder, power. Grata, favor. Contenido, contents. Anotar, to make a note of, to note. De con- formidad, in conformity. El pedido, the order. El articulo, the article. Confiar, to confide. Emharcar, to ship. De acuerdo con, in accordance with. 8 Las siguientes abreviaturas son muy usual es : nuestro, etc., ntro., ntra., ntros., ntras. ; fecha,/Aa. / proximo pasaclo, 'ppdo. ; corriente, cte. ; primera, 1°" ; siempre, spre., etc. » Grata, gta., sinonimo de cstimada, apreciable, aphle. 376 MODELOS PARA CORRESPONDENCIA. Cartas de Sociedad. 1. {Tin cdballero d una seflorita 6 seftora:) Cadiz, Setiembre 2, 1890. » Sta. (6 Sra.) Da. Carmen Molina. Senorita (6 Senora): (6, Distinguida, 6, Estimada senorita 6 senora). Quedo a los pp. (pies) de Vd. atto. y Quedo de Vd. atto. y S. S. Q. B. S. P.2 2. Sra. Da. Isabel Serrano. Muy seiiora mia : (6, Distinguida, etc., senora). 3. (Una seftora d otra senora 6 seflorita, y viceversa.) Mi apreciable (querida, estimada, etc.) senora (6 sefiorita). Soy de Vd. (6 tuya) afma. (afectisima), 6 atta. S. S. 4. ( Una seflorita d un caballero,) Sefior Don Jose M. Martinez. Muy Sr. mio : (6, estimado, apreciable, etc., seilor). Quedo de Vd. atta. S. S. Q. B. S. M. Sevilla, Abril 3, 1890. Soy de Vd. respetuosamente (6 sinceramente, 6 afma.). 1 La fecha se puede colocar al principio y a la derecha de la primera pa- gina de una carta, 6 al fin y a la izquierda. 8 Vease pag. 375, nota 6. PROVERBIOS Y DICHOS ESPAROLES. 877 5. {Entre amigos.) Querido amigo : ^ (6 amigo Ramirez). Quedo suyo (6 de Vd., 6 tuyo) afmo. (afectisimo). PROVERBIOS Y DICHOS ESPANOLES Con Verbos,^ j)oco Grasp all, lose all. " Quien mucho abarca aprieta.^^ Acostarse con las gallinas, Adelantar como el cangrejo, " Bie7ies mal adquiridos d nadie han enriquecido" " Quien Men ama tarde olvida,^' " Quien lo feo ama hermoso le parece" " Quien ama el peligro, perece en eiy " Cuando Dios am.anece para todos aparece." No se ande Vd. en cumplimientos, Andando el tiempo. Andar de Zeca en Meca, "Ande yo caliente y riase la geniey " Quien mal anda, mal acaha" To go to bed very early. To retrograde. Ill-gotten gains never prosper. He who loves truly is slow to forget. Love is blind to defects or imper- fections. He w^ho loves danger will perish by it. The sun shines on the just and on the unjust. No ceremony, pray ! In the course of time. To rove about from Dan to Beer- she ba. If I am comfortable, I care little for ridicule. Bad habits lead to worse ends. 1 Cuando se escribe k los padres 6 hermanos, los comienzos de las cartas son parecidos lo mismo que los finales ; asi se dira. Mi querido padre^ etc., 6 querido papa^ etc. Tu amante hijo^ etc. Tu afmo. hermano^ etc. 2 La siguiente es una lista de proverhios 6 refranes^ y de dichos ; los que tieneu verbos estan impresos primero, en los cuales seguimos alfabeticamento las primeras letras de estos^ y a continuacion los que no los tienen, formando con ellos una serie a parte, por el ordeu alfab^tico de sus primeras palabras. Los proverhios estan marcados con comillas (" ") para diferenciarlos de los dichos. 378 PROVERBIOS Y DICHOS ESPANOLES. " Quien anda al reves anda el camino dos veces.^^ Andar en mangas de camisa. " El mentir y el compadrar, ambos andan a la par.^^ " Lo que se aprende en la cuna, siempre dura^ Aprovechar la ocasion, Apurar la copa del dolor hasta las heces. " Quien no se arriesga no pasa la marJ* " Quien a buen drbol se arrima, buena sombra le cobija^ " Quien bieri ata bien desata." *' Quien tiene tienda que la atien- da." " A quien madruga, Dios le ayu- da." " Harto ayuna quien mal corned " Al hierro caliente batir de re- pente,'^ Beber como una cuba. Buscar a tientas, Buscar cinco pies al gato teniendo cuatro. ''^ El pez que busca el anzuelo, busca su diieloy *' Honra y provecho no caben en un lecho." Caer simpdtico. Caersele a uno la cava de ver- guenza, Caer en gracia. " Mas vale caer en gracia que ser gracioso." Caer en el chiste. *•'• Del drbol caido todos hacen Una:' He who takes the wrong roact makes the Journey twice. To be in one's shirt-sleeves. False friends try to outwit each other. What is learned in childhood is never forgotten. To improve the opportunity. To drain the cup of misery to the dregs. Nothing venture, nothing gain. Old oak gives good shade. He who hides knows where to find. He who has a store must watch it. God helps those who help them- selves. A bad meal is no better than fast- ing. Strike while the iron is hot. To drink like fish. To grope. To seek a quarrel. The fish that dallies with the hook does so to his sorrow. Honor and riches are seldom found united. To become a favorite. To blush with shame. To please. It is better to please than to be pleasant. To see the point (of a joke). An unfortunate man is always imposed upon. PROVERBIOS Y DICHOS ESPAROLES. 379 ^'^ Quien calla otorgaP " Quien canta, sus males espantaj^ ^^ Al gallo que canta, le aprietan la gargantar Como el gallo de Moron, sin pluma y cacareando. " Antes que te cases mira lo que haces" " Para mal casar, mas vale nunca maridarT " Gato con guante 7io caza rato- nes.^^ *' En boca cerrada no entran mos- easy A ojos cerrados. " Lo que no has de comer, dejalo cocer." Coger a uno la palahra. "Comer y rascar tasta empe- zar,^^ Costar un ojo. Creer a ojos cerrados, " Dios los cria y ellos sejuntan.''^ Chuparse los dedos, Dar la mano. Dar de si. - Me doy por vencido. " Quien da primero, da dos vecesj* No darsele a uno un pita {un hledo), " Donde las dan las tomans Dar una hofetada, Dar los dias. " Al necio y al aire, darle calle.'^ Dar las espaldas. " Dime con quien andas y te dire quien eres.^^ No decir esta boca es mia. Dicho y hecho. Silence gives consent. A cheerful spirit lessens many troubles. Warning to keep a secret. The defeated cock loses feathers, but not conceit. Look before you leap. Better never marry than marry unwisely. A cat in mittens seldom catches a rat. A wise head keeps a close mouth. Without hesitation. Do not meddle in other people's business. To take one at his word. The proof of the pudding is in the eating. To be very dear. To believe without proof. Birds of a feather flock together. To feel great delight. To shake hands. To stretch. I give it up. He who hits promptly, hits twice. Not to care a straw. As one sows so he must reap. To give a slap on the face. To congratulate on one's birthday. Never contradict a fool. To turn one's back. Tell me your friends and I will tell tell you what you are. To keep a profound silence. No sooner said than done. 380 PROVERBIOS Y DICJIOS ESPANOLES: *' Los ninos y los locos dicen las verdades^ Disparar a quema ropa, \ Disparar a boca de jarro, ! Dormir como una piedra, Echar un trago. Echarse a reir. Echar los hofes, " Cobra buena fama, y echate a dormir^ " La caridad bien entendida em- pieza por si mismo.^^ Sin encozaendarse a Bios ni al diablo. Enfadarse por nada. *' Quien te enganb, te enga&ara ; y si repite, bien te estara." *' LI ojo del amo engorda el ca- bailor Entrarse como Pedro por su casa. Quien espera desespera, Estar empeilado hasta los ojos, Estar e7i babia. Quien evita la ocasion evita el ladrbn. Faltar a la palabra, " Quien fia o promete en deuda se meter ^^ No se gan6 Zamora en U7ia horar " Quien se guarda, Dios le guar- dar El hdbito no hace al monje, ^^ No hay mal que por bien no vengar "No hay mas bronce, que anos once." ** No hay atajo sin trabajor Children and fools speak the truth. To fire point-blank. To sleep like a top. To take a dram. To begin to laugh. To work to excess. Get the name of early rising, and you may lie abed all day. Charity begins at home. Imprudently. To be vexed by trifles. If a man deceives you once, shame on him ; if twice, shame on you. The eye of the master fattens the horse. To be too familiar in a neighbor's house. He who hopes also fears. To be deeply in debt. To be foolish. He who avoids temptation avoids sin. To break one's promise. He who trusts on sale or promise becomes indebted. Rome was not built in a day. God helps him who helps him- self. The dress does not make the man. There is no evil that may not be turned to good. True metal is youth. No gains without pains. PROVERBIOS Y DICHOS ESPANOLES. 381 ** iVb hay rosas sin espinas."" *^ A buena hambre no hay pan duro.''^ ^^ No hay peor cufia que la del mismo palo." " Casa donde no hay harina, todo se vuelve tremoUfia.^^ ^^ Debajo de una mala capa suele haber un buen bebedor.^^ Aun no ha salido del cascarofi y ya tiene presuncimi, " A pobreza no hay verguenza.^^ No hay regla sm excepcibn, " A caballo regalado no hay que mirarle el diente.^^ Sobre gustos no hay nada escrito. No hay quince anos feos. " A mucho hablar, mucho errar.^'' " La ocasibn hace al ladrbn" ^^ Necios y porfiados hacen ricos a los letrados.^^ "Z)e escarmentados se hacen los avisados." " A donde fueres, haz lo que vie- res'^ Hacer una de las suyas. " Un loco hace cientoT " Hagase el milagro y hagalo el diablo.'^ " Quien hace U7i cesto, hace cien- to:' " Mas hace el que quiere que el que puede." " No se hizo la miel para la boca del asno." ^^ Del dicho al hecho hay gran trecho^ Cada uno hace de su capa un sayo. 20 There is no rose without a thorn. A hungry man does not find fault with his food. The worst enemy is he who was once a friend. When poverty comes in, love flies out. Appearances are often deceitful. Scarcely hatched, yet thinks him- self cock of the walk. Poverty is no shame. There is no rule without excep- tions. Never look a gift horse in the mouth. There is no accounting for taste. Youth has always some beauty. Much talking, much erring. Opportunity makes the thief. Fools and obstinate people make the lawyers rich. Experience teaches wisdom. When you are in Rome, do as the Romans do. To play one of his tricks (pranks). One fool makes many. The meric of a deed is not lessened by the obscurity of the doer. He who steals a penny will steal a pound. Where there's a will there's a way. Honey was not made for the mouth of an ass. There is a wide difference between saying and doing. Every one may do as he likes with his own. 382 PROVERBIOS Y DIGHOS ESPANOLES. " Costumbres y dineros hacen a los hijos caballeros.'^ Poco a poco h-ila la vieja el copo, " Quien d su mujer no honra, d si mismo se deshonra." Gato escaldado del agua fria huye. Irsele d uno la cabeza. JEso ni me va, ni me viene. Ir con la fnusica a otra parte. Ir al grano. "Ir d la guerra, ni casar no se debe aconsejar.'' *' Vanse los amoves y quedan los dolor es.^^ " Perro que ladra, no muerdey " Quien se levanta tarde, ni oye misa ni come came.'" " Del agua mansa libreme Dios que de la brava me guar do yo.''^ " El buey suelto bien se lame." " Sol que mucho madruga, poco dura." La cosa marcha. " Quien d hierro mata, d hierro muere." " Entre padres y hermanos no me- tas tus manos." Nombrando al ruin de Roma al punto asoma. Oir campanas y no saber dbnde. " Amor con amor se paga." Pasar los ojos, 6 la vista. " Piensa el ladrbn que todos son de su condicibn^'' " Quien fue d Sevilla perdi6 la silla." Mai que le pese. ^' Sarna con gusto, no pica, pero mortiflca.'^ Courteous manners and abundant means make people popular. Drops make up the ocean. He who does not honor his wife, dishonors himself. A burnt child dreads the fire. To lose one's presence of mind. That does not concern me. To be off. To get to the point. In war and love beware of inter- ference. Love brings sorrow in its train. Barking dogs seldom bite. Indolence stands in the way of many blessings. Still waters run deep. Liberty is a blessing. Premature things have little en- durance. The affair is making progress. He who kills with the sword dies by the sword. Avoid meddling in family quar- rels. Talk of the devil and he will ap- pear. To hear without understanding. Love repays love. To glance over. The thief judges others by him- self. He who would retain his office must pay it due attention. In spite of him. Evils of one's own seeking are not felt, but they mortify. PROVEEBIOS Y DICHOS ESPANOLES. 383 Poner manos d la obra. " Quien presta al amigo^ amenu- do cobra un enemigo.'^ " Ul hombre propone y Bios dis- pone.''^ " Quien quiere d Beltrdn, quiere d su can.^' Para las cuestas arriba te quiero mulo^ que las cuestas abajo yo me las subo. *' Quien bien te quiere te hard llo- rarT *'Z>e lo ajeno, lo que quiera su duefloy *' El que quiera azul celeste que le cuester La codicia rompe el saco. La cuerda se rompe por lo mas delgado. Saber algo de huena tifita. Coda uno sabe donde le aprieta el zapato. " Mds sabe el loco en su casa que el cuerdo en la ajenaJ" Salirse con la suya. Salvarse en una tabla. No es oro todo lo que reluce. *' Hombre prevenido nunca fue vencido.^^ ^^ Mientras que en mi casa estoy rey soy." Ciertos son los toros. "Donde fuiste caballero, no seas escudero.^' De noche todos los gatos son par- dos. " En tierra de ciegos el tuerto es rey:' To set one's self to work. He who lends to a friend often makes an enemy. Man proposes and God disposes, Love me, love my dog. I wish assistance in difficult mat- ters ; in easy ones I can help myself. He who loves you will chasten you. Take from no man that which he does not wish you to have. Obtain good things by paying their worth. Grasp all, lose all. The rope breaks at its weakest point. To know a thing on good author- ity. Every one knows where his own shoe pinches. A fool knows more of his own business than a wise man can tell him. To have one's own way. To escape miraculously. All is not gold that glitters. Forewarned, forearmed. A man's house is his castle. The tale is true. Where you had a high position, do not be at a lower grade. When the candles are out, all eats are gray. Big faults excuse the smaller. 384: PROVERBIOS Y DICHOS ESPAJJOLES. " En la boca del discreio lo publi- co es secreto." " Amigo en la adversidad es ami- go de verdad.'^ Frimero es la obligacibn que la devocion. Mariana sera otro dia, ^^ La pobreza no es vileza, mas es ramo de pereza.'^ Los duelos con pari son menos. *' Para el mal que hoy se acaba, no es remedio el de manana.'^ Es un grano de anis, Cuando el rio suena agua lleva. Tener malas pulgas. *^ Muertos e idos no tienen ami- gosr Tomar el rdbano por las Tiojas, " Mas vale mafia que fuerza^ Mas vale que sobre que no que falte. Mas vale doblarse que quebrarse. *^ Mas vale pdjaro en mano que ciento volando." Vender hasta la camisa. Venga lo que viniere. Meter se en lo que no va ni viene. Verse entre la espada y la pared. Si te vi no me acuerdo, Hacer ver a uno las estrellas. ^^El que de ajeno se viste en la calle lo desnudan." '•^Aunque la mona se vista de seda mona se queda.'' Volver patas arriba una cosa. " Al cabo de aflos mil, vnelve el agua por do solia ir.^^ The prudent man is reticent to- ward the public. A friend in need is a friend in- deed. Business before pleasure. To-morrow may bring better luck. Poverty is no crime, but sometimes implies a want of energy. Wealth mitigates the troubles of life. To day's evil is not alienated by to-morrow's remedy. It is nothing (ironical). When the river roars the water rises. To be ill-tempered. The absent must always bear the blame. To put the cart before the horse. Skill is better than strength. It is better to have too much than to be in want. Better to bend than to break. A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush. To sell everything. Come what will. To meddle in what does not con- cern one. To be in danger. Out of sight, out of mind. To see stars in the daytime. He who wears borrowed plumes risks exposure. A hog in armor is still but a hog. To turn a thing upside down. Time brings old customs round PROVERBIOS Y DICHOS ESPANOLES. 386 Proverbios y Dichos sin Yerhos, A lo hecho pecho. A otro perro co7i ese Jmeso. A porfia, A proposito. " A Ho revuelto ganancia de Pes- cadores J'^ A solas. A tiro, A la vuelta. Aprendiz de todo oficial de nada, Al as?io muerto la cebada al rabo. *^ Antes caheza de ratbn que cola lebn.^^ Bienes raices. Cada loco con su tema. Cada oveja con su pareja. Con todo eso. De buenas d primer as, " De dinero y calidad la mitad de la mitad J^ De oidas, De tal palo tal astilla, De tal padre tal hijo, ' De tal amo tal criado, De par en par, De sobra, De cuando en cuando, De un tirbn. En resumidas cuentas. El gozo en un pozo. En un d^cir Jesus, Gente de medio pelo. \ Oente de poco mas 6 menos, J " Oenio y figura hasta la sepul- tura." Juego de palabras. What is done must be endured. Tell that to the marines. In an obstinate manner. Apropos (by the by). Torment profits the notice-seeker.N^ Alone. Within reach. On the next page (P. T. 0.). Jack of all trades, good at none. Lock the stable -door after the horse is stolen. Better be the head of a mouse than the tail of a lion. Real estate. Every one has his hobby. Like seeks like. Notwithstanding. Without being expected, suddenly. To be at the truth, reduce hearsay about the wealth and charac- ter of any one. By hearsay. • Like produces like. Wide open. Over and above. Now and then. At one stroke. In short. The hopes in the whole. In an instant. People of little account. What is bred in the bone will never come out of the flesh. A pun. 386 ABREVIATURAS. " La cruz en los pechos y el diahlo en los hechosy Lo dicho dicho. Mai que le pese. For termino medio. Sendos golpes. Sin mas acd ni mas alia. Sin que ni para que. Tal para cual. " Vida sin amigos inuerte sin ies- Hgos.'' / Voto a tal / The cross on one's breast and the devil in one's deeds. What I have said I abide by. In spite of him. On an average. Heavy blows. Without more ado. Without cause or motive. Tit for tat. Friendless in life, friendless in death. By Jove ! ABREVIATXTRAS aUE MAS SE USAN EN CASTELLANO.^ A. C. Afto de Cristo. af"™". afectisimo. ag*o. agosto. am<*. amigo. Ant**.' Antonio, ap. aparte. art. 6 art®, articulo. B. L. M. 6 b. 1. m. besa la mano. B. L. P. 6 b. 1. p. besa los pies. gmo^ Pe. Beatisimo Padre. cap. b cap**, capitulo. eg. centigramo. cl. centilitrOy centilitros. cm. centimetro, centimetros. col. 6 col*, columna, colonia, Comp». 6 C'''. compania, (3Qj.|.te 3 corriente. ct*.^ cuenta. D. 6 D°. Do7i. D». Dona. D. D. Doctores. Dg. decagramo, decagramos, dg. decigramo. * dha.,^ dho. dicha, dicho. dic^. 6 10®. diciembre. Dl. decalitro, decalitros. 1 En esta lista no es posible seguir siempre la regla de empezar con letra mayiiscula la primera palabra despues del punto. Algunas veces la mayus- cula es abreviatura de una palabra, y la miniiscula de otra, las cuales se con- fundirian si se observara dicha reo^la. 2 En los nombres propios de persona solo se pone corao ejemplo el de varon, por ser facil conocer que la abreviatura del femenino se obtiene, con- virtiendo en a la o del masculino. 3 Las dieciones terminados en enta^ ente^ 6 ento se puoden abreviar corao los vocablos cuenta^ conveniente y documento. * Las palabras precedidas de una estrella ban de llevar en el manuscrito una raya^ tilde 6 ra^go encima, cruzando los palos de las letras altas. ABREVIATUBAS. 887 dl. decilitro, decilitros. Dm. decdmetro, dm. decimetro, decimetros. doct. 6 dr. doctor. docum^o.i documento. *dra.,2 *dro. dereclia, derecho. E. este (oriente). ENE. estenordeste. eno. enero. ESE. estesudeste. etc. 6 &. etcetera. F. Fulano. F. de T. i^wZaTio <^e TaZ. pco^ 6 Fran'^o. Francisco. feb«. febrero. *fha., *fho. fecha, fecho. g. gramo, gramos. Gen. general (dignidad). gob"*', gohierno. gral. general. hect. hectdrea, hectdreas. Hg. hecfvgramo, Jiectogramos. HI. hectolitrOy hecfolitros. Hm. hectometro, hectometros. id. *c^em. * igl*. iglesia. it. *^em. *izq*., izq**. izquierda, izqnierdo. Kg. kilogramo, hilogramos. Kl. kilolitro, Mlolitros. Km. Mlometro^ kilometros. 1. ZiYro, Zi7ro«, *lbs. libras. lie. Ucenciado. m. (sing, and pi.), minuto, metro. mile». milesimas. mg. miligramo, miligramos. Mm. milidmetro, milidmetros. mm. milimetro, milimetros. N. nomhre ignorado, 7iorte. N. B. iVb^a 6ene (notese bien). nov®. 6 9*. noviembre. n°. 6 num«. numero. *ntra., *ntro. nuestra, nuestro, 0. oes/e. Oct®, w 8**. octuhre. ONO. oesnoroeste. OSO. oessudoeste. P. A. jpor ausencia. p** ^ara. pag., pags. pdgi7ia, pdginas, P. D. posdata. p. ej. ^or ejemplo. P. 0. ^or orden. P. P. ^or^e pagado, par poder, * pral. principal. prov». provincia. P. S. J905^ scriptum (posdata). Q. B. S. M, 6 q. b. s. m. ^i*e ftesa 51^ mano. Q. B. S. P. 6 q. b. s. p. (?^^e Jesa q«. gwe. q. e. g. e. que en gloria este. q. e. p. d. que en paz descanse, q. s. g. h. que santa gloria haya, R«. recipe. R. I. F. ^equiescat in pace (en paz descanse). S. San 6 Santo — sur. S». 6 Sra. seftora. s. c. 51^ casa. s. e. u o. salvo error u omision, set®. 6 '7^. setiembre. » sig*®. siguiente. > Vcase pag. 386, nota 3. a Veasc pig. 386, nota 4. 388 ABREVIATURAS. *Sor. 6 Sr. seiior, * spre. siempre. * Sres. 6 Srs. senores. *Srta. 6 Sta. seftorita. S. S. S. sw seguro servidor, tit. 6 tit°. titulo. torn. 6 t«. ^owo. U. 6 Ud. usted, Us^ 6 U**'. ustedes, V, usted, vease. V^., V•i^ ws^e^Z, ustedes. V. E. Vuestra Excelencia 6 Fwe- cencia. vg., V. g., 6 V. gr. verhigracia, V. M. Vuestra JIajestad, vol. volumen, voluntad. *vtra., *vtro. vuestra, tmestro, V. S. Vueseftoria 6 C/ism. V^. 6 VV. 7istedes. VOCABULAEY-INDEX. N. B.— The larger figure after each definition refers to the page in which the word has been explained ; and the smaller one, above, to the number of the note. A, prep., at, to, 282^ 340. AbajOy down, down-stairs ; arriha^ up, above, up-stairs ; ahajo de la ciudad^ down-town ; arriha de la ciudad, up-town, 101^. About, translated by del, 226*. Abbreviations in Spanish, 386. Acdy adv., here; alia, adv., there; acd y alia, here and there, 139^ Acabar, to finish, to end ; acdbar de, to be just, to have just, 89^. Accents, 15. Acera or banqueta^ sidewalk, 199*. Active form of verbs with se instead of passive in English, 39^. Adelantar, advance, to make prog- ress ; atrasar, to retard, 89*^ Ademds, prep., besides ; adv., more- over, besides, 153^ 282. Adjectives agree with nouns, 36^, 47®. ending in o are masc. ; those in a, fem., 36^. demonstratives, este, esta, this ; estos, estas, these ; etc., 39^. alguno, some one ; ninguno, none ; bueno, good ; drop the last o be- fore a masc. noun, 44^. to form the superlative, 49^* ^. multiplicatives, 145. Admiradon, admiration, wonder (ex- pressions). See Usual Phrases. Adverbs, cuanto and tanto, lose the last syllable to before an ad- jective or adverb, 10 P, 203\ Adverbs of affirmation, 223. of comparison ; use of them, 203"^. list of, 264. in mente (ly), 215^ of method and order (list of), 223. of negation (list of them), 223. of place (list of them), 223. of order (list of them), 264. of quantity (list of them), 223. of time (list of them), 215. of uncertainty (list of them), 264. Adverbs, yes and no, expressed by que si and que no, 223^. Age, about the (convers.), 80. Agradecer, to be grateful, irreg. verb, Class III, 169. Agriculture (vocab.), 296. Agreement of irregular verbs in ir- regular tenses, 171\ 172«, 176^, 1793, 1803. Aguardar, to wait, to expect, 97*^. Aguilar, Gaspar, biog., works, 305. AM, alii, there, dif. bet., 139«. Alameda, public walk. See Cadiz, Mejico, and Ve^'a Cruz. Alarcon, Juan Ruiz de, 303. Alarcon, Pedro Antonio de, biog. and works, 3323. Alas, Leopoldo (Clarin), works, 336. Alava, province of Spain, 266*. Albaicin. See Granada, 275. Alcald, Galiano, biog., 327. Alcdzar. See Sevilla, 274^. Alcazar de San Juan, 273 Alegrarse, to be glad ; and sentiry to be sorry, 205''. 390 VOCABULARY-INDEX. Algo^ pron., something, anything ; and nada^ adv., nothing^ 83', 97^. Alguien^ pron., somebody, anybody ; and nadie, no one, nobody, 159^. AlgunOy cdguna, pron. and adj., some- body, some one, anybody, any one ; ninguno^ ninguna^ no one, nobody, none, no, 159^. Alhambra^ palace of Granada, 276^ Alimentos, food (vocab.), 129, 136. Alii and ahi, there, 139^. Almeria^ city of Spain, 278. Alphabet, 7. Alrededoi\ around, 199^. Alvarado, salto de^ leap of Alvarado (Mexico). See Tacubaya. A mas tardar^ at the latest, 158^. Ambos^ ambas, pron., both, 98^. Andalucia^ name of the southern region of Spain, 274. Andar^ to walk, irreg. verb, 181. Andar, idiomatic rendering in refer- ence to ivatch or dock^ 89*. Anger (expressions of). See Usual Phrases. Anoche, adv., last night, 200^. Ante, before, in presence of, 282^. Antes, prep., before ; antes de, 282. Antes, adv., first, sooner than, 26. Antes and delante, dif., lOl^. Antillas, West Indies, 290^. Antipathy and sympathy (expres- sions of). See Usual Phrases. Any and some, often not translated in Spanish, 73^. Ano pasado and ano que viene, 79. A quel, aquella, that (yonder); aque- llos, aquellas, those, 39^. ar, termination first conj., 22\ 54. ara and ase, imp. subj. dif., 56^. Arce, Nunez de, works, 319. Argitir, to argue; irreg. verb, 179, Armeria Real. See Madrid, 269. Articles, def., el, la, los, las, etc., 52. used when the subject is expressed in a general sense, 25 5^ indef., un, una, unos, unas, etc., 53. Asir, to seize, irreg. verb, 194. Asuntos and negocios, dif., 97^. Atracar. Nau, 294^. Atrasar and adelantar. ^eeadelantar. Augmentatives, 217^. Ayellaneda, Gertrudis G. de, 315. Avila, city of Spain, 268. Avila, Gaspar, biog. and works, 306. Ay, river of Cuba, 290^. Ayala, Lopez de, biog. and works, 323. Azotea, roof of a house, 288'-^. Azpeitia, town of Spain, 266. Azieca, old Mexican race, 287^. B Balmes, Jaime, biog. and works, 327. Banana or pldtano, banana, 98^. Barca, Amilcar, 278^. Barcelona, 279. Barcino, Barcelona, 278^. Barometer (convers.), 148. Bebidas, drinks (vocab.), 29. Become {to), different meanings, 240^ Becquer, Gustavo, biog., works, 317. Bendecir, to bless, irreg. verb, 195. Bes6, El, river, 2783. Bien, adv., well; bueno, adj., good. Bien !, bueno !, well ! exclama- tions. / Bien pues !, bueno pues, well then ! 93*. Blasco, Eusebio, 835. Boadil, last Moorish king of Granada. See Granada. Body, parts of the (vocab.), 281. Bremon, Fernandez, 331. Buena Vista. See Saltillo, 285. Bull-fight (description), 27 P. Burgos, city of Spain, 267. Business (convers.), 72, 80, 96, 160. By, translation, 47^ 254^, 256. Caballero and seiior, dif., 139^. Cabaiia, Castillo de la, Havana, 293. Caber, irreg. verb., no caber degozo, to be overjoyed ; no cabe mas, noth- ing more can be desired, 183. Cada, each, indeclinable pron., 135'. Cadiz, city of Spain, 277. Caer, to fall, to see, to understand ; irreg. verb, ya caigo en ello, now I see (I understand) ; las ven- tanas caen a la plaza^ the win- VOCABULARY-INDEX. 391 dows look on the square ; caer- sele d uno la cava de verguenza^ to blush with shame, 184. Calderon^ Pedro, biog., works, 298. Campeche, Yucatan, Mexico, 292. Campoamor Ramon de, works, 318. Cano y Masas, 325. Cantidad and suma, sum, 221^. Carabinero, 266^. Card, ia7'jeta, 159^. Cdrdenas, city of Cuba, 294^. Cardinal numbers, 70. used instead of ordinal, 77^. Cartageiia, city of Spain, 278. Cartago Nova, old Cartagena, 278. Cartas, modelos para, 374. Casa, La, the house (vocab.), 136. Cash (to) drafts (convers.), 42. Castelar, Emilio, biog., works, 333. CasteUana, La, Madrid, 272^. Castilla, central region of Spain, 266^. Castro, Guillen de, biog., works, 306. Castro y Serrano, 335. Cataluna, name of the eastern region of Spain, 278^. Catorce, town of Mexico, 285"*. Cauto, El, river of Cuba, 290^. Cayo Hueso, Key West, 295^. Celaya, town of Mexico, 286. Cerro de las Campanas, 286. Cervantes, Miguel de, biog., and works, 298. Chance, to have a chance, 205^. Chapultepec, Castillo de, 287. Chiste, fun, joke ; dar en el chiste, to hit the nail on the head ; chiste pesado, scurvy trick, 307^. Choluca, Pirdmide de, 289. Choza, cottage, shanty, 292^. Cid, El, conqueror of Valencia, 278^ Cienfuegos, city of Cuba, 295''^. Oiento, num. adj., hundred, loses the to before a noun, 71^ Citar, to make an appointment, to mention, to quote, 300^. City, ciiidad (vocab.), 199, 206. Clothing, vestido (vocab.), 37. Coachman (convers. with), 132. Coahuila, State of Mexico, 284®. Cocer, to boil, irreg. verb, 185. Cocinar, to cook, 185^ Comedias de capa y espada, 29 9^. Colors, colores, 264. Comenzar, irreg. verb, 163. Cornet', to eat, to dine, reg. verb, 59. Comidas, meals (vocab.), 29. Como, adv., how, as. See Compara- tives of Equality, 203''. Comparatives of adjectives, hueno, good ; malo, bad ; grande, large ; pequeno, small ; mejor, peor, mayor y peor, 82. of adverbs, do not need mds or menos, before, 204^. of equality, tan, so, as ; como, as ; tantos, tantas, so many, as may, with adj. and adv., 203'. particles, mds and menos, followed by que, 43^. of superiority and inferiority with inds and menos, 203^ Componer, to fix, to mend ; and arre.' glar, to fix, to put in order, 92*. Compound tenses of verbs, 104. Con, prep., with, 35«, 247, 340. Conditional, use of this tense, 341. Conducir, to conduct, to convey, to lead, irreg. verb, 194. Congreso or Parlamento, Chambers of Deputies. See Madrid, 269. Conjunctions, list of, 297. cuando, aun cuando, etc., govern subj. mood, 226^, 345. me7ios and y used when speaking about the hour, 89*. of time, when, after, ichile^ as, be- fore infinitives, 1843, 345^ Conmigo, with me; contigo, with thee ; consigo, with himself, 35*. Conocer, to know, irreg. verb, 169. Conocer, to know, to be acquainted with ; and sabe^^, to know, 229^ Consonants, sounds of the, 9. Contentar, to content, reg. verb de- rived from tentar, irreg., 164*. Contradecir, comp. of Decir, 195. Copiosa, abundant, 300*. C6rdoha, city of Mexico, 290. Cdrdoba, city of Spain, 274. Cork, tapon', cork-wood, corcho, 98^ 392 VOCABULARY-INDEX. Corporal senses (vocab.), 268. Correr^ to run; correrse, to be ashamed, to blush ; correr vieniOy to blow wind, 15 1^^', Correspondence, models for the, 3*74. Could, how to render it, 201^. Countries of the world, 155, 207. Country and sea (vocab.), 296. Creer^ to believe, irreg. verb, 171. Creer, followed by que^ 33^. Cual {el), la cual, which one; los cuales, las cuales, which ones ; used instead of que^ quien, and quienes, 202'-^. / Cudl ? which ? g qnien ? who ? ^que? what? 76. . Cualquiera, any one, whosoever, some one; cualesquiera, pi., 229^. ^ Cudnto ? how much ? g cudntos ? how many? cuanto antes, as soon as possible. See Adverbs. Cuaresma, Lent, 95^. Cuba and Mexico, trip, 283. Cuba, island of, 29P. Cuchara, spoon ; cucharita, tea- spoon ; cucharada, spoonful, 1356. Cuna, native soil or country, 266"^. Cuya, cuyo, cuyas, cuyos, pron., 99^ D d and s terminations second and first pers. pi. imp. are dropped in the reflexive verbs, 233^. Dar, to give, irreg, verb, 182. Dar, idiomatic meanings ; dares y tomares, ifs and ands ; Darse d la vela, to set sail, 83^ 204^, 217^ Days of the week, 44. De, prep., of, from ; de dia, by day ; de noche, at night; de intento, by purpose, 282^, 328. De instead of por, 256. De, desde, of, from, difference, 226®. Dear, caro, referring to price; que- rido, implying affection, 36^. Deber, to owe, must, 40^, 149^. Decir, to say, to tell, irreg. verb, 195. Declaration or interrogation, differ- ence in the speech, 1 30^ Defective verbs, 261. Del, of the, for about, 226*. Delante and ante, 10 P. Delicias, Las. See Sevilla, 274. Demasiado^ demasiada, too, too much; demasiados, demasiadas, 151^. Dentro de, within, 93^. De^'ogar, from rogar, irregular verb, is regular, 166^ Desde, from, 219''. Desear, to wish, reg. verb, 55. Despertarse, to wake up, 201^. Desviar, to separate, 300^ Devolver, to give back, 213^. Diaz, Pastor, 315. Dieciseis, diecisiete, etc., or diez y seis, diez y siete, etc., 701 Diminutives, 132®. Diphthongs and Triphthongs, 17, 18. Directions, "How to study by this System," 1. Direct object of a verb takes a, if animated thing, 130^, 358. Division of time, 78, 95. Division of words into syllables, 18. Do (to), hacer, 22^. Doctor (conversation with), 130, 134. Dolores Hidalgo, Mexico, 285. BoWa.r, peso or duj-o, 132^ Don and senor, Mr., 156^. g Donde ?, g en donde ?, g d donde ?, etc., where? 85®. Don't mention it, no las merece, 213®. Dormir, to sleep, irreg. verb, 178. Dos up to ciento, indeclinable, 70^. Doscientos to novecientos have a femi- nine form, 71®. Double consonants, 17. Doubt, duda (expression of). See Usual Phrases, 311. Drinks, hebidas (vocab.), 29. Due (to), veneer, implying terms, 218^. Durdn, Agustin, biog., works, 327. Durar, to last, to take, 202^. E Echegaray, Miguel, works, 325. Echegaray, Jose, works, 324. El, the. See Articles {definite), 52. ^l, ella, etc., he, she, etc., 53, 244. VOCABULARY-INDEX. 393 Eleven hundred, mil ciento ; eighteen hundred,m?7 oc// oc/en^o5, etc., 7 1 ^^ Eliseo {ieatro del)j Barcelona, 278^. EmpedraVy to pave, 206^ Empenarse^ to persist, 292"*. En^ in, prep., its use, 225^, 328. Ensanche. See Barcelonay 279. Ensenar^ to teach or to show ; and monstrar^ to show, 217*. Entahlar, 267^'. Entender^ irreg. verb, 164. Enierarse, to be instructed in, 230^ Entrey between or among, 211^. Equipaje^ baggage or equipage, 143^. Equivocacioiiy mistake, 16 P. Equivocarse or estar equivocado, 160^ er^ termination second conj., 25*, 54. ErraVj to err, irreg. verb, 164. Escala, 291''. Escorialj Monasterio del^ Spain, 269. Escrichy Enrique Perez^ SSS'*^. Es decir^ that is to say ; i. e., 168^ Esperanza, town of Mexico, 290. Esperar, to hope, wait, expect, 97"^^. Espronceda, Jose, biog., works, 313. Esquina and rincon^ corner, 157^. Estacion, station or season, 15 P. Estante de libroSy book-case, 300^. Estar J to be, auxiliary verb, 122. difference with ser, 90*, 128. Estar la marpicada, rough sea, 292'. EstCy estay this ; ese, csa, that ; estoSy estaSy these ; esoSy esas, those, 39^. Exactamente and en puntOy exactly (sharp), referring to hour, 221^. Exhibition, exposi€i6n{cor\YQT^.)y 210. Expressions, he who^ she whoy etc., translations into Spanish, 202^. for me, for him, etc., in connec- tion with verbs, 220^ /, hey we, etc., have been told, 212^ the more — the less ; the better — the worse ; translation in Sp., 205*. Exporting (business convers.), 40. Face (to), dary 217^ Facturary to check, to invoice ; facturay the invoice, 143^. 'SamWyyfamilia (vocab.), 21, 207. Farm, the, la huerta (vocab.), 310. Favor, favor, followed by c?c, 35*. Fernandez Flores, 331. Fernandez y GonzdleZy 330. Festivities of the year (vocab.), 95. Finoy polite, 292^. Fire (vocab.), 154. Flowers, /ores (vocab.), 311. Freiry to fry, irreg. verb, 173. Fronteray town of Mexico, 292. Fruits, /W«^«s (vocab.), 310. Fulano de Tal, So-and-So, 220^. Furniture, muebles (vocab ), 144, 154. Future, futuro, use of this tense, 340. G GaldoSy biog. and works, 331. GallegOy Juan, biog. and works, 312. Garcia GutierreZy biog. works, 322. Gerona, city of Spain, 280. Gerundio. See tise of Tenses. Getting up, levantarse (convers.), 200. Gil Bias de Santillana (convers.), 230. Gil y Zdrate, biog. and works, 320. Giralda, 274^. Gran Capitdn Gonzalo de Cordoba, See Cordoba, 2l4c. Granada, city of Spain, 275. Grande, large, drops syllable c?e, 44*. Grao {Paseo del). See Valenciay 279. Grilo, biog. and works, 319. Guadalquivir, river of Spain, 275*. Guadalupe, Iglesia de, Mexico, 288^ Guevara, Luis Velez de, 307. G^iipuzcoay province of Spain, 266. Guitar, to please, to like, 14 1^ H Hd, instead of hay or hace, 260. Habana {La), capital of Cuba, 293, Haber, to have, auxiliary verb, 102. remarks upon the use of it, 106. as an auxiliary, dif. with tener, to have, 73^ as an active verb, 75^ 107. as an impersonal, there to be and to be necessary, 73», 77*' ^ 260\ Hacer, to do, to make, 186. idiomatic renderings, 146*. impersonal verb, 259. 394: VOCABULARY-INDEX. Hacer dano, to make one sick, 292^. Hacer /alia, to be in want of, 158^ Hacer se or mandar hacer ^ to have done, to order to be made, 157*. Hartzenhusch^ biog. and works, 321. Hasta^ till, until, as far as, 231^. Have (to) done^ to have brought^ etc., how to render it in Spanish, 157^ 353. Helo^ hela^ here it is; heme^ here I am ; helos, helas^ etc., 104, 143'^. Herir^ to wound, to strike, 176. Herreros^ Breton de loSy biog. and works, 321. Hidalgo, Dn. Miguel, 28S\ 286^. Hints to learn the verbs, 58, 62. Hotel (convers.), 216. Hotel waiters (convers.), 158. How to study by this system, 1. Huerta, La, de Valencia, 278. Huir, to flee ; irreg. verb, 179. iera and iese, forms imp. subj., 56^. H you please, si Vd. gtista, 140^ Imperative mood. See Use of Tenses. Imperfect and past, 382-3, 339, 340. Impermeable, water-proof, 150^. Impersonal verbs, 257. active verbs used as imp., 259. verbs used as such, 260. Importing (convers.), 40, 42, 96. Indicative mood, its use, 338. Indirect object personal prons., me, te, le, nos, os, les, 46^. Infinitive mood, its use, 349. ing, term, in English, how in Spanish to indicate iise ov purpose, 43^*. Interjections, interjecciones, 297. Introduction of persons, 208. Invertir, to invert; irreg. verb, 176. ir, termination third conj., 25^, 54. Ir, to go, irreg. verb ; its conj., 196. Ir, to go, and ser, to be ; irregulari- ties compared, 196^. Ir d buen paso, to hasten, 133"^. Ir, to go, and quedar, to remain, in the passive voice, 256. Irreg. past part, verbs in oher, 167*. of twelve reg. verbs, 21 1^ Irregular verbs, 162, 364. Class I, in ar and ei\ with e in the syllable before the last, 163. Class II, in ar and er, with o in the syllable before the last, 165. Class III, in acer, ecer, ocer, ucir, 168. Class IV, in eer, 170. Class V, in ir, with e in the sylla- ble before the last, 171. ending in eir, 173. ending in enir, 175. Class VI, in entir, erir, ertir, 176. Class VII, in ir, with o in the syl- lable before the last, 178. Class VIII, in uir and giiir, 179. Class IX, peculiar irregularities, 181. List of irregular verbs, 365. Iru7t, town of Spain, 266. It, pron. to, never translated when accompanying to be, 46^ It, lo and ello, difference, 209^. It is I, soy yo, etc., conj., 247. Iztaccihuatl, Mexican volcano, 289*, Jamas and nunca, never, 149*, 215*= Jardincillos {Los), Madrid, 272. Joy (to express). See Usual Phrases, Jugar, to play, irreg. verb, 166. Key West (Fla.), Cayo Hueso, 295^. Know (to) how to do anything, 204*. Know (to), conocer, saber^ dif., 229''. La, the, def. art., decl., 52. La, fem. pron., it, her; las, them, to be placed with verbs, 33^, 5P. Lafuente, Modesto, biog., works, 328. Lanchas, boats, 294^. Languages, about (convers.), 22, 32. Laredo {Nuevo), town of Mexico, 284. Larra, Mariano {Figaro), 329. Le, pron., him, you, to him, to you ; ^^5, them, to them, 34^. Leer, to read, irreg. verb, 171. Legendario^ belonging to legend, 301'"'. VOCABULARY-INDEX. 395 Legumhres, vegetables (vocab.), 810. Lengua^ tongue or language, 36*. Lethim^ us, ihem, etc., 218^. Letters, models of, 3'74. Levantarse, to get up, 200', 201 «. Lista, Alberto, biog. and works, 326. Listo, clever, ready, 204^ Literatura antigua, 298. Literaiura moderna, 312. Llevar, to take, to carry, 92"*, 101^. Llobregat^ river in Spain, 278=^. Lontananza, far distance, 293^, io, los, prons., it, them, placed with verbs, 33=^, 51». JLoyola, Ignacio de, 266. Lucir, to shine, irreg. verb, 170. Luego, adv., by and by ; conj., then, therefore, 229«. M Madrid, capital of Spain, 269. Madrigal^ Alfonso Tostado de, 268. Malaga, city of Spain, 277, Maldecir, to curse; irreg. verb, 195. Mamey. See Esperanza, 290. Manco, lame of one hand, 298^. Mandar, to command, to send, 75^. Mandar hacer or hacerss, to have made, 157^ 353. Mantequilla and manteca, 141^. Map of Spain, bet. 280 and 281. Maravilloso, wonderful, 300^. Mareo.rse, to get sea-sickness, 292^ Mas, conj., and jo^ro, conj., but, 297^. Matanzas, city of Cuba, 294"^. May he, puede ser, 139''. Mayor, menor, etc., 82 ^ Mazmorra, Moorish dungeon, 298^. !Meals, comidas (convers.), 30, 138. ^leals and drinks (vocab.), 29. Mesonero Momanos, 329. Mediterranean Sea, MediterraneOy 278^ Mejor, peor, etc., 82^ Meeting of persons (convers.), 160. Mendoza^ Hurtado de, 305. Menos and y. See Conjunctions, 89"*. Merida, town of Mexico, 292. 3fesa de los Cartujos, Mexico, 284. Mesa y alimcntos (vocab.), 129, 136. Mescna, Mira de, biog., works, 309. Mexico, city of, 286. Mexico and Cuba, trip, 283. Mexico, history of, 283', Mezquita. See Cordoba, Spain, 274. Jfi, poss. pron., my ; mi, me ; mis, my (pi.), agree with nouns, 27^ Mientras mas — tanto menos, etc., the more — the less, etc., 205**. Mil, thousand ; indeclinable, 71®. Mlo, etc., mine, etc. ; poss. pron. and poss. adj. As poss. adj., always placed after the subst., 99\ 2243. Mismo, misma, adj., same, self; el mismo, he, himself, 153^ Mitad^ subst., half; and mediOy adj., half, dif. bet., 137-. Mitral, Las, Mexico, 284^. Modo imperatlvo, 358. Modo indicativo, 388. Modo injinitivo, 349. Modo subjuntivo, 344. Money (Spanish), dinero, 132^ Montalvdn, Juan Perez de, 309. Monterrey, town of Mexico, 284. Montjuich, Castillo de, 278^. Months of the year, 78. Moreto, Agustin, biog., works, 304. Morir, to die, irreg. verb, 178. Morro, El, Havana, 293. Mostrar and ensenar, to show, 2171 Mr., Mrs., and Miss, Sr. or Sr. Don, Sra, (La.) or Sta. (La,), 1562. Mv^ho, much, translated instead of muy, very, 147^. Muebles, furniture (vocab.), 144, 154. Muralla, wall, 279^ Murillo, Bartolome Esteban, 214. Museo del Frado, Madrid, 271. Muy, very, or very much, 161**. N Nada, adv., nothing; algo, some- thing, anything, 83', 97®. Nacei*^ to be born, irreg. verb, 168. Nadie, ind. pron., nobody, no one." See Alguien. Kavidad, natividad, Christmas, 95'. Nationalities, nacionalidadcs, 21, 156. Negatives, about, 24'^. 396 VOCABULARY-INDEX. Negocios. See Asuntos^ 97^. Nevada de Toluca^ 286. Newspaper, diario or periodtco, 211^. Ninguno^ no one, nobody; ninguna cosa^ nothing. See Alguno, 1 59^. Ni — nij conj., neither — nor, 15P^ jVb, adv., not, no, in connection with verbs, 34^ iVb importa^ never mind ; 7io me inu porta^ I don't care, 21 P. Nocedal^ Cdndido^ biog., works, 328. Noclie tviste. See Tacuba^ 288. -A^os, pers. pron., us, to us, 34^. Nouns beginning with long a or Aa, exceptions in ma and «, 84^. Nouns ending in a are fern., 36^. in e are masc, 75''. in d are fern., 152^. in i are masc, 213^ in./ are masc, 89'**. in / are masc, 143*. in n are masc, 142^. in o are masc, 37*. in r are masc, 141^. in 8 are masc, 144*. in tion, don in Spanish, 142*. in ;? are masc, 144^. Nuhe^ cloud ; nuhlar^ to cloud, 149^. JVuestro, poss. pron., our, 99^ 224^. Numbers, cardinal, cardinales, 70. collective, colectivos, 137. fractional, fraccionarios^ 137. ordinal, numeros ordina/es, 86. Nunca and jamas, never, 149*, 215*. 0, or, either, changes for u, 168*. d, termination, 3d pers., past ; o, ter., 1st pers., present, 49*. Ocean trip, viaje por mar^ 292. Offer {to). See Usual Phrases, 264. Oir, to hear, irreg. verb, 197. Oler, to smell, irreg. verb, 167. Ordinal numbers, 86. Orizaba, city of Mexico, 290. Orizaba, Pico de, 290^. Os, yourselves ; and ^e, thyself, prons., their use, 232«. Otro, otra, other, another; otros^ otras, others, another, 227^. Painters, most celebrated, 271. Pa,lacio, Manuel del, 320. Panaderia, bakery; how to form this kind of nouns, 45^'-^. Panecillo, roll, ivom. pan, 141*. Para, for, to, in order to, 47^, 150^ Paraguas, s. m., umbrella, 150*. Para que, so as, so that, 158*. Para servir d Vd., at your service, that is my name, 92\ 96^ Par do, Bazdn Mmilia, works, 337. Parecer, def. verb, to seem, to ap- pear ; parecerse, to look like, 23 1*. Participio pasado, use of, 354. presente, use of, 353. Partir, to leave, to slice, 59. Pasar adelante, to walk in, 134^. Passive verbs, verbos pasivos, 228*, 250. are declinable, 26V, 256. in English which are reflexive in Spanish, 240. Passive voice not so generally used in Spanish as in English, 241. used in an active form, 255. with estar instead of ser, 250. with quedar and ir, 256. Past and imperfect, difference in their use, SS^' ^, 339, 340. Past part, verbs in olver, 167'-^. irregularities of reg. verbs, 211^. Pedir, to ask for, irreg.. verb, 172. Pelayo, Menendez, 320. Pereda, Jose Ma., works, 334. Pero and mas, conjs., but, 84\ 297^. Peseta, Spanish legal currency, 132^. Personal pronouns, 244. table for their use, 248. when are suppressed, 245. Pldtano or banana, banana, 98^. Plaza de Toros, bull-ring, 2711 Plazo, term, 99^ Please, sir vase, 14P. Please (to), gvMar, 14P. Plural of words ending in consonant, vowel, and accented vowel, 41^ Plural of words ending in z, 145'^. Poder, to be able, irreg. verb, 187. Poner, to put, irreg. verb, conj., 188. VOCABULARY-IKDE}C 397 Popocatepetl^ Mexican volcano, 289^. Por^ by, for, through, 47\ 13(H. Por^ with passive verbs, 254^ Por supuesto^ of course, 225*. Possessive adjectives in connection with articles of clothing, 134^. Poesia lirica, moderna^ 312. dramdtica^ moderna^ 320. Possessive pronouns, meo, mine ; tuyo, thine ; suyo^ his, 99"^. Power of attorney, jood'er (con v.), 100. Precocidad de hombres celebres^ 300. Predecir^ to predict, to foretell, 195. Preface, prefacio^ iii. Preguntar^ to ask, to question, and pedir^ to ask for, 156^ Prepositional pronouns, m^, ti^ c/,with a, and pronominal particles, me, te, le, etc., 210^ Prepositions, preposiciones^ requiring de and d, 30\ 282. Presidents of Mexico, 283^ Present participle, 153. Present of indicative, its use, 338. Primero, first, drops the o, 20^^. Principe (casiilh del), Cuba, 294. Principios, mediados, fineSy 79''. Progreso, town of Mexico, 292. Pronominal particles, me, te, se, 200^. Pronominal reflexive particles, and indirect object, pers. pron., 20P. Prosa moderna, modern prose, 326. Pronunciation, pronundacion, 3. Pronouns, pronombres, 242. objective, ohjetivos, 243. permutations, permutaci.ones, le la, le le, etc., for se la, se le, etc., 243. personal, personates, 53, 244. absolute, ahsolutos, yo, de mi, etc., tu, de ti, etc., 244. conjunctive, conjunctivos, me, tc, le, etc., 245. combination list, Usta de combina- Clones, me le, me la, etc. ; te le, te la, etc. ; nos le, etc., 249. reflexive, reflexivos, 242. combinations with se, 244. se, used when the object of the verb refers to body or clothing, 241. Proverbs, proverbios, 377. 27 Puebla, city of Mexico, 288, . Puerta del Sol. Sec Madrid, 270. PueSy conj., then, therefore, inas- much, as, since, because ; interj., well! /pues, que f well! 157*^. Puesto que, conj., adv., since, inas- much as, supposing that, 150^ Pulque. See Esperavza, 290. Punctuation, puntuacion, 19. Punta, Castillo de la, Havana, 294, Punto, en, exactly, sharp, 22 P. Purchasing, compras (convers.), 46. Que, pron., that, which, who, 93^ Lo que, and todo lo que, 224^ Que, than, with comparatives, 203^. Que, than, before numerals, de, 89*. ^ Que ? 6 what ? ; g quien? who ? ; and g cudl ? which ? 76^ g Que hay? what about? 97^ Quedar, to remain, to stay, ir, to go ; with passive verbs, 256. Querer, to wish, to desire, to will, to love, to like, to be willing, 189. Queretaro, town of Mexico, 286. Quevedo, Francisco de, biog. and works, 308. g Quiere Vd. ? will you ? 36^. Quincena, fortnight, 79^. Quiniana, Manuel, biog., work, 312. R R. R. station (convers.), 142. Rain, lluvia or agua, 147'. Ixato, while, moment; d ratos, from time to time ; raiito, little while, 229«. Rambla, river-bed, Barcelona, 279'. Reading, lectura (convers.), 228. Receipt, recibo, model for them, 220. Recetas, prescription, medicines, 292^. Recoletos and Retiro, Madrid, 273. Reflexive pronouns, 242. Reflexive verbs, 91^, 232. conj. with another verb, 237. remarks, 238. Regular verbs, verbos regtdares, 54. orthographic change, 64. list of them, 362. 39S VOCABULARY-INDEX. Rm\ to laugh, irreg. verb, 173. Rehir^ to scold, irreg. verb, 175. Request {to\ para suplicar, 311. Resbaladizas, slippery, 228^. ResfHarse (eonvcrs.), 202. Reves, back part, wrong ; al reves^ upside down, 269^ ry^ English terminations of substan- tives, via in Spanish, 45''^. Rincon and esquina^ corner, 157®. Rio Grande, boundary of the United States and Mexico, 284. Rogar^ to beg, to pray, irreg., 165. Rojas, Fra?icisco, biog., works, 304. Rosa, Martinez de la, 312. Roto, broken, of romper, 211^. s and d, terminations first and second persons imp., dropped in the re- flexive verbs, 233^. Saber, to know, to have knowledge of, to savor, to taste, 189. Saber, to hear from, 160'^. Saber and conocer, 229"". Sacromonte. See Granada, 276. Salir, to go out, to leave, irreg., 197. Saltillo, town of Mexico, 285. Salutations, forms, saludos, 38, 96. Sanchez el Diviiio, Miguel, 305. San Luis Potosi, Mexico, 285. San Sebastian, city of Spain, 266. San Telnio, Falacio de, 275. Santiago de Cuba, 295^. Satisfacer, to satisfy, irreg., 187. Savedra, Angel de, 313^. Se, indefinite personal pron., 208^ Se, personal pron., instead of le, les, etc., to him, to them, etc., 209^ Se, reflexive pron., 21 1'', 242. Sea and country (vocab.), 298. Sea-sickness, mareo (convers.), 292. Segovia, city of Spain, 268. Segnir, to follow, irreg. verb, 172. Segun, prep., according to, 202°. Selgas, Jose, biog. and works, 316. Selles, Eugenio, 325. Senses and sensations (vocab.), 263. Sentarse, to sit down, 20 1''. Sentir, to feel, to be sorry, 161^, 176. Sentirse, to feel one's self, 130^. Senor, Don, Mr., sehora, etc., 156^. Ser, to be, aux. verb, conj., 116. difference with estar, 128. remarks, 88^, 90^ 119. Serra, Narciso, biog. and works, 323, Servidor de Vd., that's my name, 92\ Servir, to be useful, 150^. Sevilla, city of Spain, 274. Sewing articles (vocab.), 214. Shoes, calzado (vocab.), 37. Si, conj., if ; si, adv., yes, 28*. Sino, pe7'0, conjs., but, 84^ Sierra Madre, Monterrey, 284. Silla, La, Monterrey, 285. Simon, cab, 270\ Sympathy (expressions), 311. Sinues, Ma. del Pilar, 331. So-and-So, Fulano, Mengano y Zutoy no, 1603. Sobre ci'.bierta, on deck, 292®. Solamenie, solo, adv., only, 97^. Some, algiin, not translated, 73^. Sorrow. See Usual Phrases, Spain, trip, viaje por Espana, 266. Spring, rnuelle or ma7iantial, 93''^. Spring, primavera. See Seasons, 95. Streets, about naming them, 91', 221"*. Su, poss. adj., his, hers, etc., 25®. Subjunctive mood, 147®, 226\ 344. present, 138*, 216^, 346. and imperative, " nota," 63. Such, such a, tal, un tal, 220-. Suit of clothes, traje or terno, 157''. Suma, ca7iiidad, sum, 221^. Sunset, puesta del sol, 95^. Superlatives, formation of the, 140^. by means of mas and menos, 219^. of adjectives, el mayor, el menor, el mejor, el peor, 82^ Surprise, doubt, admiration, 311. Table and food (vocab.), 129, 136. Table d'hote, mesa redonda, 218'. Table for the sounds, 5. Taboada, 331. Tacuba, town of Mexico, 288. Tacfiibaya, town of Mexico, 288. Tal, tales, adj., such, such one, 220'^ VOCABULARY-INDEX. 399 Tamaulipas, State of Mexico, 284. Tamayo^ Mmiuel^ 325. Tan^ so, so much, as, as much, 203'''. Tanto^ tanta^ adjs., comp., so, so much, in such a manner ; tanto niejor^ so much the better, 10 P. Taporiy cork ; corcho^ cork- wood, 98^. Tarjeta^ card, visiting-card, 159^. Tdrrega^ hiog. and works, 305. Tartana^ Valencia's coach, 279. Tailor, sastre (convers. with), 158. 2>, pron., thee, to thee, 34^. Te and 05, prons., 232^. Tempi ete. See Havana^ 294. Tener^ to have, to hold, 110. remarks upon its use, YS"^, 80, 113. Tenochtitldn^ voile de^ Mexico, 286. Teocalli. See Mexico^ 286. Teresa dc Jesus, 268. Terminations of verbs, 58, 62. Thermometer (convers.), 146. Tezcoco, lake of. See Mexico, 286. Than, rendered by de lo que, del que, etc., 43^. Thank, to. See Usual Phrases, 265. Ticket, billete ov papeleta, 47^. Tiempos, compuestos, compound tenses. See Use of the Tenses. Tierra caliente, tierrafria, 290^ Time, division of, '78, 95. Time for study, " Directions,'' 2. Tirso de Molina, biog., works, 302. Tocar, to be the turn to, 213^. Todavia, yet, still, ya, already, 89^. Todo, toda, all, every, 219^. Toilet articles (vocab.), 214. Toldo, awning, 2941 Toledo, city in Spain, 273. Toledo, Juan B. de, 269. Toluca, town of Mexico, 286. Topo Chico, town of Mexico, 284^ Torre del Oro. See Sevilla, 274. Traer, to bring, to carry, irreg., 191. Tratar de, to try, 1582. Traveling, majes (convers.), 24, 46. Trees, arholes (vocab.), 810. Trip, Mexico and Cuba, 283. Trip through Spain, 266. Triphthongs, iriptongos, 18. Trueba, Antonio, biog., works, 316. Tu, thou, and vosotros, ye, 54. Ty, termination, dad in Spanish, 230^ U fl, conj., or, instead of 6, 168*. Un, una, unos, unas, a, 63. Uno, a, loses the final o, W. Usted, ustedes, ab., V., Vds., 23^ Usted, ustedes, indirect object, 139^ Usual Phrases, 265, 311. Doubt, surprise, admiration, 311. Expressions of anger, 265. Expressions of sorrow, 265. Inquiring the way, 265. Sympathy and antipathy, 311. To express joy, 265. To offer, 265. To request, 311. To thank, 265. Use of the tenses of the verb, 338. Indicative mood, present, 338. Imperfect, 339. Past, 340. Future, 340. Conditional, 341. Comp. tenses, indef. past, 342. Pluscuamperfect, 343. Anterior past, 343. Perfect future, 343. Perfect conditional, 343. Subjunctive mood, 344. Present, 346. Perfect preterit, 348. Imperfect, 348. Pluscuamperfect, 348. Infinitive mood, 349. Present participle, gerundio, 853. Past participle, 354. not ending in ado or ido, 355. Verbs having two past part., 355. Imperative, 368. V.gr.,verhi-gracia, for instance, 167*. Valdes, Armando Palacio, 336. Valencia, city in Spain, 278. Valer, to be worth, to be good for, 1 92. Valera, Juan, works, 332. Valladolid, city in Spain, 268. Vascongadas provincias, 260. 400 VOCABULARY-IXDEX. Vega de Granada^ 277^. Vega^ Ventuj'a de la^ 322. Vegetables, legumbres (vocab.), 310. Veiicer^ to vanquish, conj., 65. Veneer^ to be due, 218'-^. Venlrj to come, irreg. verb, 198. F(?r, to see, to look, 193. Veracruz, city of Mexico, 291. Ve7'bs, to add terminations, etc., 54. defectives. See Defective Verbs. different conjs., 55. forms, ara, ase, and iera, iese, 5G^. list of irregular verbs, 365. list of regular verbs, 361. impersonal. See Impersonal Verbs. irregular. See Irregular Verbs. passive. See Passive Verbs, Voice. reflective. See Reflexive Verbs. regular. See Regular Vei'bs. orthographic change, reg. verbs, 64. having two past part., 355. not requiring prep., 350. requiring de, 228^, 341, 352. requiring the prep, a, 351. Viaje por Mejico y Cuba; 283. Viaje por Espana, 266. Vitoria, battle of, 267. Vitoria, city of Spain, 267. Vizcaya, province of Spain, 266^. Volanta, carriage. See Havana, 293'^. Volver, to turn, to come or go back, to return, to do again, 167. Volver, idiomatic renderings ; volver en si, to recover one's senses; volver d las andadas, to return to one's bad habits, 135^, 226^. Vosotros, you, ye ; and tu, thou, pers. prons., their use, 54. W Watch or clock, reloj (convers.), 88. Walking, paseo (convers.), 204. Way, to inquire the, 265. Weather, tiempo (convers.), 146, 224. What else ? g que mas ? 43^. What ? g que ? which ? g cudl ? who ? g quien ? whom ^ gd qui'en ? 93^. Words beginning with ie take h be- fore the diphthong, 164^, with ue take h before the diph- thong, 167*. Words ending in a are fern., 36^. in don are fem., 142"^. in d are fem., 85^, 152'. in e are masc, 75'^. in i are masc, 213^ in J are masc, 89^®. in I are masc, 143^*. in ma or a are masc, 36^. in n are masc, 142'^. in o are masc, 37^. in r are masc, 141^. in s are masc, 144'*. in z are masc, 144^. World (parts of the) (vocab.), 155. Writing material (vocab.), 222. F, and, changes for e, and, 132'. Y, when, takes the place of i in the termination of verbs, 1801 Ya, adv., already, 2271 Ya and todavia, advs., 89^, 1411 Yacer, to lie, defect, verb, 262. Year, festivities of the (vocab.), 95. Interrogation and declaration, dif. in the speech, 1301 Yucatan, Mexico, 292. YumurL Valle del Cuba, 295. Zarpar, to weigh anchor, 290^. Zarzuela, comic opera, 270'^. Zocalo, zocle, 2871 Zocodover, square in Toledo, 273. Zorrilla^ Jose, works, 317. FIN. O O e o I 3 a ^< Aj "^ -Sk Ilia .« .« '•■? Q 1 s ■2 5 « -f ^ •^ c _. ^ s -I •^ c^ .^ 5 ^ C^ K^ o ^'"^ rS *^ B o 1 e 2 H ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ u o o tr. i« o >- < s z 2 1-1 \F> H r- Ct^ ^ O o in UJ < * ^ ^ u 1 Q N U 0!i § 1 < 1 ^ o 1 si •$; ^i •:: rt "S e - S H S .w ^i d "^ o «3 o §5 s «o •^ ■^ ^ s k u o '5 •a i .o c c ^ o 1 « -S so ^ 00 2i O 0, *^* 1 sis \) »s (fl *J '*• «. o •^ « .2 J c 1 ^ 1^ 3 1 ** « be Vj ^ ^ rt a "3 - •g S^ ■^ ^ e 11^ xt) rt [O ^ 4) ^ c c o ■vi a u to 5 a; oj Q i C ^ e 9 ^5 CORTINA_TEXT BOOKS. THE CORTINA METHOD. Awarded the First Prize by the Department of Liberal Arts at the Columbian Exposition, Chicago, 1895. Intended for Use in Schools and for Studying With or Without a Teacher, with a system of articulation based on simple equivalents indicating a most exact pronunciation of the Spanish, French and English languages. Spanish in Twenty Lessons. First edition published, December, 1889. Text book in the United States, England, Canada and the Eng- lish colonies. Introductory autograph letter from Don Carlos de Borb6n. This book has had such an extraordinary and unequaled success, that it is now entering on the twenty-first edition. Its practical plan, copious and useful vocabulary and phraseology, have won it fame, and it is conceded to be the standard work for mastering Castilian in the shortest possible time. 21st edition. In one volume, bound in cloth, §1.50. The same in paper, divided into five small books easily carried in the pocket, thus giving an opportunity to study at intervals, ^. French in Twenty Lessons. January, 1896. This book, based on the same plan so famous for its comprehensible and practical ideas which characterize the Cortina Method, does not demand from a student the fatiguing and slow process of memorizing innu- merable and abstruse grammatical rules. It is recommended by the best experts in modern didactics. Revised by Prof. J. Leroux, of the U. S. Naval Academy. 4th edition, cloth, $1.50. The same in paper, five parts, $1.50. Specimen copies of two parts, 30c. Ingles en Veinte Lecciones. (English in Twenty Lessons), diarchy 1893. Standard text book in colleges of the Argentine Republic, Chile, Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Ecuador, Spain, Guatemala, Mexico, Peru, Porto Rico, St. Domingo and Venezuela. The favorite book for learn- ing English rapidly and as it is spoken, without memorizing abstruse grammatical rules. Prologue by the great Spaniard, Don Emilio Caste lar. 15th edition, one vol., cloth, $1.50. Frances en Veinte Lecciones. (French in Twenty Lessons). Ja7v- uary, 1896. Like ''Ingles en Veinte Lecciones,'" in regard to the English language, ''Frances en Veinte Lecciones^' is, according to all those having a knowledge of the book, the best adapted for Spanish-speak- ing people to learn French. As well as the preceding ones, it is arranged for the use of schools, academies, etc., and for studying with or without a teacher. Prologue by Don Gaspar Nuflez de Arce, the poet laureate of Spain. 4th edition, one vol., cloth, $1.50. The same in paper, divided into five parts, $1.50. Specimen copies of two parts, 30c. ^ Verbos Espanoles. January, 1898. 6th Edition, much improved. All the Castilian verbs; all conjugated in fall, v^ith the prepositions folloW' ing them, and English equivalents, together with practical remarks about the formation of tenses. The only book of its kind in any lan- guage. 222 pages, cloth, $1 ; paper, 75 cents. CORTINA SERIES. Modelos para Cartas. 15th edition, bilingual, improved and cor- rected. December, 1895. Prologue by the famous Spanish orator and parliamentarian, Don Juan Vdzquez de Mella. This book is not only, as its title indicates, a complete series of the general styles of letters and documents of all kinds in English and Spanish, but also an ex- pedient and most worthy assistant for acquiring a good selection of commercial vocabularies ; copious in phrases, technical terms, idioms, abbreviations, etc. It is divided into sections, relating respectively to the press, the navy, etiquette, and other no less important subjects, a knowledge of which is not only most essential, but impossible to acquire through any other work of this description yet published. One vol., cloth, ^1 ; paper, 75c. READING BOOKS IN TWO LANGUAGES. Annparo. February, 1S9U. A most charming and interesting novel, used as a reading book in universities, colleges and schools of languages, in England, Spain, and English and Spanish-speaking countries. The Spanish is on one page and the English opposite, so that either can be used for reference. 7th edition, cloth, $1 ; paper, 75c. < EI Indiano. October, 1893. Published also in English and Spanish, and arranged in the same manner as Amparo. This pretty prose comedy in three acts is specially arranged for classes in Spanish and in English, and should be used in connection with The Cortina Method for teaching either language. In order that this instructive and en- tertaining work may give satisfactory and tangible results, the teacher should follow strictly the " Directions " given on the first page of the Method. 9th edition, cloth, 75c.; paper, 50c. READING BOOKS IN SPANISH ONLY. Amparo. 6th edition in Spanish, with English Vocabulary. Paper, 50c. El Indiano. 8th edition in Spanish, with English Vocabulary. Paper, 40c. Despues de la Liu via. November, 1891. Edition in Spanish with English foot-notes. 4th edition, cloth, 50c.; paper, 25c. El Final de Norma. September, 189U. Arranged from the best novel of the popular author, Don P. A. de Alarc6n, with an extensive Eng- lish Vocabulary. One vol., 2d edition, cloth, $1 ; paper, 75c. "CORTINA LIBRARY." Contains a Numerous and Choice Selectio7i of Spanish Books, DictionarieSf etc. R. D. CORTINA, Publisher, 44 W. 34th St., New York. Originator of the Adaptation of Chicago Exhibitioi^ J^fftfife^A "Will reproduce the Ian- of 1893. CS^^vflS^^^^ate guage of the master with Department of iP^^BBIB 2" I-"^ force cadence, in- j^W i^l^'^Rmrai flection, emphasis, accent, Liberal Arts. .J^^^-'-mTmiII^IBI pauses and power. It mul- AwARD "^^^^^^ ^^MB/M^ll ii Bli tiplies the power of the FOR ITS ADAPTABILITY TO ^t ^^^^^^ ^ JoHn"boYD ThACHER. LANGUAGE TEACHING. "= ^^^S^^^^^li^ Chairman, the Phonograph to the Teaching of Languages. LIBROS DE TEXTO DE COETIKA. METODO DE CORTINA. JPremiado con Medalla de Primera Clase en la Exposicibn de Chicago, 1S9,% por el Departanienio de Artes Liberales, Para Usarlo en Colegios y Estudiar con 6 sin Profesor. Su Sistema de Articulaciones, Basado en Simples Equivalencias, Indica la Exactfsima Pronunciacion del Ingl6s, Frances y Castellano. Ingles en Veinte Lecciones. Publicada la 1^ edicion en Marzo, 1893. De texto en colegios de la Argentina, Chile, Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Ecuador, Espafia, Guatemala, Mejico, Peru, Puerto Rico, Santo Domingo y Venezuela. El libro favorito para aprender ingles tal como se habla y pronto, sin estudiar de memoria reglas gramaticales. Pr61ogo de Don Emilio Castelar. 15» edici6n. Un tomo en S^, pasta, $1.50. Spanish in Twenty Lessons (Espanol en 20 Lecciones). Dlcienibre, 1SS9. Libro de texto en los Estados Unidos, Inglaterra, Canada y colonias inglesas. Carta prologo aut6grafa de Don Carlos de Borbon. Este libro ha obtenido tan extraordinaria 6 inusitada acogida que esta pr6xima d, agotarse la vig6simo primera edici6n. Lo prflctico de su plan y lo vario y iltil de su rico vocabulario y de su fraseologia, le ban conquistado la fama de ser el que mAs voces y giros castellanos enseiia en menos tiempo. 21aedici6n. Un tomo en 8o, pasta, SI. 50. El mismo en rustica, divididoen cinco libritos fl fin de facilmente poder- los llevar en el bolsillo y asf aprovechar toda oportunidad que para el estudio se presente, $2. Frances en Veinte Lecciones. Enero, 1896. Basado este libro en el mismo plan tan reputado por lo comprensible, pn'ictico y rdpido que caracteriza al Mj&todo de Cortina, que no exige del estudiante los fatigosos y lentos procedimientos de aprender de memoria innu- merables y engorrosas reglas gramaticales, es el mas recomendado por los inteligentes en la didactica moderna. Con este Metodo, el estu- diante deduce las reglas de una manera objetiva, lo cual tiene por resultado adquirir el conocimlento de ellas sin la fatiga y la perdida de tiempo que ocasiona su estudio. Prologo de don Gaspar Niiflez de Arce. Cuarta edici6n. Un tomo en 8°, pasta, $1.50. El mismo dividido en cinco partes y en rustica, $1.50. Dos libros, 30c. French in Twenty Lessons (Frances en 20 Lecciones). Enero, 1896. Corao ^' Spanish in Twenty Lessons" con respecto al espafiol, ''Erench in Twenty Lessons" es, & juicio de cuantos lo conocen, el libro m&s adaptable para el aprendizaje del francos por aquellos cuyo Idioma sea el ingl6s. Estd, como los precedentes, arreglado para el uso en Escuelas, Academias, etc., y para estudiar con 6 sin profesor. Intro- ducci6n del autor. 4» edicion. Un tomo en S^, pasta, $1.50. El mismo dividido en cinco partes y en riistica, $1.50. Dos libros, 30c. Verbos Espanoles. Enero, 1898. 6* Ed., considerablemente aumen- tada y corregida. Con tiene todos los verbos castellanos; todos conjuga' dos, con sus eqidvalentes ingleses, y las preposieiones que les correspon- den. tJnico libro en su clase. Es inapreciable auxiliar para cuantos hablen 6 estudien el castellano. 222 pdginas. Pasta, $1 ; rust., 75 cts. 10 Modelos para Cartas. 15»edici6n, bilingae, aumentada y corregida. Noviembre, 1895. Pr61ogo del famoso orador parlamentario espaflol, don Juan Vdzquez de Mella. Este libro no es sOlo, como su Utulo indica, un compendio completo de estllos generales de cartas y de documentos de todas clases en espaflol y en lngl6s, sino tambi6ii un prontuario y eficaz auxiliar para aprender una numerosa serle de selectos vocabuiarios comerciales, ricos en frases y voces t6cnicas, de modismos, abreviaturas, etc. Estd di vidido en secciones entre las que las hay con referenda a la Prensa, A la Marina, al Buen Tono y & otros asuntos no menos importantes, de cuyo conocimiento es tan perentoria la necesidad cuanto Iniitiles serdn los esfuerzos que se hagan para encontrar los en ninguna otraobra publicada hastael dla. Un tomo en 8°, pasta, SI ; rtistica, 75 cents. LIBROS, BILINGUES, DE LECTURA. Amparo. Febrero, 189U. Preciosa 6 instructiva novela usada hoy como libro de lectura en Universidades, Coleglos y Academias de Idiomas de Espana, Inglaterra y los paf ses hispanos y angloamericanos. Con- tiene el ingl6s en una pflgina y el espaflol en la opuesta, de modo qua se tengan uno u otro, segiln sea el que se estudie, como referenda, 7» edici6n en S", teia, %l ; rustica, 75 cents. El Indiano. Octubre, 1893. Publicado tambien en ingl6s yen espaflol, segun el plan de Amparo. Esta graciosa comedia, en tres actos y en prosa, esta expresamente arreglada para las clases de espaflol y de Ingles, y debe usarse en combinacion con el M^todo de Cortina para aprender cualquiera de ambas lenguas. A fin de que este inte- resante trabajo resulte satisfactorio y de 6xito incontestable, el profe- sor debe seguir las '*Direcciones" impresas en la p^gina 1» de dicho M6todo. 9* edici6n en 8o, tela, 75 cents ; rustica, 50 cents. LIBROS DE LECTURA EN ESPANOL. Amparo. 6* edici6n espaflola con vocabulario ingl6s. Rtlstica, 50 cents. El Indiano. 8* edici6n espaflola con vocabulario ingl6s. Rastica,40c. Despues de la Lluvia. Noviembre, 1891. Edici6n en espaflol con notas en ingl6s. 4» edici6n, tela 50 cents ; rUstica, 25 cents. El Final de Norma. Sepiiembre,189U. Arreglo de la mejor novela del popular autor espaflol don Pedro A. de Alarc6n, con extenso vocabu- lario ingl6s al final de la obra. Un tomo en 8», rustica, 75 cents. "BIBLIOTECA CORTINA" Ctoniiene una Numerosa y Escogida Coleccidn de Libros en Espaflol, Dicde^ narios, etc. JPidase Catdlogo. R. D. CORTINA, Autor y Editor, 44 W. 34th St., NuevaYork, E. U. de A. Originador de la Aplicacidn de! FONOGRAFO PREMiADxj, m^^^^ -Reproduce las lee PoR SU ADAPTACI6N .^^^^S^^=,^ ciones del maestro con A liA ENSEfJANZA ^^^^siSflMV ^^^^ ®^ fuerza, caden- DE IDIOMAS, Jl'^^af^Bl ''^"" inflexi6n, 6nfasis, ^ ' ^bLw r^wQUil acentuaci6n y pausas. EN LA EXP0SICI6N ^^^^^^J^BIf'MIl Multiplica el valor de DE Chicago, 1893. ^^"C iK^^ ^SHt,^ BHfc' laensefianza." Departamento de '^^^ ^^S^^HL "^^^^ ^^^^ Thacher, Artes Liberates. Presideute. d ia Ensefianza de Idiomas. 11 ^'CORTINA library;' DICTIONARIES. Spanish. Campano, illustrated, cloth 2.25 Prieto, handy size, cloth, 1.75 Salva, cloth, . " . . . 8.00 Sociedad de Literatos, 9.00 Enciclopedico, illustrated, 2 vols., cloth, . . . . 20.00 German-English, and English-German. Adler, cloth, .2.25 Grieb, cloth, . . 8.00 Spanish-German and German-Spanish. Booch Arkossy, 2.00 Taschenwoerterbuch, 2 vols., cloth, 6.00 Spanish-English and English-Spanish. Bustamante, 2 vols., cloth, 2.25 L6pez and Bensley, cloth, 8.00 Spanish-Erench and French-Spanish. Salvd, cloth, 1.50 and 8.00 Spanish-Italian and Italian-Spanish. Sinati, 2 vols., cloth, 8.00 French. Littr^, 5 vols. , cloth, 35.00 Bescherelle, Encyclop^dique Ilustrd, cloth, . . . .2.50 French-English and English-French. Clifton, cloth, 1.75 Clifton y Grimaux, cloth, 9.00 French-German and German-French. Rotteck, cloth, 1.75 English-Portuguese and Portuguese-English. Vieyra, 2 vols., cloth, 4.00 Italian-English and English-Italian. Birmingham, cloth, , . .2.25 Milhouse, cloth, 5.00 p 5 "•c3 BH-gSw SaSoS. P§3S 8 ^ MS llart «'"^efi. ___ ...„,__,-.. ^^^j3 g 55 55^ S pTo o ogH:35 5 .^w ^ "^^ g^^q tJ go to o a o « S^^^* h OtfC5«i;QSaroK5HJ^JaO*^O'^3QHg^QOfcp50kOHHp> ;^ii'^s5i^feSH>->^ s *» s %^ C3 *3 in s O i^ 8 Q O o 0) < < z H (^ O U w Q < ,8 ^«3 Z &« a o U -o ,c ^ k —. 03 ^ <:b rt .^ O THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. AHH ^ 1 1939 FEB '3 itjAr RUG 16 1933 (b/ V JUL 14 1941 ff" 12)934 57GR i',.r..l J-'^ ' ^'-' * Rr^.rD LD F£S 5 f93g JAN 7 1957 Q%CT S3 193£ OCT 15 1936 oec ^^^^'' ^1^^ LD 21-50m-l/33 ^ ^ X, n o lO « 3 crq I D 1j O o ^ p 50 o 2 Wg^l.al- lES 392 I o -'.M775':'